Getting Started Articles How to Purchase Animation Addons for Elementor Pro Plugin How to Install Animation Addons for Elementor? How To Get Support for Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How To Install Animation Addons for Elementor Pro How to Configure Animation Addons for Elementor Features Can I upgrade my licenses? How to Purchase Animation Addons for Elementor Pro Plugin This guide will help you purchase Animation Addons for Elementor Pro with ease, so you can start using the plugin without any hassle. Step-by-Step Purchase Guide Go to the official Animation Addons website and click on the ‘View Pricing’ section. Choose a Pricing Plan Before you make a pick, here’s the deal:You’ve got two options — Annual or Lifetime — just choose what works best for you. If you go with the Annual Plan, you’ll need to renew it every year to keep using the plugin. If you don’t renew, the plugin will stop working. On the other hand, if you go with the Lifetime Plan, you just pay once and that’s it — no renewals, no hassle. Nice and simple. The choice is yours! Enter Payment Details Once you pick your pricing plan, click on the “Get Started” button. Next, enter your name and email address, then choose your preferred payment method. If you have a discount code, you can apply it here as well. Once you’ve filled in the required details, check the box to agree to our license terms, and then click “Purchase” to complete your order. After Purchase After purchasing your specific plans, you will receive an email from Wealcoder. The email may be found in the email inbox or the Spam Folder. Next, click on the wealcoder link down below. Once you click on the wealcoder link, you can view your details and downloads. In conclusion, if you have any questions or need a hand, feel free to reach out to our support team—we’re always here to help. How to Install Animation Addons for Elementor? Animation Addons lets you build animated websites using the powerful features of GSAP. It makes the process faster and easier, especially when you’re working on multiple projects. Even if you have no coding experience, you can still create stunning animations with ease. The plugin is available in both free and premium versions. If you’d like to try the free version, there are two simple ways to download it. Let’s take a look! Method 1: Installing Plugin From Your WordPress Dashboard From your WordPress dashboard, go to Plugins > Add Plugin. In the search bar, type “Animation Addons”. Find the plugin called “Animation Addons for Elementor” with the orange icon. Afterward, click Install Now, then activate the plugin once the installation is complete. After activation, the plugin is all set and ready to go! Method 2: Downloading & Installing from The WordPress Plugin Directory To download Animation Addons as a ZIP file from an external source, follow the steps below. You can find Animation Addons by browsing the WordPress plugin directory. One click on the download button and the Animation Addons Zip is yours. Go to Plugins > Add New, then click the “Upload Plugin” button Click the “Choose File” button and upload the ZIP file you just downloaded. After that, install and activate the plugin. You’re now all set to start using Animation Addons on your website. You can explore a variety of beautifully crafted animations or create your own custom effects with ease. That’s it! If you have any questions or need a hand, feel free to reach out to our support team—we’re always here to help. How To Get Support for Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor Having trouble or need help with Animation Addons for Elementor? No worries—this page will guide you through where to find answers and how to contact support if you need one-on-one help. Just follow the steps below to get the support you need. Step 1: Visit the Website First of all, visit the Animation Addons website and scroll down slightly—you’ll find the support section there. Step 2: Fill Out the Support Form Once you click on the Support section, the “Submit a Ticket” form will appear. Select the product “Animation Addons for Elementor Pro.” Next, paste your license key, then enter your email, password, and name to complete the registration. After that, provide the subject of your issue and include any relevant URLs. In the Description section, be sure to describe your issue in as much detail as possible. Finally, click “Submit Ticket” to complete the process. We hope these steps help you easily get the support you need for Animation Addons for Elementor. However, if you have any questions or need a hand, feel free to reach out to our support team—we’re always here to help. How To Install Animation Addons for Elementor Pro Animation Addons for Elementor Pro is a premium plugin designed to work seamlessly with your website. Meanwhile, Animation Addons for Elementor’s free version offers limited features and can be installed directly from the WordPress dashboard. However, the Pro version isn’t available through the WordPress dashboard. In this guide, I’ll show you step-by-step through the process of installing the Pro version on your website. Whether you’ve just purchased it or are setting it up for the first time, this simple guide will help you get everything up and running in no time. Step 1 First and foremost, click on Plugins> Add Plugin> Upload Plugin, and upload the Animation Addons Pro zip file plugin that you have downloaded. Step 2 You must install the free version of the Animation Addons plugin first; only then can you use the Pro version properly. Step 3 Finally, explore the Animation Addons for Elementor Pro full features and take your website to the next level. Conclusion I truly believe that by following the steps above, you can easily install Animation Addons for your Elementor Pro website. With it, you’ll be able to make your site more engaging, animated, and interactive. To sum up, if you have any questions or need a hand, feel free to reach out to our support team—we’re always here to help. How to Configure Animation Addons for Elementor Features Animation Addons for Elementor delivers performance-ready animation tools that enhance the user experience. Whether you’re aiming for subtle transitions or bold visual effects, setting it up is straightforward. This guide will take you through everything you need to know to get started. 1. First of all, head to Animation Addons for Elementor > Setup, and then hit Continue. 2. Next, you need to activate the widgets you want to use. For example, if you want to use the Image Box widget or the Image Box Slider, simply toggle the switch to enable them. After that, click on “Continue” and repeat the same process to activate the Extensions, just as you did with the widgets. 3. Once you’ve clicked ‘Continue,’ simply hit the ‘Go to Dashboard’ button to complete the setup and start exploring the addons. 4. After successfully completing the setup process, navigate to the Widgets and Extensions tabs. From there, you can selectively enable the widget elements and extension features that best suit your needs. Final Verdict Now that you’ve learned how to configure the key features of Animation Addons for Elementor, you’re ready to transform your website with smooth, high-impact animations. Whether you’re building a dynamic landing page or an engaging scroll-based experience, the tools are in your hands. Start exploring and bring your creative vision to life. If you have any questions or need a hand, feel free to reach out to our support team—we’re always here to help. Can I upgrade my licenses? Yes, you can upgrade your license whenever you need. Just log in to your account at animation-addons.com, find the plugin you purchased, and click on “View Licenses” next to it. From there, you’ll see the available upgrade options. If there are any upgrades for your license, you’ll see a View Upgrades link on the right. Simply click it to explore your options and make the upgrade as per your choice. Afterward, you will see the total cost for each option, such as Business and Agency. Choose the one that best suits your preference to complete the purchase. Next, enter your details, such as your first name, last name, and email address, and choose your preferred payment method. After completing your upgrade purchase, your license will be upgraded, allowing you to activate it on additional URLs. To view the domains where your license is activated or deactivate it from a website, head to your account page and click on the View Licenses link. From there, click Manage Sites, and you’ll have the option to add a new site for activation or deactivate an existing one, like this:
Image Widgets Before setting up the Image Widget, make sure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. Once activated, you’ll get access to all free widgets, including the Image Widget—completely free! You can also explore both free and pro widgets by using the filter options. The Image Widget for Elementor offers easy customization, allowing you to adjust image size, alignment, hover effects, and more to create visually engaging and interactive web pages. Key Use Cases for the Image Widget in Elementor: Use the image widget to display product images, create portfolio galleries, or design hero sections and banners. Showcase blog post featured images, team members, testimonials, and before-and-after transformations. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Image Widget Click on Animation Addons in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Image Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Image Widget is ready to use! How to Add the Image Widget in Elementor: Open the page you want to add the Image widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Image Widget.” Drag and drop the widget to your desired section. Your Image Widget is now ready to use! Here’s the interface where you can configure the settings and customize the image across various tabs for a personalized effect. Configuring Image Widget in Animation Addons: A Step-by-Step Guide. The Image widget is available in Elementor and can be placed on the desired section of the page. It offers three main settings tabs: Content, Style, and Advanced. In the Content settings of the Image Widget, you’ll find the option to upload your image and the Image Animation feature, available in the editor panel. Note that animations are part of the Pro version. Content Settings The Content section lets you choose your preferred image, adjust its resolution, and set the alignment. Image Animation After selecting the Image Animation option, you’ll have access to the “Enable on Editor” option, the “Play Animation” button, and the “Data Ease” setting to control the animation’s ease and flow. Reveal After enabling these options, the “Enable on Editor” option allows you to preview the animation in the editor, while the “Play Animation” button triggers the animation when clicked. The “Data Ease” setting adjusts the speed and smoothness of the animation, offering a more fluid and dynamic effect. ScaleIf you choose the “Scale” option for image animation, the image will gradually grow (scale up) or shrink (scale down) based on the animation settings. This creates a dynamic zoom-in or zoom-out effect that draws attention to the image. You can control the speed, direction, and smoothness of the scaling animation using the available options. By choosing the “Scale” option for image animation, you will have access to several settings: Enable/Editor Toggle: Allows you to enable or disable the animation in the editor. Play Animation Button: A button to preview the animation effect. Start Scale & End Scale: Controls the initial and final scale values of the image, adjusting the zoom-in or zoom-out effect. Animation Start: Defines when the animation begins during page load or on interaction. Stretch By selecting the “Stretch” animation option for the image, you will get the following two settings: Enable/Editor Button: Allows you to enable or disable the animation effect in the editor. Play Animation Button: A button to preview the stretch animation effect in action. These two options give you basic control over the stretch animation for your image Style Settings In the Style section, you can customize the image’s dimensions, opacity, and apply CSS filters for effects like blur or brightness. Additionally, you can adjust border types, border radius for rounded corners, and add a box shadow for a 3D effect. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve now learned how to configure the Image Widget in Elementor to effectively customize and display images on your website. If you need further assistance, don’t hesitate to reach out to our support team! View Live Demo
Social Icons Before setting up the Social Icons Widget, make sure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. Once activated, you’ll get access to all free Elementor widgets, including the Social Icons Widget—completely free! You can also explore both free and pro widgets by using the filter options within the widget library. Introduction Social Icons in Elementor let you add customizable icons that link to your social media profiles, improving user engagement and connectivity across platforms like Facebook, Twitter, Instagram, and LinkedIn. Key Use Cases for the Social Icons Widget in Elementor: Use the Social Icons widget to link your social media profiles, boosting brand visibility. Add icons to footers, headers, or sidebars to encourage followers and sharing. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Social Icons Widget? Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Social Icons Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Social Icons Widget is ready to use! How to Add the Social Icons Widget in Elementor? Open the page where you want to add the Social Icons Widget. Launch the Elementor editor.In the Elementor panel, search for “Social Icons Widget.” Drag the widget to your desired section. The Social Icons Widget is now ready for customization! How to Configure the Social Icons Widget in Animation Addons: In the Elementor panel, search for the “Social Icons Widget. Drag and drop the widget into your desired section. Customize the icon settings using the available options in the Elementor panel—such as icon style, link, layout, and alignment. Your Social Icons Widget is now ready to use! Use the configuration interface to personalize your social links with different styling options and make them stand out on your website. Configuring Social Icons Widget in Animation Addons: A Step-by-Step Guide. The Social Icons Widget is available in Elementor and can be placed in any section of your page. It includes three main settings tabs: Content, Style, and Advanced—each offering customization options to personalize your social icons display, including icon styles, size, alignment, and link settings. Content Settings In the Content section, you can add and manage the main text, paragraphs, and other content types for your page. In the Social Icons widget, you can configure sections for platforms such as Facebook, Twitter, and YouTube. You can either select icons from the built-in library or upload your custom icons. Additionally, you can adjust the icon color, set a background color, and add the corresponding links for each social media platform. This customization allows you to tailor the social icons to match your site’s design and ensure seamless connectivity to your social profiles. Alignment and Direction In the Social Icons widget, you can adjust the alignment (left, center, right) and set the direction (horizontal or vertical) of the icons to fit your design. These options help integrate the icons smoothly into your website layout. Style Settings The Style section includes two sections: Icon and Icon Hover. In the Style section of the Social Icons widget, you can customize the following icon settings: Icon Icon Color: Set the color of the icon. Icon Background Color: Choose a background color for the icon. Icon Size: Adjust the size of the icon. Icon Padding: Control the padding around the icon. Icon Spacing: Set the spacing between multiple icons. Icon Border Type: Select the border style for the icon. Border Radius: Adjust the roundness of the icon’s corners. These settings allow you to style the icons to match your site’s design and branding. Icon Hover In the Icon Hover section, you can customize the following settings: Hover Color: Change the icon color when the user hovers over it. Hover Background Color: Set a different background color when the icon is hovered. Hover Animation: Choose an animation effect (such as fade, zoom, or bounce) that activates when the user hovers over the icon. These options enhance the interactivity of the social icons, providing a dynamic experience for users. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve now learned how to configure the Social Icons Widget in Elementor to effectively customize and display images on your website. View Live Demo
Header & Footer Widgets Articles Site Logo Nav Menu Animated Off-Canvas Site Logo Before setting up the Site Logo Widget, make sure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. Once activated, you’ll have access to all free Elementor widgets, including the Site Logo Widget—at no cost! Additionally, you can explore both free and pro widgets by filtering the selection options. Introduction The Site Logo Widget lets you upload, resize, align, and link your logo for a professional brand appearance. Key Use Cases for the Site Logo Widget The Site Logo Widget in Elementor is perfect for: Branding – Display your logo consistently across your website. Header/Footer Design – Easily integrate your logo in the header or footer sections. Clickable Logo – Link your logo to your homepage for seamless navigation. Responsive Design – Ensure your logo adapts perfectly to different screen sizes. Professional Appearance – Enhance your site’s overall design with a polished brand identity. With the Site Logo Widget, you can showcase your brand’s logo with customization options for size, alignment, and link behavior. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Site Logo Widget? Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Site Logo Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Site Logo Widget is ready to use! How to Add the Site Logo Widget in Elementor Open the page where you want to add the Site Logo. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Site Logo.” Drag the Site Logo widget to your desired section. The Site Logo widget will now be available for customization. You can upload your logo, adjust its size, alignment, and link it to the homepage as needed. How to Configure the Site Logo Widget Enable it, create a new page, set a title, choose the Elementor Full Width template, and publish. Adjust options as needed. In the Elementor panel, search for the “Site Logo Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into your desired section. Upload your logo and customize its size, alignment, and link using the available options. Your Site Logo Widget is now ready to showcase your brand professionally across your site! Configuring Site Logo Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Site Logo Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content, Style and Advanced. Content Settings There is only one option available: Site Logo. Site Logo The Site Logo widget allows you to display your brand’s logo with flexible customization options, making it easier to maintain consistent branding across your website. Within the Content section, you’ll find several configurable settings: Logo – Customization Options Within the Logo section of the Site Logo widget, you are provided with two options to control how your site’s logo is displayed: 1. Site Logo This option automatically pulls the logo that is set in your WordPress site settings (Appearance → Customize → Site Identity). Ideal for maintaining consistency across multiple pages or templates. Any updates made to the default site logo in WordPress will be reflected automatically wherever this widget is used with the Site Logo option. 2. Custom Logo Allows you to upload and use a different logo specifically for this instance of the widget. This is useful when you want to display a variation of your logo (e.g., a white version for dark backgrounds, or a compact version for mobile layouts) without changing the global site logo. The custom logo overrides the default site logo only in the selected widget area. When to Use Which Use Site Logo for consistency and centralized control. Use Custom Logo for flexibility and design variations on different sections of the site. This dual option ensures you have both control and customization capabilities while maintaining a coherent brand identity. Image Resolution The Image Resolution option in the Site Logo widget controls the logo’s size and clarity, ensuring it appears sharp across all devices. Key Functionalities: Default Setting (Full)By default, the logo displays in its original resolution as uploaded to the WordPress media library. This preserves image quality, especially for high-resolution displays like Retina screens. Custom Image SizeYou can also manually choose from predefined WordPress image sizes (thumbnail, medium, large) or enter a custom size in pixels (width × height). This allows precise control over the logo’s appearance without manually editing the image file. Best Practices: Use high-resolution images (2x or SVG) to ensure clarity on all screen types. Choose image sizes that align with your layout and device responsiveness. Link The Link section allows you to control where users are directed when they click on the site logo. It includes three linking options: Site URL – Automatically links the logo to your website’s homepage. Custom URL – Lets you define a specific link manually, such as a landing page, external site, or any custom destination. Media File – Opens the original uploaded logo image in full size when clicked, ideal for viewing or downloading. Caption The Caption option in the Site Logo widget allows you to control the visibility of image captions associated with your logo. It offers two settings: None – Disables the caption entirely. No text will appear below or near the logo image. Attachment Caption – Displays the caption text that was added to the logo image in the WordPress Media Library. Caption The Caption option in the Site Logo widget allows you to control the visibility of image captions associated with your logo. It offers two settings: None – Disables the caption entirely. No text will appear below or near the logo image. Attachment Caption – Displays the caption text that was added to the logo image in the WordPress Media Library. This feature is helpful when you want to add a descriptive note or branding message below the logo, enhancing clarity or context for your visitors. Style Settings The Style section of the Site Logo widget offers visual customization options to adjust your logo’s appearance for a clean and responsive design. Alignment Align your logo to the Left, Center, or Right of the section or column it’s placed in. This ensures it fits perfectly within your layout design. Dimensions Width, Max Width, Height: Adjust these settings to define how large or small your logo should appear across different devices, helping maintain proportion and responsiveness. Animation Effects You can style the logo under two animation states: Normal & Hover. Normal State Customize how the logo appears by default using the following options: Opacity: Control the transparency of the logo. CSS Filter: Apply visual effects like blur, brightness, contrast, saturation and hue. Border Type: Allows you to define how the border around your logo appears. You can choose from several styles: Default, None, Solid, Double, Dotted, Dashed, and Groove to outline your logo. Border Radius: Round the corners of your logo for a softer appearance. Box Shadow: Add depth with shadow effects to make your logo stand out. Hover State Define how the logo behaves when users hover over it: Opacity: Adjust the transparency when hovered. CSS Filters: Apply hover-specific visual effects for a dynamic look. Transition Duration: Set how quickly the hover effects animate. Hover Animation: Choose from a variety of hover animation styles for added interactivity. Border Type: Same options as Normal—style the border when hovered. Border Radius: Smoothly round logo corners on hover. Box Shadow: Apply shadow effects to enhance visual feedback. The Style section of the Site Logo widget offers visual customization options to adjust your logo’s appearance for a clean and responsive design. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Site Logo Widget in Elementor to create dynamic and engaging event displays on your website. For any further assistance or inquiries, feel free to contact our support team! View Live Demo Nav Menu Before setting up the Nav Menu Widget, make sure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. Once activated, you’ll have access to all free Elementor widgets, including the Nav Menu Widget—at no cost! Additionally, you can explore both free and pro widgets by filtering the selection options. Introduction The Nav Menu widget creates a responsive menu, organizing links with easy customization. Key Use Cases for the Nav Menu Widget The Nav Menu Widget in Elementor is ideal for: Navigation – Create a clear and easy-to-use navigation menu. Multi-Page Websites – Organize links to different pages, categories, or custom URLs. Responsive Design – Ensure the menu adapts across devices for a seamless user experience. User Experience – Offer a smooth and intuitive way for users to navigate your site. Customization – Customize the layout, style, and positioning of your menu to match your site’s design. With the Nav Menu Widget, you can easily build and customize a navigation menu to suit your website’s needs. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Nav Menu Widget? Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Nav Menu Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. How to Add the Nav Menu Widget in Elementor Open the page where you want to add the Nav Menu. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Nav Menu.” Drag the Nav Menu widget to your desired section. The Nav Menu widget will now be available for customization. You can organize your menu items, customize the layout, and adjust the alignment for a seamless navigation experience. How to Configure Nav Menu Widget Enable it, create a new page, set a title, choose the Elementor Full Width template, and publish. Adjust options as needed. How to Add the Nav Menu Widget in Elementor Enable the widget, create a new page, set a title, choose the Elementor Full Width template, and publish it. Adjust options as needed. In the Elementor panel, search for the “Nav Menu Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into your desired section. Choose your menu from the dropdown, and customize its layout, alignment, style, and responsive behavior using the available settings. Configuring Nav Menu Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Nav Menu Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content, Style and Advanced. Content Settings The Content section of the Nav Menu widget includes two main configuration areas: 1. Menu Settings This panel allows you to select the WordPress menu you want to display. You can also define the layout (Horizontal, Vertical, or Dropdown), align the menu (Start, Center, or End), and control pointer effects, submenu indicators, and spacing for desktop view. Menu Settings In the Menu Settings panel of the Nav Menu widget, you can configure the structure and behavior of your navigation menu. Below are the available options: Select Menu: Choose a pre-created WordPress menu from the dropdown to display in the widget. Submenu Indicator: Enable or disable indicators for items with submenus, helping users identify expandable menu items easily. Layout: Set the menu orientation to Horizontal, Vertical, or Dropdown, depending on your design requirements. Menu Alignment: Align the menu items to the Start, Center, or End within the section for optimal placement. Hover Pointer: Choose how the hover effect appears when a user interacts with the menu. Options include Dot, Underline, Overline, Line Through, and Flip. Wrap Menu Item: Toggle this setting to control whether menu items wrap to the next line, enhancing layout flexibility for longer items or smaller screens. 2. Mobile Menu Settings This section helps you customize the appearance and behavior of your menu on mobile devices. You can choose a mobile breakpoint, toggle icons (hamburger/close), define the menu layout (Dropdown or Slide), and set alignment and animation preferences to ensure an optimized mobile experience. The Mobile Menu Settings section allows you to customize how the navigation menu behaves and appears on smaller devices. Here’s a breakdown of the available options: Hamburger Icon: Choose a preferred hamburger menu icon style that appears on mobile devices to toggle the menu visibility. Mobile Icon: Customize the icon that represents the collapsed mobile menu for a more tailored design experience. Breakpoint: Define the screen size at which the mobile menu activates. Available options include: All: Displays the mobile menu on all devices. Mobile Portrait: Activates the mobile menu only on portrait-mode mobile screens. Tablet Portrait: Triggers the mobile layout on tablets in portrait mode. These settings ensure your navigation remains accessible, responsive, and visually consistent across all device types. Style Settings There will be additional customization options available in the style settings – including Desktop Main Menu, Desktop Submenu Items, Submenu Indicator, Mobile Menu, Hamburger Icon, Mobile Menu Close, and Mobile Menu Back. Desktop Main Menu The Desktop Main Menu Settings section allows you to customize how the navigation menu behaves and appears on desktop devices. Here’s a breakdown of the available options: Gap: Adjust the space between the menu items for a cleaner, more organized layout. Border Type: Choose from various border styles for your menu items. The available options include: None: No border is applied. Solid: A continuous, solid border line. Double: A double-line border for a more pronounced appearance. Dotted: A dotted border for a unique look. Dashed: A dashed border style. Groove: A 3D, grooved border effect. Padding: Customize the internal spacing around each menu item (top, bottom, left, and right) to ensure proper alignment and spacing. Border Radius: Adjust the roundness of the corners of each menu item for a more refined, rounded appearance. Animation Styles (Normal, Hover, Active): Customize the behavior of menu items in different states (normal, hover, and active): Text Color: Choose the color of the text for each state (normal, hover, and active). Background Type: Define the background style (color or gradient) for each state (normal, hover, and active). Desktop Submenu Item The Desktop Submenu Item Settings section allows you to customize the appearance and behavior of the submenu items in the navigation menu on desktop devices. Here’s a breakdown of the available options: WidthSet a custom width for the submenu container to ensure consistent alignment and spacing within your layout. Background TypeChoose a background style for the submenu wrapper. Options include solid colors or gradients to enhance visual hierarchy and design consistency. Border TypeSelect a border style for the submenu wrapper from the following options: None – No border is applied. Solid – A single, continuous border line. Double – Two parallel border lines for a more pronounced appearance. Dotted – A dotted-line border. Dashed – A dashed-line border. Groove – A 3D grooved border effect. Wrapper PaddingAdjust the internal spacing around the entire submenu wrapper for better content alignment and spacing. Wrapper Border RadiusSet the border-radius of the submenu wrapper to control the curvature of the wrapper’s corners. Submenu Item Settings: Border TypeChoose a border style specifically for individual submenu items. Available options include: None Solid Double Dotted Dashed Groove Item PaddingDefine the internal spacing for each submenu item to ensure proper alignment and readability. Item Border RadiusAdjust the curvature of submenu item corners for a polished and modern appearance. Animation Styles (Normal, Hover, Active): Customize the visual behavior of submenu items in different interaction states: Text Color: Set the font color for normal, hover, and active states. Background Type: Define the background style (solid color or gradient) for each state to enhance interactivity and user feedback. These settings provide full control over submenu styling, allowing for a responsive, elegant, and consistent desktop navigation experience. Submenu Indicator The Submenu Indicator settings allow you to customize the visual indicator (such as an arrow) that appears next to menu items with submenus. Available Options: Font Size: Adjust the size of the submenu indicator icon to match your menu’s design. Margin: Define the spacing around the indicator to ensure proper alignment and spacing within the menu layout. These settings help maintain a clear and user-friendly navigation structure. Mobile Menu The Mobile Menu settings let you customize how the navigation menu looks and behaves on mobile devices. In the Position section, you can adjust layout and style for a seamless mobile experience. Position settings let you customize the layout and appearance of the navigation menu on mobile devices, ensuring a smooth and responsive user experience. WidthDefine the width of the mobile menu panel to control how much of the screen it occupies when expanded. Background TypeChoose a background style for the mobile menu, such as a solid color or gradient, to align with your site’s visual theme. TypographyCustomize the font family, size, weight, and style for mobile menu items to ensure readability and design consistency. Border TypeSelect the border style for the mobile menu container from the following options: None Solid Double Dotted Dashed Groove PaddingAdjust the internal spacing of the mobile menu container to ensure a clean and well-structured layout. Animation Styles (Normal, Hover): Customize the appearance of mobile menu items in different interaction states: Text Color: Set the font color for both normal and hover states. Background Type: Define the background style (solid or gradient) for both normal and hover interactions. These settings allow you to create a responsive, user-friendly, and visually appealing navigation experience across all mobile devices. Hamburger The Hamburger settings allow you to customize the appearance of the hamburger menu icon on mobile devices, ensuring it aligns with your site’s design. Available Options: Font Size: Adjust the size of the hamburger icon for better visibility and design consistency. Border Type: Choose from various border styles (None, Solid, Double, Dotted, Dashed, Groove) to define the icon’s border appearance. Border Radius: Set the curvature of the icon’s corners for a rounded or sharp look. Padding: Control the internal spacing around the icon for proper alignment. Color: Define the color of the hamburger icon to match your brand. Background Type: Choose a solid color or gradient background for the icon. These settings provide full control over the hamburger icon’s design, contributing to a cohesive and user-friendly mobile navigation experience. Mobile Menu Close The Mobile Menu Close settings allow you to customize the appearance and interaction of the close icon within the mobile navigation menu, enhancing both functionality and visual consistency. Available Options: Font Size: Adjust the size of the close icon for optimal visibility. Border Type: Select from various border styles (None, Solid, Double, Dotted, Dashed, Groove) to style the icon’s border. Padding: Define the internal spacing around the icon for balanced alignment. Margin: Set the external spacing to control the icon’s position within the menu. Animation Styles (Normal, Hover): Color: Choose the icon color for both normal and hover states. Background Type: Set a solid or gradient background for the icon in normal and hover states. These settings ensure that the mobile menu close icon is both visually appealing and intuitive for users. Mobile Menu Back The Mobile Menu Back settings allow you to customize the appearance of the back navigation icon within the mobile menu, enhancing usability and visual consistency. Available Options: Icon: Choose a custom icon to represent the back navigation action. Typography: Adjust the font properties if the back button includes text, such as font family, size, weight, and style. Padding: Define the internal spacing around the back icon or text for proper alignment. Color: Set the color of the icon and/or text to match your design. Background Type: Apply a solid color or gradient background to the back button element. These settings ensure the back navigation control is intuitive, accessible, and visually aligned with the overall mobile menu design. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. View Live Demo Animated Off-Canvas Before setting up the Animated Off-Canvas Widget, make sure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. This widget is available as a paid feature. Once activated, you can explore both free and pro widgets by filtering the selection options. Introduction The Animated Off-Canvas Widget is a premium feature in Animation Addons for Elementor that lets you create sleek, animated off-canvas menus and panels for enhanced user engagement. Key Use Cases for the Animated Off-Canvas Widget The Animated Off-Canvas Widget in Elementor is perfect for: Mobile Menus – Create stylish, animated off-canvas menus for a better mobile user experience. Sidebar Content – Display additional content or widgets in an off-canvas panel for a cleaner layout. Navigation Enhancement – Improve website navigation with smooth slide-in animations. Hidden Panels – Use for hidden content that can be revealed on demand, providing a neat design. Interactive Design – Engage users with smooth and customizable animations on your website. With the Animated Off-Canvas Widget, you can easily create interactive off-canvas panels with customizable animations, improving user experience and site design. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Animated Off-Canvas Widget ? How to Activate the Animated Off-Canvas Widget? Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Locate the Animated Off-Canvas Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Animated Off-Canvas Widget is ready to use! How to Add Animated Off-Canvas Widget in Elementor Open the page where you want to add the Site Logo. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Site Logo.” Drag the Animated Off-Canvas widget to your desired section. The Animated Off-Canvas widget will now be available for customization. You can upload your logo, adjust its size, alignment, and link it to the homepage as needed. How to Configure the Animated Off-Canvas Widget Enable the widget from Animation Addons → Elements, create a new page, set a title, choose the Elementor Full Width template, and publish. Adjust page settings as needed. In the Elementor panel, search for the “Animated Off-Canvas Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into your desired section. Customize the off-canvas content, animation style, position, and trigger options using the available settings to match your design needs. Your Animated Off Canvas Widget is now ready to showcase your brand professionally across your site! Configuring Animated Off-Canvas Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Animated Off-Canvas Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content, Style and Advanced. Content Settings There are two options available: Settings and Content. Settings The Animated Off-Canvas widget provides customization options to adjust the behavior and appearance of the off-canvas menu, ensuring a tailored user experience. Available Options: Open Button Text: Customize the text displayed on the button that triggers the opening of the off-canvas menu. Enable Icon Toggle Button: Activate or deactivate the icon toggle button, which allows users to open and close the off-canvas menu. Default Close Icon Toggle Button: Choose the default icon for the close button, allowing users to close the off-canvas menu with a single click. These settings provide full control over the off-canvas menu’s interactive elements, offering a seamless and user-friendly navigation experience. Content The Content section of the Animated Off-Canvas widget allows you to further customize the content and functionality of the off-canvas menu, enhancing its interactivity and user experience Available Options: Show Loop or Image Toggle Button: Enable or disable the toggle button for displaying a looping animation or image within the off-canvas menu. Add Logo or Image: Upload and display a logo or image within the off-canvas panel to enhance branding and visual appeal. Menu: Integrate a navigation menu within the off-canvas panel for seamless user navigation. Contact Information Tab: Add a contact information tab to provide users with quick access to your contact details. Language Tab: Include a language selection tab to allow users to switch between languages, improving accessibility for global audiences. Follow Information Tab: Add social media or follow information to engage users and encourage interaction with your brand’s social platforms. These content customization options provide flexibility in creating a comprehensive and interactive off-canvas menu tailored to your site’s needs. Style Settings The Animated Off-Canvas widget offers a wide range of customization tools to help you design dynamic, responsive menus and content panels. Below is a detailed guide to each section and how the settings affect the layout and functionality. Off-Canvas Settings These settings control the main container of the off-canvas panel. Background Type: Set a solid color, gradient, or image background for the off-canvas panel to match your site’s theme. Padding: Add internal spacing within the off-canvas area to maintain a clean and balanced layout. Swap Column: Swap the order of left and right columns inside the off-canvas layout to adjust the structure as per design requirements. Effect: Adjusting these settings changes the visual style and spacing of the entire off-canvas container. Off-Canvas Left Display: Choose between Show or Hide to control the visibility of the left section. Width: Define the width of the left panel to control space allocation. Background Type: Apply a background (color/gradient/image) to this specific section. Padding: Manage internal spacing for content within the left section. Effect: Enables structured layout design by controlling visibility, width, and styling of the left column. Off-Canvas Right Display: Choose between Show or Hide to control the visibility of the right section. Width: Define the width of the right panel. Background Type: Customize the right section’s background for visual distinction. Padding: Adjust inner spacing to improve content layout. Effect: Helps create dual-column or split-layout designs within the off-canvas panel. Logo / Image Width & Height: Define the dimensions of the logo or image added inside the off-canvas panel for better brand placement and scaling across devices. Menu Settings Color: Set the default text color for menu items. Hover Color: Customize the text color on hover for improved user interaction. Border Color: Define border colors to enhance visual separation between items. Typography: Control font size, family, weight, and style for menu items. Height Auto: Enable or disable automatic height adjustment for the menu. Padding: Adjust internal spacing of menu items for a cleaner layout. Level Two & Three Padding: Customize padding for submenu levels to manage hierarchy and spacing. Expand Icon (for Submenus) Color: Set the icon color for submenu toggles. Icon Size: Adjust the size of the expand/collapse icon. Padding Size: Manage the spacing around the icon to align it properly within the menu layout. Contact The Contact section within the Animated Off-Canvas widget allows you to display essential contact details in a visually appealing and organized manner. Below are the available customization options: Display: Toggle between Show or Hide to control the visibility of the contact section. Gap: Define the spacing between individual contact items for better layout and readability. Color: Set the text color for the contact information to match your overall design. Typography: Customize the font style, size, weight, and line height for the contact text. Label Color: Set a specific color for labels (e.g., “Phone”, “Email”) to visually differentiate them from the details. Label Typography: Adjust font properties for labels to enhance clarity and hierarchy. Margin: Control the outer spacing around the contact section to align it with other content. These settings help present your contact details in a clean and structured way, ensuring better accessibility and design consistency. Follow Social Media The Follow section allows you to display social media icons within the Animated Off-Canvas panel, making it easy for users to connect with your brand across platforms. Below are the available customization options: Display: Toggle the visibility of the social media icons by selecting either Show or Hide. Color: Set the default icon color to match your website’s branding. Hover Color: Define a different color for the icons when hovered over to enhance interactivity. Icon Size: Adjust the size of the social media icons for better visibility and alignment. Margin: Control the spacing around the icons to maintain a clean and balanced layout. These options ensure your social media links are prominently and professionally displayed within your off-canvas design. Search The Search option within the Animated Off-Canvas widget provides a simple and functional search bar for enhanced user navigation. Available customization options include: Display: Choose to Show or Hide the search bar within the off-canvas panel. Color: Set the color of the search input text to align with your site’s design. These settings allow you to integrate a seamless and visually consistent search experience into your off-canvas layout. Language The Language option in the Animated Off-Canvas widget lets you add and style language selection elements within the panel. Available settings include: Display: Toggle between Show or Hide to control the visibility of the language section. Color: Set the text color to match your overall design aesthetics. Typography: Customize font style, size, weight, and spacing for clear and consistent text appearance. These options help ensure that language selectors are both accessible and visually integrated into your off-canvas layout. Open Button The Open Button settings in the Animated Off-Canvas widget allow you to personalize the appearance of the trigger button that opens the off-canvas panel. Available options include: Color: Set the text or icon color of the open button to align with your site’s design. Typography: Customize the font style, size, and weight for the button text to ensure visual consistency and readability. These options help create a cohesive and engaging user experience from the very first interaction. Close Button The Close Button settings in the Animated Off-Canvas widget provide control over the appearance and behavior of the panel’s close trigger. Available customization options include: Icon Size: Adjust the size of the close icon for better visibility and alignment. Circle Size: Set the size of the circular container around the icon (if applicable). Border Radius: Define the roundness of the button edges for a softer or sharper look. Margin: Manage spacing around the close button for precise positioning. Animation Effect: Choose from two animation patterns to define how the button responds on interaction. Color: Customize the icon color to match your design. Background Type: Select a solid or gradient background to enhance the button’s visual impact. These settings ensure the close button is both functional and seamlessly integrated into your off-canvas design. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Animated Off-Canvas widget in Elementor to create a dynamic and interactive off-canvas design for your website. For any further assistance or inquiries, feel free to contact our support team! View Live Demo
Site Logo Before setting up the Site Logo Widget, make sure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. Once activated, you’ll have access to all free Elementor widgets, including the Site Logo Widget—at no cost! Additionally, you can explore both free and pro widgets by filtering the selection options. Introduction The Site Logo Widget lets you upload, resize, align, and link your logo for a professional brand appearance. Key Use Cases for the Site Logo Widget The Site Logo Widget in Elementor is perfect for: Branding – Display your logo consistently across your website. Header/Footer Design – Easily integrate your logo in the header or footer sections. Clickable Logo – Link your logo to your homepage for seamless navigation. Responsive Design – Ensure your logo adapts perfectly to different screen sizes. Professional Appearance – Enhance your site’s overall design with a polished brand identity. With the Site Logo Widget, you can showcase your brand’s logo with customization options for size, alignment, and link behavior. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Site Logo Widget? Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Site Logo Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Site Logo Widget is ready to use! How to Add the Site Logo Widget in Elementor Open the page where you want to add the Site Logo. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Site Logo.” Drag the Site Logo widget to your desired section. The Site Logo widget will now be available for customization. You can upload your logo, adjust its size, alignment, and link it to the homepage as needed. How to Configure the Site Logo Widget Enable it, create a new page, set a title, choose the Elementor Full Width template, and publish. Adjust options as needed. In the Elementor panel, search for the “Site Logo Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into your desired section. Upload your logo and customize its size, alignment, and link using the available options. Your Site Logo Widget is now ready to showcase your brand professionally across your site! Configuring Site Logo Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Site Logo Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content, Style and Advanced. Content Settings There is only one option available: Site Logo. Site Logo The Site Logo widget allows you to display your brand’s logo with flexible customization options, making it easier to maintain consistent branding across your website. Within the Content section, you’ll find several configurable settings: Logo – Customization Options Within the Logo section of the Site Logo widget, you are provided with two options to control how your site’s logo is displayed: 1. Site Logo This option automatically pulls the logo that is set in your WordPress site settings (Appearance → Customize → Site Identity). Ideal for maintaining consistency across multiple pages or templates. Any updates made to the default site logo in WordPress will be reflected automatically wherever this widget is used with the Site Logo option. 2. Custom Logo Allows you to upload and use a different logo specifically for this instance of the widget. This is useful when you want to display a variation of your logo (e.g., a white version for dark backgrounds, or a compact version for mobile layouts) without changing the global site logo. The custom logo overrides the default site logo only in the selected widget area. When to Use Which Use Site Logo for consistency and centralized control. Use Custom Logo for flexibility and design variations on different sections of the site. This dual option ensures you have both control and customization capabilities while maintaining a coherent brand identity. Image Resolution The Image Resolution option in the Site Logo widget controls the logo’s size and clarity, ensuring it appears sharp across all devices. Key Functionalities: Default Setting (Full)By default, the logo displays in its original resolution as uploaded to the WordPress media library. This preserves image quality, especially for high-resolution displays like Retina screens. Custom Image SizeYou can also manually choose from predefined WordPress image sizes (thumbnail, medium, large) or enter a custom size in pixels (width × height). This allows precise control over the logo’s appearance without manually editing the image file. Best Practices: Use high-resolution images (2x or SVG) to ensure clarity on all screen types. Choose image sizes that align with your layout and device responsiveness. Link The Link section allows you to control where users are directed when they click on the site logo. It includes three linking options: Site URL – Automatically links the logo to your website’s homepage. Custom URL – Lets you define a specific link manually, such as a landing page, external site, or any custom destination. Media File – Opens the original uploaded logo image in full size when clicked, ideal for viewing or downloading. Caption The Caption option in the Site Logo widget allows you to control the visibility of image captions associated with your logo. It offers two settings: None – Disables the caption entirely. No text will appear below or near the logo image. Attachment Caption – Displays the caption text that was added to the logo image in the WordPress Media Library. Caption The Caption option in the Site Logo widget allows you to control the visibility of image captions associated with your logo. It offers two settings: None – Disables the caption entirely. No text will appear below or near the logo image. Attachment Caption – Displays the caption text that was added to the logo image in the WordPress Media Library. This feature is helpful when you want to add a descriptive note or branding message below the logo, enhancing clarity or context for your visitors. Style Settings The Style section of the Site Logo widget offers visual customization options to adjust your logo’s appearance for a clean and responsive design. Alignment Align your logo to the Left, Center, or Right of the section or column it’s placed in. This ensures it fits perfectly within your layout design. Dimensions Width, Max Width, Height: Adjust these settings to define how large or small your logo should appear across different devices, helping maintain proportion and responsiveness. Animation Effects You can style the logo under two animation states: Normal & Hover. Normal State Customize how the logo appears by default using the following options: Opacity: Control the transparency of the logo. CSS Filter: Apply visual effects like blur, brightness, contrast, saturation and hue. Border Type: Allows you to define how the border around your logo appears. You can choose from several styles: Default, None, Solid, Double, Dotted, Dashed, and Groove to outline your logo. Border Radius: Round the corners of your logo for a softer appearance. Box Shadow: Add depth with shadow effects to make your logo stand out. Hover State Define how the logo behaves when users hover over it: Opacity: Adjust the transparency when hovered. CSS Filters: Apply hover-specific visual effects for a dynamic look. Transition Duration: Set how quickly the hover effects animate. Hover Animation: Choose from a variety of hover animation styles for added interactivity. Border Type: Same options as Normal—style the border when hovered. Border Radius: Smoothly round logo corners on hover. Box Shadow: Apply shadow effects to enhance visual feedback. The Style section of the Site Logo widget offers visual customization options to adjust your logo’s appearance for a clean and responsive design. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Site Logo Widget in Elementor to create dynamic and engaging event displays on your website. For any further assistance or inquiries, feel free to contact our support team! View Live Demo
Advanced Mailchimp The Advanced Mailchimp Widget in Animation Addons for Elementor is a paid feature. To access this widget, ensure the plugin is installed and activated on your site. You can also explore both free and pro widgets through the filtering options. Introduction The Advanced Mailchimp Widget integrates Mailchimp forms with advanced customization options to help grow and manage your email list. Key Use Cases for the Advanced Mailchimp Widget: Style the form to match your site’s design for a seamless user experience. Easily integrate customizable Mailchimp sign-up forms to grow your email list. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Advanced Mailchimp Widget: Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Advanced Mailchimp Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Advanced Mailchimp Widget is ready to use! How to Add Advanced Mailchimp Widget in Elementor: Open the page where you want to add the Advanced Mailchimp Widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Advanced Mailchimp Widget.” Drag the widget to your desired section. The Advanced Mailchimp Widget is now ready for customization. How to Configure Advanced Mailchimp Widget In the Elementor panel, search for the “Advanced Mailchimp Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into your desired section. From the widget settings, connect your Mailchimp account and select the appropriate audience list. You can then customize advanced form fields, enable optional inputs like name or phone, and fine-tune the layout and design using extensive styling options in the Elementor panel. Configuring Advanced Mailchimp Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Advanced Mailchimp Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content,Style and Advanced. Content Settings Within the Content section, you’ll find two distinct subsections: Form and Mailchimp, each offering essential configuration options to customize the widget’s functionality and integration. Mailchimp Under the Mailchimp section, you can configure the following options: Mailchimp API: Enter your Mailchimp API key to connect your website with your Mailchimp account and enable seamless data integration. Audience: Select the specific Mailchimp audience (list) where you want to collect and store subscriber data. Enable Double Opt-In: Activate this option to require users to confirm their subscription via email before being added to the list—enhancing email security and compliance. Form Under the Form section, you can configure the following options: Email: Set the primary email input field for the subscription form. Label: Define or customize the label displayed for the email input. Placeholder: Add a placeholder text inside the email field to guide users. Additional Fields: Enable and manage extra fields such as name or phone number to collect more user information. Under the Button settings: Text: Customize the button text (“Subscribe”). Icon: Add an icon to the button for visual enhancement. Icon Position: Choose whether the icon appears before or after the text. Icon Spacing: Adjust the space between the icon and the button text for proper alignment and spacing. Style Settings In the Style section of the Advanced Mailchimp Widget, you will find various controls that allow you to customize the appearance of the subscription form. These include: Layout: Adjust the overall layout and spacing of form elements to align with your design preferences. Label: Style the text labels associated with each input field. You can modify typography, color, spacing, and alignment to match your site’s branding. Input: Customize the general input field styles, including padding, borders, background, and text appearance. Email: Specifically target and style the email input field, allowing for consistent formatting and design flexibility. Select: Style any dropdown (select) fields within the form. This includes control over background, border, font, and spacing. Radio: Customize the look and feel of radio buttons, including size, alignment, and label styling. Button: Define the appearance of the submit button. You can modify its typography, colors, border styles, hover effects, and more to enhance visual engagement and user experience. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Advanced Mailchimp Widget in Elementor to integrate customizable email sign-up forms and grow your email list. For any further assistance or inquiries, feel free to contact our support. View Live Demo
Post Title Before setting up the Post Title widget, make sure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. Once activated, you’ll have access to all free Elementor widgets, including the Post Title widget—at no cost! Additionally, you can explore both free and pro widgets by filtering the selection options. Introduction The Post Title Widget allows you to display the title of a blog post or page with customizable options for font, size, alignment, and more, providing a dynamic and engaging presentation. Key Use Cases for the Post Title Widget The Post Title Widget is ideal for: Blog Presentation – Showcase the title of your blog posts with style. Page Titles – Display clear and professional titles for your pages. Customizable Design – Adjust font size, weight, and alignment to fit your design. Responsive Layout – Ensure titles look great on all screen sizes. Content Focus – Draw attention to your posts and pages with dynamic title formatting. With the Post Title Widget, you can easily create eye-catching titles that align with your site’s style and improve user engagement. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor To activate the Post Title widget, follow these steps: Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Locate the Post Title Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. How to Add the Post Title Widget in Elementor Open the page or post where you want to add the Post Title. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Post Title.” Drag the Post Title widget to your desired section. The Post Title widget will now be available for customization. You can adjust the font size, style, alignment, and other settings to match your design. How to Configure the Post Title Widget Enable the widget, create a new page, set a title, choose the Elementor Full Width template, and publish the page. Adjust page settings as needed. In the Elementor panel, search for the “Post Title Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into your desired section. The post title will automatically display based on the current post. You can then customize its typography, alignment, color, and other design settings to match your layout. Configuring Post Title Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Post Title Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content, Style and Advanced. Content Settings In the Post Title Widget, you have several options to control the appearance and structure of your post titles: Heading Link: Enable or disable a hyperlink on the post title, allowing users to click through to the post. HTML Tag: Choose the appropriate HTML tag (such as H1, H2, H3, etc.) for semantic accuracy and SEO optimization. Alignment: Align the post title text to the left, center, right, or justified based on your design preference. Show Highlight Button: Enable this to add a visual highlight or emphasis effect on the post title, drawing more attention to it. These settings help ensure your headings are both functionally and visually optimized within your off-canvas content. Style Settings In the Style section of the Post Title Widget, you can enhance and personalize the visual appearance of your post titles using the following options: Text Color: Set the color of the post title to match your design scheme. Typography: Customize the font family, size, weight, line height, letter spacing, and more. Text Stroke: Apply an outline effect around the title text for added emphasis. Text Shadow: Add shadow effects to give the text depth and dimension. Blend Mode: Choose from a variety of blend mode options (such as Multiply, Screen, Overlay, etc.) to create unique visual effects by blending the title with background elements. These styling options give you full control over how your post titles appear, helping you maintain a cohesive and visually appealing design. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Post Title Widget in Elementor to display dynamic and engaging post titles on your website. For any further assistance or inquiries, feel free to contact our support team!
How to Purchase Animation Addons for Elementor Pro Plugin This guide will help you purchase Animation Addons for Elementor Pro with ease, so you can start using the plugin without any hassle. Step-by-Step Purchase Guide Go to the official Animation Addons website and click on the ‘View Pricing’ section. Choose a Pricing Plan Before you make a pick, here’s the deal:You’ve got two options — Annual or Lifetime — just choose what works best for you. If you go with the Annual Plan, you’ll need to renew it every year to keep using the plugin. If you don’t renew, the plugin will stop working. On the other hand, if you go with the Lifetime Plan, you just pay once and that’s it — no renewals, no hassle. Nice and simple. The choice is yours! Enter Payment Details Once you pick your pricing plan, click on the “Get Started” button. Next, enter your name and email address, then choose your preferred payment method. If you have a discount code, you can apply it here as well. Once you’ve filled in the required details, check the box to agree to our license terms, and then click “Purchase” to complete your order. After Purchase After purchasing your specific plans, you will receive an email from Wealcoder. The email may be found in the email inbox or the Spam Folder. Next, click on the wealcoder link down below. Once you click on the wealcoder link, you can view your details and downloads. In conclusion, if you have any questions or need a hand, feel free to reach out to our support team—we’re always here to help.
Video Popup The Video Popup Widget in Animation Addons for Elementor is a paid feature. To use this widget, ensure the plugin is installed and activated on your site. You can explore both free and pro widgets using the filtering options, but this specific widget is available only in the pro version. Introduction The Video Popup Widget in Animation Addons for Elementor lets you display videos in popups, boosting engagement and interactivity on your site. Key Use Cases for the Video Popup Widget: Display videos in a popup format for better user engagement. Customize the popup design to match your site’s style and branding. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Video Popup Widget: Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Video Popup Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Video Popup Widget is ready to use! How to Add Video Popup Widget in Elementor: Open the page where you want to add the Video Popup Widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Video Popup Widget.” Drag the widget to your desired section. The Video Popup Widget is now ready for customization. How to Configure Video Popup Widget Enable it, create a new page, set a title, choose the Elementor Full Width template, and publish. Adjust options as needed. You can then customize the thumbnail image, play icon, and popup behavior. Use the styling options in the Elementor panel to adjust appearance, alignment, and animations for an engaging user experience. In the Elementor panel, search for the “Video Popup Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into your desired section. From the widget settings, add your video URL (YouTube, Vimeo, or self-hosted). You can then customize the thumbnail image, play icon, and popup behavior. Use the styling options in the Elementor panel to adjust appearance, alignment, and animations for an engaging user experience. Configuring Video Popup Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Video Popup Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content,Style and Advanced. Content Settings In the Content section, you’ll find two customization options. Button and video. I only have a button section. Button The Button section allows you to customize how the play button appears and behaves: Text: Set the label or title that appears on the video popup button. Icon: Choose a play icon or any other icon to enhance the button’s visual appeal. Icon Spacing: Adjust the space between the text and icon for better layout control. Active Ripple: Enable a ripple effect when the button is clicked, adding a dynamic visual cue. Ripple Color: Define the color of the ripple animation for brand consistency. Active Spinner: Optionally show a loading spinner when the video is being fetched. Alignment: Align the button (left, center, or right) to fit your page design. Video The Video section allows you to define the source of your video: Video Link: Paste the URL of your video from YouTube, Vimeo, or a self-hosted source. This is the video that will open in a popup when the button is clicked. Style Settings The Style section provides control over the visual appearance of your Video Popup button: Button Typography: Customize font style, size, weight, line height, and letter spacing for the button text. Width & Height: Define the exact size of the button for consistent layout and design. Border Type: Choose from solid, dashed, dotted, or none to frame the button as needed. Border Radius: Round the button’s corners to match your design aesthetic. Box Shadow: Add shadows for depth and emphasis, making the button stand out. Text Color: Set the color of the button text for better visibility or brand alignment. Background Type: Choose between solid colors, gradients, or images as the button background. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Video Popup Widget in Elementor to display engaging videos in a popup format. It’s a great way to boost user interaction on your site. For any questions or further assistance, feel free to reach out to our support team. View Live Demo
Advanced Portfolio The Advanced Portfolio Widget in Animation Addons for Elementor is a paid feature. To use this widget, ensure the plugin is installed and activated on your site. You can explore both free and pro widgets using the filtering options, but this specific widget is available only in the pro version. Introduction The Advanced Portfolio Widget in Animation Addons for Elementor lets you display your projects in a stylish, customizable layout to showcase your work effectively. Key Use Cases for the Advanced Portfolio Widget: Showcase your projects in a visually appealing and organized layout. Customize the design to match your website’s style and branding. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Advanced Portfolio Widget: Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Advanced Portfolio Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Advanced Portfolio Widget is ready to use! How to Add Advanced Portfolio Widget in Elementor: Open the page where you want to add the Advanced Portfolio Widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Advanced Portfolio Widget.” Drag the widget to your desired section. The Advanced Portfolio Widget is now ready for customization. How to Configure Advanced Portfolio Widget In the Elementor panel, search for the “Advanced Portfolio Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into your desired section. From the widget settings, upload your portfolio items, including images or videos, and configure the title, category, and description for each item. You can also adjust the layout style, enable filters, and define how many items to display per row. Use the Style tab to refine the design—adjust spacing, borders, hover effects, typography, and colors—to create a visually appealing and branded portfolio section. Configuring Advanced Portfolio Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Advanced Portfolio Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content,Style and Advanced. Content Settings The Content section of the Advanced Portfolio Widget offers comprehensive configuration options to help you display and manage your portfolio items with enhanced interactivity. This section is divided into four main parts: Layout, Slider, Query, and the newly introduced Cursor Hover Effect. 1. Layout Customize the structure and appearance of your portfolio grid. Skin: Choose the visual style or template for displaying portfolio items. Posts Per Page: Set how many items should appear on a single page. Image Resolution: Select the resolution to ensure optimal image quality and loading speed. Post Title Tag: Define the HTML tag for portfolio titles (e.g., H1, H2, H3) to maintain SEO hierarchy. Icon: Display icons on items to enhance visual indication or action. 2. Slider Convert your portfolio grid into a sleek slider with dynamic settings. Slides to Show: Set the number of slides visible at once. Autoplay: Enable automatic slide transitions. Allow Touch Move: Allow users to swipe through slides on touch devices. Loop: Enable continuous loop scrolling. Mousewheel Button: Let users navigate through slides using the mouse wheel. Animation Speed: Define the speed of slide transitions. Space Between: Set spacing between each slide. Effect: Choose slide transition effects like fade or slide. Navigation and Pagination Buttons: Enable/disable navigation arrows and pagination indicators. Direction: Select horizontal or vertical slide direction. 3. Query Control what content gets pulled into the portfolio. Query Type: Choose between standard or custom queries. Source: Select post types (e.g., posts, pages, custom post types). Include By: Filter content by ID, term, or author. Post Format: Include only certain post formats such as video, gallery, etc. Date: Filter by post date. Order By: Choose how content is sorted (e.g., date, title, ID). Order: Ascending or descending. Ignore Sticky Posts: Option to exclude sticky posts from the query. 4. Cursor Hover Effect A unique interactive feature to enhance user experience with custom hover visuals. Enable Button: Toggle to activate the cursor hover effect. Once enabled: Text: Define the text that appears when the cursor hovers over a portfolio item. Typography: Adjust the font size, style, weight, and spacing for hover text. Text Color: Set the color for the hover text. Background Type: Choose a solid color, gradient, or image for the background behind the cursor text. Width & Height: Define the dimensions of the hover area. Border Type: Multiple styles are available: None: No border is applied. Solid: A single, solid line. Double: Two solid lines. Dotted: Dotted line around the cursor effect. Dashed: Dashed outline for a stylized look. Groove: Adds a carved groove effect for depth. Border Radius: Round the edges of the hover element to achieve a circular or oval shape. Style Settings In the Style section, you will find customization options for Layout, Slider Navigation, Slider Pagination, Content, Date, Title, and Image. These options allow you to fine-tune the design and style of each element, ensuring a personalized and visually appealing result – Layout: Customize the overall layout to fit your design preferences, providing a clean and organized look. Slider Navigation: Adjust the navigation arrows or dots for smooth navigation through your content. Slider Pagination: Add pagination for easy content navigation and a more structured layout. Content: Customize the content’s typography, color, and alignment to match your site’s branding. Date: Style the date display to suit your design, offering more control over its appearance. Title: Modify the title’s style, such as font size, weight, and color, to make it stand out. Image: Style the images, including adjusting size, border, and hover effects, to give your content an engaging and visually appealing presentation. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome Congratulations! You’ve now mastered the process of setting up the Advanced Portfolio Widget in Elementor to beautifully display your portfolio and elevate your website’s design. If you have any questions or need further assistance, don’t hesitate to reach out to our support team. View Live Demo
Typewriter Before setting up the Typewriter Widget, make sure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. Once activated, you’ll get access to all free Elementor widgets, including the Typewriter Widget—completely free! You can also explore both free and pro widgets by using the filter options. Introduction The Typewriter Widget in Animation Addons for Elementor adds engaging text animations with a typewriter effect, ideal for headlines or quotes. Here’s how to configure it for your website. Key Use Cases for the Typewriter Widget in Elementor: Use the Typewriter widget to create dynamic headlines, engaging text animations, and showcase quotes or testimonials with a unique effect. Perfect for landing pages and calls to action. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Typewriter Widget? Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Typewriter Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Typewriter Widget is ready to use! How to Add the Typewriter Widget in Elementor: Open the page where you want to add the Typewriter widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Typewriter Widget.” Drag the widget to your desired section. How to Configure the Typewriter Widget in Animation Addons? In the Elementor panel, search for the “Typewriter Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into the desired section. Customize the typewriter settings using the available options in the Elementor panel. Your Typewriter Widget is now ready to use! Here’s the interface where you can configure the settings and customize the text animation across various tabs for a personalized effect. Configuring Typewriter Widget in Animation Addons: A Step-by-Step Guide The Typewriter widget is available in Elementor and can be placed on the desired section of the page. It offers three main settings tabs: Content, Style and Advanced. In the Content settings of the Typewriter Widget, you will find the “Content” option, where you can input the text that will appear with the typewriter effect. Content Settings In the Content section of the Typewriter Widget, you have: Non-Animated Text: Adds static text alongside the animation. Animated Text List: Creates a sequence of animated text items. HTML Tag: Adds HTML tags for styling. Alignment: Controls text alignment (left, center, right). Style Settings In the Style section of the Typewriter Widget, you have: Text Color: Changes the color of your text. Select any color for text to match your design. Typography: Adjusts font family, size, weight, and style. Customize the appearance of text for better readability or style. Text Stroke: Adds an outline around the text. Defines the thickness and color of the text’s border. Text Shadow: Applies a shadow effect behind the text. Adds depth and contrast for a more dynamic look. Line Color: Changes the color of the text’s underline. Customize the underline color to match or highlight text. Advance Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! Now you know how to configure the Typewriter Widget in Elementor to add engaging text animations to your website. If you need any further assistance, feel free to contact our support team! View Live Demo
General Widgets Articles Image Widgets Social Icons Image Box Slider Text Hover Image Image Box Brand Slider Counter Icon Box Testimonial Classic Testimonial Modern Testimonial Button Image Comparison Progress bar Team One Page Nav Timeline Tabs Services Tabs Floating Elements Event Slider Content Slider Countdown Advanced Button Contact Form 7 Featured Posts Current Date Widget Category Showcase Breaking News Slider Grid Hover Posts Posts Slider Filterable Posts Video Posts Tab Advanced Posts Mailchimp Video Story Image Widgets Before setting up the Image Widget, make sure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. Once activated, you’ll get access to all free widgets, including the Image Widget—completely free! You can also explore both free and pro widgets by using the filter options. The Image Widget for Elementor offers easy customization, allowing you to adjust image size, alignment, hover effects, and more to create visually engaging and interactive web pages. Key Use Cases for the Image Widget in Elementor: Use the image widget to display product images, create portfolio galleries, or design hero sections and banners. Showcase blog post featured images, team members, testimonials, and before-and-after transformations. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Image Widget Click on Animation Addons in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Image Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Image Widget is ready to use! How to Add the Image Widget in Elementor: Open the page you want to add the Image widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Image Widget.” Drag and drop the widget to your desired section. Your Image Widget is now ready to use! Here’s the interface where you can configure the settings and customize the image across various tabs for a personalized effect. Configuring Image Widget in Animation Addons: A Step-by-Step Guide. The Image widget is available in Elementor and can be placed on the desired section of the page. It offers three main settings tabs: Content, Style, and Advanced. In the Content settings of the Image Widget, you’ll find the option to upload your image and the Image Animation feature, available in the editor panel. Note that animations are part of the Pro version. Content Settings The Content section lets you choose your preferred image, adjust its resolution, and set the alignment. Image Animation After selecting the Image Animation option, you’ll have access to the “Enable on Editor” option, the “Play Animation” button, and the “Data Ease” setting to control the animation’s ease and flow. Reveal After enabling these options, the “Enable on Editor” option allows you to preview the animation in the editor, while the “Play Animation” button triggers the animation when clicked. The “Data Ease” setting adjusts the speed and smoothness of the animation, offering a more fluid and dynamic effect. ScaleIf you choose the “Scale” option for image animation, the image will gradually grow (scale up) or shrink (scale down) based on the animation settings. This creates a dynamic zoom-in or zoom-out effect that draws attention to the image. You can control the speed, direction, and smoothness of the scaling animation using the available options. By choosing the “Scale” option for image animation, you will have access to several settings: Enable/Editor Toggle: Allows you to enable or disable the animation in the editor. Play Animation Button: A button to preview the animation effect. Start Scale & End Scale: Controls the initial and final scale values of the image, adjusting the zoom-in or zoom-out effect. Animation Start: Defines when the animation begins during page load or on interaction. Stretch By selecting the “Stretch” animation option for the image, you will get the following two settings: Enable/Editor Button: Allows you to enable or disable the animation effect in the editor. Play Animation Button: A button to preview the stretch animation effect in action. These two options give you basic control over the stretch animation for your image Style Settings In the Style section, you can customize the image’s dimensions, opacity, and apply CSS filters for effects like blur or brightness. Additionally, you can adjust border types, border radius for rounded corners, and add a box shadow for a 3D effect. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve now learned how to configure the Image Widget in Elementor to effectively customize and display images on your website. If you need further assistance, don’t hesitate to reach out to our support team! View Live Demo Social Icons Before setting up the Social Icons Widget, make sure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. Once activated, you’ll get access to all free Elementor widgets, including the Social Icons Widget—completely free! You can also explore both free and pro widgets by using the filter options within the widget library. Introduction Social Icons in Elementor let you add customizable icons that link to your social media profiles, improving user engagement and connectivity across platforms like Facebook, Twitter, Instagram, and LinkedIn. Key Use Cases for the Social Icons Widget in Elementor: Use the Social Icons widget to link your social media profiles, boosting brand visibility. Add icons to footers, headers, or sidebars to encourage followers and sharing. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Social Icons Widget? Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Social Icons Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Social Icons Widget is ready to use! How to Add the Social Icons Widget in Elementor? Open the page where you want to add the Social Icons Widget. Launch the Elementor editor.In the Elementor panel, search for “Social Icons Widget.” Drag the widget to your desired section. The Social Icons Widget is now ready for customization! How to Configure the Social Icons Widget in Animation Addons: In the Elementor panel, search for the “Social Icons Widget. Drag and drop the widget into your desired section. Customize the icon settings using the available options in the Elementor panel—such as icon style, link, layout, and alignment. Your Social Icons Widget is now ready to use! Use the configuration interface to personalize your social links with different styling options and make them stand out on your website. Configuring Social Icons Widget in Animation Addons: A Step-by-Step Guide. The Social Icons Widget is available in Elementor and can be placed in any section of your page. It includes three main settings tabs: Content, Style, and Advanced—each offering customization options to personalize your social icons display, including icon styles, size, alignment, and link settings. Content Settings In the Content section, you can add and manage the main text, paragraphs, and other content types for your page. In the Social Icons widget, you can configure sections for platforms such as Facebook, Twitter, and YouTube. You can either select icons from the built-in library or upload your custom icons. Additionally, you can adjust the icon color, set a background color, and add the corresponding links for each social media platform. This customization allows you to tailor the social icons to match your site’s design and ensure seamless connectivity to your social profiles. Alignment and Direction In the Social Icons widget, you can adjust the alignment (left, center, right) and set the direction (horizontal or vertical) of the icons to fit your design. These options help integrate the icons smoothly into your website layout. Style Settings The Style section includes two sections: Icon and Icon Hover. In the Style section of the Social Icons widget, you can customize the following icon settings: Icon Icon Color: Set the color of the icon. Icon Background Color: Choose a background color for the icon. Icon Size: Adjust the size of the icon. Icon Padding: Control the padding around the icon. Icon Spacing: Set the spacing between multiple icons. Icon Border Type: Select the border style for the icon. Border Radius: Adjust the roundness of the icon’s corners. These settings allow you to style the icons to match your site’s design and branding. Icon Hover In the Icon Hover section, you can customize the following settings: Hover Color: Change the icon color when the user hovers over it. Hover Background Color: Set a different background color when the icon is hovered. Hover Animation: Choose an animation effect (such as fade, zoom, or bounce) that activates when the user hovers over the icon. These options enhance the interactivity of the social icons, providing a dynamic experience for users. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve now learned how to configure the Social Icons Widget in Elementor to effectively customize and display images on your website. View Live Demo Image Box Slider Before setting up the Image Box Slider Widget, ensure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. Once activated, you’ll get access to all free Elementor widgets, including the Image Box Slider Widget—completely free! You can also filter between free and pro widgets for easier access. Introduction The Image Box Slider Widget displays multiple image boxes in a smooth slider, ideal for showcasing features or visual content. Key Use Cases for the Image Box Slider Widget in Elementor: Showcase multiple image boxes in a sleek, scrollable slider layout. Enhance visual storytelling with images, titles, and descriptions in a compact format. Customize styling and animation to match your website’s design and improve user engagement. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Image Box Slider Widget? Navigate to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Locate the Image Box Slider widget in the list. Toggle the switch to enable the widget. The Image Box Slider Widget is now ready to use in your Elementor editor. How to Add Image Box Slider Widget in Elementor Open the page where you want to add the Image Box Slider Widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Image Box Slider Widget”. Drag and drop the widget into your desired section. The Image Box Slider Widget is now ready for customization. How to Configure Image Box Slider Widget Enable the widget, create a new page, set a title, choose the Elementor Full Width template, and publish the page. Adjust page settings as needed. In the Elementor panel, search for “Image Box Slider Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into your desired section. The slider will display image boxes automatically. You can then customize the content, layout, navigation, and styling to match your design preferences. Configuring Archive Image Box Slider Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Image Box Slider Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content, Style and Advanced. Content Settings In the Image Box Slider Widget’s content section, You will get two options like layout and slider option. Layout 1. Layout Styles (Five Different Styles) The Image Box Slider offers five layout styles for flexible and dynamic presentation of images and text. Style 1: A basic image box slider with an image, title, subtitle, description, and link. Style 2: Features an image with a more prominent title and description with a link. Style 3: Focuses on image-centric presentation with minimal text. Style 4: Includes an image and an icon next to the text elements for added emphasis. Style 5: Allows for a more compact design where elements are stacked for better readability on mobile devices. Item 1: Configuration Options: In Item 1, users can customize the following settings: Image Setup: Upload and position an image to be displayed in the slider. Title: Set a title for the item. The title can be customized with an HTML tag (e.g., <h1>, <h2>, etc.) to define its importance. Subtitle: A secondary title or description that provides additional context. Subtitle Position: You can control whether the subtitle appears above, below, or beside the image. Description: A brief description that provides more details about the image. Link: Add a clickable link to each item in the slider that directs users to more information or a different page. Each layout is fully responsive and can be adjusted for various screen sizes to ensure optimal display across all devices. 2. Image Resolution (Seven Different Styles) The Image Box Slider widget supports seven different image resolution styles. These options enable you to adjust the image quality based on the visual needs and load time requirements of your website: Resolution Options: Low resolution Medium-low resolution Medium resolution High resolution Very high resolution Ultra-high resolution & Custom resolution (user-defined) These options ensure that images load quickly without compromising too much on quality, thus improving both the user experience and SEO performance. 3. Direction The direction setting controls the flow of the slider. You can choose from: Horizontal: The slider moves left to right or right to left. Vertical: The slider moves from top to bottom or bottom to top. The direction setting allows for the creation of dynamic visual effects tailored to the website’s design and user interaction goals. 4. Gap This option controls the space between the image boxes in the slider. You can set the gap to: SmallMedium Large Adjusting the gap helps maintain a clean and balanced layout, enhancing the visual flow and user engagement. 5. Link Type The Link Type setting defines how the link behaves when clicked: External URL: Opens an external website or page in a new tab. Internal Link: Links to another page or section within the same website. No Link: The item does not have a clickable link, providing a purely visual effect. This flexibility allows users to choose whether they want their image box slider to drive traffic externally or simply enhance user interaction within the site. 6. Alignment This option allows for precise control over how the text and images are aligned within each image box: Left Alignment: Text and elements are aligned to the left side of the box. Center Alignment: Text and elements are centered within the box. Right Alignment: Text and elements are aligned to the right side of the box. Alignment ensures that content is placed in the desired manner, creating a polished and professional look. 7. Icon The Icon option lets you add pre-designed or custom icons to enhance the design and highlight features in the slider. Slider Option Below is a detailed explanation of each option, covering how they look, function, and the effects of changing their settings- Sliders to Show This setting defines how many image boxes are visible at a time in the slider. You can specify the number of slides shown in the viewport. This helps tailor the layout to fit different screen sizes or content needs. Effect: Adjusting this number will determine how many image boxes are visible on-screen, allowing for a customized display of content. Autoplay When enabled, the slider will automatically move through the images after a defined delay. It’s ideal for creating an automated slideshow experience. Effect: When activated, images will transition automatically without user interaction, offering a more hands-off display. Change: Turning this on makes the slider self-running, providing a seamless experience for viewers. 3. Autoplay Delay This option allows you to set the time delay (in milliseconds) between each slide transition during autoplay. Effect: You can control the speed of the slider’s movement by adjusting the delay between images. Change: Increasing the delay results in slower transitions; decreasing it makes the transition faster. 4. Autoplay Interaction This setting determines whether the autoplay feature is paused when the user interacts with the slider (mouse hover or touch). Effect: When enabled, autoplay will pause if a user interacts with the slider, ensuring they can engage with the content without interruption. Change: If disabled, autoplay will continue regardless of user interaction. 5. Allow Touch Move This feature enables touch swipe functionality on mobile devices. Users can swipe left or right to navigate between slides. Effect: On touch-enabled devices, users can swipe through slides, providing a mobile-friendly, interactive experience. Change: Enabling this feature allows for more intuitive navigation on mobile devices. 6. Loop When activated, the slider will loop back to the first slide after reaching the last one, creating a continuous cycling effect. Effect: The slider will start from the first slide once it reaches the last, creating an endless loop of content. Change: Disabling this feature will stop the slider once it reaches the last slide. 7. Mousewheel This option allows users to navigate through the slides using the mouse wheel. Effect: Scrolling the mouse wheel up or down will move the slider between slides. Change: Enabling this feature adds another method of navigation, enhancing usability. 8. Animation Speed This setting controls how quickly the transition between slides occurs. You can set the speed of the animation in milliseconds. Effect: A faster animation speed makes transitions quicker, while a slower speed provides smoother, more gradual changes between slides. Change: Adjusting the animation speed alters the visual flow of the slider. 9. Space Between This option sets the amount of space between each slide in the slider. Effect: Increasing the space between slides will create a more separated layout, while reducing the space will bring the slides closer together. Change: Adjusting this space affects the visual density of the slider and can be used to create more compact or spacious designs. 10. Navigation This feature allows for customizable navigation controls (previous and next arrows) to move through the slides. Effect: Navigation arrows appear on either side of the slider, providing users with the ability to manually control the slider. Change: Enabling navigation arrows adds interactivity, while disabling them makes the slider auto-play or swipe-based only. 11. Previous Arrow Icon This option lets you choose or upload a custom icon for the previous slide navigation arrow. Effect: The arrow icon will appear on the left side of the slider to move to the previous slide. Change: Customizing the icon allows for design consistency with the website’s theme. 12. Next Arrow Icon Similar to the previous arrow, this option lets you choose or upload a custom icon for the next slide navigation arrow. Effect: The arrow icon will appear on the right side of the slider to move to the next slide. Change: Customizing the icon provides a more personalized look for navigation. 13. Pagination Pagination enables users to see an indicator of the number of slides and navigate directly to a specific slide via clickable dots or other indicators. Effect: When enabled, small indicators will appear, showing the user’s position within the slider and allowing them to click to navigate to a particular slide. Change: Disabling pagination removes the visual guide, making it harder for users to track slide positions. 14. Pagination Type You can select between different types of pagination, such as dots, numbers, or custom indicators. Effect: The type of pagination selected changes the appearance of the indicators (e.g., dots, numbers, or other shapes). Change: Choosing different types of pagination gives you flexibility in design and user navigation. 15. Left/Right Direction This setting allows you to define the direction in which the slider moves when manually controlled by the user. Effect: You can choose whether the navigation will move the slides from left to right or vice versa. Change: Changing the direction affects how users interact with the slider and how content flows visually. 16. Direction This option lets you define the general direction of the slider’s movement—either horizontal or vertical. Effect: Horizontal direction moves the slides left to right (or right to left), while vertical direction moves slides up or down. Change: Changing the direction alters the overall layout and interaction style of the slider. 17. Centre Slide When enabled, this option ensures that the active slide is always centered in the viewport. Effect: The active slide is always visually in focus and centered, drawing attention to it. Change: Disabling this feature can create a more casual, less structured display of slides. 18. Effect This setting allows you to choose the animation effect applied to the slides during transitions. Common options include fade, slide, or flip. Effect: The transition effect adds dynamic movement to the slider, making the changes between slides visually engaging. Change: Selecting different effects can change the overall feel of the slider, from smooth fades to more interactive movements. Style Settings In the Style section, you’ll find five customizable areas: Image Box, Image, Content, Slider Navigation, and Slider Pagination. Each section allows for detailed styling to match your design preferences and website branding. Image Box The Image Box section allows you to customize the container that holds the image and content. Available settings include: Height: Set the height of the image box for consistent layout control. Max Width: Define the maximum width to ensure responsiveness across devices. Padding: Adjust the inner spacing between the content and the box edge. Border Type: Choose from solid, dashed, dotted, or none to define the box’s border style. Border Radius: Apply rounded corners to soften the edges of the image box. Hover Effect: Add interactive visual effects when the user hovers over the box. Border Type (Hover): Customize the border style specifically for hover state, enhancing interactivity. These options provide full control over the visual appearance and interactivity of the image box container. Image The Image Box section allows you to customize the container that holds the image and content. Available settings include: Height: Set the height of the image box for consistent layout control. Max Width: Define the maximum width to ensure responsiveness across devices. Padding: Adjust the inner spacing between the content and the box edge. Border Type: Choose from solid, dashed, dotted, or none to define the box’s border style. Border Radius: Apply rounded corners to soften the edges of the image box. Hover Effect: Add interactive visual effects when the user hovers over the box. Border Type (Hover): Customize the border style specifically for hover state, enhancing interactivity. These options provide full control over the visual appearance and interactivity of the image box container. Content The Content Section offers full customization of text and visuals within the image box, including options for background, spacing, typography, and color- 1. Background Type This setting determines the background style for the content section. You can select from solid colors, gradients, or images as the background. Effect: The background adds a visual foundation to the content, enhancing its contrast with the image box. Change: Selecting a gradient or image will introduce a more dynamic background compared to a solid color. 2. Padding This controls the space around the content inside the box, ensuring that text and other elements are well-separated from the edges of the content section. Effect: Adjusting padding creates more space around the content, improving readability and appearance. Change: Increasing padding will make the content box larger, while reducing it brings the content closer to the edges. . Title Spacing This setting adjusts the space between the title and the elements surrounding it, such as the image or subtitle. Effect: Title spacing ensures the title is properly separated from other elements, providing a balanced look. Change: Increasing the spacing allows the title to stand out more, while decreasing it brings the title closer to adjacent content. 4. Title Color This option allows you to set the color for the title text, making it stand out against the background and other content. Effect: The title color helps draw attention to the heading, influencing its visual hierarchy on the page. Change: Choosing a contrasting color ensures the title remains visible, even with complex backgrounds. 5. Title Typography This setting controls the font style, weight, size, and other typographic properties of the title text. Effect: Typography settings help define the font style and size, enhancing the title’s readability and impact. Change: Adjusting the font weight and style can make the title more prominent or subtle, depending on the design requirements. 6. Subtitle Spacing This setting defines the space between the subtitle and surrounding elements, ensuring a clear separation and readability. Effect: Subtitle spacing adds balance and harmony between the subtitle and the title or description. Change: Increasing the spacing makes the subtitle more distinct from the title, while reducing it brings the elements closer together. 7. Subtitle Color This option allows you to change the color of the subtitle text, complementing the title and aligning with your overall color scheme. Effect: Subtitle color helps differentiate it from the title while maintaining visual consistency with the design.Change: Using a softer or lighter color can create a more subtle contrast with the title. 8. Subtitle Typography Here, you can customize the font, size, weight, and style of the subtitle text. Effect: This ensures the subtitle matches the design and hierarchy of the title, offering consistency across the content. Change: You can adjust the subtitle’s appearance for emphasis or to create visual hierarchy between the title and description. 9. Description Spacing This controls the space between the subtitle and the description, ensuring proper separation for readability. Effect: Description spacing prevents text from appearing too cluttered, making the content more digestible. Change: Increasing the spacing improves readability, while reducing it can create a more compact layout. 10. Description Color This setting allows you to modify the color of the description text to enhance readability and design harmony. Effect: The description color influences the visual contrast and legibility against the background. Change: Choosing a darker or lighter color ensures optimal readability depending on the background type. 11. Description Typography Here, you can customize the font family, weight, size, and other typographic properties for the description text. Effect: Typography settings ensure the description is easy to read and visually aligned with the title and subtitle. Change: Adjusting the typography makes the description text fit better within the overall design of the slider. 12. Icon Spacing This setting defines the space around the icon, ensuring that it is well-separated from the text and other elements in the image box. Effect: Icon spacing ensures that the icon doesn’t appear too close to the content, maintaining a balanced look. Change: Increasing the icon spacing can create a cleaner, more spacious design, while reducing it allows for a more compact layout. 13. Icon Color Here, you can customize the color of the icon to match the content design, making sure it aligns with the overall aesthetic. Effect: The icon color affects its visibility and integration with the content section’s style. Change: A contrasting icon color helps the icon stand out, while a muted color blends it with the design. 14. Icon Size This option allows you to adjust the size of the icon, ensuring it is proportional to the content. Effect: Icon size determines how prominent or subtle the icon will be within the design. Change: Increasing the size makes the icon more noticeable, while decreasing it can give a more minimalist appearance. 15. Icon Rotate This feature allows you to rotate the icon, providing an interactive and dynamic effect. Effect: Rotating the icon can add a unique visual effect or animation to the image box. Change: You can rotate the icon slightly for a subtle effect or rotate it dramatically for more visual interest. Slider Navigation The Slider Navigation section allows you to fully customize the navigation controls for the image box slider, offering various visual and interactive settings. Below is a breakdown of each option: 1. Size This setting controls the overall size of the navigation elements (e.g., arrows or dots) within the slider. Effect: Adjusting the size changes how large or small the navigation controls appear. Change: Increasing the size makes the controls more prominent, while decreasing them results in a more minimalist appearance. 2. Circle Size If circular navigation elements (such as dots) are used, this option allows you to control their diameter. Effect: Adjusting the circle size changes the visual prominence of the navigation dots. Change: Larger circles make the navigation more noticeable, while smaller ones offer a subtler look. 3. Border Type This option defines the style of the border around the navigation elements. You can choose from solid, dashed, dotted, or no border. Effect: The border type adds definition to the navigation controls. Change: A solid border offers a clean look, while dashed or dotted borders introduce a more dynamic, creative style. 4. Border Radius This controls the roundness of the corners for the navigation elements, including arrows or dots. Effect: Border radius softens the edges of the navigation elements, creating a more rounded or square look. Change: A higher radius makes the elements more rounded, while a lower value creates sharper edges. 5. Padding Padding adjusts the space inside the navigation elements, ensuring proper spacing between the content (such as arrows) and the element border. Effect: Adjusting padding affects the inner spacing within the navigation element. Change: Increasing the padding creates more breathing room for the content inside, while decreasing it tightens the layout. 6. Animation (Normal & Hover) This option defines the animation effects applied to the navigation elements during normal interaction and when the user hovers over them. Effect: Normal animation applies to the default state of the navigation, while hover animation activates when the user hovers over the element. Change: You can set different animations (e.g., fading, sliding) for both states, enhancing interactivity and visual appeal. 7. Color This option controls the color of the navigation elements, including arrows or dots. Effect: Color settings define the visual contrast of the navigation against the background. Change: Adjusting the color can help the navigation blend or stand out, depending on your design preferences. 8. Background Type This setting determines the background style for the navigation elements, which can include a solid color, gradient, or image. Effect: Background type adds visual depth to the navigation controls, making them either blend in or stand out. Change: A gradient or image background adds more design variation, while a solid color provides a cleaner, simpler look. 9. Position Type Position type controls where the navigation elements are placed within the slider container. You can position them relative to the container or set fixed positioning. Effect: This affects where the navigation appears (e.g., top, bottom, left, or right) within the slider. Change: Adjusting the position allows for flexible placement of navigation controls based on the layout needs. 10. Alignment This option controls the alignment of the navigation elements within their designated area, such as left, center, or right alignment. Effect: Alignment determines where the navigation elements are positioned within their container. Change: Left or right alignment places the controls at the edges, while center alignment brings them to the middle of the container. 11. Gap Gap adjusts the space between multiple navigation elements, such as arrows or dots. Effect: Gap helps space out the navigation elements evenly. Change: Increasing the gap creates more space between the elements, while reducing it places them closer together. Slider Pagination The Slider Pagination section allows customization of pagination controls (dots or numbers) for slider navigation. Here’s a quick overview of each option: 1. Color: This setting controls the color of the pagination elements, such as the active and inactive dots or numbers. Effect: The color option affects the visibility and aesthetic of the pagination elements. Change: Adjusting the color ensures that the pagination elements contrast with the background for better visibility. 2. Active Color: This option sets the color of the active pagination element (the dot or number that represents the current slide). Effect: The active color highlights the current slide’s pagination element, indicating the user’s position in the slider. Change: A bright or distinct active color makes it easier for users to identify which slide is currently being viewed. 3. Size: This option controls the size of the pagination elements, such as dots or numbers. Effect: The size adjustment alters how large or small the pagination elements appear on the page. Change: Increasing the size makes the pagination elements more prominent, while decreasing the size results in a more subtle look. 4. Gap: Gap defines the space between each pagination element, such as dots or numbers. Effect: Gap controls how spaced out the pagination elements are, providing a more visually appealing layout. Change: Increasing the gap separates the pagination elements more, while decreasing it brings them closer together. 5. Border Type: This option sets the style of the border around the pagination elements. You can choose from solid, dashed, dotted, or none. Effect: Border type adds a clear definition to the pagination elements. Change: A solid border offers a clean and clear look, while dashed or dotted borders can add a more dynamic or playful design. 6. Border Radius: This setting controls the roundness of the corners for the pagination elements. Effect: Border radius softens the corners, giving the pagination elements a more rounded or squared appearance. Change: A higher radius makes the elements more circular, while a lower value keeps them sharp and angular. 7. Direction: Direction controls the orientation of the pagination elements, whether they are displayed horizontally or vertically. Effect: The direction setting determines whether the pagination controls are placed in a row (horizontal) or a column (vertical). Change: Horizontal pagination is commonly used for a sleek, linear design, while vertical pagination is often used for unique, dynamic layouts. 8. Position: This option sets the position of the pagination elements within the slider container, allowing you to place them at the top, bottom, left, or right. Effect: Position defines where the pagination will appear relative to the slider content. Change: You can adjust the position based on the desired layout, whether you want the pagination at the top, bottom, or on the sides. 9. Alignment: Alignment controls the alignment of the pagination elements within their container, allowing you to position them to the left, center, or right. Effect: Alignment ensures the pagination is placed in a specific position within the slider, either to the left, center, or right. Change: Left or right alignment positions the pagination at the edges, while center alignment places it at the middle of the container. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Image Box Slider Widget in Elementor to create dynamic and visually appealing image sliders with customizable titles, descriptions, and links. For any further assistance or inquiries, feel free to contact our support team! View Live Demo Text Hover Image Before setting up the Text Hover Image widget, make sure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. Once activated, you’ll get access to all free Elementor widgets, including the Text Hover Image widget—completely free! You can also explore both free and pro widgets by using the filter options. Introduction The Text Hover Image feature displays an image on text hover, enhancing engagement and customization. The Text Hover Image feature displays an image when users hover over text, enhancing interactivity. Key Use Cases for the Social Icons Widget in Elementor: Use the Text Hover Image widget to showcase product previews and portfolio items interactively. Add hover effects to display additional information without cluttering the page. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Text Hover Image Widget? Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Text Hover Image Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Text Hover Image Widget is ready to use! How to Add the Text Hover Image Widget in Elementor: Open the page where you want to add the Text Hover Image widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Text Hover Image Widget.” Drag the widget to your desired section. The Text Hover Image widget is now ready for customization! How to Configure the Text Hover Image Widget in Animation Addons: In the Elementor panel, search for the “Text Hover Image Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into your desired section. Customize the image and text settings using the available options in the Elementor panel. Your Text Hover Image widget is now ready to use! You can personalize the settings to achieve the desired hover effect and style. Configuring Text Hover Image Widget in Animation Addons: A Step-by-Step Guide The Text Hover Image Widget is available in Elementor and can be placed in any section of your page. It includes three main settings tabs: Content, Style, and Advanced—each offering customization options to fine-tune your image and hover effects. In the Text Hover Image widget, you will only find one section under the Content tab. Content Settings In the Content section of the Text Hover Image widget, you will find the following options: Content Before Hover Text: Set the text displayed before the hover effect. Hover Text: Define the text that appears when the user hovers over the element. After Hover Text: Specify the text displayed after the hover action. Hover Image: Upload the image that will appear on hover. HTML Tag: Choose the appropriate HTML tag for the text (e.g., <h1>, <p>, <span>). Link: Add a URL for the text or image to link to. Alignment: Control the alignment of the text and image (left, center, right). These options allow you to customize the hover effect and ensure smooth integration with your site’s design. Style Settings The Style section is divided into two parts: Style and Image. Let’s explore how to work with and customize these settings. Style In the Style section of the Text Hover Image widget, you can customize the following settings: Text Color: Set the color of the text before hover. Hover Color: Define the text color when the element is hovered. Typography: Adjust font family, size, weight, and other typography settings for the text. Text Stroke: Apply a stroke (outline) around the text for emphasis. Text Shadow: Add a shadow effect to the text for depth and visual appeal. Blend Mode: Control how the text and background interact visually with blend mode options. Hover Text: Customize the appearance of the text during the hover effect. Hover Text Color: Set the text color specifically when the hover effect is active. These options provide flexibility in styling the text and hover effects to ensure seamless integration with the website’s overall design. Image In the Image section of the Text Hover Image widget, you can customize the image’s width and height to fit your design. The Position Top and Position Left settings allow you to adjust the image’s vertical and horizontal placement, ensuring precise control over its positioning during the hover effect. These options help integrate the image seamlessly into your layout. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve now learned how to configure the Text Hover Image widget in Elementor to effectively customize and display interactive images on your website. If you need further assistance, feel free to reach out to our support team! View Live Demo Image Box The Image Box Widget in Animation Addons for Elementor is a completely free feature. To use this widget, simply ensure that the plugin is installed and activated on your site. You can enjoy the full functionality of the Image Box widget without any additional cost, as it is available in the free version. Introduction The Image Box widget combines images and text, offering customizable size, alignment, spacing, overlays, hover effects, and animations for an interactive design. Key Use Cases for the Image Box Widget in Elementor: Highlight features Showcase services Display testimonials, portfolios, pricing plans, and call-to-action sections Enhance blog previews, promote events, and visually present key information with text and images Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Image Box Widget: Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Image Box Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Image Box Widget is ready to use! How to Add the Image Box Widget in Elementor: Open the page where you want to add the Image Box Widget. Launch the Elementor editor. Search for “Image Box Widget.” Drag the widget to your desired section. How to Configure the Image Box Widget in Animation Addons? In the Elementor panel, search for the “Image Box Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into the desired section. Customize the widget settings using the available options in the Elementor panel. Your Image Box Widget is now ready to use! Here’s the interface where you can configure the settings and customize the Testimonial Widget across various tabs. Configuring Image Box Widget in Animation Addons: A Step-by-Step GuideThe Image Box Widget can be added anywhere in Elementor, with three main settings: Content, Style, and Advanced. In the Content settings of the Image Box Widget, you’ll find five options for Layout, Image, Button, and Content. Additionally, the Image Animation feature is available in the editor panel. Note that animations require the Pro version for full functionality. Content Settings Layout: Choose the overall structure and alignment of your image box content. Image: Upload and adjust the main image. Content: Add and style the title, subtitle, and description. Button: Add a call-to-action with customizable text, link, and icon. Layout Here’s a brief description of each option in the Layout section: Style: Choose the animation style (slide, bounce) Direction: Set the direction the text animates (left, right, up, down). Gap: Adjust spacing between text and icon. Link Type: Choose how the link behaves (e.g., open in a new tab). Alignment: Set the text alignment (left, center, right). Icon: Add or customize an icon before/after the text. This section gives you full control over how the widget looks and interacts with users on your website, helping to achieve a polished and professional design. Image In the Image section, you will find options for Image and Image Resolution. Image: Upload the image you want to display within the widget, which will be shown alongside your text or content. Image Resolution: Adjust the quality of the image (low, medium, or high resolution) to control its clarity and loading speed on your site. Higher resolution provides better image quality but might affect loading time. Content In the Content section, you’ll find: Title: The main heading for the widget. Title HTML Tag: Choose the appropriate HTML tag for SEO and structure. Subtitle: A secondary heading, usually smaller than the title. Subtitle Position: Control where the subtitle appears (above or below the title). Description: A detailed explanation or additional text to provide context. Button In the Button section, you’ll find: Style: Customize the button’s appearance (e.g., color, border, background). Hover Style: Set the button’s look when hovered (e.g., color change, effects). Text: Define the text that appears on the button. Link: Set the URL that the button will redirect to. Icon: Choose an icon to display on the button. Icon Position: Decide whether the icon appears before or after the text. Direction: Control the button’s layout (e.g., horizontal or vertical alignment). Icon Spacing: Adjust the space between the icon and the text. Image AnimationIn the Image Animation section, the Reveal option creates a smooth transition where the image gradually appears from a specified direction (left, right, top, or bottom). After selecting the Reveal option, you’ll find the “Data Ease” setting, which controls the smoothness and flow of the animation transition. In the Data Ease option, you will find several categories that allow you to fine-tune the animation’s timing and movement. These categories give your animation different pacing effects, each offering a unique transition style. Here’s a brief explanation of the available categories: Power2.out: The animation begins quickly and slows down gradually toward the end. Example: Imagine an image sliding in from the left. At first, it moves quickly, then slows down as it reaches its final position, creating a smooth, natural stop. Bounce: The animation ends with a bouncing effect, creating a “rubber band” feel. Example: Picture an image dropping into place. As it lands, it bounces back a couple of times before settling, giving the effect of elasticity. Back: The animation slightly overshoots and then reverses, creating a playful “back and forth” motion before settling. Example: Imagine a ball moving to the right, going a bit too far, then quickly bouncing back to the left before stopping. This creates a fun, dynamic effect. Elastic: The animation has an elastic or spring-like movement, often bouncing back multiple times. Example: Think of a rubber band being stretched and released. The element will move, stretch beyond its final position, and then spring back, bouncing a few times before settling. Slowmo: Slows down the animation towards the end, creating a dramatic, slowed effect. Example: Imagine an object falling and then gradually slowing down as it approaches the ground. The movement becomes slower as it nears its final position, adding a dramatic touch. Stepped: The animation progresses in distinct steps, creating a staccato, segmented effect. Example: Think of a character walking, where each movement is in separate, abrupt steps rather than a smooth transition. The animation “jumps” from one frame to the next, giving it a blocky feel. Sine: The animation follows a sinusoidal (wave-like) curve, creating smooth oscillations. Example: Imagine a ball swinging back and forth in a smooth, continuous wave motion. The animation moves fluidly in a smooth up-and-down pattern, like a gentle wave. Expo: The animation starts off accelerating quickly and then slows down at the end, creating a dramatic effect. Example: Think of a curtain quickly opening and then slowly coming to a stop, revealing what’s behind. This creates a powerful, attention-grabbing effect. You can select the appropriate easing type based on the feel you want for your animation, providing a smoother, more professional look to the image reveal effect. Style Settings In the Style Section, you will find the following options: Image Box: This controls the overall appearance and layout of the image box, including its borders, background color, and padding, allowing you to style the entire section containing the image. Image: Here, you can adjust the appearance of the image itself, such as adding borders, shadows, and setting the image’s size, alignment, and other properties to enhance its visual presentation. Content: This section lets you style the text or content inside the image box, including adjusting the font size, color, spacing, and alignment, ensuring the text complements the image properly. Button: This allows you to style the button within the image box, including customizing its background color, text color, border radius, hover effects, and more, to make it visually appealing and functional. These options give you complete control over the styling of the image box and its elements, creating a cohesive and polished design. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve now learned how to configure the Image Box Widget in Elementor to effectively customize and display engaging image content on your website. If you need further assistance, feel free to reach out to our support team! View Live Demo Brand Slider Before setting up the Brand Slider Widget, make sure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your website. Once activated, you’ll have access to all the free Elementor widgets, including the Brand Slider Widget—completely free! You can also explore both free and pro widgets using the available filter options. Introduction The Brand Slider Widget lets you showcase brand logos in a responsive, customizable slider—perfect for displaying partners or clients with smooth transitions. Key Use Cases for the Social Icons Widget in Elementor: Use the Brand Slider widget to display partner or client logos, boosting brand visibility. Add logos to footers, headers, or dedicated sections to highlight collaborations and affiliations. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Brand Slider Widget? Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Brand Slider Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Brand Slider Widget is ready to use! How to Add the Brand Slider Widget in Elementor: Open the page where you want to add the Brand Slider Widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Brand Slider Widget.” Drag the widget to your desired section The Brand Slider Widget is now ready for customization! How to Configure the Brand Slider Widget in Animation Addons: In the Elementor panel, search for the “Brand Slider Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into the desired section. Customize the logo slider settings using the available options in the Elementor panel. Your Brand Slider Widget is now ready to use! Use the configuration tabs to personalize the logo display, adjust slider speed, and apply transition effects for a smooth, professional look. Configuring Brand Slider Widget: A Step-by-Step Guide The Brand Slider Widget is available in Elementor and can be added to any section of your page. It includes three main settings tabs: Content, Style, and Advanced—each offering customization options to fine-tune your brand logo slider display. Content Settings In the Content section, you will find two options: Brand Slider and Slider Options. Brand Slider You will find two category options: Text and Image. Text: This option allows you to add textual content such as brand names, descriptions, or other relevant information to be displayed in the slide. Image: With this option, you can upload an image, typically the brand’s logo, to be displayed on the slide. These categories give you flexibility in presenting either text or images, allowing you to customize each slide according to your content needs. You can customize the slider content with three key options. The Slide Content option lets you add main content, like brand names or descriptions, alongside the logos. The Text List option allows you to display brand names or relevant details, adding context to each slide. The Text Separator defines a separator between the texts, ensuring a clean and organized layout. These options offer flexibility in customizing your Brand Slider, making it informative and visually appealing. Slider Options The Slider Options section lets you customize the Brand Slider’s behavior and appearance. Choose the number of slides to display (3), and the interface will show that many slides on the front. With autoplay enabled, the sliders move automatically without the need to press. You can also set the duration and autoplay interaction. Allow Touch Move: Enable touch movement for mobile users. Loop: Set the slider to loop continuously. Mousewheel: Allow navigation through the mouse wheel. Animation Speed: Adjust the speed of the slide transition. Speed Between: Set the delay between slide transitions. Navigation: Enable or disable navigation controls. Previous Arrow Icon: Customize the icon for the previous slide. Next Arrow Icon: Customize the icon for the next slide. Pagination: Enable pagination dots for navigation. Pagination Type: Choose the type of pagination (e.g., numbers, dots). Left/Right Direction: Set the slide direction to left or right. Style Settings The Style section includes three sections: Text, Slider Navigation and Pagination. Text Section: Customize the text color, typography, separator color, and size to match your design preferences. Slider Navigation: Adjust the appearance of navigation arrows for better user interaction. Pagination: Modify pagination styles for enhanced visual appeal and functionality. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve now learned how to configure the Brand Slider Widget in Elementor to customize and showcase brand logos effectively on your website. If you need further assistance, feel free to reach out to our support team! View Live Demo Counter Before setting up the Counter Widget, make sure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. Once activated, you’ll get access to all free Elementor widgets, including the Counter Widget—completely free! You can also explore both free and pro widgets using the filter options. Introduction The Counter Widget displays animated numbers—perfect for highlighting stats or milestones with customizable styles. Key Use Cases for the Counter Widget in Elementor: Use the Counter widget to highlight statistics, milestones, or achievements dynamically. Display real-time data with engaging animations to enhance user interaction. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Counter Widget? Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Counter Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. How to Add the Counter Widget in Elementor: Open the page where you want to add the Counter Widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Counter Widget“. Drag the widget to your desired section. The Counter Widget is now ready for customization! How to Configure the Counter Widget in Animation Addons: In the Elementor panel, search for the “Counter Widget”. Drag and drop the widget into the desired section. Customize the counter settings using the available options in the Elementor panel. Your Counter Widget is now ready to use! Use the tabs to personalize number style, animation, and layout for a visually engaging result. Configuring the Counter Widget in Animation Addons: A Step-by-Step Guide The Counter Widget in Elementor offers three main tabs: Content, Style, and Advanced, allowing you to customize the number format, animation style, and layout. Content Settings Content In the Content section, you’ll find the following settings: Starting Number: The initial value of the counter. Ending Number: The final value the counter will reach. Number Prefix: Adds text before the number (e.g., “$”). Number Suffix: Adds text after the number (e.g., “%”). Animation Duration: Sets how long the counter animation lasts. Thousand Separator Toggle: Enables or disables the comma separator for large numbers. Separator: Defines the character used as a separator (e.g., comma). Title: Adds a title to your counter. Direction: Controls whether the counter counts up or down. Gap: Adjusts the spacing between numbers. Separator Button: Enables separator for thousands in large numbers. Alignment: Aligns the counter text (left, center, right). Style Settings The Style section consists of three parts: Number, Suffix/Prefix, and Title. Let’s explore how to customize each setting. Number Customize the font, size, color, weight, and letter spacing for the counter number. Prefix/Suffix Adjust the font, size, color, and weight for the number prefix and suffix. Title Style the title text, including font, size, color, and weight to match the overall design. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve now learned how to configure the Counter widget in Elementor to effectively customize and display dynamic counters on your website. If you need further assistance, feel free to reach out to our support team! View Live Demo Icon Box Before setting up the Icon Widget, make sure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. Once activated, you’ll get access to all free Elementor widgets, including the Icon Widget—completely free! You can also explore both free and pro widgets by using the filter options. Introduction The Icon Widget in Elementor lets you display fully customizable icons with control over size, color, alignment, hover effects, and links, enhancing both design and interactivity. Key Use Cases for the Icon Box Widget in Elementor: Use the Icon Box widget to showcase services, features, or key offerings with icons and descriptive text. Create visually engaging sections to highlight important information, enhancing user experience and interaction. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Icon Widget? Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Icon Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Icon Widget is ready to use! How to Add the Icon Widget in Elementor: Open the page where you want to add the Icon Widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Icon Widget”. Drag the widget to your desired section. The Icon Widget is now ready for customization! How to Configure the Icon Widget in Animation Addons: In the Elementor panel, search for the “Icon Widget.” Drag anddrop the widget into the desired section. Customize icon settings like type, size, color, hover effects, and link using the available options. Your Icon Widget is now ready to use! Use the tabs to style and personalize it for a visually engaging effect. Configuring Icon Box Widget in Animation Addons: A Step-by-Step Guide. The Icon Box Widget is available in Elementor and can be placed on the desired section of the page. It offers three main settings tabs: Content, Style, and Advanced. Content Settings Icon Box Under the Content section of the Icon Widget, you’ll find the Icon settings, where you can customize the following: Icon Box Style: Choose the layout style for the icon and text. Icon: Select the icon you want to display. Title: Add a custom title next to or below the icon. Title HTML Tag: Choose a suitable HTML tag for the title (like H1–H6, div, span). Description: Add short supporting text or details below the title. Media: Upload or link media content if needed. Paragraph: Insert additional text or context as a paragraph. Each setting allows you to personalize the widget for a clean, functional design. Button In the Button section of the Icon Widget, you’ll find the following customization options: Style: Choose the default look of the button. Hover Style: Set the visual effect when users hover over the button. Text: Enter the button label or call-to-action. Link: Add a URL where the button will redirect. Icon: Select an icon to show with the text. Icon Position: Place the icon before or after the text. Direction: Set the direction of the button content (row or column). Icon Spacing: Adjust the space between the icon and text. These settings help you design engaging, clickable buttons for a better user experience. Style Settings Style settings provide the flexibility to fine-tune and enhance your content, improving its visual appeal. Within this section, you’ll find options for Box, Icon, Content, Button, and Hover Effects. Let’s explore how each of these works: In the Style section of the Icon Widget, you’ll find four key areas to customize: Box: Adjust background, border, padding, and overall box layout. Icon: Change icon size, color, spacing, and hover effects. Content: Style the title and description with typography, color, and spacing. Button: Customize button appearance, including colors, typography, border, and hover animations. These controls let you perfectly style the widget to match your site design. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve now learned how to configure the Icon Box in Elementor to effectively customize and display dynamic counters on your website. If you need further assistance, feel free to reach out to our support team! View Live Demo Testimonial Before setting up the Testimonial Widget, make sure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. Once activated, you’ll get access to all free Elementor widgets, including the Testimonial Widget—completely free! You can also explore both free and pro widgets by using the filter options. Introduction The Testimonial Widget showcases customer feedback with customizable layouts and effects, boosting trust and credibility. Key Use Cases for the Testimonial Widget in Elementor: Use the Testimonial Widget to display customer feedback, reviews, or success stories, building trust and credibility. Create engaging sections to highlight positive experiences, enhancing social proof and boosting user confidence. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Testimonial Widget: Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Testimonial Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Testimonial Widget is ready to use! How to Add the Testimonial Widget in Elementor: Open the page where you want to add the Testimonial widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Testimonial Widget.” Drag the widget to your desired section. The Testimonial widget is now ready for customization! How to Configure the Testimonial Widget in Animation Addons: In the Elementor panel, search for the “Testimonial Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into the desired section. Customize the testimonial settings using the available options in the Elementor panel. Your Testimonial Widget is now ready to use! Here’s the interface where you can configure the settings and personalize the testimonials with different layouts and design options for an engaging display. Content Settings In the Content Settings, you’ll find options for Testimonial and Slider. Testimonial Style In the Testimonial Widget, you’ll find: Testimonial Styles: Choose from multiple preset layouts to best fit your design needs. Image Resolution: Adjust the image size and quality for clean, professional visuals. These options help you create stylish, trust-building testimonial displays effortlessly. Slider Option Here’s a quick breakdown of the Slider Options available in the Testimonial Widget: Slides to Show: Set how many testimonial slides appear at once. Autoplay: Enable automatic sliding of testimonials. Autoplay Delay: Choose the delay time between each auto-slide. Autoplay Interaction: Pause or continue autoplay on user interaction. Allow Touch Move: Enable swipe gestures on touch devices. Loop: Make the slider loop infinitely. Animated Speed: Control how fast the slide transitions occur. Space Between: Set spacing between each testimonial slide. Navigation: Enable/disable navigation arrows or dots. Previous Arrow Icon: Choose the icon style for the previous arrow. Next Arrow Icon: Choose the icon style for the next arrow. Direction: Set the slide direction (left-to-right or right-to-left). These settings help you fully customize the testimonial slider experience for your site’s visitors. Style Settings In the Style section, you’ll find various options such as Slide, Navigation, Image, Content, Name, and Designation. Here’s a brief overview of each part under the Style section of the Testimonial Widget: Slide: Customize the background, padding, border, and box-shadow of the testimonial slide. Navigation: Style the navigation arrows and dots, including color, size, spacing, and hover effects. Image: Adjust the testimonial author’s image size, border radius, and spacing. Content: Style the testimonial text with typography, color, spacing, and alignment settings. Name: Customize the name text with font, size, weight, and color options. Designation: Style the author’s role or title with typography and color controls. These options help you perfectly match the testimonial design to your website’s branding. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome Congratulations! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Testimonial Widget in Elementor to customize and display dynamic counters on your website. For any additional help or inquiries, don’t hesitate to contact our support team! View Live Demo Classic Testimonial Before setting up the Classic Testimonial Widget, ensure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. Once activated, you’ll get access to all free Elementor widgets, including the Classic Testimonial Widget—completely free! You can also use the filter options to explore both free and pro widgets. Introduction The Classic Testimonial widget in Elementor displays customer feedback in a simple, professional layout, helping to build trust with your audience. Key Use Cases for the Classic Testimonial Widget in Elementor: Use the Classic Testimonial Widget to showcase customer feedback, reviews, or success stories, fostering trust and credibility. Create clean, professional sections to highlight positive experiences, enhancing social proof and boosting user confidence. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Classic Testimonial Widget? Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Classic Testimonial Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Classic Testimonial Widget is ready to use! How to Add the Classic Testimonial Widget in Elementor: Open the page where you want to add the Classic Testimonial widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Classic Testimonial Widget.” Drag the widget to your desired section. The Classic Testimonial Widget is now ready for customization! How to Configure the Classic Testimonial Widget in Animation Addons: In the Elementor panel, search for the “Classic Testimonial Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into your desired section. Customize the testimonial settings using the available options in the Elementor panel—such as content, layout, image, and style. Your Classic Testimonial Widget is now ready to use! You can personalize it further using the Content, Style, and Advanced tabs for a clean and credible testimonial display. Configuring Classic Testimonial Widget in Animation Addons: A Step-by-Step Guide The Classic Testimonial Widget is available in Elementor and can be placed in any section of your page. It includes three main settings tabs: Content, Style, and Advanced—each offering customization options to fine-tune the testimonial’s layout, appearance, and behavior for a polished and trustworthy look. Content Settings In the Content Settings, you’ll find options for Content and Slider options. Content In the content section, you’ll find various testimonial styles. For Testimonial Item One, you need to set an image along with the content, including the reviewer’s name, title, and a link. Slider Option In the Slider section of the Classic Testimonial Widget‘s Content settings, you can customize the following options: Slides to Show: Set the number of testimonial slides you want to display at once. Autoplay: Enable or disable automatic sliding of testimonials. Autoplay Delay: Set the delay time (in milliseconds) between each slide transition when autoplay is enabled. Autoplay Interaction: Control whether autoplay continues after a user interaction. Allow Touch Move: Enable or disable touch movement for mobile devices. Loop: Choose whether the slider should loop back to the first testimonial after reaching the last one. Animated Speed: Set the speed of slide transitions for smooth animation. Space Between: Adjust the space between each testimonial slide. Navigation: Enable or disable navigation arrows for sliding through testimonials. Previous Arrow Icon: Customize the icon for the previous navigation arrow. Next Arrow Icon: Customize the icon for the next navigation arrow. Direction: Set the direction for sliding (e.g., horizontal or vertical). These options allow you to fully customize how the testimonial slider behaves and interacts with users. Style Settings In the Style section of the Classic Testimonial Widget, you’ll find a range of customization options for each part of the testimonial display. Here’s how each one works: Slide: Adjust the overall appearance of the testimonial slides, including background color, padding, and borders. Navigation: Customize the navigation arrows for moving through the slides. You can change the color, size, position, and style of the previous and next arrows. Content: Style the content of each testimonial, such as the testimonial text. You can modify font size, color, typography, line height, and text alignment for better readability. Image: Customize the appearance of the testimonial image (if available). You can adjust the image border radius, size, and add box shadow or other visual effects. Name: Style the name of the person giving the testimonial. Options include changing the font size, color, weight, and alignment to match the overall design. Title: Customize the title (e.g., job title or role) of the person in the testimonial. Adjust font settings like size, color, and weight to differentiate the name from the title. Quote: Style the quote symbol or icon. You can adjust its color, size, position, and even add custom icons to represent the quote symbol, making the testimonial stand out more. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome Congratulations! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Testimonial Classic widget in Elementor to showcase customer feedback effectively on your website. View Live Demo Modern Testimonial Before setting up the Modern Testimonial Widget, make sure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. Once activated, you’ll get access to all free Elementor widgets, including the Modern Testimonial Widget—completely free! You can also explore both free and pro widgets by using the filter options. Introduction The Modern Testimonial Widget displays sleek customer reviews, enhancing credibility and trust for business sites and portfolios. Key Use Cases for the Testimonial Modern Widget in Elementor: Use the Modern Testimonial widget to showcase customer feedback, reviews, or success stories, enhancing trust and credibility. Create visually appealing sections to highlight positive experiences, boosting social proof and increasing user confidence. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Modern Testimonial Widget: Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Modern Testimonial Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Modern Testimonial Widget is ready to use! How to Add the Modern Testimonial Widget in Elementor: Open the page where you want to add the Modern Testimonial widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Modern Testimonial Widget.” Drag the widget to your desired section. The Modern Testimonial widget is now ready for customization! How to Configure the Modern Testimonial Widget in Elementor: In the Elementor panel, search for the “Modern Testimonial Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into the desired section. Customize the testimonial settings using the available options in the Elementor panel. The Modern Testimonial widget is now ready to use! Here’s where you can configure settings like testimonial style, images, navigation, and other visual options to create a dynamic and professional display. Configuring Modern Testimonial Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide The Modern Testimonial Widget is available in Elementor and can be placed on the desired section of the page. It offers three main settings tabs: Content, Style, and Advanced. Content Settings In the Content Settings, you’ll find options for both Content and Slider customization. The Content section allows you to add and manage text, images, and other elements, ensuring your testimonials are well-structured and visually appealing. Content In the Content Section of the Modern Testimonial Widget, you will find the following options: Section Title: This allows you to add a title above your testimonial section. It can help provide context to the testimonials or introduce the section on your page. HTML Tag: You can select the HTML tag for the section title (e.g., H1, H2, H3). This helps with SEO and controlling the structure of your content. Testimonial Style Category: Here, you can choose the style category for the testimonial layout. This allows you to customize the look and feel of how the testimonials appear, whether in a grid, carousel, or other styles. Quote: This field allows you to add the actual testimonial text. You can customize this section with quotes from your clients or customers, showcasing their feedback in a visually appealing way. These settings allow you to create a visually engaging testimonial section while maintaining flexibility in design. Slider Option In the Slider Option of the Modern Testimonial Widget, you’ll find the following customizable settings: Slides to Show: Choose how many testimonial slides you want to display at once in the slider. This helps in controlling the layout of your testimonial section. Autoplay: Toggle this option to automatically cycle through the testimonials without user interaction. It ensures a seamless viewing experience. Autoplay Delay: Set the delay between each slide transition when autoplay is enabled. This determines how long each testimonial stays visible before the next one appears. Autoplay Interaction: If enabled, the slider will pause when a user interacts with it (hover or click), ensuring they can read the testimonials without interruption. Allow Touch Move: This option allows users to swipe through the testimonials on touch devices, like smartphones or tablets. Loop: Enabling this makes the slider loop back to the first testimonial after reaching the last one, creating a continuous experience. Animation Speed: Adjust how quickly the testimonials transition from one to the next. This controls the smoothness of the slide effect. Space Between: Set the space between each slide. This is helpful in managing the visual flow and arrangement of testimonials. Navigation: You can choose to enable navigation arrows for the user to manually move between the testimonials. Previous Arrows Icon: Customize the icon for the previous slide arrow, making it more in line with your site’s style. Next Arrow Icon: Customize the icon for the next slide arrow, adding to the overall aesthetic. Direction: Choose whether the slides move horizontally or vertically. This affects how the testimonials are presented in the slider. Style Settings The Style section offers various customization options, including Section Border, Navigation, Section Title, Content, Name, Designation, and Quote. In the Style Section of the Modern Testimonial Widget, you’ll find the following options: Slide: Customize the look of the individual testimonial slides, including background color, border, and padding. Navigation: Style the navigation arrows (previous/next), adjusting their size, color, and positioning. Image: Adjust the image settings for testimonial authors, such as size, border radius, and padding. Content: Style the testimonial content, including font size, color, line height, and text alignment. Name: Customize the name of the testimonial author by adjusting the font size, color, and typography. Designation: the designation (job title or position) of the testimonial author, including font style and color. These options help you tailor the appearance of the testimonial widget to match your site’s design, ensuring consistency and a professional look. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome Congratulations! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Modern Testimonial in Elementor to customize and display dynamic counters on your website. View Live Demo Button Before setting up the Button Widget, make sure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. Once activated, you’ll get access to all free Elementor widgets, including the Button Widget—completely free! You can also explore both free and pro widgets by using the filter options. Introduction The Button widget in Elementor lets you create customizable buttons with adjustable text, colors, borders, hover effects, and links, ideal for call-to-action and boosting user engagement. Key Use Cases for the Button Widget in Elementor: Use the Button widget to create customizable, clickable buttons for your website. Enhance user engagement by adjusting text, colors, borders, and hover effects, and set links to guide users to specific actions or pages. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Button Widget: Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Button Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Button Widget is ready to use! How to Add the Button Widget in Elementor: Open the page where you want to add the Button Widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Button Widget.” Drag the widget to your desired section. The Button Widget is now ready for customization! How to Configure the Button Widget in Animation Addons: In the Elementor panel, search for the “Button Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into your desired section. Customize the button text, link, alignment, and icon using the available options in the Elementor panel. Your Button Widget is now ready to use! Explore the Content, Style, and Advanced tabs to personalize its appearance, animations, and interactions for a more engaging user experience. Configuring Button Widget in Animation Addons: A Step-by-Step Guide The Button Widget is available in Elementor and can be placed on the desired section of the page. It offers three main settings tabs: Content, Style, and Advanced. Content Settings In the Content section, you will find only the Button option, where you can customize the text, link and alignment for your button. Let’s explore the Button section located under the Content tab in the Button Widget. Here’s a quick breakdown of each option: Style: Choose the visual appearance of your button—like solid, outline, or gradient styles to match your website design. Hover Style: Set how the button reacts on hover. This includes hover animations, color transitions, or other interactive effects. Text: This is where you add the button label. For example, “Buy Now,” “Learn More,” or any CTA you prefer. Link: Insert the URL where the button will redirect your visitors once clicked. Icon: Add an icon to enhance the button’s visual impact—choose from a wide variety of icons available in Elementor. Icon Position: Decide whether you want the icon to appear before or after the button text. Direction: Set the layout direction as LTR (left to right) or RTL (right to left) depending on your content language and alignment. Icon Spacing: Adjust the space between the icon and the text for better readability and design balance. Alignment: Control the button’s position—align it to the left, center, right, or justify based on your layout needs. Style Settings The Button section under the Style tab lets you visually enhance the look and feel of your button. Here’s a quick exploration of each option: Typography: Customize the font style, size, weight, line height, letter spacing, and more to match your brand’s voice. Icon Size: Adjust the size of the icon to make it more prominent or subtle depending on your design goal. Text Color: Change the button text color to ensure it’s readable and aligns with your site’s color palette. Background Type: Choose between solid color, gradient, or even image backgrounds for your button. Border Type: Add or customize borders—set solid, dashed, dotted, or none, and define border width and color. Border Radius: Control how rounded the button corners are—from sharp squares to smooth pills. Padding: Define the spacing inside the button—top, bottom, left, and right—to control button size and spacing. Box Shadow: Add shadows around the button to give it depth or a subtle lift effect. These styling tools help you design a fully responsive, visually appealing button that fits perfectly with your site aesthetics. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome Congratulations! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Button widget in Elementor to create customizable, clickable buttons on your website. For any further assistance or inquiries, feel free to contact our support team! View Live Demo Image Comparison Before setting up the Image Comparison Widget, make sure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. Once activated, you’ll get access to all free Elementor widgets, including the Image Comparison Widget—completely free! You can also explore both free and pro widgets by using the filter options. Introduction The Image Comparison widget lets users compare two images with a slider—perfect for before-and-after views. Key Use Cases for the Image Comparison Widget in Elementor: Use the Image Comparison widget to showcase two images side by side with a draggable slider. Perfect for before-and-after visuals, product comparisons, or transformations, enhancing user engagement and interactivity. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Image Comparison Widget: Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Image Comparison Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Image Comparison Widget is ready to use! How to Add the Image Comparison Widget in Elementor: Open the page where you want to add the Image Comparison widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Image Comparison Widget.” Drag the widget to your desired section. The Image Comparison widget is now ready for customization! How to Configure the Image Comparison Widget in Elementor: In the Elementor panel, search for the “Image Comparison Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into the desired section. Upload the two images you want to compare.Customize the settings like slider position, image width, and more in the Elementor panel. Your Image Comparison Widget is now ready to use! You can adjust the settings for a smooth before-and-after comparison experience. Configuring Image Comparison Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide The Image Comparison Widget is available in Elementor and can be placed on the desired section of the page. It offers three main settings tabs: Content, Style, and Advanced. Content Settings In the Content section, you will find only the content option, where you can customize the text, link, and alignment for your button. Content In the Content Section of the Image Comparison Widget, you’ll find the following image customization options: Before Image: This option allows you to upload and set the image for the “before” state in your comparison. After Image: Similarly, this lets you upload and set the “after” state image for comparison. Show Caption : When enabled, this option allows you to add a caption (text) that will appear over the image, describing the comparison. Alignment: Controls the positioning of the images and the comparison slider. You can choose from left, center, or right alignment to place the images within their container. Show Button: This option enables or disables a button that can appear below the images. It’s often used for actions like “Learn More” or “Shop Now.” These customization options allow you to control how the images, captions, and buttons are displayed within the comparison widget. Style Settings In the Style Section of the Image Comparison Widget, you have the following two options: Image: This allows you to style both the Before and After images. You can adjust the image’s width, height, border, shadow, and other visual properties to enhance the look and feel of the images within the comparison widget. Handler: The handler is the slider button that users drag to compare the images. You can customize its appearance here, including its size, color, border radius, and shadow, to make it fit with your site’s design. These options help you fine-tune the visuals of both the images and the comparison slider, ensuring it blends seamlessly with the overall design of your website. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Image Comparison widget in Elementor to create customizable, clickable buttons on your website. For any further assistance or inquiries, feel free to contact our support team! View Live Demo Progress bar Before setting up the Progress Bar Widget, make sure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. Once activated, you’ll get access to all free Elementor widgets, including the Progress Bar Widget—completely free! You can also explore both free and pro widgets by using the filter options. Introduction The Progress Bar widget adds dynamic, customizable progress bars to track goals and achievements in Elementor. Key Use Cases for the Progress Bar Widget in Elementor: Use the Progress Bar widget to visually display progress, goals, or achievements on your website. Customize the appearance, colors, and animations to engage users and track measurable progress effectively. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Progress Bar Widget: Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Progress Bar Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Progress Bar Widget is ready to use! How to Add the Progress Bar Widget in Elementor Open the page where you want to add the Progress Bar. Launch Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Progress Bar.” Drag the Progress Bar widget to your desired section. The Progress Bar widget will now be available for customization. How to Configure the Progress Bar Widget in Animation Addons: In the Elementor panel, search for the “Progress Bar Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into the desired section. Customize the progress bar settings using the available options in the Elementor panel. Your Progress Bar Widget is now ready to use! You can adjust the progress percentage, style, and animations to match your design needs. Configuring Progress Bar Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content, Style, and Advanced. Content Settings You will find two options: Layout and Progress Bar. Layout In the Layout section of the Progress Bar widget, you’ll only find the Style option. You can choose from three preset styles to match your design preferences: Style One Style Two Style Three Each style gives your progress bar a different visual appearance. Simply select the one that fits your page’s design best—it’s that easy! Progress Bar From the Progress Bar settings under the Content section, you can control: Percentage – Adjust the progress using the slider or input box. You can set it anywhere from 0 to 100 depending on what you want to display. Display Percentage – Toggle this option ON/OFF to either show or hide the numeric percentage on the progress bar. This section helps you define how far along a task or goal is visually and numerically. Let me know if you want help with the Style section too! Style Settings From the Style tab of the Progress Bar widget, under the Progress Bar section (as shown in your screenshot), you can customize the appearance with the following options: Progress Bar Color – Choose the color of the progress bar (the filled portion). Background Color – Set the background color of the bar (the unfilled portion). Stroke Width – Adjust the thickness of the progress stroke (the main progress line). Trail Width – Modify the width of the background trail line behind the progress. These settings help you design the progress bar to match your site’s branding or desired visual style. Let me know if you want help describing the Percentage section or the Advanced tab! Percentage Under the Style tab of the Progress Bar widget, the Percentage section lets you style the percentage text displayed on the bar. Here’s what you can customize: Color – Change the color of the percentage text to match your design. Typography – Customize the font, size, weight, and other text styles. Position Y – Adjust the vertical position of the percentage label along the Y-axis. (e.g., move it up or down over the progress bar). These settings help make the progress bar more visually appealing and aligned with your site’s design. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Progress Bar widget in Elementor to create customizable, clickable buttons on your website. For any further assistance or inquiries, feel free to contact our support team! View Live Demo Team Before setting up the Team Widget, make sure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. Once activated, you’ll get access to all free Elementor widgets, including the Team Widget—completely free! You can also explore both free and pro widgets by using the filter options. Introduction The Team Widget lets you display team members with images, roles, and social links in customizable layouts. Key Use Cases for the Team Widget in Elementor: Use the Team Widget to showcase your team members professionally with images, roles, and social links. Create engaging team sections to highlight expertise, build credibility, and enhance your brand’s identity. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Team Widget? Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Team Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Team Widget is ready to use! How to Add the Progress Bar Widget in Elementor Open the page where you want to add the Progress Bar. Launch Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Team Widget” Drag the Team Widget to your desired section. The Progress Bar widget will now be available for customization. How to Configure the Team Widget in Animation Addons: In the Elementor panel, search for the “Team Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into the desired section. Customize the team member details, layout, and social links using the available options in the Elementor panel. Your Team Widget is now ready to showcase your amazing team! Configuring Button Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content, Style, and Advanced. Content Settings The Team Widget offers four configuration options: Layout, Image, Content, and Social Media, enabling precise customization for an optimized team display. Layout – Choose your preferred layout style to display team members. Image – Upload profile photos and control how they appear. Content – Add the team member’s name, designation, and description. Social Media – Insert social icons with links to platforms like Facebook, LinkedIn, Instagram, and more Style Settings Image Settings: Customize the profile picture or team member’s image to match your design. You can adjust the size, shape, and even apply hover effects for a more interactive experience. Content Adjustments: Tailor the text, such as the team member’s name, role, and bio. You can choose different fonts, colors, and layout styles to ensure the content fits the overall look of your site. Social Media Integrations: Link your team members’ social media profiles directly to their profiles on the website. This allows visitors to connect easily with your team across various platforms, such as LinkedIn, Twitter, or Facebook. These options give you full control over the presentation and functionality of your team section. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Team Widget in Elementor to create customizable, clickable buttons on your website. For any further assistance or inquiries, feel free to contact our support team! View Live Demo One Page Nav Before setting up the Animated Title Widget for your one-page navigation, ensure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. Once activated, you’ll gain access to all free Elementor widgets, including the Animated Title Widget, at no cost! You can easily explore both free and pro widgets by using the filter options for efficient navigation within your one-page layout. Introduction The One Page Nav Widget provides smooth, customizable navigation for single-page websites. Key Use Cases for the One Page Nav Widget in Elementor: Use the One Page Nav widget to create seamless, easy navigation between sections on a single-page website. Customize the design and links to enhance user experience and improve site interaction. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the One Page Nav Widget? Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the One Page Nav Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the One Page Nav Widget is ready to use! How to Add the One Page Nav Widget in Elementor Open the page where you want to add the Progress Bar. Launch Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “One Page Nav” . Drag the One Page Nav widget to your desired section. The Progress Bar widget will now be available for customization. How to Configure the One Page Nav Widget in Animation Addons: In the Elementor panel, search for the “One Page Nav Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into the desired section. Customize the navigation settings using the available options in the Elementor panel. Your One Page Nav Widget is now ready to use! Here’s the interface where you can configure the settings and personalize the navigation links for a seamless one-page website experience. Configuring One Page Nav Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the One Page Nav widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content, Style, and Advanced. Content Settings You will find two options: Navigation and Settings. Navigation From the Content section, you’ll find two subsections: Navigation and Settings. Under the Navigation subsection, you can set up your one-page navigation menu with items like Home, About, and FAQ. Settings From the Settings subsection, you’ll find the following options: Navigation Position: Choose where the navigation appears—left or right side of the screen. Vertical Position: Adjust the vertical alignment of the navigation—top, middle, or bottom.Show Tooltip: Toggle this on to display tooltips when hovering over navigation items. Style Settings Now, it’s time to enhance the look of your navigation using the Style section. Here’s what you can explore: Navigation Wrapper: Customize the background, border, padding, and spacing to match your site’s design. Navigation Item: Style the individual items with color, size, spacing, hover effects, and more for a clean and modern look. These styling options help you create a visually appealing and user-friendly one-page navigation setup. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the One Page Nav widget in Elementor to create customizable, clickable buttons on your website. For any further assistance or inquiries, feel free to contact our support team! View Live Demo Timeline Before setting up the Timeline Widget, make sure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. Once activated, you’ll get access to all free Elementor widgets, including the Timeline Widget—completely free! You can also explore both free and pro widgets using the filter options. Introduction The Timeline Widget displays events in order with customizable layouts for better storytelling. Key Use Cases for the Timeline Widget in Elementor: Use the Timeline widget to showcase events, milestones, or achievements in chronological order. Customize the layout, colors, and design to create an engaging visual story and highlight key moments on your website. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Timeline Widget? Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Timeline Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Timeline Widget is ready to use! How to Add the Progress Bar Widget in Elementor Open the page where you want to add the Progress Bar. Launch Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Timeline” Drag the Timeline widget to your desired section. The Progress Bar widget will now be available for customization. How to Configure the Timeline Widget in Animation Addons: In the Elementor panel, search for the “Timeline Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into the desired section. Customize the timeline settings using the available options in the Elementor panel. Your Timeline Widget is now ready to use! Use the interface to configure and personalize your timeline with different tabs for a visually engaging and chronological display of events or milestones. Configuring Timeline Widget in Animation Addons: A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Timeline widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content, Style, and Advanced. Content Settings You will find two options: Layout and Timeline & Image Animation (optional). Layout Customize the timeline structure, such as vertical or horizontal layout, alignment, spacing, and connectors to match your design needs. Timeline Add engaging entrance animations to timeline items and images, enhancing the visual flow and making your timeline more dynamic. Image Animation And, explore the Animation section to apply effects like Power2out or Reveal for smooth transitions. Enable the Play Animation option to use your selected effect. Note: Animations require the Pro version of the plugin. 1. Power2.out Behavior: Starts fast and slows down toward the end (ease-out). Use case: Smooth transitions for UI elements like buttons, cards, or text reveals. Why use it: It gives a professional, subtle feel without being too flashy. 2. Bounce Behavior: The animation hits the end point and bounces a few times like a ball. Use case: Fun, playful interfaces—great for kids’ websites, eCommerce pop-ups, or gamified UIs. Why use it: Adds personality and movement but might be too much for minimalist designs. 3. Back Behavior: Goes slightly past the target before coming back to settle—like a reverse tug. Use case: Hover animations, dropdowns, or modal pop-ups. Why use it: Adds a lively feel, perfect for making elements look responsive and interactive. 4. Elastic Behavior: Like a spring—overshoots the final position and oscillates before settling. Use case: Loading indicators, playful transitions, and attention-grabbing animations. Why use it: Eye-catching but can be overwhelming if used too much. 5. Slowmo Behavior: Starts slow, speeds up, then slows down again. Use case: Dramatic reveals—text overlays, hero sections, or featured images. Why use it: Great for storytelling or highlighting something important. 6. Stepped Behavior: Moves in sudden, discrete steps—no smooth transitions. Use case: Retro or glitchy design styles, pixel art interfaces, or robotic themes. Why use it: Stylized look, works when you want something to feel abrupt or digital. 7. Sine Behavior: Smooth, wave-like easing—in and out gently. Use case: Image sliders, content fades, scroll animations. Why use it: Very natural and smooth—good for subtle movement. 8. Expo Behavior: Exponential curve—starts slow then accelerates rapidly (or the opposite). Use case: When you want dramatic emphasis, like a hero element flying in. Why use it: Bold, impactful entrance—but can feel intense if overused. Style Settings Under the Style tab in the timeline widget you will find three expandable options: Timeline Controls the appearance of the line that connects the steps. Line color & thickness Alignment (left/center/right) Spacing between elements Line animation (if supported) Content Styles the text, headings, and descriptions inside each timeline item. Typography (font, size, color) Background color or image Padding, margin, border radius Box shadow or hover effects Step Customizes the icon or circle that represents each timeline point. Size & shape Border, background color Icon settings (if using icons) Hover/active animations Advance Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! Now you know how to manage the Timeline Widget settings in Elementor to showcase events and milestones effectively on your website. For any further assistance, feel free to reach out to our support team! View Live Demo Tabs Before setting up the Tabs Widget, make sure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. Once activated, you’ll get access to all free Elementor widgets, including the Tabs Widget—completely free! You can also explore both free and pro widgets by using the filter options. Introduction The Tabs Widget lets you display segmented content in interactive, easy-to-navigate sections. Key Use Cases for the One Page Nav Widget in Elementor: Use the Tabs Widget to organize content into separate, easy-to-navigate sections within a page. Customize the design and tab labels to provide a clear, interactive experience, allowing users to switch between different content seamlessly. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Tabs Widget? Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Tabs Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Tabs Widget is ready to use! How to Add the One Page Nav Widget in Elementor Open the page where you want to add the Progress Bar. Launch Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Tabs”. Drag the Tabs widget to your desired section. The Progress Bar widget will now be available for customization. How to Configure the Tabs Widget in Animation Addons In the Elementor panel, search for the “Tabs Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into the desired section. Customize the tab settings using the available options in the Elementor panel. Your Tabs Widget is now ready to use! Here’s the interface where you can configure the settings and personalize the tabs for a clean and interactive user experience. Configuring Tabs Widget in Animation Addons: A Step-by-Step Guide The Tabs Widget is available in Elementor and can be placed in any section of your page. It includes three main settings tabs: Content, Style, and Advanced—each offering customization options to personalize your tabs and optimize the layout for a seamless user experience. Content Settings You will find two options: Tabs and Settings. Tabs Section (under the Content tab): In the Tabs section, you’ll find the Tab Items subsection, which allows you to configure the content for each individual tab. The available settings include: Tab Title – Set a label for the tab. Icon – Choose an icon to visually represent the tab. Title – Add a title that appears inside the content area. Content Type – Select between two options: Content – Use the built-in editor to create and display custom content. Saved Templates – Insert a pre-designed Elementor template as the tab content. When Content is selected, the following additional configuration options will appear: Add Media – Upload or insert images, videos, or custom code for enhanced visual presentation. Paragraph – Enter descriptive text or supporting content using the rich text editor. These features allow you to structure your content in a clear, organized format—ideal for FAQs, service descriptions, or product details. Direction (Tab Content Placement): The Direction setting allows you to define the placement of the tab content in relation to the tab labels. You can choose from the following options: Above – Displays the tab content above the tab labels. Below – Places the tab content beneath the tab labels (commonly used layout). Before – Positions the tab content to the left of the tab labels. After – Places the tab content to the right of the tab labels. This feature helps you design the layout of your Tabs Widget to best match your page structure and visual preferences. Alignment – Controls the position of the tabs (Start, Center, End & Stretch). This setting determines how the tabs are aligned within the widget’s container. You can choose from the following options: Start – Aligns all tab items to the left side (default for left-to-right languages). Center – Places the tab items in the center of the container, creating a balanced look. End – Aligns all tab items to the right side of the container. Stretch – Expands all tab items evenly to fill the entire width of the container, ensuring equal space between each tab. This control is useful for adjusting the visual alignment of your tabs based on your design needs or layout preferences. Settings (Under the Content Tab) After configuring the Tabs section, you’ll move on to the Settings panel. This section offers additional customization options to fine-tune the appearance and behavior of your tabs. Here’s what you’ll find: Title Alignment Choose how your tab titles should align within the widget. Options include: Left Center Right This helps you match the tab alignment with your overall design layout. Icon Position Decide where the icon will appear in relation to the tab title. You can place it before or after the text for better visual hierarchy. Icon Gap Set the spacing between the icon and the title text. This ensures that your design remains clean and easy to read. Breakpoint Define how the tab layout behaves on different devices. The available breakpoints are: Mobile Portrait (>767px) – Adjusts the layout specifically for mobile devices in portrait orientation. Tablet Portrait (>1024px) – Optimizes the layout for tablets in portrait mode. These settings provide responsive control and allow you to create a seamless viewing experience across various devices. Style Settings In the Content section under Style, you’ll find the following options: Style Background Type Set the background of the tab items. You can choose between: Solid color Gradient Image background Border Radius Adjust the roundness of the tab corners. A higher radius results in more rounded edges, while a lower value gives a sharper, boxed look. Gap Between Tabs Control the space between each individual tab. Proper spacing improves readability and maintains a clean layout. Distance from Content Define the spacing between the tab headers and the content area. This ensures clear separation and visual balance between the navigation and its associated content. Typography Subsection Within this subsection, you can fine-tune how the text and icons inside the tabs appear: 🔸 Icon Size Set the size of the icon used within the tab titles. Larger icons draw more attention, while smaller ones create a minimal look. 🔸 Text Color Choose the color of the tab title text. This should complement your site’s color scheme while ensuring good readability. 🔸 Background Type This controls the background of the text area or tab title, separate from the main background. It adds layering and contrast to the tab design. Additional Styling Options Border Type and Radius Define the border style (solid, dashed, dotted, etc.) and radius to shape the outer frame of the tab content or tab titles. This helps reinforce structure in your design. 🔹 Padding Adjust the inner spacing around the content inside each tab. Proper padding ensures that text and visuals do not appear cramped and enhances user experience. These style options are designed to give you full control over the look and feel of your tabbed content, helping you create engaging, responsive, and brand-aligned sections on your Elementor-powered website. Content Background Type The Background Type setting in the Style tab allows users to customize the visual appearance of the content area within the Tabs widget. This option is essential for enhancing the overall design and user experience of your section. Available Background Types: Default: Keeps the default styling provided by your theme or Elementor. None: Removes any background styling, resulting in a transparent background.Solid: Applies a single solid color as the background. You can choose any color using the color picker. Double: Creates a double border effect around the content area, offering a more decorative look. Dotted: Applies a dotted border around the content area for a stylized, subtle effect. Dashed: Similar to dotted, but with dashed lines, giving a segmented appearance to the border. Groove: Adds a 3D grooved border style, providing depth and visual interest. Border Type Choose the style of border around the tab content. Options include None, Solid, Double, Dotted, Dashed, Groove, and more. Border Radius Customize the curvature of the content box’s corners. You can enter different values for Top, Right, Bottom, and Left to create rounded or sharp corners. Padding Controls the space inside the content box (between the content and the border). Set padding values individually for Top, Right, Bottom, and Left to manage spacing effectively. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Tabs widget in Elementor to create customizable, interactive tabbed content on your website. For any further assistance or inquiries, feel free to contact our support team! View Live Demo Services Tabs Before setting up the Service Tabs widget, ensure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. Once activated, you’ll have access to all free Elementor widgets, including the Service Tabs widget—at no cost! Additionally, you can explore both free and pro widgets by filtering the selection options. Introduction The Services Tabs widget displays services in a tabbed layout for easy navigation and better user experience. Key Use Cases for the Services Tabs Widget in Elementor: Use the Services Tabs widget to showcase different services in an organized, tabbed format. Customize the design and content to enhance user experience and make it easier for visitors to explore your offerings. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Service Tabs Widget? Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Service Tabs Widget from the list. Toggle the switch to enable it. That’s it! The Service Tabs Widget is now ready to use on your website. How to Add the One Page Nav Widget in Elementor Open the page where you want to add the Progress Bar. Launch Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Services Tabs” . Drag the Services Tabs widget to your desired section. The Progress Bar widget will now be available for customization. How to Configure the Service Tabs Widget in Animation Addons In the Elementor panel, search for the “Service Tabs Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into the section where you want to display your services. Use the available options in the Elementor panel to customize the tabs, such as titles, icons, content, and layout to match your site’s style and service offerings. Your Service Tabs Widget is now ready to use! Here’s the interface where you can configure the settings and customize each tab to showcase your services in a clean, organized, and interactive layout. Configuring Services Tabs Widget: A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Services Tabs widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content, Style, and Advanced. Content Settings You will find two options: Tabs, Button, and Settings. Tab Under the Content section of the Service Tabs Widget, you’ll find several key configuration options to customize each tab effectively: Style: Choose between two available layout styles – Style One and Style Two – based on your design preference. Tabs Items: Tab Number: Define the number of tabs you want to display. Tab Title: Add a title for each tab to clearly represent the content. Add Media: Insert rich content using either the Visual editor or Code view for advanced customization. Paragraph: Add descriptive text to provide context or details. Choose Image: Upload or select an image that complements your tab content. Link Option: Add a clickable link to direct users to more information or a specific page. Once all your tabs are set up, make sure to adjust the image resolution to match your overall design theme for a polished and cohesive look. Button In the Button section of the Service Tabs Widget, you can fully personalize the appearance and behavior of your button to match your website’s style: Style Selection: Choose from 7 unique button styles to suit your design preference. Hover Effects: Select from 7 different hover styles to enhance interactivity. Text: Add your desired button label/text. Icon: You can either upload a custom icon or choose one from the icon library. Icon Position: Decide whether the icon appears before or after the text. Direction: Arrange the button layout in a horizontal (row) or vertical (column) orientation. Icon Spacing: Adjust the space between the icon and text for better visual balance. These settings allow you to create a visually appealing and highly functional button that complements your service tabs seamlessly. Settings In the final part of the Content section, you’ll find the Settings panel, which allows you to manage how your Service Tabs display across different screen sizes. You’ll have two Breakpoint categories available: Mobile Portrait: Targets screens below 767px, ensuring your content looks great on smaller mobile devices. Tablet Portrait: Targets screens up to 1024px, providing optimal layout for tablet users. These settings help maintain a responsive and user-friendly experience across all devices by automatically adjusting the tab layout based on screen size. Style Settings Now, it’s time to enhance your Tabs, Image, Tab Title, and content by styling them to match your design preferences and improve the overall user experience. Tabs You can adjust the tab width according to these settings to ensure optimal display across different devices. Image In the image section, you’ll find customization options such as margin, border type, and box shadow, allowing you to adjust the tab width as needed for a refined design. Tab Title Tab Number Function: This field likely auto-generates or displays the number of the tab in order (e.g., Tab 1, Tab 2). Customization: There might not be much to change here unless it’s manually editable depending on the widget you’re using. Color Purpose: Changes the color of the tab number or title text. Options: Clicking the color box opens the color picker, allowing you to choose a solid color, gradient, or even set it to transparent. Typography Purpose: Lets you customize the font styling for the tab number or title. Options: Includes font family, size, weight (boldness), transform (uppercase/lowercase), style (italic/normal), decoration (underline, etc.), line-height, and letter-spacing. Space (Slider) Function: Adjusts the spacing (likely the gap between the tab number/title and the tab content or between tabs themselves). Customization: Use the slider or manually input a number in the box to the right. Title Function: Input field where you enter the actual name/title of the tab (e.g., “Cleaning Services,” “Pricing,” etc.). Tabs: There are two states: Normal: Controls how the title looks normally. Hover/Active: Controls how the title looks when hovered over or currently selected. Color (under Title state) Function: Customize the color of the tab title based on the state selected (Normal or Hover/Active). Interaction: Clicking opens the color picker for both text and background options. Typography (under Title state) Purpose: Customize font details specifically for the title under Normal or Hover/Active state. Options: Font family, size, weight, style, spacing, etc. Border Type Function: Lets you apply borders around the tab title. Options: Choices may include none, solid, dashed, dotted, double, or groove. Padding Function: Adds spacing inside the tab title area (between the content and the border). Values: Editable fields for Top, Right, Bottom, and Left. Margin Function: Adds spacing outside the tab title area (between this tab and surrounding elements). Values: Editable fields for Top, Right, Bottom, and Left. Content Color:Adjust the text color, background color, and active tab color to match your brand’s palette and improve readability. Padding:Control the space inside each tab element, ensuring your content has enough breathing room and a clean layout. Typography:Customize font family, size, weight, line height, and letter spacing to maintain consistency with your site’s overall text style. Margin:Set the space outside the tab elements, allowing you to control the distance between tabs and other elements on the page. These options provide complete flexibility to fine-tune the appearance of your tabs, ensuring they look polished and consistent with the rest of your design. Button Button Margin What it does: Adds space outside the button. Input Fields: You can set values for Top, Right, Bottom, and Left independently. Link Icon (🔗): Click to apply the same margin to all sides simultaneously. Typography Purpose: Adjusts the font style of the button text. Options: Includes settings like font family, size, weight (boldness), style (italic/normal), decoration (underline), line height, and letter spacing. Open Settings: Click the pencil/edit icon to reveal these options. Icon Size What it does: If your button includes an icon, this slider controls its size. Adjust: Use the slider or type the value manually in px (pixels). State Tabs: Normal | Hover Normal Tab: Style your button in its default state. Hover Tab: Change how the button looks when the user hovers their mouse over it. You can toggle between them to apply different settings for each state. Text Color Purpose: Changes the color of the text on the button. Color Picker: Click to choose a color. You can use solid colors, gradients, or even transparent options. Background Type Purpose: Set the background color or gradient of the button. Options: Classic: Solid color or image background. Gradient: Smooth color transitions. Click the color panel to reveal the picker or image upload tool. Border Type Purpose: Determines the type of border around the button. Options: Default, solid, dotted, dashed, double, groove, ridge, etc. Border Radius What it does: Controls the roundness of the button corners. Values: You can set custom radius values for Top, Right, Bottom, and Left. Linked editing: Use the chain icon to keep all corners uniform. Padding Purpose: Adds space inside the button (between the border and the text/icon). Input Fields: Customize padding for Top, Right, Bottom, and Left sides separately. Box Shadow Purpose: Adds a shadow around the button for a lifted or 3D effect. Settings (when expanded): Control shadow color, blur, spread, position (horizontal/vertical), and more. Click the edit icon (✏️) to configure shadow properties. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Services Tabs Widget in Elementor to create customizable, interactive tabbed content on your website. For any further assistance or inquiries, feel free to contact our support team! View Live Demo Floating Elements Before setting up the Floating Elements, make sure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. Once activated, you’ll have access to all free Elementor widgets, including the Floating Elements—at no cost! Additionally, you can explore both free and pro widgets by filtering the selection options. Introduction Floating elements stay fixed while scrolling, ensuring quick access to key actions or info without interrupting the layout. Key Use Cases for the Floating elements in Elementor: Use the Floating Elements widget to display key components like navigation menus, call-to-action buttons, or notifications in a fixed position. Customize the design and placement to ensure they stay accessible as users scroll, enhancing user experience without interrupting the page flow. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Floating Elements Widget? Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Locate the Floating Elements Widget in the list. Toggle the switch to enable the widget. That’s it! The Floating Elements Widget is now ready to use on your website. How to Add the Floating Elements Widget in Elementor Open the page where you want to add the Progress Bar. Launch Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Floating Elements” . Drag the Floating Elements widget to your desired section. The Progress Bar widget will now be available for customization. How to Configure the Floating Elements Widget In the Elementor panel, search for the “Floating Elements Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into the section where you want the floating effect to appear. Customize the widget settings using the available options in the Elementor panel, including animation style, direction, speed, and more to achieve your desired floating effect. Configuring Floating Elements Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Floating Elements widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content and Advanced. Content Settings You will find only one option there – WCF Floating Elements. The Elements section within the WCF Floating Elements widget provides comprehensive control over the floating items you want to display on your webpage. Below is a breakdown of the configurable options available for each item: Choose Image: Allows you to upload or select an image from the media library to be used as the floating element. 2. Size: Lets you define the width and height of the floating image. This ensures consistent sizing across devices. 3. Offset: Provides control over the horizontal and vertical positioning of the element. You can fine-tune the placement by adjusting the offset values. 4. Z-Index: Sets the layering order of the floating element. A higher z-index value brings the element to the front over other page elements. 5. Live Animation: Enables dynamic visual effects for floating elements. Available animation styles include: Float Y – Vertical floating motion Float X – Horizontal floating motion Spin – Rotational movement Scale – Smooth zoom in/out effect Wiggle – Playful shaking motion 6. Enable Scroll Smoother: A toggle option to enable or disable smooth scrolling effects for the floating elements, making transitions appear more fluid. 7. Visibility Options: You can control the visibility of floating elements on various devices using the following toggles: Hide on Desktop Hide on Tablet Portrait Hide on Mobile Portrait These options ensure that your floating elements display only on the intended devices, improving performance and user experience. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Floating Elements widget in Elementor to create interactive, floating components on your website. For any further assistance or inquiries, feel free to contact our support team! View Live Demo Event Slider Before setting up the Event Slider, make sure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. Once activated, you’ll have access to all free Elementor widgets, including the Event Slider—at no cost! Additionally, you can explore both free and pro widgets by filtering the selection options. Introduction The Event Slider widget in Elementor displays events in a dynamic slider with customizable design, showing dates, descriptions, and images. Key Use Cases for the Event Slider in Elementor: Use the Event Slider widget to showcase upcoming events in a dynamic, sliding format. Customize the design, transitions, and content to display event details like dates, descriptions, and images, ensuring an engaging and interactive user experience. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Event Slider Widget? Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Event Slider Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Event Slider Widget is ready to use! How to Add Event Slider Widget in Elementor Open the page where you want to add the Event Slider. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Event Slider.“ Drag the Event Slider widget to your desired section. The Event Slider widget will now be available for customization. How to Configure the Event Slider Widget In the Elementor panel, search for the “Event Slider Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into the desired section. Customize the event slider settings using the available options in the Elementor panel. Your Event Slider Widget is now ready to use! Here’s the interface where you can configure the settings and personalize the slider for a dynamic and engaging event showcase. Configuring Event Slider Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Event Slider widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content,Style and Advanced. Content Settings You will find only three options there – Event Slider, Button and Slider Option. Event Slider The Slider Option settings include – Event Style,Events item, choose image,name,date and description. The Slider Option settings provide various customization options to enhance your design. For the Event Style settings, follow these steps: Event Item: Choose the event or item you want to customize. Each event will have its own unique settings. Choose Image: Select an image for the event that visually represents it. Name: Add the name or title of the event to make it easily identifiable. Date: Set the date of the event to inform your audience about when it will occur. Description: Provide a brief description of the event so users understand the details and what to expect. Button The Button Section offers a variety of customization options to help you design visually appealing and interactive buttons. Below is a detailed explanation of each setting: 1. Style Defines the default appearance of the button. You can customize: Background color Text color Border style Typography Padding & Margin This allows you to align the button design with your website’s branding. 2. Hover Style Controls the button’s appearance when a user hovers over it. You can configure: Hover Style Categories Within the Hover Style option, you’ll find a variety of pre-designed hover animation categories to enhance user interaction and visual appeal. These styles provide dynamic effects when users hover over the button. Here are some of the available hover style categories: Divided – Splits the button visually during hover for a modern effect. Cross – Displays a cross-patterned hover animation. Cropping – Creates a crop-like visual transition on hover. Rollover Top – Applies a slide effect from the top of the button. Rollover Left – Slides the hover effect in from the left side. Parallel Border – Highlights the button with animated parallel borders. Rollover Cross – Combines rollover motion with a cross-direction animation. These options are designed to give your buttons a unique and interactive feel. You can experiment with each style to find the one that best suits your design needs. 3. Text Specifies the label displayed on the button. It should be clear and action-oriented (e.g., “Read More”, “Buy Now”). 4. Icon Enables you to add an icon to the button from a predefined icon library. Icons enhance visual context and user comprehension. 5. Icon Position Determines where the icon will appear in relation to the text. You can choose: Before the text After the text This ensures better alignment based on design preferences. 6. Direction Controls the layout direction of the icon and text. Options include: Row (default) – icon and text appear side-by-side. Column – icon appears above or below the text. This is useful for different layout styles, especially in vertical designs. 7. Icon Spacing Adjusts the space between the icon and the button text. You can define precise spacing to maintain visual balance and clarity. Slider Option The Slider Options panel provides comprehensive control over the behavior, design, and navigation of your slider. Below is a detailed explanation of each setting available: 1. Slider Styles Choose from 10 unique slider styles to control the overall look and layout of your slider. Each style comes with a predefined design configuration that can be further customized. 2. Autoplay Button Enables a play/pause button for the slider, allowing users to manually control autoplay functionality. 3. Autoplay Delay Specifies the time interval (in milliseconds) between automatic slide transitions.Example: Setting it to 3000ms results in a 3-second delay between slides. 4. Autoplay Interaction Determines whether autoplay will pause on user interaction (e.g., mouse hover or touch). Enabled: Autoplay pauses when the user interacts. Disabled: Autoplay continues regardless of user interaction. 5. Allow Touch Move Enables swipe functionality on touch devices. Useful for enhancing mobile responsiveness and user experience. 6. Loop Allows the slider to loop continuously from the last slide back to the first, creating a seamless carousel effect. 7. Mousewheel Control Enables users to navigate through slides using the mouse wheel — particularly useful for full-page slider experiences. 8. Animation Speed Controls the transition speed (in milliseconds) between slides.Example: A setting of 500ms results in a half-second slide animation. 9. Space Between Sets the amount of spacing (in pixels) between each slide. This helps manage layout density and visual clarity. 10. Navigation Enables or disables navigation arrows (previous and next) on the slider. Enabled: Users can manually switch slides using arrows. Disabled: Arrows are hidden. 11. Previous Arrow Icon Select a custom icon for the previous navigation arrow, allowing alignment with your site’s theme or style. 12. Next Arrow Icon Select a custom icon for the next navigation arrow, similar to the previous arrow setting. 13. Pagination Displays pagination indicators (e.g., dots or progress bars) to show the current slide position within the total slides. 14. Pagination Type Choose the style of pagination, such as: Bullets Fraction Progress Bar Each type offers a different visual representation of the slider’s progress. 15. Direction Defines the slide transition direction: Left to Right (default for horizontal sliders) Right to Left (ideal for RTL languages or custom flows) Style Settings Once your Event Slider Widget is added and configured, the next step is to enhance the visual presentation of your content. Images This section lets you style the event image for a polished and responsive visual display. Size: Adjust the image dimensions to maintain consistency across all event slides. Border Type: Select a border style (solid, dashed, dotted, etc.) to enhance the image frame. Border Radius: Define the roundness of the image corners for a smooth or sharp look, depending on your design needs. These settings allow you to present your event images in a visually consistent and attractive manner. Content Customize the container that holds the title, description, and other event information. Background Type: Choose a solid color, gradient, or image background to enhance visual depth. Padding: Control the inner spacing between the content and the container’s edges for better alignment and spacing. Margin: Adjust the outer spacing around the content area to create breathing space from other elements. Individual Text Elements within Content: Title Color: Set the text color to match your brand or design palette. Typography: Customize font family, size, weight, line height, and letter spacing. Margin: Fine-tune spacing above and below the title for visual balance. Date Color: Define the date’s text color for clarity and emphasis. Typography: Adjust typography settings to match your style guide. Margin: Set spacing to separate the date from surrounding elements. Description Color: Control the description text color for optimal readability. Typography: Modify font details to ensure legibility and aesthetic harmony. Margin: Adjust spacing around the description to maintain layout consistency. Button Customize the action button within the slider for a compelling call-to-action. Adjust text styling, padding, border, colors, hover effects, icon settings, and spacing to create a visually engaging and functional button. Slider Navigation This section lets you personalize the Previous and Next arrows. Customize icon styles, size, color, background, positioning, and hover effects to align with your design aesthetic. Pagination Configure the look of pagination elements such as dots or progress bars. Control shape, size, color, spacing, and active/hover states to ensure intuitive navigation across slides. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Event Slider widget in Elementor to create dynamic and engaging event displays on your website. For any further assistance or inquiries, feel free to contact our support team! View Live Demo Content Slider Before setting up the Content Slider Widget, make sure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. Once activated, you’ll have access to all free Elementor widgets, including the Content Slider Widget—at no cost! Additionally, you can explore both free and pro widgets by filtering the selection options. Introduction The Content Slider widget displays dynamic content with customizable design and transitions. Key Use Cases for the Content Slider in Elementor: Use the Content Slider widget to showcase dynamic text, images, or promotions in an interactive sliding format. Customize the layout, transitions, and design to create an engaging experience without disrupting the page flow. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Content Slider Widget? Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Content Slider Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Content Slider Widget is ready to use! How to Add the Content Slider Widget in Elementor Open the page where you want to add the Content Slider. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Content Slider“. Drag the Content Slider Widget to your desired section. The Content Slider Widget will now be available for customization. How to Configure the Content Slider Widget in Animation Addons Enable the widget, create a new page, set a title, choose the Elementor Full Width template, and publish it. Adjust options as needed. In the Elementor panel, search for the “Content Slider Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into your desired section. Add your slides and customize each one’s content, layout, and animation using the available settings. Content Settings These options allow you to customize the slider functionality, manage content visibility, and fine-tune the display settings for optimal user engagement. The settings panel provides two primary configuration options: Content Slider and Slider Option. Content Slider The Content Slider widget offers various configuration options to adjust the layout, content, and media elements for an engaging and responsive presentation. Below is a breakdown of the key settings available in the Content Slider section: Max Width Description: Defines the maximum width of the content slider, allowing you to control the slider’s overall size within its container. Use Case: This setting helps maintain consistency across different screen sizes and ensures that the slider does not stretch beyond the desired width. Options: You can set the width in pixels or percentage, depending on your design needs. Align Items Description: Controls the vertical alignment of the content inside each slide. Use Case: Aligning items ensures that the content within the slider is positioned properly, whether centered, top-aligned, or bottom-aligned. Options: Available alignment options include Top, Center, or Bottom. Two Category Content Type Description: Allows you to categorize the content into two distinct types for improved organization and layout options. Use Case: This is especially useful when displaying content that needs to be categorized or separated into two sections, such as an image and text, or different event categories. Options: Typically, you can choose between Image & Text or Text & Button. Content Description: This setting is for adding and managing the textual content within each slide. Use Case: You can define the title, description, or any other content you want to display within the slider. Options: Content fields allow you to input text and customize it further using typography settings like font size, color, line height, etc. Add Media (Visual and Code) Description: Allows the addition of media, either through visual elements (images, videos, etc.) or code (like HTML embeds). Use Case: Add compelling media to your slides to enrich the visual appeal, or embed content such as custom HTML code for advanced layouts and dynamic elements. Options: Visual: Upload or select media from your media library. Code: Insert custom HTML code for more flexible, dynamic content. Paragraph Description: Provides the option to add a paragraph of text to each slide. Use Case: The paragraph field is ideal for adding descriptions, additional details, or any longer text content related to the event or offer being showcased. Options: You can style the paragraph text using standard typography settings, such as font size, color, line height, and alignment. Slider Option I made slight changes to my slider and customized a few things as well. That’s All! Slider Option The Slider Options section provides a wide range of controls to fine-tune the behavior, layout, and user interaction of your Content Slider. Below is a detailed explanation of each setting to help you configure the slider professionally and effectively: 1. Slides to Show (1–10) Description: Defines how many slides are visible at once within the slider viewport. Use Case: Display multiple items side-by-side or focus on a single highlighted content element. Options: Choose from 1 to 10 slides to display simultaneously. Autoplay Button Description: Enables or disables automatic slide transition. Use Case: Ideal for hands-free, continuous content presentation such as featured posts or promotions. Control: Toggle switch (On/Off). Autoplay Delay (if available) Description: Sets the time delay (in milliseconds) between automatic slide transitions.Use Case: Controls the pacing of autoplay to match your content’s visibility needs. Allow Touch Move Description: Enables swipe gestures for touch devices. Use Case: Enhances mobile usability by allowing users to slide content using finger gestures. Control: Toggle switch (On/Off). Loop Description: Allows the slider to loop back to the beginning after the last slide. Use Case: Provides a seamless, continuous sliding experience. Control: Toggle switch (On/Off). Mousewheel Toggle Button Description: Enables slide navigation using mouse wheel scrolling. Use Case: Improves desktop navigation and adds intuitive interaction. Control: Toggle switch (On/Off). Animation Speed Description: Controls the transition speed between slides. Use Case: Adjusts the feel of the slider—smooth and slow or quick and snappy. Unit: Time in milliseconds (e.g., 300ms, 500ms). Space Between Description: Sets the gap between individual slides. Use Case: Useful for visually separating content blocks and improving layout clarity. Unit: Pixels (px). Navigation Description: Displays previous and next navigation arrows for manual slide control. Use Case: Allows users to manually scroll through slides. Control: Toggle switch (On/Off). Previous Arrow Icon / Next Arrow Icon Description: Customize the icons used for the previous and next navigation arrows. Use Case: Match your site’s design language or theme. Options: Select from available icon sets. Pagination Toggle Button Description: Enables dot or numeric pagination indicators. Use Case: Helps users identify their position within the slider. Control: Toggle switch (On/Off). Pagination Type Description: Selects the style of pagination (e.g., dots, fraction, progress bar). Use Case: Enhances visual feedback and user orientation. Options: Depends on available pagination styles in the widget. Left/Right Direction Description: Determines the sliding direction of the content. Use Case: Useful for RTL (Right-to-Left) language support or custom design preference. Options: Left or Right. Center Slide Toggle Button Description: Centers the currently active slide within the slider frame. Use Case: Enhances focus on the active item for a clean, professional look. Control: Toggle switch (On/Off). Effect Description: Sets the slide transition animation effect (e.g., slide, fade). Use Case: Adds aesthetic value and improves content engagement. Options: Based on available animation types. Style Settings The Style section of the Content Slider widget is categorized into three parts: Slide, Slider Navigation, and Slider Pagination. Each section offers detailed styling options to help you align the slider’s design with your website’s aesthetics- Slide Customize the visual appearance of individual slides using the following settings: Background Type – Choose between classic, gradient, or image backgrounds to set the visual tone. Border Type – Define the border style (solid, dotted, dashed, etc.) around the slide. Border Radius – Adjust the roundness of slide corners for a softer or sharper appearance. Padding – Control the spacing inside the slide for proper content alignment. Slider Navigation Style the previous and next navigation arrows with precision: Size – Set the icon size to match your design layout. Padding – Add spacing around the navigation buttons for balanced positioning. Color – Choose the arrow icon color to match your brand palette. Background Type – Customize the background using solid colors, gradients, or images. Border Type – Apply a suitable border style to the navigation buttons. Border Radius – Round off the edges of the navigation buttons for a modern or classic look. Slider Pagination Design the pagination indicators to enhance user navigation: Size – Adjust the size of pagination dots or lines. Color – Set the default color of the pagination items. Active Color – Define a distinct color for the active pagination item to highlight the current slide. Border Type – Customize the border around each pagination item. Gap – Set spacing between pagination items for clean alignment. Pagination Position – Choose where the pagination appears (e.g., top, bottom, inside). Pagination Offset – Fine-tune the exact position by setting offset values. These options provide full control over the design and user experience of your Content Slider, ensuring it integrates seamlessly into your website’s layout and branding. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Content Slider widget in Elementor to create dynamic and engaging content displays on your website. For any further assistance or inquiries, feel free to contact our support team! View Live Demo Countdown Before setting up the Countdown Widget, make sure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. Once activated, you’ll have access to all free Elementor widgets, including the Countdown Widget—at no cost! Additionally, you can explore both free and pro widgets by filtering the selection options. Introduction The Countdown widget adds a customizable timer to create urgency for events or promotions. Key Use Cases for the Countdown Widget in Elementor: Use the Countdown widget to display timers for upcoming events, product launches, or promotions. Customize the design and countdown settings to create urgency and engage visitors effectively. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Countdown Widget: Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Countdown Widget in the list Toggle it on to enable the widget.Now, the Countdown Widget is ready to use! How to Add Countdown Widget in Elementor Open the page where you want to add the Countdown. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Countdown.“ Drag the Event Slider widget to your desired section. The Event Slider widget will now be available for customization. How to Configure the Countdown Widget Enable it, create a new page, set a title, choose the Elementor Full Width template, and publish. Adjust options as needed. In the Elementor panel, search for the “Countdown Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into the desired section. Customize the countdown settings using the available options in the Elementor panel. Your Countdown Widget is now ready to use! Configure the settings to create an engaging and time-sensitive experience. Configuring Countdown Widget in Animation Addons: A Step-by-Step Guide The Countdown Widget is available in Elementor and can be placed in any section of your page. It includes three main settings tabs: Content, Style, and Advanced—each offering customization options to personalize the timer and optimize the layout for a time-sensitive, engaging user experience. Content Settings In the Content section of the Countdown Widget, you will find three main options: Layout Style – Choose the overall visual style of the countdown timer (boxed, inline). Show Separator – Enable or disable separators (like colons or symbols) between time units for better readability and design consistency. Timer In the Timer section of the Countdown Widget, you will find the following options: Due Date – Set the exact date and time when the countdown will end. Labels – Enable or disable labels for each time unit (Days, Hours, Minutes, Seconds). Days / Hours / Minutes / Seconds – Customize the visibility and styling for each unit individually. Direction – Set the alignment direction of the timer (e.g., row or column layout). Label Gap – Adjust the spacing between the numbers and their respective labels for a cleaner look. These options allow you to tailor the countdown timer’s functionality and appearance to match your site’s design. Time Expire In the Time Expire section of the Countdown Widget, you can define what will be displayed once the countdown reaches zero. This allows you to maintain engagement with your audience even after the countdown ends. 🔹 Title Specify a custom title that appears when the countdown timer expires. This can be used to highlight a message like “Time’s Up!”, “Offer Ended”, or any other relevant notification. 🔹 Description Add a supporting description below the title to provide additional information. For example, you might include details like “Please stay tuned for upcoming events.” or “This deal is no longer available.” Style Settings As we can see, there are several customization options in the style section for layout, days, hours, minutes, seconds and separator. The Style section allows you to customize the visual appearance of your Countdown Timer, helping you create an attractive, brand-aligned design. The options are divided into several key areas: Layout Item Gap: Adjust the spacing between each time unit (Days, Hours, Minutes, Seconds) to ensure balanced alignment and visual clarity. Days / Hours / Minutes / Seconds (Under “General”) Each of these sections provides the same set of customization options: Digit & Label Gap: Control the space between the numeric value and its corresponding label (e.g., “Days”, “Hours”). Padding: Add internal spacing inside the time unit box for a more spacious look. Background Type: Choose a background color or gradient to enhance visibility and match your design theme. Border Type: Apply solid, dashed, dotted, or double borders around each time unit. Border Radius: Soften the corners of each box by adjusting the radius value. Box Shadow: Add a shadow effect for depth and emphasis. Digits Typography and Color: Customize the font style, weight, size, and color of the digits. Labels Typography and Color: Modify the label’s text appearance to maintain consistency with your site’s aesthetic. Separator Size: Set the thickness or font size of the separator between time units. Offset: Adjust the vertical positioning of the separator to align it perfectly with the design layout. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve successfully configured the Countdown widget in Elementor to create an engaging countdown timer for your website. For any further assistance or inquiries, feel free to contact our support team! View Live Demo Advanced Button Before setting up the Advanced Button, make sure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. Once activated, you’ll have access to all free Elementor widgets, including the Advanced Button—at no cost! Additionally, you can explore both free and pro widgets by filtering the selection options. Introduction The Advanced Button widget in Elementor lets you create customizable, stylish buttons with various design and hover effects to boost user engagement. Key Use Cases for the Advanced Button in Elementor: Use the Advanced Button widget to create highly customizable, interactive buttons with unique hover effects, shapes, and styles. Customize button design, actions, and animations to enhance user experience and drive engagement on your website. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Advanced Button Widget Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Advanced Button Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Advanced Button Widget is ready to use! How to Add Advanced Button Widget in Elementor: Open the page where you want to add the Advanced Button. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Advanced Button.” Drag the Advanced Button widget to your desired section. The Advanced Button widget will now be available for customization. How to Configure Advanced Button Widget In the Elementor panel, search for the Advanced Button Widget. Drag and drop the widget into the desired section. Customize the button settings using the available options in the Elementor panel. Your Advanced Button Widget is now ready to use! Configuring Advanced Button Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Advanced Button Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content,Style and Advanced. Content Settings You will find only one option – Button. In the Button section, you will find the following customization options: Styles: Choose from 8 predefined button styles. Text: Customize the text displayed on the button. Icon: Add an icon to the button. Icon Position: Control the position of the icon (before or after the text). Link: Set the link for the button (URL). Alignment: Adjust the alignment of the button (left, center, or right). These options allow you to tailor the appearance and functionality of the button to suit your design. Style Settings Within the Style tab, the Button section provides a range of design customization options to enhance the visual appeal and usability of your button. Here’s what you can configure: Typography: Customize the font style, size, weight, and spacing of the button text. Background Type: Choose between classic or gradient backgrounds for the button. Border Width: Define the thickness of the button border. Border Radius: Adjust the roundness of the button corners. Padding: Control the space inside the button for balanced text and icon placement. Icon Size: Set the size of the icon used in the button. Gap: Manage the spacing between the icon and the button text. Color: Choose the text color of the button. Border Color: Select a color for the button border. These options give you complete control over the button’s appearance, helping you align it perfectly with your site’s design language. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Advanced Button widget in Elementor to create stylish and interactive buttons for your website. For any further assistance or inquiries, feel free to contact our support team! View Live Demo Contact Form 7 The Contact Form 7 Widget in Animation Addons for Elementor is a free feature. To access this widget, ensure the plugin is installed and activated on your site. You can easily integrate and customize Contact Form 7 forms on your pages with this widget. Introduction Contact Form 7 is a customizable WordPress plugin for creating forms with email notifications and spam protection. Key Use Cases for Contact Form 7 Widgets: Create and manage custom forms for seamless user interaction. Integrate email notifications and spam protection for secure communication. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Contact Form 7 Widget: Go to Contact Form 7 in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Contact Form 7 Widget in the list of available widgets. Drag and drop the widget into your desired widget area. Customize the form settings and save changes. How to Add Contact Form 7 Widget in Elementor: Open the page where you want to add the Contact Form 7 Widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Contact Form 7”. Drag the widget to your desired section. Select the form you want to display and customize the widget settings. How to Configure Contact Form 7 Widgets Ensure the Contact Form 7 plugin is activated in your WordPress settings. Open a new page in WordPress. Add a page title and choose the Elementor Full Width template. Click Publish to save your changes. In the Elementor panel, search for “Contact Form 7 Widget” and drag it onto the page. Configuring Contact Form 7 Widgets : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Contact Form 7 Widgets is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content,Style and Advanced. Content Settings In the Content section, there is only one customization option. Before selecting any option from the contact section, make sure to customize it first from the Contact Dashboard in the backend. After customizing it from the Contact Dashboard in the backend, you can select any option from your creation. Style Settings Style – Overall customization for the form’s appearance, including layout and general design. Input – Allows customization of the input fields, such as font, background, border, and padding. Textarea – Customizes the appearance of larger text areas, such as height, width, and font style. Label – Customizes the styling of form labels, such as font size, color, and spacing.Button – Customizes the submit button’s design, including color, size, shape, and hover effects.Message – Customizes the appearance of success or error messages that appear after form submission. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Contact Form 7 Widget in Elementor to create and manage custom contact forms effortlessly. For any further assistance or inquiries, feel free to contact our support. View Live Demo Featured Posts The Featured Posts Widget in Animation Addons for Elementor is a paid feature. To access this widget, ensure the plugin is installed and activated on your site. You can also explore both free and pro widgets through the filtering options. Introduction The Featured Posts Widget displays selected posts in a stylish format, perfect for highlighting key content on your website. Key Use Cases for the Featured Posts Widget Showcase featured posts for maximum attention. Customize the look to blend perfectly with your site’s design. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Featured Posts Widget : Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Featured Posts Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Featured Posts Widget is ready to use! How to Add Featured Posts Widget in Elementor Open the page where you want to add the Featured Posts Widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Featured Posts Widget” . Drag the widget to your desired section. The Featured Posts Widget is now ready for customization. How to Configure Featured Posts Widget Make sure the Featured Posts Widget is activated in your Elementor settings. Open a new page in WordPress. Add a page title and choose the Elementor Full Width template. Click Publish to save your changes. In the Elementor panel, search for “Featured Posts Widget” and drag it onto the page. Customize the post selection, layout, and styling to match your website’s design. Configuring Featured Posts Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Featured Posts Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content,Style and Advanced. Content Settings In the Content section, you’ll find plenty of customization options such as Query, Settings, Title, Taxonomy, Meta, and Read More. These options allow you to control which posts appear, adjust layout behaviors, display important post details, and fine-tune how users interact with your featured posts. Query: Set the source of your posts by choosing specific categories, tags, or manual selections. This helps you control which posts appear in the widget. Settings: Manage the overall behavior and layout of the widget, such as the number of posts to display, post order, and other basic display settings. Title: Customize the post title by adjusting its visibility and adding styling options, making the titles more attractive and aligned with your page design. Taxonomy: Choose how categories or tags are shown under each post. You can enable, disable, or style them to match your website’s look. Meta: Display additional post information like the author’s name, publish date, or comment count. You can also choose which meta details to show or hide. Read More: Customize the “Read More” button or link that takes visitors to the full post. You can adjust its text, enable/disable it, and style it for better engagement. Style Settings Banner – Likely refers to the large header or image that appears at the top of the post, which can be styled. Tab Area – Might be used for organizing different categories or sections within the widget, styled as tabs. Grid Area – Refers to the layout or arrangement of posts in a grid format. Thumbnail – The smaller image or icon that represents the post visually, typically displayed next to the title. Title – The post’s heading, which can be customized in terms of font, size, and color. Taxonomy – This could refer to categories or tags associated with the post, typically styled as small labels or tags. Meta – Contains metadata like the author name, publication date, etc. Meta Admin – Likely refers to admin-related meta-information, like who edited or published the post. Read More – A button or link that directs users to the full post; this is often styled with specific colors, shapes, and text. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Featured Posts Widget in Elementor to display highlighted posts dynamically and visually appealing. For any further assistance or inquiries, feel free to contact our support. View Live Demo Current Date Widget The Current Date Widget in Animation Addons for Elementor is a paid feature. To access this widget, ensure the plugin is installed and activated on your site. You can also explore both free and pro widgets through the filtering options. Introduction The Current Date Widget dynamically displays the date, keeping your site updated and engaging. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Current Date Widget: Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Current Date Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Current Date Widget is ready to use! Open the page where you want to add the Current Date Widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Current Date Widget”. Drag the widget to your desired section. The Current Date Widget is now ready for customization. How to Configure Current Date Widget Make sure the Current Date Widget is activated in your Elementor settings. Open a new page in WordPress. Add a page title and choose the Elementor Full Width template. Click Publish to save your changes. In the Elementor panel, search for “Current Date Widget” and drag it onto the page. Adjust the date format, style, and alignment as needed to match your design. Configuring Current Date Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Current Date Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content, Style, and Advanced. Content Settings In the Content section, you’ll find customization options for the date format. Date Format: Choose the format in which the date will appear. A dropdown menu provides different format styles to match your design needs. Show Day: Toggle this option to display or hide the day of the week (like Monday, Tuesday) alongside the date. When you toggle on the Show Day option in the Current Date Widget, a few additional settings appear: # Separator: Choose the symbol (like a dash, comma, or custom character) that separates the day from the date.#Gap: Adjust the spacing between the day and the date for better visual balance.#Direction: Set the order — whether the day appears before or after the date. Alignment: Set the position of the date (left, center, or right) based on your page layout and design preference. Style Settings In the Style section of the Current Date Widget, you’ll find several customization options: Current Date (Color & Typography): Change the color and font styling of the main date to match your design. Day (Color & Typography): Customize the color and typography specifically for the day text when it’s shown. Margin: Adjust the spacing around the date to control its positioning. Separator (Color & Typography): Style the separator by changing its color and font settings for a polished look. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Current Date Widget in Elementor to display the current date dynamically on your website. For any further assistance or inquiries, feel free to contact our support. View Live Demo Category Showcase The Category Showcase Widget in Animation Addons for Elementor is a paid feature. To access this widget, ensure the plugin is installed and activated on your site. You can explore both free and pro widgets by filtering the selection options. Introduction The Category Showcase Widget displays post categories in a visually appealing layout, making content navigation easier. Key Use Cases for the Category Showcase Widget: Display categories in a well-organized and visually appealing manner. Customize the style to seamlessly align with your site’s design. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Category Showcase Widget : Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Category Showcase Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Category Showcase Widget is ready to use! How to Add Category Showcase Widget in Elementor Open the page where you want to add the Category Showcase Widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Category Showcase Widget”. Drag the widget to your desired section. The Category Showcase Widget is now ready for customization. How to Configure Category Showcase Widget Make sure the Category Showcase Widget is activated in your Elementor settings. Open a new page in WordPress. Add a page title and choose the Elementor Full Width template.Click Publish to save your changes. In the Elementor panel, search for “Category Showcase Widget” and drag it onto the page. Adjust the category layout, styling, and content display as needed. Configuring Category Showcase Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Category Showcase Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content, Style, and Advanced. Content Settings In the content section, you’ll find various customization options such as Image, Content, Layout, and Settings. These options allow you to tailor the widget to fit your design needs- Image: This option allows you to upload or select an image to display within the widget. You can use it to showcase category icons, cover images, or any other visual elements that represent the category. Content: The content section allows you to define what information will be displayed within the widget. This typically includes post titles, descriptions, or excerpts. You can control the specific content shown based on the category selected. Layout: This option helps you adjust how the categories are displayed. You can choose between grid or list layouts, and modify the number of columns, spacing, and alignment. This ensures the widget fits perfectly into your design. Settings: The settings section lets you tweak the overall behavior of the widget. You can control options like the number of posts to display, whether to show or hide specific elements, and adjust pagination settings if needed. Style Settings In the style section, you’ll find various customization options such as Item, Thumbnail, Content, Title, Subtitle, Description, Slogan, and Border. These options allow you to refine the look and feel of the widget to match your design preferences. Item: This option allows you to style the overall look of each category item, including padding, margin, and alignment. It ensures that each category block is styled consistently across your site. Thumbnail: Style the thumbnail image for each category. You can adjust the image size, border radius, and hover effects to create an eye-catching display for category images. Content: Customize the look and feel of the content area within each category block. You can adjust spacing, padding, font settings, and more to ensure the content is visually appealing and easy to read. Title: Style the category title, including its typography, font size, color, weight, and spacing. This ensures that the title stands out and aligns with your site’s design. Subtitle: If you use subtitles for categories, you can adjust their typography, color, size, and spacing to differentiate them from the main title and make them visually appealing. Description: Customize the description text within the category block. You can adjust font size, color, line height, and spacing to make sure the description is readable and well-integrated with the overall design. Slogan: Style the category slogan if it’s part of the widget. Adjust font size, weight, color, and spacing to make it stand out or blend with the design as needed. Border: Customize the border around the category items. You can change the border color, width, style, and radius to create a unique visual frame for each category. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make- Final Outcome Congratulations! You’ve successfully learned how to set up the Category Showcase Widget in Elementor to display categories in an engaging and dynamic way. For any further help or questions, feel free to reach out to our support team! View Live Demo Breaking News Slider The Breaking News Slider Widget in Animation Addons for Elementor is a paid feature. To access this widget, ensure the plugin is installed and activated on your site. You can explore both free and pro widgets by filtering the selection options. Introduction The Breaking News Slider Widget showcases news or updates in a dynamic sliding format. Key Use Cases for the Filterable Posts Widget: Display important news or updates in a dynamic sliding format. Customize the design to align with your site’s branding for a cohesive look. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Breaking News Slider Widget: Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Breaking News Slider Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Breaking News Slider Widget is ready to use! How to Add Breaking News Slider Widget in Elementor: Open the page where you want to add the Breaking News Slider Widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Breaking News Slider Widget.” Drag the widget to your desired section. The Breaking News Slider Widget is now ready for customization. How to ConfigureBreaking News Slider Widget Make sure the Breaking News Slider Widget is activated in your Elementor settings. Open a new page in WordPress. Add a page title and choose the Elementor Full Width template. Click Publish to save your changes. In the Elementor panel, search for “Breaking News Slider Widget” and drag it onto the page. Adjust the slider layout, animation effects, post sources, and style as needed. Configuring Breaking News Slider Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Breaking News Slider Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content, Style and Advanced. Content Settings In the content section, you will find two options: one is “Query” and the other is “Settings” . Query: This option allows you to define which posts will be displayed in the Breaking News Slider. You can filter posts based on categories, tags, or post types, giving you control over the content shown in the slider. Settings: This option provides configuration settings for the slider, such as controlling the number of posts to display, enabling or disabling autoplay, and adjusting the slide transition speed. It helps you fine-tune the slider’s behavior and presentation. Style Settings In the style section, you will find three options: “Layout,” “Title Style” and “Icon Style.” Layout: This option allows you to customize the overall appearance of the slider, including the number of columns, spacing, and alignment of the posts. You can adjust how the posts are arranged within the slider for a clean and organized look. Title Style: This option lets you style the titles of the posts within the slider. You can adjust the typography, color, size, weight, and spacing to make the titles stand out and match your design aesthetic. Icon Style: If your Breaking News Slider includes icons (such as for categories or post types), this option allows you to customize the icon’s size, color, and spacing. You can modify the icon’s appearance to ensure it aligns with your site’s overall design. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Breaking News Slider Widget in Elementor to display dynamic and eye-catching news updates. For any further assistance or inquiries, feel free to contact our support. View Live Demo Grid Hover Posts Before setting up the Grid Hover Posts Widget, make sure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. Once activated, you’ll have access to all paid Elementor widgets, including the Grid Hover Posts Widget. Additionally, you can explore both free and pro widgets by filtering the selection options. Introduction The Grid Hover Posts Widget displays posts in a grid with hover effects, allowing easy customization. Key Use Cases for the Grid Hover Posts Widget: Display posts in an interactive grid with hover effects for better engagement. The Grid Hover Posts Widget displays posts in a grid with hover effects, offering simple customization. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Grid Hover Posts Widget: Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Grid Hover Posts widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Grid Hover Posts widget is ready to use! Here’s how to add the Grid Hover Posts Widget in Elementor: Open the page where you want to add the Grid Hover Posts Widget.Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Grid Hover Posts Widget.” Drag the widget to your desired section. The Grid Hover Posts Widget is now ready for customization. How to Configure Grid Hover Posts Widget Make sure the Grid Hover Posts Widget is activated in your Elementor settings. Open a new page in WordPress. Add a page title and choose the Elementor Full Width template. Click Publish to save your changes. In the Elementor panel, search for “Grid Hover Posts Widget” and drag it onto the page. Adjust the grid layout, hover effects, post sources, and style as needed. Configuring Grid Hover Posts Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Grid Hover Posts Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content,Style and Advanced. Content Settings In the content section, you’ll find plenty of customization options. I made a slight change by toggling on the filter button, while the rest remained unchanged as they weren’t needed for my design. Query: Define which posts to display by setting specific filters such as categories, tags, or post types. Layout: Adjust the layout of your posts, such as the number of columns and spacing between posts to suit your design. Settings: Fine-tune the overall widget settings, including pagination options, post limit, and more to enhance the user experience. Title: Customize the title of your posts, including typography, color, size, and spacing to match your website’s style. Excerpt: Style the excerpt text of your posts, controlling font settings, colors, and margins for consistency with your design. Taxonomy: Style how categories or tags appear for each post, with options to modify typography, color, and spacing. Meta: Adjust the appearance of post metadata, including author name, date, and comment count, to match your site’s look and feel. Read More: Customize the “Read More” link or button, including its color, typography, and hover effects for better interaction. Style Settings Layout: Modify the overall layout of your posts, including adjustments to spacing, padding, and alignment to fit your design style. Thumbnail: Style the post thumbnails by adjusting their size, border radius, hover effects, and spacing to make them visually appealing. Title: Customize the typography, color, size, and spacing of the post titles to match your website’s aesthetic and improve readability. Excerpt: Style the post excerpts, allowing you to adjust font settings, colors, margins, and line height to ensure consistency with your design. Taxonomy: Customize how categories or tags are displayed, including typography, color, and spacing to match your style preferences. Meta: Adjust the appearance of metadata like the author name, publish date, and comment count, controlling their typography and colors. Meta Admin: Customize the style of metadata fields specifically for admin use, if needed, to fit the overall look of your design. Read More: Style the “Read More” button or link, customizing its typography, color, hover effects, and spacing for better interaction. These options give you flexibility in designing your widget to suit your style. You can choose to explore and adjust these settings based on your needs. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Grid Hover Posts widget in Elementor to display posts in a grid layout with engaging hover effects. View Live Demo Posts Slider Before setting up the Post Slider Widget, ensure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. This is a premium widget, available in the pro version. Once activated, you can explore both free and pro widgets using the filtering options. Introduction The Post Slider Widget displays posts in a stylish, interactive slider with smooth transitions. Key Use Cases for the Archive Title Widget in Elementor: Display posts in a Post Slider Widget format for easy navigation. Customize the layout and design to match your site’s style. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Post Slider Widget: Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Post Slider widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Post Slider widget is ready to use! How to Add Post Slider Widget in Elementor: Open the page where you want to add the Post Slider Widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Post Slider Widget.” Drag the widget to your desired section. The Post Slider widget is now ready for customization. How to Configure Post Slider Widget Make sure the Post Slider Widget is activated in your Elementor settings. Open a new page in WordPress. Add a page title and choose the Elementor Full Width template. Click Publish to save your changes. In the Elementor panel, search for “Post Slider Widget” and drag it onto the page. Adjust post settings, slider layout, transitions, and style as needed. Configuring Post Slider Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Post Slider Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content, Style, and Advanced. Content Settings In the Content section of the Post Slider Widget, you’ll find the following options: Query, Layout, Post Settings, Title, Excerpt, Taxonomy, Meta, Read More, Slider Settings and Settings. Query: Select the post source and set filters by category, tag, or author. Layout: Pick the slider layout and arrange the design structure. Post Settings: Adjust how the post displays, like setting the image position and alignment. Title: Choose whether to show the post title and customize its style. Excerpt: Display a short preview of the post and control how much text appears. Taxonomy: Show categories or tags attached to the posts and style them as needed. Meta: Display extra information like the author’s name and publish date. Read More: Add a “Read More” link and style it to guide users to the full post. Slider Settings: Set how the slider behaves — like autoplay, slide speed, and navigation options. Settings: Fine-tune extra options such as image size and content alignment for better control. Additional customization options are available under each setting. Explore these settings to tailor the widget to your needs and enhance the final output. Style Settings Customizing the Style of Your Post Slider Widget with the Following Customization Options: General Style: Adjust the overall look of the slider, including spacing, padding, and general design elements. Gallery Video: Customize the appearance of any video content displayed in the slider. Content: Style the main post content area, including background, padding, and borders. Thumbnail: Modify the appearance of post thumbnails like size, border radius, and hover effects. Title: Customize the post title’s typography, color, and spacing to match your design. Excerpt: Style the post excerpt text, controlling font settings, colors, and margins.Taxonomy: Design how categories or tags appear, with options for typography, color, and spacing. Meta: Style metadata like author name, publish date, and comment count. Meta Admin: Adjust styling specifically for admin metadata fields, if needed. Read More: Customize the “Read More” button or link, including its colors, typography, and hover effects. Slider Navigation: Style navigation elements like arrows for moving between slides. Slider Pagination: Customize pagination indicators (dots, numbers) to improve navigation and user experience. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Post Slider Widget in Elementor to display dynamic posts in a stylish and engaging slider format. For any further assistance or inquiries, feel free to contact our support. View Live Demo Filterable Posts The Filterable Posts Widget in Animation Addons for Elementor is a paid feature. To access this widget, ensure the plugin is installed and activated on your site. You can also explore both free and pro widgets through the filtering options. Introduction The Filterable Posts Widget lets you display and sort posts dynamically, enhancing content organization and user experience. Key Use Cases for the Filterable Posts Widget: Display and sort posts dynamically for better content organization. Customize styling to match your site’s design seamlessly. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Filterable Posts Widget? Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Filterable Posts Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Filterable Posts Widget is ready to use! How to Add Filterable Posts Widget in Elementor Open the page where you want to add the Filterable Posts Widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Filterable Posts Widget”. Drag the widget to your desired section. The Filterable Posts Widget is now ready for customization. How to Configure Filterable Posts Widget Enable it, create a new page, set a title, choose the Elementor Full Width template, and publish. Adjust options as needed. Make sure the Filterable Posts Widget is activated in your Elementor settings. Open a new page in WordPress. Add a page title and choose the Elementor Full Width template. Click Publish to save your changes. In the Elementor panel, search for “Filterable Posts Widget” and drag it onto the page. Adjust filters, post sources, layout, and style as needed. Configuring Filterable Posts Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Filterable Posts Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content,Style and Advanced. Content Settings In the Elementor Editor, under the Content tab of the Filterable Posts Widget, you’ll find the following configurable sections: Filter: Enable and customize filter tabs for post categories or tags. Query: Define which posts to display based on source, category, tags, or custom queries. Layout: Choose grid, masonry, or other display layouts. Settings: Control post count, image size, and display toggles (author, date, etc.). Title: Manage visibility and styling options for post titles. Excerpt: Display a short preview of each post with length control. Taxonomy: Show assigned categories or tags with customization. Meta: Toggle metadata like author, date, and customize its appearance. Read More: Enable and style a call-to-action link to full post content. Pagination: Add pagination controls to navigate through multiple post pages. You’ll find even more customization options under each setting. So go ahead, explore them, and see the difference! Style Settings In the style section, I only made changes to the filter section only, while the rest remained unchanged as I don’t need them right now. Filter: Customize the appearance of filter buttons, including color, typography, and spacing. Layout: Adjust the overall design, alignment, and spacing of the post slider layout. Thumbnail: Style the post thumbnail by setting dimensions, border radius, and hover effects. Title: Change the typography, color, and spacing of the post titles. Excerpt: Style the excerpt text by adjusting font size, color, and spacing. Taxonomy: Customize the look of categories or tags, including font, color, and background styles. Meta: Style metadata like author name and date with typography and color settings. Meta Admin: Adjust the appearance of admin-specific metadata fields if displayed. Read More: Style the “Read More” button or link, including typography, colors, background, and hover effects. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Filterable Posts Widget in Elementor to display dynamic and categorized posts seamlessly. For any further assistance or inquiries, feel free to contact our support. View Live Demo Video Posts Tab Before setting up the Video Posts Tab Widget, ensure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. Once activated, you’ll have access to all Elementor widgets, including the Video Posts Tab Widget—completely free! You can also explore both free and pro widgets by filtering the selection options. Introduction The Video Posts Tab Widget displays videos in tabs, allowing easy navigation and customization for better user engagement. Key Use Cases for the Video Posts Tab Widget: Display videos in an organized tabbed format for easy navigation. Customize design and transitions to match your site’s style. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Video Posts Tab Widget: Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Video Posts Tab widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Video Posts Tab widget is ready to use! How to Add the Video Posts Tab Widget in Elementor: Open the page where you want to add the Video Posts Tab Widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Video Posts Tab Widget.” Drag the widget to your desired section. The Video Posts Tab widget is now ready for customization. How to Configure Video Posts Tab Widget Enable it, create a new page, set a title, choose the Elementor Full Width template, and publish. Adjust options as needed. Navigate to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard and ensure the Video Story Widget is enabled. Go to Pages → Add New and create a new page where you want to showcase the video stories. Enter a relevant title for your page to define its purpose. From the page attributes section, select the Elementor Full Width template to utilize a clean, full-width layout. Click the Publish button to make the page live. Launch the Elementor editor for the newly created page. In the Elementor panel, use the search bar to find “Video Story Widget.” Drag the Video Story Widget into your desired section of the page. Configure widget options such as video sources, layout, playback settings, title, excerpt, taxonomy, and meta display to suit your content and design preferences. Configuring Video Posts Tab Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Video Posts Tab Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content,Style and Advanced. Content Settings You’ll find three customization options in the content section: Query, Settings, and Button. I only adjusted the Query section—that’s it. Query – Video Story Widget: Define which content to display in the video stories Order By: Determines the criteria used to sort the displayed posts (e.g., by date, title, menu order, or custom fields). Order: Sets the sorting direction—Ascending (ASC) or Descending (DESC)—based on the selected “Order By” option. Ignore Sticky Posts: Enable this option to exclude sticky posts from the query results, ensuring only regular posts appear in the video story layout. Settings – Video Story Widget : Customize the core behavior of your video stories. Posts Per Page:Set the number of video story posts to display per page. Image Resolution:Choose the image size (e.g., Medium – 300×300) for thumbnails or cover visuals. Show Thumb:Toggle to display or hide the thumbnail image for each story. Show Title:Enable to display the story title. Title Length:Limit the number Show Author:Display the author name for each story. Show Taxonomy:Show categories or tags associated with each post. Read More:Enable a “Read More” button to link to the full post. Additional Read More Settings: Read More Text: Customize the text displayed on the button (“Read More”, “Watch Full Story”). Read More Icon: Add an icon to visually enhance the button. Icon Position: Choose whether the icon appears before or after the button text. Icon Spacing: Adjust the spacing between the icon and the text for better visual balance. ButtonConfigure the call-to-action button shown with each story. You can set the button text, link destination, and adjust alignment or visibility to drive user interaction. View All Button Enable or disable a “View All” button that directs users to a full listing or archive page of all video stories. View Text Customize the text label displayed on the View All button.Example: “View All” “See More Stories” “Explore Videos” Link Define the URL or permalink where the View All button redirects users. This should typically point to a dedicated video story archive or a custom landing page. Icon Add a visual icon alongside the View Text to enhance clarity and aesthetics. This icon can be placed before or after the text. Additional Icon Options: Icon Library : The Icon Library provides a wide range of commonly used icons (arrows, play buttons, magnifiers) that can be easily selected and applied without uploading external files. Icon SVG : Upload or paste a custom SVG (Scalable Vector Graphics) icon to use within the widget. This option is ideal when you need a unique or brand-specific icon not available in the default library. Style Settings You’ll also find plenty of customization options in the Style section. Layout – Adjust the overall structure and arrangement of the video posts. Banner – Add and customize a banner for the video section. Play Icon – Modify the play button style, size, and color. Thumbnail – Customize the preview image for each video post. Title – Control the font, size, and color of the video titles. Excerpt – Adjust the visual presentation of the story excerpts to align with your site’s branding. Meta – Style the meta information to be clean and informative without overwhelming the design. Date – Present the date clearly and consistently with your overall typography scheme. View All Button – Make the “View All” button visually prominent and aligned with your site design. Read More Button – Refine the style of the “Read More” button for a polished and interactive user experience. I made slight changes to fit my needs, but you can fully customize everything to match your design. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Archive Title widget in Elementor to display dynamic and customized titles for your archive pages. For any further assistance or inquiries, feel free to contact our support team! Excerpt – Adjust the short description displayed with each video. Meta – Manage additional details like author name or category. Date – Show or hide the video post’s publication date. View All – Customize the “View All” button for accessing more videos. Read More – Adjust the styling and text for the “Read More” button. View Live Demo Advanced Posts Before setting up the Advanced Posts Widget, ensure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. Since the Advanced Posts Widget is a premium feature, you’ll need to upgrade to access its advanced functionalities. Additionally, you can explore both free and pro widgets by filtering the selection options. Introduction The Advanced Posts Widget in Elementor displays blog posts dynamically with custom layouts and filters for better engagement. Key Use Cases for the Advanced Posts Widget in Elementor: Showcase blog posts dynamically for better content visibility. Customize layout and filters to enhance user experience. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Advanced Posts Widget? Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Advanced Posts widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Advanced Posts widget is ready to use! How to Add Advanced Posts Widget in Elementor Open the page where you want to add the Advanced Posts Widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Advanced Posts Widget”. Drag the widget to your desired section. Since this is a premium widget, ensure you have the pro version activated. The Advanced Posts Widget is now ready for customization. How to Configure Advanced Posts Widget Make sure the Advanced Posts Widget is activated in your Elementor settings. Open a new page where you want to showcase your posts. Provide a title for your page as required. Select the Elementor Full Width template for a seamless layout. After finalizing the title and layout, publish the page. In the Elementor panel, type “Advanced Posts Widget” in the search bar. Place the widget in the desired section of your page. Customize the widget’s layout, post query, pagination, metadata, and style options to fit your design preferences. Once added, the Advanced Posts Widget will automatically display a dynamic list of posts based on your selected query settings, allowing users to browse and engage with curated post content seamlessly. Configuring Advanced Posts Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Advanced Posts Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content,Style and Advanced. Content Settings The Content section of the Advanced Posts Widget offers extensive customization to control how your posts appear and function. Key options include: Filter Enable Filter: Toggle this option to display a filter bar above the post grid. Alignment: Once enabled, you can set the alignment (left, center, right) of the filter controls. Query Query Type: Choose from 12 different query types to control the logic for post display. Source: Select from Posts, Pages, or Video Stories. Include/Exclude: Define which posts to show or hide based on various parameters. Include By: Post Format: Choose from Image, Video, Audio, and Gallery formats. Date Range Order By: Set sorting criteria such as date, title, or random. Order: Ascending or Descending. Ignore Sticky Posts: Optionally ignore posts marked as sticky. Layout Layout Type: Choose from 5 unique layout styles to present your content visually. Offers a flexible grid system for showcasing posts in a structured manner. Settings Columns: Define how many columns to display across different screen sizes. Posts Per Page: Set how many posts should appear at a time. Show/Hide Toggles: Customize visibility for elements like: Thumbnail Image Image Resolution Title Excerpt Taxonomy Meta Information Rating Read More Button Masonry Layout Post Audio, Video, and Gallery Integration Title Title Length: Limit the number of words shown in the post title. HTML Tag: Choose the HTML heading tag (H1–H6, Div, Span, etc.). Show Highlights: Highlight certain keywords or styled portions of the title. Excerpt Excerpt Length: Set the number of words displayed in the excerpt section. Taxonomy Categories Displayed: Show up to three taxonomy types (e.g., Category, Tag, Custom Taxonomy). Limit: Control the number of taxonomies shown per post. Meta Post Meta: Show or hide post views, publish date, and author information. Separator: Add a custom separator between different meta fields. Author Avatar: Option to display the author’s profile image. Read More Text Label: Customize the “Read More” button text. Icon: Choose an icon from the library or upload an SVG. Icon Position: Set it to display before or after the text. Icon Spacing: Define the space between icon and text. Pagination Choose from multiple pagination types including Numbers, Load More Button, and Infinite Scroll. Style Settings Layout The Layout section under the Style tab in the Advanced Posts Widget provides essential customization controls to refine the visual structure of your post grid. Below is a professional breakdown of each available setting: Columns Gap: Adjust the horizontal spacing between post columns. The value can be set using the slider or entered manually in pixels (px). Rows Gap: Control the vertical spacing between rows of posts. This setting ensures that your post layout remains visually balanced and well-organized. Border Type: Choose a border style (e.g., Solid, Dashed, Dotted) or keep it as Default to inherit global or theme styles. Padding: Set the inner spacing of the post container from all sides (Top, Right, Bottom, Left). This helps create breathing space within each post block. Margin: Define the outer spacing of each post container. Use this to manage spacing between multiple widgets or content blocks. Background Type: Select a background type (e.g., Classic, Gradient, or Video) to enhance the visual appeal of your post containers. Hover Effect: Choose an animation effect ( Zoom In) that is triggered when users hover over the posts. This adds interactivity and improves user engagement. Thumbnail You can control the visual appearance of post thumbnails to align with your design preferences. Below are the available customization options explained professionally: Height & Width Height: Set a fixed height for your post thumbnails to ensure uniformity across all post items. Width: Define the width of the thumbnails to control their horizontal size and alignment within the post layout. Border Radius: Adjust the border radius to create rounded corners for the thumbnails. This helps soften the design and adds a modern touch to your posts. Margin: Control the space outside the thumbnail image. This setting is useful for maintaining consistent spacing between thumbnails and other post elements Title You have control over the visual appearance of post titles in both Normal and Hover states. This allows for a more dynamic and interactive design. Here’s a breakdown of the available settings: Typography Customize the font family, size, weight, transform, style, line height, and letter spacing to ensure the post titles match your website’s branding and remain visually appealing. Color Normal: Choose the default color for the post title when it is not being interacted with. Hover: Set a different color that appears when a user hovers over the title, adding visual feedback and interactivity. Margin Define the space around the title element, controlling how it aligns with other components such as thumbnails, excerpts, or meta information. You can adjust the top, right, bottom, and left margins individually for precise spacing. Excerpt Color: Choose the text color for the excerpt to ensure readability and design consistency with the rest of your content. Typography: Adjust the font family, size, font weight, transform, style, line height, and letter spacing to control the look and feel of the excerpt text. This helps maintain a consistent visual hierarchy across the widget. Margin: Define the outer spacing around the excerpt area. You can set the top, right, bottom, and left margins individually to manage how the excerpt is positioned relative to other elements like the title or metadata. Taxonomy Typography: Customize the font family, size, weight, style, line height, and letter spacing to control the visual presentation of taxonomy text, ensuring it aligns with your site’s overall typography. Space Between: Define the spacing between individual taxonomy items, allowing for clear separation and better readability when multiple terms are shown. Color: Set the text color for taxonomy items to match your branding or improve visibility against the background. Background Type: Choose a background style (solid color, gradient, or image) to highlight the taxonomy section and make it stand out from the rest of the content. Border Type: Apply a border around taxonomy items. You can choose the border style (solid, dashed, dotted, etc.) and control its thickness and visibility. Border Radius: Define rounded corners for the taxonomy box. This adds a softer, more modern look to the tags or categories. Box Shadow: Add a shadow effect around taxonomy items for depth and visual emphasis. This is useful for drawing attention subtly. Padding: Set inner spacing within each taxonomy item to ensure the text isn’t cramped and maintains a neat appearance. Position: Control the placement of taxonomy labels within the post layout, offering flexibility in alignment and design hierarchy. Meta Gap Adjust the space between meta elements (e.g., between date and author) to ensure a clean and balanced layout. Color Set the text color for meta information. This allows you to highlight or tone down metadata depending on your design preference. Typography Control the font style, size, weight, line height, and spacing for meta text to match the overall site typography and improve readability. Margin Define outer spacing around the meta section to separate it visually from other content, like post titles or thumbnails. Icon Size Set the size of icons (such as calendar, user, or eye icons) used alongside metadata to ensure they are proportionate and clear. Icon Color Customize the icon color separately from the text color for visual contrast or harmony, depending on your design. Icon Gap Adjust the space between each icon and its corresponding text to maintain clarity and visual appeal. Meta – Admin These settings ensure the author’s presence aligns seamlessly with your overall design and user interaction preferences. Below is a professional explanation of each option: Gap Defines the spacing between the author label (e.g., “By”) and the author’s name. This helps maintain a clean and readable layout. Author By Allows you to customize or toggle the “By” prefix shown before the author’s name (e.g., “By John Doe”). You can choose whether to display it or not, based on your content style. Color Sets the default color of the author text. You can use this to match your theme or highlight the author’s name for emphasis. Typography Manage typographic properties such as font family, size, weight, line height, and spacing for the entire author section to ensure consistent branding. Author – Typography Provides separate control over the typography of the author’s name itself. You can distinguish it from surrounding text for better visual hierarchy. Author – Color Allows you to apply a distinct color style to the author’s name, helping it stand out or blend in based on your preference. Animation (Normal & Hover) You can apply two animation states: Normal: Default animation style for the author text when not interacted with. Hover: Define animation effects or transitions when the user hovers over the author’s name, adding interactive appeal. Read More In the Read More section of the Advanced Posts Widget, you can fully personalize the appearance and behavior of the “Read More” link or button that invites users to explore individual posts further. Below is a clear and professional breakdown of each available style setting: Typography: Adjusts the font family, size, weight, letter spacing, and line height of the “Read More” text to maintain consistency with your site’s overall design. Icon Size: Allows you to set the size of the icon used alongside the text (if any), ensuring proper visual balance between icon and text. Text Color: Controls the color of the “Read More” text, helping it stand out or blend in with your design theme. Background Type: Lets you choose between a solid color, gradient, or image as the background for the button or text area, adding depth and visual interest. Border Type: Defines the border style (solid, dashed, dotted, double, or none), allowing you to create separation or emphasize the call-to-action. Border Radius: Customizes the rounded corners of the button or link, giving it a soft or sharp appearance based on your design preference. Padding: Controls the inner spacing around the text and icon, ensuring the “Read More” element has appropriate breathing room. Box Shadow: Adds a shadow effect around the element to create depth or highlight the call-to-action area. Margin: Sets the outer spacing between the “Read More” element and other sections, helping to align it cleanly within the post layout. Filter These options usually allow users to customize the appearance of elements on a website, particularly when styling a widget or section. Padding: Controls the space inside the container, creating a buffer between the content and the edges of the element. It helps in adjusting the internal spacing for a clean and balanced layout. Tab Item Gap: Defines the space between each tab within a tabbed interface. Adjusting the gap ensures a visually appealing and easy-to-navigate tab layout. Content Gap: Determines the spacing between individual content sections or elements. This setting improves readability and ensures proper alignment and balance of the content. Border Type: Specifies the style of the element’s border. Options typically include solid, dashed, dotted, or double, providing flexibility in the visual appeal and border design. Border Radius: Adjusts the roundness of the corners of an element’s border. A higher radius creates a more rounded appearance, offering a softer, modern look. Typography Customizes the font style, size, weight, line-height, and other text-related attributes. Typography settings are crucial for readability and overall design consistency. Text Color: Allows for the modification of the text color within the element. Proper contrast and color choices enhance readability and align with the brand’s aesthetic. Background Type: Defines the background style of an element, which can include solid color, gradient, or image. This option is key in enhancing visual appeal and setting the tone of the design. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Archive Title widget in Elementor to display dynamic and customized titles for your archive pages. For any further assistance or inquiries, feel free to contact our support team! View Live Demo Mailchimp The Mailchimp Widget in Animation Addons for Elementor is a paid feature. To use this widget, ensure the plugin is installed and activated on your site. You can explore both free and pro widgets using the filtering options, but this specific widget is available only in the pro version. Introduction The Mailchimp Widget in Animation Addons for Elementor helps you integrate Mailchimp forms seamlessly into your site, making email list building easy and efficient. Key Use Cases for the Mailchimp Widget: Easily integrate Mailchimp forms to grow your email list. Customize the design to match your website’s branding. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Mailchimp Widget: Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Mailchimp Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Mailchimp Widget is ready to use! How to Add Mailchimp Widget in Elementor: Open the page where you want to add the Mailchimp Widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Mailchimp Widget.” Drag the widget to your desired section. The Mailchimp Widget is now ready for customization. How to Configure Mailchimp Widget Ensure the Mailchimp plugin is activated in your WordPress settings. Open a new page in WordPress.Add a page title and choose the Elementor Full Width template. Click Publish to save your changes. In the Elementor panel, search for “Mailchimp Widget” and drag it onto the page. Configuring Mailchimp Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Mailchimp Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content,Style and Advanced. Content Settings In the Content section, you’ll find two customization options named Mailchimp and Form. Mailchimp Options: Mailchimp API: Connect your Mailchimp account to integrate the widget with your Mailchimp account. Audience: Create and select your audience (list) from Mailchimp to send the form data. Enable Double Opt-In: Turn on double opt-in for confirming subscriptions, ensuring the user agrees to receive emails. Form Options: Customize a variety of elements for the form: Alignment: Control the alignment of form elements. Item Gap: Adjust the spacing between form fields. Enable Name: Option to include a name field in the form. Enable Phone: Option to include a phone number field in the form. Email Label: Customize the label for the email field. Email Placeholder: Set a placeholder text for the email field. Email Icon: Add an icon to the email field (optional). Icon Position: Choose whether to display the email icon on the left or right. Button Text: Customize the text on the submit button. Button Icon: Add an icon to the submit button (optional). Icon Position: Set the icon’s position (left or right). Icon Spacing: Adjust the spacing between the icon and the text on the button. This will allow you to fully customize the appearance and behavior of the Mailchimp form on your page. Style Settings In the style section, I only made changes to the filter section only, while the rest remained unchanged as I don’t need them right now. However, you can explore and customize them as needed. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Mailchimp Widget in Elementor to integrate email sign-up forms and grow your email list. For any further assistance or inquiries, feel free to contact our support. View Live Demo Video Story Before setting up the Video Story_Widget, ensure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. Once activated, you’ll gain access to the Video Story_Widget, which is part of the paid version of the plugin. Please note that this widget is not available for free and requires a valid license for use. After activation, you can explore a variety of premium widgets, including the Video Story Widget, through the selection options. Introduction The Video Story_Widget is a premium Elementor widget for displaying videos in an interactive, story format. Key Use Cases for the Post Reactions Widget in Elementor: Showcase videos in an interactive, story-like format to captivate users. Enhance user engagement by offering dynamic video presentations. Customize video display settings to match your site’s design and branding. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Video Story Widget: Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Video Story_Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. The Video Story_Widget is now ready to use! How to Add the Video Story Widget in Elementor: Open the page where you want to add the Video Story_Widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Video Story_Widget.” Drag the widget to your desired section. How to Configure the Video Story Widget: Enable the Widget: Ensure the Video Story_Widget is enabled in your Elementor settings. Create a New Page: Open a new page where you wish to display the widget. Set a Title: Add a title for your page as required. Choose Template: Select the Elementor Full Width template for a full-width layout. Publish the Page: After setting the title and template, publish the page. Search for Video Story Widget: In the Elementor panel, search for “Video Story_Widget.” Drag and Drop the Widget: Drag the widget to your desired section of the page. Adjust Settings: Customize the widget settings, including video sources, display options, and styling, as needed. Once added, the Video Story Widget displays your video in an engaging, story-style format for dynamic user interaction. Configuring Video Story Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Video Story Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under three tabs: Content, Style, and Advanced. Content Settings Query: Choose which posts or custom post types to display as video stories using filters like categories or tags. Layout: Select the visual arrangement (e.g., horizontal, vertical, carousel) for displaying the stories. Settings: Configure story duration, autoplay, loop, and transition effects. Title: Show or hide post titles and adjust their display settings. Excerpt: Enable or disable post excerpts to show a short summary. Taxonomy: Filter stories by categories, tags, or custom taxonomies. Meta: Display post metadata such as author, date, or reading time. Style Settings Style Section Overview – Video Story Widget Layout: Customize spacing, alignment, and overall structure of the widget layout. Video: Style the video container with border, shadow, radius, and overlay effects. Content: Adjust padding, alignment, and background of the content area. Title: Control typography, color, and spacing of the story titles. Excerpt: Style the excerpt text, including font, size, color, and spacing. Taxonomy: Modify the appearance of categories or tags shown with each story. Meta: Customize the look of meta info (author, date, etc.) including font, size, and color. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Video Story Widget in Elementor to showcase videos in an interactive, story-style format and enhance user engagement.For any further assistance or inquiries, feel free to contact our support team! View Live Demo
Filterable Slider The Filterable Slider Widget in Animation Addons for Elementor is a paid feature. To use this widget, make sure the plugin is installed and activated on your site. While you can browse both free and pro widgets using the filtering options, please note that this particular widget is available only in the pro version. Introduction The Filterable Slider Widget allows you to create interactive sliders with filter options for easy content organization. Key Use Cases for the Filterable Slider Widget: Showcase content in a dynamic, filterable slider. Customize the design to match your website’s style and layout. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Filterable Slider Widget: Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Filterable Slider Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Filterable Slider Widget is ready to use! How to Add Filterable Slider Widget in Elementor: Open the page where you want to add the Filterable Slider Widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Filterable Slider Widget.” Drag the widget to your desired section. The Filterable Slider Widget is now ready for customization. How to Configure Filterable Slider Widget In the Elementor panel, search for the “Filterable Slider Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into your desired section. Add your slider items by uploading images, setting titles, descriptions, and assigning categories. Enable filtering options to allow users to switch between slides by category. Use the Style tab to customize slider layout, spacing, navigation controls, typography, and colors to match your website’s design. Configuring Filterable Slider Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Filterable Slider Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content, Style, and Advanced. Content Settings Once the Filterable Slider Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under four options: Filter, Slides, Slider Options, and Settings. Filter: This section allows you to set up filters for the slider. You can categorize your slides and let users filter them based on the selected categories. This helps in organizing and displaying content more effectively. Slides: In the Slides section, you can add and manage the individual slides for the slider. You can include images, text, buttons, and links for each slide. This is where you create and arrange the content that will appear in the slider. Slider Options: This section provides settings to control the functionality and appearance of the slider. You can adjust the number of slides to show the transition effects, autoplay settings, navigation buttons, and more to customize how the slider operates. Settings: The Settings section allows you to adjust various configurations like the slider’s layout, responsiveness, spacing, and alignment. You can fine-tune the visual presentation and ensure the slider fits your design perfectly. Style Settings In the Style section, we have the following options to customize: Filter Image Slider Navigation Pagination Filter: In this section, you can customize the appearance of the filter buttons. Adjust colors, font size, padding, and spacing to match your site’s branding and enhance the visual presentation of the filter options. Image: This section allows you to style the images within the slider. You can adjust image borders, hover effects, shadows, and more, to ensure the images look visually appealing and consistent with the overall design. Slider Navigation:Here, you can customize the navigation buttons of the slider, such as arrows or dots. Control their size, color, hover effects, and alignment to improve user experience and make navigation intuitive. Pagination: This section lets you style the pagination controls that appear if the slider has multiple pages. You can adjust the look of the page indicators, including their size, color, and hover effects, ensuring they align with the overall design of the slider and website. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Filterable Slider Widget in Elementor to create a dynamic and interactive slider with filtering options. For any further assistance or inquiries, feel free to contact our support. View Live Demo
Nav Menu Before setting up the Nav Menu Widget, make sure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. Once activated, you’ll have access to all free Elementor widgets, including the Nav Menu Widget—at no cost! Additionally, you can explore both free and pro widgets by filtering the selection options. Introduction The Nav Menu widget creates a responsive menu, organizing links with easy customization. Key Use Cases for the Nav Menu Widget The Nav Menu Widget in Elementor is ideal for: Navigation – Create a clear and easy-to-use navigation menu. Multi-Page Websites – Organize links to different pages, categories, or custom URLs. Responsive Design – Ensure the menu adapts across devices for a seamless user experience. User Experience – Offer a smooth and intuitive way for users to navigate your site. Customization – Customize the layout, style, and positioning of your menu to match your site’s design. With the Nav Menu Widget, you can easily build and customize a navigation menu to suit your website’s needs. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Nav Menu Widget? Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Nav Menu Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. How to Add the Nav Menu Widget in Elementor Open the page where you want to add the Nav Menu. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Nav Menu.” Drag the Nav Menu widget to your desired section. The Nav Menu widget will now be available for customization. You can organize your menu items, customize the layout, and adjust the alignment for a seamless navigation experience. How to Configure Nav Menu Widget Enable it, create a new page, set a title, choose the Elementor Full Width template, and publish. Adjust options as needed. How to Add the Nav Menu Widget in Elementor Enable the widget, create a new page, set a title, choose the Elementor Full Width template, and publish it. Adjust options as needed. In the Elementor panel, search for the “Nav Menu Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into your desired section. Choose your menu from the dropdown, and customize its layout, alignment, style, and responsive behavior using the available settings. Configuring Nav Menu Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Nav Menu Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content, Style and Advanced. Content Settings The Content section of the Nav Menu widget includes two main configuration areas: 1. Menu Settings This panel allows you to select the WordPress menu you want to display. You can also define the layout (Horizontal, Vertical, or Dropdown), align the menu (Start, Center, or End), and control pointer effects, submenu indicators, and spacing for desktop view. Menu Settings In the Menu Settings panel of the Nav Menu widget, you can configure the structure and behavior of your navigation menu. Below are the available options: Select Menu: Choose a pre-created WordPress menu from the dropdown to display in the widget. Submenu Indicator: Enable or disable indicators for items with submenus, helping users identify expandable menu items easily. Layout: Set the menu orientation to Horizontal, Vertical, or Dropdown, depending on your design requirements. Menu Alignment: Align the menu items to the Start, Center, or End within the section for optimal placement. Hover Pointer: Choose how the hover effect appears when a user interacts with the menu. Options include Dot, Underline, Overline, Line Through, and Flip. Wrap Menu Item: Toggle this setting to control whether menu items wrap to the next line, enhancing layout flexibility for longer items or smaller screens. 2. Mobile Menu Settings This section helps you customize the appearance and behavior of your menu on mobile devices. You can choose a mobile breakpoint, toggle icons (hamburger/close), define the menu layout (Dropdown or Slide), and set alignment and animation preferences to ensure an optimized mobile experience. The Mobile Menu Settings section allows you to customize how the navigation menu behaves and appears on smaller devices. Here’s a breakdown of the available options: Hamburger Icon: Choose a preferred hamburger menu icon style that appears on mobile devices to toggle the menu visibility. Mobile Icon: Customize the icon that represents the collapsed mobile menu for a more tailored design experience. Breakpoint: Define the screen size at which the mobile menu activates. Available options include: All: Displays the mobile menu on all devices. Mobile Portrait: Activates the mobile menu only on portrait-mode mobile screens. Tablet Portrait: Triggers the mobile layout on tablets in portrait mode. These settings ensure your navigation remains accessible, responsive, and visually consistent across all device types. Style Settings There will be additional customization options available in the style settings – including Desktop Main Menu, Desktop Submenu Items, Submenu Indicator, Mobile Menu, Hamburger Icon, Mobile Menu Close, and Mobile Menu Back. Desktop Main Menu The Desktop Main Menu Settings section allows you to customize how the navigation menu behaves and appears on desktop devices. Here’s a breakdown of the available options: Gap: Adjust the space between the menu items for a cleaner, more organized layout. Border Type: Choose from various border styles for your menu items. The available options include: None: No border is applied. Solid: A continuous, solid border line. Double: A double-line border for a more pronounced appearance. Dotted: A dotted border for a unique look. Dashed: A dashed border style. Groove: A 3D, grooved border effect. Padding: Customize the internal spacing around each menu item (top, bottom, left, and right) to ensure proper alignment and spacing. Border Radius: Adjust the roundness of the corners of each menu item for a more refined, rounded appearance. Animation Styles (Normal, Hover, Active): Customize the behavior of menu items in different states (normal, hover, and active): Text Color: Choose the color of the text for each state (normal, hover, and active). Background Type: Define the background style (color or gradient) for each state (normal, hover, and active). Desktop Submenu Item The Desktop Submenu Item Settings section allows you to customize the appearance and behavior of the submenu items in the navigation menu on desktop devices. Here’s a breakdown of the available options: WidthSet a custom width for the submenu container to ensure consistent alignment and spacing within your layout. Background TypeChoose a background style for the submenu wrapper. Options include solid colors or gradients to enhance visual hierarchy and design consistency. Border TypeSelect a border style for the submenu wrapper from the following options: None – No border is applied. Solid – A single, continuous border line. Double – Two parallel border lines for a more pronounced appearance. Dotted – A dotted-line border. Dashed – A dashed-line border. Groove – A 3D grooved border effect. Wrapper PaddingAdjust the internal spacing around the entire submenu wrapper for better content alignment and spacing. Wrapper Border RadiusSet the border-radius of the submenu wrapper to control the curvature of the wrapper’s corners. Submenu Item Settings: Border TypeChoose a border style specifically for individual submenu items. Available options include: None Solid Double Dotted Dashed Groove Item PaddingDefine the internal spacing for each submenu item to ensure proper alignment and readability. Item Border RadiusAdjust the curvature of submenu item corners for a polished and modern appearance. Animation Styles (Normal, Hover, Active): Customize the visual behavior of submenu items in different interaction states: Text Color: Set the font color for normal, hover, and active states. Background Type: Define the background style (solid color or gradient) for each state to enhance interactivity and user feedback. These settings provide full control over submenu styling, allowing for a responsive, elegant, and consistent desktop navigation experience. Submenu Indicator The Submenu Indicator settings allow you to customize the visual indicator (such as an arrow) that appears next to menu items with submenus. Available Options: Font Size: Adjust the size of the submenu indicator icon to match your menu’s design. Margin: Define the spacing around the indicator to ensure proper alignment and spacing within the menu layout. These settings help maintain a clear and user-friendly navigation structure. Mobile Menu The Mobile Menu settings let you customize how the navigation menu looks and behaves on mobile devices. In the Position section, you can adjust layout and style for a seamless mobile experience. Position settings let you customize the layout and appearance of the navigation menu on mobile devices, ensuring a smooth and responsive user experience. WidthDefine the width of the mobile menu panel to control how much of the screen it occupies when expanded. Background TypeChoose a background style for the mobile menu, such as a solid color or gradient, to align with your site’s visual theme. TypographyCustomize the font family, size, weight, and style for mobile menu items to ensure readability and design consistency. Border TypeSelect the border style for the mobile menu container from the following options: None Solid Double Dotted Dashed Groove PaddingAdjust the internal spacing of the mobile menu container to ensure a clean and well-structured layout. Animation Styles (Normal, Hover): Customize the appearance of mobile menu items in different interaction states: Text Color: Set the font color for both normal and hover states. Background Type: Define the background style (solid or gradient) for both normal and hover interactions. These settings allow you to create a responsive, user-friendly, and visually appealing navigation experience across all mobile devices. Hamburger The Hamburger settings allow you to customize the appearance of the hamburger menu icon on mobile devices, ensuring it aligns with your site’s design. Available Options: Font Size: Adjust the size of the hamburger icon for better visibility and design consistency. Border Type: Choose from various border styles (None, Solid, Double, Dotted, Dashed, Groove) to define the icon’s border appearance. Border Radius: Set the curvature of the icon’s corners for a rounded or sharp look. Padding: Control the internal spacing around the icon for proper alignment. Color: Define the color of the hamburger icon to match your brand. Background Type: Choose a solid color or gradient background for the icon. These settings provide full control over the hamburger icon’s design, contributing to a cohesive and user-friendly mobile navigation experience. Mobile Menu Close The Mobile Menu Close settings allow you to customize the appearance and interaction of the close icon within the mobile navigation menu, enhancing both functionality and visual consistency. Available Options: Font Size: Adjust the size of the close icon for optimal visibility. Border Type: Select from various border styles (None, Solid, Double, Dotted, Dashed, Groove) to style the icon’s border. Padding: Define the internal spacing around the icon for balanced alignment. Margin: Set the external spacing to control the icon’s position within the menu. Animation Styles (Normal, Hover): Color: Choose the icon color for both normal and hover states. Background Type: Set a solid or gradient background for the icon in normal and hover states. These settings ensure that the mobile menu close icon is both visually appealing and intuitive for users. Mobile Menu Back The Mobile Menu Back settings allow you to customize the appearance of the back navigation icon within the mobile menu, enhancing usability and visual consistency. Available Options: Icon: Choose a custom icon to represent the back navigation action. Typography: Adjust the font properties if the back button includes text, such as font family, size, weight, and style. Padding: Define the internal spacing around the back icon or text for proper alignment. Color: Set the color of the icon and/or text to match your design. Background Type: Apply a solid color or gradient background to the back button element. These settings ensure the back navigation control is intuitive, accessible, and visually aligned with the overall mobile menu design. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. View Live Demo
Post Featured Image Before setting up the Post Featured Image Widget, make sure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. Once activated, you’ll have access to all free Elementor widgets, including the Post Featured Image Widget—totally free! Additionally, you can explore both free and pro widgets by filtering the selection options. Introduction The Post Featured Image Widget displays the main image of a blog post, enhancing your site’s visual appeal. Key Use Cases for the Post Featured Image Widget The Post Featured Image Widget in Elementor is ideal for: Showcase Visual Content – Display the featured image of your post to capture the attention of your visitors. Blog Post Design – Easily integrate the featured image into your blog posts for a more visually appealing layout. Clickable Image – Link the featured image to the post, allowing users to easily access the content. Responsive Design – Ensure your post’s featured image adapts perfectly across all screen sizes. Professional Appearance – Elevate your blog’s design by adding professional and visually engaging imagery. With the Post Featured Image Widget, you can effortlessly showcase your post’s featured image and customize its alignment, size, and link behavior to match your design. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to activate the Post Featured Image widget, follow these steps: Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Locate the Post Featured Image Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. How to Add the Post Featured Image Widget in Elementor Open the page where you want to add the Post Featured Image. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Site Logo.” Drag the Post Featured Image to your desired section. The Post Featured Image widget will now be available for customization. How to Configure the Post Featured Image Widget Enable the widget, create a new page, set a title, choose the Elementor Full Width template, and publish the page. Adjust page settings as needed. In the Elementor panel, search for the “Post Featured Image Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into your desired section. The featured image of the current post will be displayed automatically. You can then customize its size, alignment, border, and styling options to fit your layout and design preferences. Configuring Post Featured Image Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Post Featured Image Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content, Style and Advanced. Content Settings There is only one option available: Image. Image In the Content section of the Post Featured Image Widget, you can control how the featured image is displayed using the following options: Image Resolution: Select the appropriate image size (full, medium, thumbnail) to match your layout needs and optimize loading performance. Alignment: Align the featured image to the left, center, or right within the section to suit your design. These settings help you display the post’s featured image effectively while maintaining visual consistency. Style Settings In the Style section of the Post Featured Image Widget, the Image subsection offers several customization options to refine the visual presentation of your featured image: Width & Max Width: Set a fixed or maximum width to control how wide the image appears within its container. Height: Define a specific height to maintain consistent image proportions across your layout. Border Type: Choose from multiple border styles such as None, Solid, Double, Dotted, Dashed, Groove, and more. Border Radius: Apply rounded corners to soften the image edges and match your design aesthetic. Box Shadow: Add a shadow effect to create depth and highlight the image visually. These settings provide fine-tuned control over the appearance of your post’s featured image, ensuring it blends seamlessly with the rest of your design. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Post Featured Image Widget in Elementor to display dynamic and eye-catching images on your website. For any further assistance or inquiries, feel free to contact our support team!
Video Box The Video Popup Widget in Animation Addons for Elementor is a paid feature. To use this widget, make sure the plugin is properly installed and activated on your site. While you can browse both free and pro widgets using the filtering options, please note that this particular widget is only available in the pro version. Introduction The Video Box Widget in Animation Addons for Elementor allows you to showcase videos in an interactive and visually appealing format, enhancing user engagement on your website. Key Use Cases for the Video Box Widget: Display engaging videos directly on your site to capture attention. Customize the video box design to match your site’s overall look and feel. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Video Box Widget: Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Video Box Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget.Now, the Video Box Widget is ready to use! How to Add Video Box Widget in Elementor: Open the page where you want to add the Video Box Widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Video Box Widget.” How to Configure the Video Box Widget: In the Elementor panel, search for the “Video Box Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into your desired section. In the widget settings, add your video URL and set a custom thumbnail if needed. You can also adjust the title, description, icon, and play button appearance. Configuring Video Box Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Video Box Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content,Style and Advanced. Content Settings The Content section of the Video Box Widget is divided into several configurable panels to help you design and control the video presentation effectively. Below is a breakdown of each subsection and its available settings: 1. Layout Style: Choose between two predefined layout styles. Alignment: Set the alignment of the entire widget content (left, center, or right). 2. Thumbnail Type: Select whether to display an image or a video as the thumbnail. Image: Upload or choose a thumbnail image from the media library. Image Resolution: Define the resolution quality of the thumbnail image. 3. Content Title: Enter the main heading text to be displayed. Title HTML Tag: Set the appropriate semantic HTML tag (e.g., H1, H2, H3) for the title. Subtitle: Add a short descriptive subtitle to appear below the title. 4. Button Text: Customize the call-to-action button text. Icon: Select an icon to be displayed alongside the button text. Icon Spacing: Adjust the spacing between the icon and the button text. Active Ripple: Enable or disable the ripple effect on click. Ripple Color: Choose the color of the ripple animation. Active Spinner: Toggle the loading spinner effect when the video is triggered. Style Settings The Style section of the Video Box Widget offers comprehensive design customization options across four main categories: Video Box, Thumbnail, Content, and Button. Below is a detailed breakdown of each section and its styling controls: 1. Video Box Border Type: Select the border style (solid, dashed, dotted, etc.) for the video box container. Border Radius: Define the corner roundness of the video box to achieve sharp or rounded edges. 2. Thumbnail Height: Adjust the height of the thumbnail to fit your design layout and maintain responsive proportions. 3. Content Padding: Set inner spacing around the content area for better visual separation. Background Type: Choose between classic color, gradient, or image backgrounds for the content container. Title Color: Set the color for the title text. Title Typography: Customize the font family, size, weight, line height, and letter spacing for the title. Title Space: Control the spacing below the title. Subtitle Typography: Define the typography settings for the subtitle text. Subtitle Color: Choose a color for the subtitle text. Subtitle Space: Adjust the spacing below the subtitle for consistent layout flow. 4. Button Typography: Configure the font settings for the button text. Width & Height: Set the button’s dimensions to match your design needs. Border Type: Choose the border style for the button. Border Radius: Define how rounded the button edges should be. Box Shadow: Apply a shadow effect around the button for depth and emphasis. Text Color: Set the color of the button text. Background Type: Customize the button background using a solid color, gradient, or image. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome And that’s it! You’ve now successfully configured the Video Box Widget in Elementor to showcase engaging video content in a sleek and interactive way. Feel free to explore more styling options to match your website’s vibe. Need help? Our support team is just a message away! View Live Demo
How to Install Animation Addons for Elementor? Animation Addons lets you build animated websites using the powerful features of GSAP. It makes the process faster and easier, especially when you’re working on multiple projects. Even if you have no coding experience, you can still create stunning animations with ease. The plugin is available in both free and premium versions. If you’d like to try the free version, there are two simple ways to download it. Let’s take a look! Method 1: Installing Plugin From Your WordPress Dashboard From your WordPress dashboard, go to Plugins > Add Plugin. In the search bar, type “Animation Addons”. Find the plugin called “Animation Addons for Elementor” with the orange icon. Afterward, click Install Now, then activate the plugin once the installation is complete. After activation, the plugin is all set and ready to go! Method 2: Downloading & Installing from The WordPress Plugin Directory To download Animation Addons as a ZIP file from an external source, follow the steps below. You can find Animation Addons by browsing the WordPress plugin directory. One click on the download button and the Animation Addons Zip is yours. Go to Plugins > Add New, then click the “Upload Plugin” button Click the “Choose File” button and upload the ZIP file you just downloaded. After that, install and activate the plugin. You’re now all set to start using Animation Addons on your website. You can explore a variety of beautifully crafted animations or create your own custom effects with ease. That’s it! If you have any questions or need a hand, feel free to reach out to our support team—we’re always here to help.
Table Of Content The Table of Content Widget in Animation Addons for Elementor is a paid feature. To use this widget, ensure the plugin is installed and activated on your site. You can explore both free and pro widgets using the filtering options, but this specific widget is available only in the pro version. Introduction The Table of Content Widget in Animation Addons for Elementor helps create a structured, easy-to-navigate table of contents, improving user experience and boosting SEO. Key Use Cases for the Table of Content Widget: Create an organized, easy-to-navigate table of contents for your pages or posts. Improve user experience by allowing quick access to sections of interest. Enhance SEO by providing a well-structured content outline. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Table of Content Widget: Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Table of Content Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Table of Content Widget is ready to use! How to Add Table of Content Widget in Elementor: Open the page where you want to add the Table of Content Widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Table of Content Widget.” Drag the widget to your desired section. The Table of Content Widget is now ready for customization. How to Configure Table Of Content Widget In the Elementor panel, search for the “Table of Content Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into your desired section. From the widget settings, configure the heading tags (H1–H6) you want to include and customize the structure of the table. You can also define the container or page scope for which the headings will be scanned. Enable collapsible options, adjust hierarchical display, and add scroll behavior to improve user navigation. Use the Style tab to personalize the appearance—customize typography, colors, spacing, borders, and hover effects to ensure the Table of Content aligns with your site’s design and branding. Configuring Table Of Content Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Table of Content Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content, Style, and Advanced. Content Settings The Content section of the Table of Content Widget is divided into two main panels: Table of Contents and Additional Settings. 1. Table of Contents Title: Set a custom heading for your table of content. HTML Tag: Choose the HTML tag (e.g., H2, H3) for the title element to define its semantic hierarchy. Anchors by Tags: Select which heading tags (H1–H6) should be included in the TOC.Container: Specify the CSS container from which the widget will fetch the headings. Marker View: Choose how the active section marker appears—such as dots, lines, or none—to visually indicate scrolling progress. 2. Additional Settings Word Wrap: Enable to wrap long text lines for better mobile readability. Minimize Box: Allow users to collapse the TOC for a cleaner interface. Icon: Customize the icon used for the TOC title or minimize functionality. Minimize Icon: Set the icon that appears when the TOC is minimized. Minimize On: Choose the behavior or screen size on which the TOC should auto-minimize. Hierarchical View Button: Enable to show nested heading levels. Collapse Subitems Button: Allow users to expand or collapse heading sublevels as needed. Style Settings The Style section of the Table of Content Widget allows you to fine-tune the design and visual presentation of the TOC( using three main customization panels: Box, Header, and List. 1. Box Customize the outer container of the TOC widget to align with your website’s design aesthetics: Background Color: Set the background color for the TOC box. Border Color: Define the color of the box’s border. Loader Color: Choose a color for the loading indicator, if applicable. Border Width: Specify the thickness of the border on all sides. Border Radius: Add rounded corners by adjusting the radius. Padding: Control the internal spacing within the TOC box. Min Height: Set a minimum height for the container. Box Shadow: Apply shadow effects to add depth and visual emphasis. 2. Header Control the appearance of the header/title area of the TOC: Background Color: Choose a background color for the TOC header. Text Color: Set the color of the title text. Typography: Customize font family, size, weight, and line height. Icon Color: Define the color of any icons used in the header. Separator Width: Adjust the width of the separator line between the header and the content area. 3. List Style the list of items (anchors) displayed in the TOC: List Max Height: Set a maximum height for the list container. Typography: Customize the text style for the TOC items. Indent: Define the indentation for nested items to reflect hierarchy. Text Color: Choose the color for the list text. Underline: Optionally add underlines to the list items. Marker Color and Size: Style the list markers (bullets or indicators) with custom color and size settings. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome And that’s a wrap! You’ve now learned how to configure the Table of Contents Widget in Elementor to create a structured, easy-to-navigate layout for your content. This not only enhances user experience but also improves content accessibility. If you need any further help or have questions, our support team is always here for you! View Live Demo
Animations Title Introduction Want your titles to pop? The Animated Title Widget adds animations to your text, making it more engaging and fun for your website visitors. Key Use Cases for the Image Widget in Elementor: Use the Animated Title widget to create eye-catching headlines for your homepage or landing pages. Highlight key services or promotions with dynamic animated text to engage visitors. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor Note: Ensure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated. Then, enable the Animated Title Widget toggle from the plugin settings. How to Activate an Image Widget ? To activate the Animated Title Widget, navigate to Animation Addons → Elements in the admin dashboard. Then, select the Widget tab, search for the Animated Title Widget, and toggle it on. The widget will be activated immediately. How to Configure the Animated Title Widget in Animation Addons? Enable it, create a new page, set a title, choose the Elementor Full Width template, and publish. Adjust options as needed. Note: Selecting full Elementor elements in a template unlocks all widgets and customization options, boosting design flexibility and functionality. Navigate to the Edit with Elementor option to access the editor interface. After selection, the Elementor panel appears with all tools and customization options. Click the “+” icon to add a container, then select the appropriate column structure and layout. In the Elementor Editor, click the ‘+’ icon to add a section. Search for the “Animated Title”, then drag and drop it into the desired section of the page. Configure the widget settings under the available tabs to customize it as needed. Here’s the interface where you can configure the settings and customize the Animated Title Widget across various tabs. Configuring Animated Title Widget: A Step-by-Step Guide The Animated Title Widget is available in Elementor and can be placed on the desired section of the page. It offers three main settings tabs: Content, Style, and Advanced. Content Settings The Content section lets you choose your preferred image, adjust its resolution, and set the alignment. This is the Content section of the Animated Title Widget in Elementor. Here’s what each option does: Title: Enter your desired text. You can highlight parts of the text by enclosing them in square brackets [ ]. Show Prefix: Toggle this option to display or hide a prefix before the title. HTML Tag: Choose the appropriate HTML heading tag (H1, H2, H3, etc.) for SEO and design structure. Alignment: Adjust the title’s alignment to left, center, right, or justified for proper positioning on the page. —————————————————————————————————————————- Animation text And, explore the optional Text Animation section to apply effects for smooth transitions. Note: Animations require the Pro version of the plugin. —————————————————————————————————————————– Style Settings The Style section includes two sections: Title and Prefix. This is the Style section of the Animated Title Widget in Elementor. Here’s what each option does: Title Styling Text Color: Defines the title text color, allowing customization for better visibility and design consistency. Typography: Controls font properties, including style, size, weight, and letter spacing for enhanced readability. Text Stroke: Applies an outline effect to the text, improving emphasis and contrast. Text Shadow: Adds shadow effects to create depth and highlight the text. Blend Mode: Determines how the text interacts with the background for seamless integration. Prefix Color: Choose a color to highlight specific words in the title. Background Type: Select a solid color or gradient for the highlight. Typography: Customize the highlighted text font style. Text Stroke: Apply an outline effect to the highlighted text. Text Shadow: Add shadow effects for better contrast. Blend Mode: Adjust how the highlight blends with the background. So, you’ve completed all the customizations! Here’s the final output: —————————————————————————————————————————– Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. —————————————————————————————————————————– Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve now learned how to configure the Animated Title Widget in Elementor to effectively customize and display images on your website. If you need further assistance, don’t hesitate to reach out to our support team!
Image Box Slider Before setting up the Image Box Slider Widget, ensure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. Once activated, you’ll get access to all free Elementor widgets, including the Image Box Slider Widget—completely free! You can also filter between free and pro widgets for easier access. Introduction The Image Box Slider Widget displays multiple image boxes in a smooth slider, ideal for showcasing features or visual content. Key Use Cases for the Image Box Slider Widget in Elementor: Showcase multiple image boxes in a sleek, scrollable slider layout. Enhance visual storytelling with images, titles, and descriptions in a compact format. Customize styling and animation to match your website’s design and improve user engagement. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Image Box Slider Widget? Navigate to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Locate the Image Box Slider widget in the list. Toggle the switch to enable the widget. The Image Box Slider Widget is now ready to use in your Elementor editor. How to Add Image Box Slider Widget in Elementor Open the page where you want to add the Image Box Slider Widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Image Box Slider Widget”. Drag and drop the widget into your desired section. The Image Box Slider Widget is now ready for customization. How to Configure Image Box Slider Widget Enable the widget, create a new page, set a title, choose the Elementor Full Width template, and publish the page. Adjust page settings as needed. In the Elementor panel, search for “Image Box Slider Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into your desired section. The slider will display image boxes automatically. You can then customize the content, layout, navigation, and styling to match your design preferences. Configuring Archive Image Box Slider Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Image Box Slider Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content, Style and Advanced. Content Settings In the Image Box Slider Widget’s content section, You will get two options like layout and slider option. Layout 1. Layout Styles (Five Different Styles) The Image Box Slider offers five layout styles for flexible and dynamic presentation of images and text. Style 1: A basic image box slider with an image, title, subtitle, description, and link. Style 2: Features an image with a more prominent title and description with a link. Style 3: Focuses on image-centric presentation with minimal text. Style 4: Includes an image and an icon next to the text elements for added emphasis. Style 5: Allows for a more compact design where elements are stacked for better readability on mobile devices. Item 1: Configuration Options: In Item 1, users can customize the following settings: Image Setup: Upload and position an image to be displayed in the slider. Title: Set a title for the item. The title can be customized with an HTML tag (e.g., <h1>, <h2>, etc.) to define its importance. Subtitle: A secondary title or description that provides additional context. Subtitle Position: You can control whether the subtitle appears above, below, or beside the image. Description: A brief description that provides more details about the image. Link: Add a clickable link to each item in the slider that directs users to more information or a different page. Each layout is fully responsive and can be adjusted for various screen sizes to ensure optimal display across all devices. 2. Image Resolution (Seven Different Styles) The Image Box Slider widget supports seven different image resolution styles. These options enable you to adjust the image quality based on the visual needs and load time requirements of your website: Resolution Options: Low resolution Medium-low resolution Medium resolution High resolution Very high resolution Ultra-high resolution & Custom resolution (user-defined) These options ensure that images load quickly without compromising too much on quality, thus improving both the user experience and SEO performance. 3. Direction The direction setting controls the flow of the slider. You can choose from: Horizontal: The slider moves left to right or right to left. Vertical: The slider moves from top to bottom or bottom to top. The direction setting allows for the creation of dynamic visual effects tailored to the website’s design and user interaction goals. 4. Gap This option controls the space between the image boxes in the slider. You can set the gap to: SmallMedium Large Adjusting the gap helps maintain a clean and balanced layout, enhancing the visual flow and user engagement. 5. Link Type The Link Type setting defines how the link behaves when clicked: External URL: Opens an external website or page in a new tab. Internal Link: Links to another page or section within the same website. No Link: The item does not have a clickable link, providing a purely visual effect. This flexibility allows users to choose whether they want their image box slider to drive traffic externally or simply enhance user interaction within the site. 6. Alignment This option allows for precise control over how the text and images are aligned within each image box: Left Alignment: Text and elements are aligned to the left side of the box. Center Alignment: Text and elements are centered within the box. Right Alignment: Text and elements are aligned to the right side of the box. Alignment ensures that content is placed in the desired manner, creating a polished and professional look. 7. Icon The Icon option lets you add pre-designed or custom icons to enhance the design and highlight features in the slider. Slider Option Below is a detailed explanation of each option, covering how they look, function, and the effects of changing their settings- Sliders to Show This setting defines how many image boxes are visible at a time in the slider. You can specify the number of slides shown in the viewport. This helps tailor the layout to fit different screen sizes or content needs. Effect: Adjusting this number will determine how many image boxes are visible on-screen, allowing for a customized display of content. Autoplay When enabled, the slider will automatically move through the images after a defined delay. It’s ideal for creating an automated slideshow experience. Effect: When activated, images will transition automatically without user interaction, offering a more hands-off display. Change: Turning this on makes the slider self-running, providing a seamless experience for viewers. 3. Autoplay Delay This option allows you to set the time delay (in milliseconds) between each slide transition during autoplay. Effect: You can control the speed of the slider’s movement by adjusting the delay between images. Change: Increasing the delay results in slower transitions; decreasing it makes the transition faster. 4. Autoplay Interaction This setting determines whether the autoplay feature is paused when the user interacts with the slider (mouse hover or touch). Effect: When enabled, autoplay will pause if a user interacts with the slider, ensuring they can engage with the content without interruption. Change: If disabled, autoplay will continue regardless of user interaction. 5. Allow Touch Move This feature enables touch swipe functionality on mobile devices. Users can swipe left or right to navigate between slides. Effect: On touch-enabled devices, users can swipe through slides, providing a mobile-friendly, interactive experience. Change: Enabling this feature allows for more intuitive navigation on mobile devices. 6. Loop When activated, the slider will loop back to the first slide after reaching the last one, creating a continuous cycling effect. Effect: The slider will start from the first slide once it reaches the last, creating an endless loop of content. Change: Disabling this feature will stop the slider once it reaches the last slide. 7. Mousewheel This option allows users to navigate through the slides using the mouse wheel. Effect: Scrolling the mouse wheel up or down will move the slider between slides. Change: Enabling this feature adds another method of navigation, enhancing usability. 8. Animation Speed This setting controls how quickly the transition between slides occurs. You can set the speed of the animation in milliseconds. Effect: A faster animation speed makes transitions quicker, while a slower speed provides smoother, more gradual changes between slides. Change: Adjusting the animation speed alters the visual flow of the slider. 9. Space Between This option sets the amount of space between each slide in the slider. Effect: Increasing the space between slides will create a more separated layout, while reducing the space will bring the slides closer together. Change: Adjusting this space affects the visual density of the slider and can be used to create more compact or spacious designs. 10. Navigation This feature allows for customizable navigation controls (previous and next arrows) to move through the slides. Effect: Navigation arrows appear on either side of the slider, providing users with the ability to manually control the slider. Change: Enabling navigation arrows adds interactivity, while disabling them makes the slider auto-play or swipe-based only. 11. Previous Arrow Icon This option lets you choose or upload a custom icon for the previous slide navigation arrow. Effect: The arrow icon will appear on the left side of the slider to move to the previous slide. Change: Customizing the icon allows for design consistency with the website’s theme. 12. Next Arrow Icon Similar to the previous arrow, this option lets you choose or upload a custom icon for the next slide navigation arrow. Effect: The arrow icon will appear on the right side of the slider to move to the next slide. Change: Customizing the icon provides a more personalized look for navigation. 13. Pagination Pagination enables users to see an indicator of the number of slides and navigate directly to a specific slide via clickable dots or other indicators. Effect: When enabled, small indicators will appear, showing the user’s position within the slider and allowing them to click to navigate to a particular slide. Change: Disabling pagination removes the visual guide, making it harder for users to track slide positions. 14. Pagination Type You can select between different types of pagination, such as dots, numbers, or custom indicators. Effect: The type of pagination selected changes the appearance of the indicators (e.g., dots, numbers, or other shapes). Change: Choosing different types of pagination gives you flexibility in design and user navigation. 15. Left/Right Direction This setting allows you to define the direction in which the slider moves when manually controlled by the user. Effect: You can choose whether the navigation will move the slides from left to right or vice versa. Change: Changing the direction affects how users interact with the slider and how content flows visually. 16. Direction This option lets you define the general direction of the slider’s movement—either horizontal or vertical. Effect: Horizontal direction moves the slides left to right (or right to left), while vertical direction moves slides up or down. Change: Changing the direction alters the overall layout and interaction style of the slider. 17. Centre Slide When enabled, this option ensures that the active slide is always centered in the viewport. Effect: The active slide is always visually in focus and centered, drawing attention to it. Change: Disabling this feature can create a more casual, less structured display of slides. 18. Effect This setting allows you to choose the animation effect applied to the slides during transitions. Common options include fade, slide, or flip. Effect: The transition effect adds dynamic movement to the slider, making the changes between slides visually engaging. Change: Selecting different effects can change the overall feel of the slider, from smooth fades to more interactive movements. Style Settings In the Style section, you’ll find five customizable areas: Image Box, Image, Content, Slider Navigation, and Slider Pagination. Each section allows for detailed styling to match your design preferences and website branding. Image Box The Image Box section allows you to customize the container that holds the image and content. Available settings include: Height: Set the height of the image box for consistent layout control. Max Width: Define the maximum width to ensure responsiveness across devices. Padding: Adjust the inner spacing between the content and the box edge. Border Type: Choose from solid, dashed, dotted, or none to define the box’s border style. Border Radius: Apply rounded corners to soften the edges of the image box. Hover Effect: Add interactive visual effects when the user hovers over the box. Border Type (Hover): Customize the border style specifically for hover state, enhancing interactivity. These options provide full control over the visual appearance and interactivity of the image box container. Image The Image Box section allows you to customize the container that holds the image and content. Available settings include: Height: Set the height of the image box for consistent layout control. Max Width: Define the maximum width to ensure responsiveness across devices. Padding: Adjust the inner spacing between the content and the box edge. Border Type: Choose from solid, dashed, dotted, or none to define the box’s border style. Border Radius: Apply rounded corners to soften the edges of the image box. Hover Effect: Add interactive visual effects when the user hovers over the box. Border Type (Hover): Customize the border style specifically for hover state, enhancing interactivity. These options provide full control over the visual appearance and interactivity of the image box container. Content The Content Section offers full customization of text and visuals within the image box, including options for background, spacing, typography, and color- 1. Background Type This setting determines the background style for the content section. You can select from solid colors, gradients, or images as the background. Effect: The background adds a visual foundation to the content, enhancing its contrast with the image box. Change: Selecting a gradient or image will introduce a more dynamic background compared to a solid color. 2. Padding This controls the space around the content inside the box, ensuring that text and other elements are well-separated from the edges of the content section. Effect: Adjusting padding creates more space around the content, improving readability and appearance. Change: Increasing padding will make the content box larger, while reducing it brings the content closer to the edges. . Title Spacing This setting adjusts the space between the title and the elements surrounding it, such as the image or subtitle. Effect: Title spacing ensures the title is properly separated from other elements, providing a balanced look. Change: Increasing the spacing allows the title to stand out more, while decreasing it brings the title closer to adjacent content. 4. Title Color This option allows you to set the color for the title text, making it stand out against the background and other content. Effect: The title color helps draw attention to the heading, influencing its visual hierarchy on the page. Change: Choosing a contrasting color ensures the title remains visible, even with complex backgrounds. 5. Title Typography This setting controls the font style, weight, size, and other typographic properties of the title text. Effect: Typography settings help define the font style and size, enhancing the title’s readability and impact. Change: Adjusting the font weight and style can make the title more prominent or subtle, depending on the design requirements. 6. Subtitle Spacing This setting defines the space between the subtitle and surrounding elements, ensuring a clear separation and readability. Effect: Subtitle spacing adds balance and harmony between the subtitle and the title or description. Change: Increasing the spacing makes the subtitle more distinct from the title, while reducing it brings the elements closer together. 7. Subtitle Color This option allows you to change the color of the subtitle text, complementing the title and aligning with your overall color scheme. Effect: Subtitle color helps differentiate it from the title while maintaining visual consistency with the design.Change: Using a softer or lighter color can create a more subtle contrast with the title. 8. Subtitle Typography Here, you can customize the font, size, weight, and style of the subtitle text. Effect: This ensures the subtitle matches the design and hierarchy of the title, offering consistency across the content. Change: You can adjust the subtitle’s appearance for emphasis or to create visual hierarchy between the title and description. 9. Description Spacing This controls the space between the subtitle and the description, ensuring proper separation for readability. Effect: Description spacing prevents text from appearing too cluttered, making the content more digestible. Change: Increasing the spacing improves readability, while reducing it can create a more compact layout. 10. Description Color This setting allows you to modify the color of the description text to enhance readability and design harmony. Effect: The description color influences the visual contrast and legibility against the background. Change: Choosing a darker or lighter color ensures optimal readability depending on the background type. 11. Description Typography Here, you can customize the font family, weight, size, and other typographic properties for the description text. Effect: Typography settings ensure the description is easy to read and visually aligned with the title and subtitle. Change: Adjusting the typography makes the description text fit better within the overall design of the slider. 12. Icon Spacing This setting defines the space around the icon, ensuring that it is well-separated from the text and other elements in the image box. Effect: Icon spacing ensures that the icon doesn’t appear too close to the content, maintaining a balanced look. Change: Increasing the icon spacing can create a cleaner, more spacious design, while reducing it allows for a more compact layout. 13. Icon Color Here, you can customize the color of the icon to match the content design, making sure it aligns with the overall aesthetic. Effect: The icon color affects its visibility and integration with the content section’s style. Change: A contrasting icon color helps the icon stand out, while a muted color blends it with the design. 14. Icon Size This option allows you to adjust the size of the icon, ensuring it is proportional to the content. Effect: Icon size determines how prominent or subtle the icon will be within the design. Change: Increasing the size makes the icon more noticeable, while decreasing it can give a more minimalist appearance. 15. Icon Rotate This feature allows you to rotate the icon, providing an interactive and dynamic effect. Effect: Rotating the icon can add a unique visual effect or animation to the image box. Change: You can rotate the icon slightly for a subtle effect or rotate it dramatically for more visual interest. Slider Navigation The Slider Navigation section allows you to fully customize the navigation controls for the image box slider, offering various visual and interactive settings. Below is a breakdown of each option: 1. Size This setting controls the overall size of the navigation elements (e.g., arrows or dots) within the slider. Effect: Adjusting the size changes how large or small the navigation controls appear. Change: Increasing the size makes the controls more prominent, while decreasing them results in a more minimalist appearance. 2. Circle Size If circular navigation elements (such as dots) are used, this option allows you to control their diameter. Effect: Adjusting the circle size changes the visual prominence of the navigation dots. Change: Larger circles make the navigation more noticeable, while smaller ones offer a subtler look. 3. Border Type This option defines the style of the border around the navigation elements. You can choose from solid, dashed, dotted, or no border. Effect: The border type adds definition to the navigation controls. Change: A solid border offers a clean look, while dashed or dotted borders introduce a more dynamic, creative style. 4. Border Radius This controls the roundness of the corners for the navigation elements, including arrows or dots. Effect: Border radius softens the edges of the navigation elements, creating a more rounded or square look. Change: A higher radius makes the elements more rounded, while a lower value creates sharper edges. 5. Padding Padding adjusts the space inside the navigation elements, ensuring proper spacing between the content (such as arrows) and the element border. Effect: Adjusting padding affects the inner spacing within the navigation element. Change: Increasing the padding creates more breathing room for the content inside, while decreasing it tightens the layout. 6. Animation (Normal & Hover) This option defines the animation effects applied to the navigation elements during normal interaction and when the user hovers over them. Effect: Normal animation applies to the default state of the navigation, while hover animation activates when the user hovers over the element. Change: You can set different animations (e.g., fading, sliding) for both states, enhancing interactivity and visual appeal. 7. Color This option controls the color of the navigation elements, including arrows or dots. Effect: Color settings define the visual contrast of the navigation against the background. Change: Adjusting the color can help the navigation blend or stand out, depending on your design preferences. 8. Background Type This setting determines the background style for the navigation elements, which can include a solid color, gradient, or image. Effect: Background type adds visual depth to the navigation controls, making them either blend in or stand out. Change: A gradient or image background adds more design variation, while a solid color provides a cleaner, simpler look. 9. Position Type Position type controls where the navigation elements are placed within the slider container. You can position them relative to the container or set fixed positioning. Effect: This affects where the navigation appears (e.g., top, bottom, left, or right) within the slider. Change: Adjusting the position allows for flexible placement of navigation controls based on the layout needs. 10. Alignment This option controls the alignment of the navigation elements within their designated area, such as left, center, or right alignment. Effect: Alignment determines where the navigation elements are positioned within their container. Change: Left or right alignment places the controls at the edges, while center alignment brings them to the middle of the container. 11. Gap Gap adjusts the space between multiple navigation elements, such as arrows or dots. Effect: Gap helps space out the navigation elements evenly. Change: Increasing the gap creates more space between the elements, while reducing it places them closer together. Slider Pagination The Slider Pagination section allows customization of pagination controls (dots or numbers) for slider navigation. Here’s a quick overview of each option: 1. Color: This setting controls the color of the pagination elements, such as the active and inactive dots or numbers. Effect: The color option affects the visibility and aesthetic of the pagination elements. Change: Adjusting the color ensures that the pagination elements contrast with the background for better visibility. 2. Active Color: This option sets the color of the active pagination element (the dot or number that represents the current slide). Effect: The active color highlights the current slide’s pagination element, indicating the user’s position in the slider. Change: A bright or distinct active color makes it easier for users to identify which slide is currently being viewed. 3. Size: This option controls the size of the pagination elements, such as dots or numbers. Effect: The size adjustment alters how large or small the pagination elements appear on the page. Change: Increasing the size makes the pagination elements more prominent, while decreasing the size results in a more subtle look. 4. Gap: Gap defines the space between each pagination element, such as dots or numbers. Effect: Gap controls how spaced out the pagination elements are, providing a more visually appealing layout. Change: Increasing the gap separates the pagination elements more, while decreasing it brings them closer together. 5. Border Type: This option sets the style of the border around the pagination elements. You can choose from solid, dashed, dotted, or none. Effect: Border type adds a clear definition to the pagination elements. Change: A solid border offers a clean and clear look, while dashed or dotted borders can add a more dynamic or playful design. 6. Border Radius: This setting controls the roundness of the corners for the pagination elements. Effect: Border radius softens the corners, giving the pagination elements a more rounded or squared appearance. Change: A higher radius makes the elements more circular, while a lower value keeps them sharp and angular. 7. Direction: Direction controls the orientation of the pagination elements, whether they are displayed horizontally or vertically. Effect: The direction setting determines whether the pagination controls are placed in a row (horizontal) or a column (vertical). Change: Horizontal pagination is commonly used for a sleek, linear design, while vertical pagination is often used for unique, dynamic layouts. 8. Position: This option sets the position of the pagination elements within the slider container, allowing you to place them at the top, bottom, left, or right. Effect: Position defines where the pagination will appear relative to the slider content. Change: You can adjust the position based on the desired layout, whether you want the pagination at the top, bottom, or on the sides. 9. Alignment: Alignment controls the alignment of the pagination elements within their container, allowing you to position them to the left, center, or right. Effect: Alignment ensures the pagination is placed in a specific position within the slider, either to the left, center, or right. Change: Left or right alignment positions the pagination at the edges, while center alignment places it at the middle of the container. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Image Box Slider Widget in Elementor to create dynamic and visually appealing image sliders with customizable titles, descriptions, and links. For any further assistance or inquiries, feel free to contact our support team! View Live Demo
Text Hover Image Before setting up the Text Hover Image widget, make sure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. Once activated, you’ll get access to all free Elementor widgets, including the Text Hover Image widget—completely free! You can also explore both free and pro widgets by using the filter options. Introduction The Text Hover Image feature displays an image on text hover, enhancing engagement and customization. The Text Hover Image feature displays an image when users hover over text, enhancing interactivity. Key Use Cases for the Social Icons Widget in Elementor: Use the Text Hover Image widget to showcase product previews and portfolio items interactively. Add hover effects to display additional information without cluttering the page. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Text Hover Image Widget? Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Text Hover Image Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Text Hover Image Widget is ready to use! How to Add the Text Hover Image Widget in Elementor: Open the page where you want to add the Text Hover Image widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Text Hover Image Widget.” Drag the widget to your desired section. The Text Hover Image widget is now ready for customization! How to Configure the Text Hover Image Widget in Animation Addons: In the Elementor panel, search for the “Text Hover Image Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into your desired section. Customize the image and text settings using the available options in the Elementor panel. Your Text Hover Image widget is now ready to use! You can personalize the settings to achieve the desired hover effect and style. Configuring Text Hover Image Widget in Animation Addons: A Step-by-Step Guide The Text Hover Image Widget is available in Elementor and can be placed in any section of your page. It includes three main settings tabs: Content, Style, and Advanced—each offering customization options to fine-tune your image and hover effects. In the Text Hover Image widget, you will only find one section under the Content tab. Content Settings In the Content section of the Text Hover Image widget, you will find the following options: Content Before Hover Text: Set the text displayed before the hover effect. Hover Text: Define the text that appears when the user hovers over the element. After Hover Text: Specify the text displayed after the hover action. Hover Image: Upload the image that will appear on hover. HTML Tag: Choose the appropriate HTML tag for the text (e.g., <h1>, <p>, <span>). Link: Add a URL for the text or image to link to. Alignment: Control the alignment of the text and image (left, center, right). These options allow you to customize the hover effect and ensure smooth integration with your site’s design. Style Settings The Style section is divided into two parts: Style and Image. Let’s explore how to work with and customize these settings. Style In the Style section of the Text Hover Image widget, you can customize the following settings: Text Color: Set the color of the text before hover. Hover Color: Define the text color when the element is hovered. Typography: Adjust font family, size, weight, and other typography settings for the text. Text Stroke: Apply a stroke (outline) around the text for emphasis. Text Shadow: Add a shadow effect to the text for depth and visual appeal. Blend Mode: Control how the text and background interact visually with blend mode options. Hover Text: Customize the appearance of the text during the hover effect. Hover Text Color: Set the text color specifically when the hover effect is active. These options provide flexibility in styling the text and hover effects to ensure seamless integration with the website’s overall design. Image In the Image section of the Text Hover Image widget, you can customize the image’s width and height to fit your design. The Position Top and Position Left settings allow you to adjust the image’s vertical and horizontal placement, ensuring precise control over its positioning during the hover effect. These options help integrate the image seamlessly into your layout. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve now learned how to configure the Text Hover Image widget in Elementor to effectively customize and display interactive images on your website. If you need further assistance, feel free to reach out to our support team! View Live Demo
Animated Off-Canvas Before setting up the Animated Off-Canvas Widget, make sure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. This widget is available as a paid feature. Once activated, you can explore both free and pro widgets by filtering the selection options. Introduction The Animated Off-Canvas Widget is a premium feature in Animation Addons for Elementor that lets you create sleek, animated off-canvas menus and panels for enhanced user engagement. Key Use Cases for the Animated Off-Canvas Widget The Animated Off-Canvas Widget in Elementor is perfect for: Mobile Menus – Create stylish, animated off-canvas menus for a better mobile user experience. Sidebar Content – Display additional content or widgets in an off-canvas panel for a cleaner layout. Navigation Enhancement – Improve website navigation with smooth slide-in animations. Hidden Panels – Use for hidden content that can be revealed on demand, providing a neat design. Interactive Design – Engage users with smooth and customizable animations on your website. With the Animated Off-Canvas Widget, you can easily create interactive off-canvas panels with customizable animations, improving user experience and site design. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Animated Off-Canvas Widget ? How to Activate the Animated Off-Canvas Widget? Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Locate the Animated Off-Canvas Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Animated Off-Canvas Widget is ready to use! How to Add Animated Off-Canvas Widget in Elementor Open the page where you want to add the Site Logo. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Site Logo.” Drag the Animated Off-Canvas widget to your desired section. The Animated Off-Canvas widget will now be available for customization. You can upload your logo, adjust its size, alignment, and link it to the homepage as needed. How to Configure the Animated Off-Canvas Widget Enable the widget from Animation Addons → Elements, create a new page, set a title, choose the Elementor Full Width template, and publish. Adjust page settings as needed. In the Elementor panel, search for the “Animated Off-Canvas Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into your desired section. Customize the off-canvas content, animation style, position, and trigger options using the available settings to match your design needs. Your Animated Off Canvas Widget is now ready to showcase your brand professionally across your site! Configuring Animated Off-Canvas Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Animated Off-Canvas Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content, Style and Advanced. Content Settings There are two options available: Settings and Content. Settings The Animated Off-Canvas widget provides customization options to adjust the behavior and appearance of the off-canvas menu, ensuring a tailored user experience. Available Options: Open Button Text: Customize the text displayed on the button that triggers the opening of the off-canvas menu. Enable Icon Toggle Button: Activate or deactivate the icon toggle button, which allows users to open and close the off-canvas menu. Default Close Icon Toggle Button: Choose the default icon for the close button, allowing users to close the off-canvas menu with a single click. These settings provide full control over the off-canvas menu’s interactive elements, offering a seamless and user-friendly navigation experience. Content The Content section of the Animated Off-Canvas widget allows you to further customize the content and functionality of the off-canvas menu, enhancing its interactivity and user experience Available Options: Show Loop or Image Toggle Button: Enable or disable the toggle button for displaying a looping animation or image within the off-canvas menu. Add Logo or Image: Upload and display a logo or image within the off-canvas panel to enhance branding and visual appeal. Menu: Integrate a navigation menu within the off-canvas panel for seamless user navigation. Contact Information Tab: Add a contact information tab to provide users with quick access to your contact details. Language Tab: Include a language selection tab to allow users to switch between languages, improving accessibility for global audiences. Follow Information Tab: Add social media or follow information to engage users and encourage interaction with your brand’s social platforms. These content customization options provide flexibility in creating a comprehensive and interactive off-canvas menu tailored to your site’s needs. Style Settings The Animated Off-Canvas widget offers a wide range of customization tools to help you design dynamic, responsive menus and content panels. Below is a detailed guide to each section and how the settings affect the layout and functionality. Off-Canvas Settings These settings control the main container of the off-canvas panel. Background Type: Set a solid color, gradient, or image background for the off-canvas panel to match your site’s theme. Padding: Add internal spacing within the off-canvas area to maintain a clean and balanced layout. Swap Column: Swap the order of left and right columns inside the off-canvas layout to adjust the structure as per design requirements. Effect: Adjusting these settings changes the visual style and spacing of the entire off-canvas container. Off-Canvas Left Display: Choose between Show or Hide to control the visibility of the left section. Width: Define the width of the left panel to control space allocation. Background Type: Apply a background (color/gradient/image) to this specific section. Padding: Manage internal spacing for content within the left section. Effect: Enables structured layout design by controlling visibility, width, and styling of the left column. Off-Canvas Right Display: Choose between Show or Hide to control the visibility of the right section. Width: Define the width of the right panel. Background Type: Customize the right section’s background for visual distinction. Padding: Adjust inner spacing to improve content layout. Effect: Helps create dual-column or split-layout designs within the off-canvas panel. Logo / Image Width & Height: Define the dimensions of the logo or image added inside the off-canvas panel for better brand placement and scaling across devices. Menu Settings Color: Set the default text color for menu items. Hover Color: Customize the text color on hover for improved user interaction. Border Color: Define border colors to enhance visual separation between items. Typography: Control font size, family, weight, and style for menu items. Height Auto: Enable or disable automatic height adjustment for the menu. Padding: Adjust internal spacing of menu items for a cleaner layout. Level Two & Three Padding: Customize padding for submenu levels to manage hierarchy and spacing. Expand Icon (for Submenus) Color: Set the icon color for submenu toggles. Icon Size: Adjust the size of the expand/collapse icon. Padding Size: Manage the spacing around the icon to align it properly within the menu layout. Contact The Contact section within the Animated Off-Canvas widget allows you to display essential contact details in a visually appealing and organized manner. Below are the available customization options: Display: Toggle between Show or Hide to control the visibility of the contact section. Gap: Define the spacing between individual contact items for better layout and readability. Color: Set the text color for the contact information to match your overall design. Typography: Customize the font style, size, weight, and line height for the contact text. Label Color: Set a specific color for labels (e.g., “Phone”, “Email”) to visually differentiate them from the details. Label Typography: Adjust font properties for labels to enhance clarity and hierarchy. Margin: Control the outer spacing around the contact section to align it with other content. These settings help present your contact details in a clean and structured way, ensuring better accessibility and design consistency. Follow Social Media The Follow section allows you to display social media icons within the Animated Off-Canvas panel, making it easy for users to connect with your brand across platforms. Below are the available customization options: Display: Toggle the visibility of the social media icons by selecting either Show or Hide. Color: Set the default icon color to match your website’s branding. Hover Color: Define a different color for the icons when hovered over to enhance interactivity. Icon Size: Adjust the size of the social media icons for better visibility and alignment. Margin: Control the spacing around the icons to maintain a clean and balanced layout. These options ensure your social media links are prominently and professionally displayed within your off-canvas design. Search The Search option within the Animated Off-Canvas widget provides a simple and functional search bar for enhanced user navigation. Available customization options include: Display: Choose to Show or Hide the search bar within the off-canvas panel. Color: Set the color of the search input text to align with your site’s design. These settings allow you to integrate a seamless and visually consistent search experience into your off-canvas layout. Language The Language option in the Animated Off-Canvas widget lets you add and style language selection elements within the panel. Available settings include: Display: Toggle between Show or Hide to control the visibility of the language section. Color: Set the text color to match your overall design aesthetics. Typography: Customize font style, size, weight, and spacing for clear and consistent text appearance. These options help ensure that language selectors are both accessible and visually integrated into your off-canvas layout. Open Button The Open Button settings in the Animated Off-Canvas widget allow you to personalize the appearance of the trigger button that opens the off-canvas panel. Available options include: Color: Set the text or icon color of the open button to align with your site’s design. Typography: Customize the font style, size, and weight for the button text to ensure visual consistency and readability. These options help create a cohesive and engaging user experience from the very first interaction. Close Button The Close Button settings in the Animated Off-Canvas widget provide control over the appearance and behavior of the panel’s close trigger. Available customization options include: Icon Size: Adjust the size of the close icon for better visibility and alignment. Circle Size: Set the size of the circular container around the icon (if applicable). Border Radius: Define the roundness of the button edges for a softer or sharper look. Margin: Manage spacing around the close button for precise positioning. Animation Effect: Choose from two animation patterns to define how the button responds on interaction. Color: Customize the icon color to match your design. Background Type: Select a solid or gradient background to enhance the button’s visual impact. These settings ensure the close button is both functional and seamlessly integrated into your off-canvas design. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Animated Off-Canvas widget in Elementor to create a dynamic and interactive off-canvas design for your website. For any further assistance or inquiries, feel free to contact our support team! View Live Demo
Advanced Widgets Articles Advanced Portfolio Table Of Content Flip Box Advanced Accordion Advanced Pricing Table Filterable Gallery Image Accordion Scroll Elements Breadcrumbs Author Box Advanced Portfolio The Advanced Portfolio Widget in Animation Addons for Elementor is a paid feature. To use this widget, ensure the plugin is installed and activated on your site. You can explore both free and pro widgets using the filtering options, but this specific widget is available only in the pro version. Introduction The Advanced Portfolio Widget in Animation Addons for Elementor lets you display your projects in a stylish, customizable layout to showcase your work effectively. Key Use Cases for the Advanced Portfolio Widget: Showcase your projects in a visually appealing and organized layout. Customize the design to match your website’s style and branding. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Advanced Portfolio Widget: Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Advanced Portfolio Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Advanced Portfolio Widget is ready to use! How to Add Advanced Portfolio Widget in Elementor: Open the page where you want to add the Advanced Portfolio Widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Advanced Portfolio Widget.” Drag the widget to your desired section. The Advanced Portfolio Widget is now ready for customization. How to Configure Advanced Portfolio Widget In the Elementor panel, search for the “Advanced Portfolio Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into your desired section. From the widget settings, upload your portfolio items, including images or videos, and configure the title, category, and description for each item. You can also adjust the layout style, enable filters, and define how many items to display per row. Use the Style tab to refine the design—adjust spacing, borders, hover effects, typography, and colors—to create a visually appealing and branded portfolio section. Configuring Advanced Portfolio Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Advanced Portfolio Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content,Style and Advanced. Content Settings The Content section of the Advanced Portfolio Widget offers comprehensive configuration options to help you display and manage your portfolio items with enhanced interactivity. This section is divided into four main parts: Layout, Slider, Query, and the newly introduced Cursor Hover Effect. 1. Layout Customize the structure and appearance of your portfolio grid. Skin: Choose the visual style or template for displaying portfolio items. Posts Per Page: Set how many items should appear on a single page. Image Resolution: Select the resolution to ensure optimal image quality and loading speed. Post Title Tag: Define the HTML tag for portfolio titles (e.g., H1, H2, H3) to maintain SEO hierarchy. Icon: Display icons on items to enhance visual indication or action. 2. Slider Convert your portfolio grid into a sleek slider with dynamic settings. Slides to Show: Set the number of slides visible at once. Autoplay: Enable automatic slide transitions. Allow Touch Move: Allow users to swipe through slides on touch devices. Loop: Enable continuous loop scrolling. Mousewheel Button: Let users navigate through slides using the mouse wheel. Animation Speed: Define the speed of slide transitions. Space Between: Set spacing between each slide. Effect: Choose slide transition effects like fade or slide. Navigation and Pagination Buttons: Enable/disable navigation arrows and pagination indicators. Direction: Select horizontal or vertical slide direction. 3. Query Control what content gets pulled into the portfolio. Query Type: Choose between standard or custom queries. Source: Select post types (e.g., posts, pages, custom post types). Include By: Filter content by ID, term, or author. Post Format: Include only certain post formats such as video, gallery, etc. Date: Filter by post date. Order By: Choose how content is sorted (e.g., date, title, ID). Order: Ascending or descending. Ignore Sticky Posts: Option to exclude sticky posts from the query. 4. Cursor Hover Effect A unique interactive feature to enhance user experience with custom hover visuals. Enable Button: Toggle to activate the cursor hover effect. Once enabled: Text: Define the text that appears when the cursor hovers over a portfolio item. Typography: Adjust the font size, style, weight, and spacing for hover text. Text Color: Set the color for the hover text. Background Type: Choose a solid color, gradient, or image for the background behind the cursor text. Width & Height: Define the dimensions of the hover area. Border Type: Multiple styles are available: None: No border is applied. Solid: A single, solid line. Double: Two solid lines. Dotted: Dotted line around the cursor effect. Dashed: Dashed outline for a stylized look. Groove: Adds a carved groove effect for depth. Border Radius: Round the edges of the hover element to achieve a circular or oval shape. Style Settings In the Style section, you will find customization options for Layout, Slider Navigation, Slider Pagination, Content, Date, Title, and Image. These options allow you to fine-tune the design and style of each element, ensuring a personalized and visually appealing result – Layout: Customize the overall layout to fit your design preferences, providing a clean and organized look. Slider Navigation: Adjust the navigation arrows or dots for smooth navigation through your content. Slider Pagination: Add pagination for easy content navigation and a more structured layout. Content: Customize the content’s typography, color, and alignment to match your site’s branding. Date: Style the date display to suit your design, offering more control over its appearance. Title: Modify the title’s style, such as font size, weight, and color, to make it stand out. Image: Style the images, including adjusting size, border, and hover effects, to give your content an engaging and visually appealing presentation. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome Congratulations! You’ve now mastered the process of setting up the Advanced Portfolio Widget in Elementor to beautifully display your portfolio and elevate your website’s design. If you have any questions or need further assistance, don’t hesitate to reach out to our support team. View Live Demo Table Of Content The Table of Content Widget in Animation Addons for Elementor is a paid feature. To use this widget, ensure the plugin is installed and activated on your site. You can explore both free and pro widgets using the filtering options, but this specific widget is available only in the pro version. Introduction The Table of Content Widget in Animation Addons for Elementor helps create a structured, easy-to-navigate table of contents, improving user experience and boosting SEO. Key Use Cases for the Table of Content Widget: Create an organized, easy-to-navigate table of contents for your pages or posts. Improve user experience by allowing quick access to sections of interest. Enhance SEO by providing a well-structured content outline. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Table of Content Widget: Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Table of Content Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Table of Content Widget is ready to use! How to Add Table of Content Widget in Elementor: Open the page where you want to add the Table of Content Widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Table of Content Widget.” Drag the widget to your desired section. The Table of Content Widget is now ready for customization. How to Configure Table Of Content Widget In the Elementor panel, search for the “Table of Content Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into your desired section. From the widget settings, configure the heading tags (H1–H6) you want to include and customize the structure of the table. You can also define the container or page scope for which the headings will be scanned. Enable collapsible options, adjust hierarchical display, and add scroll behavior to improve user navigation. Use the Style tab to personalize the appearance—customize typography, colors, spacing, borders, and hover effects to ensure the Table of Content aligns with your site’s design and branding. Configuring Table Of Content Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Table of Content Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content, Style, and Advanced. Content Settings The Content section of the Table of Content Widget is divided into two main panels: Table of Contents and Additional Settings. 1. Table of Contents Title: Set a custom heading for your table of content. HTML Tag: Choose the HTML tag (e.g., H2, H3) for the title element to define its semantic hierarchy. Anchors by Tags: Select which heading tags (H1–H6) should be included in the TOC.Container: Specify the CSS container from which the widget will fetch the headings. Marker View: Choose how the active section marker appears—such as dots, lines, or none—to visually indicate scrolling progress. 2. Additional Settings Word Wrap: Enable to wrap long text lines for better mobile readability. Minimize Box: Allow users to collapse the TOC for a cleaner interface. Icon: Customize the icon used for the TOC title or minimize functionality. Minimize Icon: Set the icon that appears when the TOC is minimized. Minimize On: Choose the behavior or screen size on which the TOC should auto-minimize. Hierarchical View Button: Enable to show nested heading levels. Collapse Subitems Button: Allow users to expand or collapse heading sublevels as needed. Style Settings The Style section of the Table of Content Widget allows you to fine-tune the design and visual presentation of the TOC( using three main customization panels: Box, Header, and List. 1. Box Customize the outer container of the TOC widget to align with your website’s design aesthetics: Background Color: Set the background color for the TOC box. Border Color: Define the color of the box’s border. Loader Color: Choose a color for the loading indicator, if applicable. Border Width: Specify the thickness of the border on all sides. Border Radius: Add rounded corners by adjusting the radius. Padding: Control the internal spacing within the TOC box. Min Height: Set a minimum height for the container. Box Shadow: Apply shadow effects to add depth and visual emphasis. 2. Header Control the appearance of the header/title area of the TOC: Background Color: Choose a background color for the TOC header. Text Color: Set the color of the title text. Typography: Customize font family, size, weight, and line height. Icon Color: Define the color of any icons used in the header. Separator Width: Adjust the width of the separator line between the header and the content area. 3. List Style the list of items (anchors) displayed in the TOC: List Max Height: Set a maximum height for the list container. Typography: Customize the text style for the TOC items. Indent: Define the indentation for nested items to reflect hierarchy. Text Color: Choose the color for the list text. Underline: Optionally add underlines to the list items. Marker Color and Size: Style the list markers (bullets or indicators) with custom color and size settings. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome And that’s a wrap! You’ve now learned how to configure the Table of Contents Widget in Elementor to create a structured, easy-to-navigate layout for your content. This not only enhances user experience but also improves content accessibility. If you need any further help or have questions, our support team is always here for you! View Live Demo Flip Box The Flip Box Widget in Animation Addons for Elementor is a pro feature. To use this widget, make sure the plugin is properly installed and activated on your website. While you can browse both free and pro widgets using the filtering options, please note that the Flip Box Widget is available exclusively in the pro version. Introduction The Flip Box Widget in Animation Addons adds interactive flip boxes with hover effects, perfect for showcasing content with dynamic appeal. Key Use Cases for the Flip Box Widget: Create interactive flip boxes to showcase features, services, or portfolios. Customize design and hover effects to match your website’s style. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Flip Box Widget: Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Flip Box Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. The Flip Box Widget is now ready to use! How to Add Flip Box Widget in Elementor: Open the page where you want to add the Flip Box Widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Flip Box Widget.” Drag the widget to your desired section. The Flip Box Widget is now ready for customization! How to Configure Flip Box Widget In the Elementor panel, search for the “Flip Box Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into your desired section. From the widget settings, configure the front and back content of the flip box. Add elements such as icons, headings, descriptions, and buttons to create an engaging interactive experience. Choose your preferred flip direction and animation effect to define how the flip transition appears on hover. Use the available content and style options in the Elementor panel to customize the widget’s layout, typography, colors, borders, and more—ensuring it aligns seamlessly with your site’s overall design. Configuring Flip Box Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Flip Box Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content, Style, and Advanced. Content Settings Within the Content section of the Flip Box Widget, you’ll find three primary customization panels: Flip Box, Settings, and Button. Flip Box This panel allows you to define content for both the front and back sides of the flip box.Key customization options include: Content Type: Choose between icon, image, or custom content. Icon Type: Select from various icon libraries. Icon: Upload or choose an icon. Title: Add a title for each side and set the appropriate HTML tag. Content: Insert content using the visual editor, media uploader, or code editor for flexibility in formatting. Settings Control the overall behavior and presentation of the flip box: Flip Box Type: Choose the animation direction (e.g., horizontal or vertical flip). 3D Depth: Enable or disable 3D flipping effects. Height: Set a fixed or responsive height for the box. Link Type: Define if the entire box or just the button will act as a clickable link. Button Customize the optional call-to-action button located on the back side of the flip box: Style & Hover Style: Choose button design styles for normal and hover states. Text & Link: Add button text and destination URL. Icon Options: Add an icon, choose its position (before or after text), define direction, and set icon spacing for alignment and spacing control. Style Settings The Style section of the Flip Box Widget allows you to fine-tune the design and appearance of each element to match your site’s branding. You’ll find customization panels for the Flip Box, Front Icon, Back Icon, Title/Content, and Button. Flip Box Control the overall appearance of both the front and back sides of the flip box: Front Background: Choose a solid color or apply a custom background using the Background Type option. Back Background: Set the Background Color and select a Background Type (classic, gradient, etc.). Padding: Adjust internal spacing. Border Type: Define the border style (solid, dashed, etc.). Border Shadow: Add shadow effects for depth. Border Radius: Apply rounded corners. Front Icon Style the icon displayed on the front side: Icon Color: Set the color of the icon itself. Icon Background Color: Customize the background behind the icon. Size & Padding: Adjust the icon size and internal spacing. Border Type & Radius: Apply border styles and rounded edges for enhanced design. Back Icon Customize the icon on the back side similarly to the front: Icon Color & Background Color Size & Padding Border Type & Radius Title/Content Independently style the front and back text content: Title Style: Configure Color, Typography, and Margin. Content Style: Adjust Color, Typography, and Margin for body text or descriptions. Button Design and enhance the call-to-action button on the back side: Typography: Set font style, weight, and size. Icon Size: Customize the size of the icon (if used). Text Color & Background Type: Adjust the button text color and background. Border Type & Radius: Apply desired border styles and rounded corners. Padding & Margin: Control spacing inside and around the button. Box Shadow: Add shadows for visual depth and emphasis. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome Congratulations! You’ve now mastered how to configure the Flip Box Widget in Elementor to create interactive and visually engaging content. Customize the flip box to showcase features, services, or portfolios effectively. If you need any assistance or have questions, our support team is here to help! View Live Demo Advanced Accordion The Advanced Accordion Widget in Animation Addons for Elementor is a pro feature. To use this widget, make sure the plugin is installed and activated on your site. While you can browse both free and pro widgets using the filtering options, this specific widget is available only in the pro version. Introduction The Advanced Accordion Widget in Animation Addons for Elementor lets you create interactive, collapsible content sections, offering a sleek and customizable design to enhance user experience. Key Use Cases for the Advanced Accordion Widget: Organize content into interactive, collapsible sections for better navigation. Customize the design to match your website’s style and improve user experience. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Advanced Accordion Widget: Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Advanced Accordion Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. The Advanced Accordion Widget is now ready to use! How to Add the Advanced Accordion Widget in Elementor: Open the page where you want to add the Advanced Accordion Widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Advanced Accordion Widget. Drag the widget to your desired section. How to Configure Advanced Accordion Widget In the Elementor panel, search for the “Advanced Accordion Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into your desired section on the page. From the widget settings, add accordion items by entering the title and content for each section. You can enable icons, set active toggle behavior, and adjust animation settings for smoother user interaction. Use the Style tab to customize the appearance—adjust typography, spacing, colors, borders, and hover effects to ensure the accordion matches your site’s branding and design. Configuring Advanced Accordion Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide After adding the Advanced Accordion Widget to your page, you can customize its settings through the Content, Style, and Advanced tabs. Content Settings Under the Content tab, you’ll find the Accordion panel, where you can manage and configure your accordion items: Accordion Items: Add as many accordion items as needed. Each item includes a title and content area to display detailed information. Icon: Choose an icon to indicate the expandable section state. Active Icon: Set a distinct icon to display when the accordion item is opened. Title HTML Tag: Define the semantic tag (e.g., H1–H6) for the accordion titles to support SEO and content hierarchy. First Item Opened: Toggle to enable the first accordion item to be expanded by default. FAQ Schema: Enable this to apply structured data markup, helping search engines recognize the accordion content as FAQs for better visibility in search results. Style Settings The Style tab allows you to fine-tune the appearance of your accordion for a polished and branded design. The available customization areas include: Accordion Border Width: Define the thickness of the border surrounding each accordion item. Border Color: Choose a color for the item borders. Border Radius: Adjust the roundness of the item corners. Item Gap: Set the spacing between each accordion item. Count Color: Select a color for the numeric or symbol counter (if used). Typography: Customize the font style, size, weight, and more. Padding: Adjust spacing around the count element. Title Alignment: Set the horizontal alignment of the title text. Background: Choose a background color or gradient for the title area. Color: Define the default title text color. Active Color: Choose a different text color for the active (open) accordion item. Typography: Control the font settings for the title text. Text Stroke: Apply a stroke effect to the title text. Text Shadow: Add shadow to the title for a layered look. Padding: Set spacing inside the title area. Icon Size: Adjust the dimensions of the expand/collapse icon. Alignment: Set the icon position relative to the title. Color: Choose the default icon color. Active Color: Define the color for the icon when the item is open. Spacing: Adjust space between the icon and the title. Content Background: Set a background color or style for the content area. Color: Choose a text color for the content. Typography: Customize the font settings for the content text. Text Shadow: Add shadow for depth or emphasis. Padding: Control spacing inside the content box. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome Congratulations! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Advanced Accordion Widget in Elementor to create interactive and collapsible content sections. For any further assistance or inquiries, feel free to contact our support team. View Live Demo Advanced Pricing Table The Advanced Pricing Table Widget in Animation Addons for Elementor is a paid feature. To use this widget, ensure the plugin is installed and activated on your site. You can explore both free and pro widgets using the filtering options, but this specific widget is available only in the pro version. Introduction The Advanced Pricing Table Widget in Animation Addons for Elementor lets you create customizable, visually appealing pricing tables that seamlessly match your website’s design. Key Use Cases for the Advanced Pricing Table Widget: Display and compare pricing plans in an organized, visually appealing layout. Customize the design to align with your website’s branding. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Advanced Pricing Table Widget: Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Advanced Pricing Table Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. The Advanced Pricing Table Widget is now ready to use! How to Add the Advanced Pricing Table Widget in Elementor: Open the page where you want to add the Advanced Pricing Table Widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Advanced Pricing Table Widget.” Drag the widget to your desired section. How to Configure Advanced Pricing Table Widget In the Elementor panel, search for the “Advanced Pricing Table Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into your desired section. From the widget settings, add your pricing plans by entering the title, price, features, and button text. You can highlight a featured plan and adjust alignment, icons, and labels as needed. Use the Style tab to customize colors, typography, spacing, and borders to match your site’s design. Configuring Advanced Pricing Table Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide After adding the Advanced Pricing Table Widget to your page, you can customize its settings through the Content, Style, and Advanced tabs. Content Settings The Content section of the Advanced Pricing Table Widget includes multiple customization options to help you design an engaging and informative pricing layout. The following settings are available: 1. Pricing Table Choose between two styles of pricing table layouts to best match your website’s design. 2. Layout Arrange the structure of your table by toggling the visibility of key sections: Header & Pricing Feature Button 3. Header Customize the top portion of the pricing table: Icon: Add an icon to visually represent the plan. Title: Enter the plan name. Title HTML Tag: Define semantic hierarchy (e.g., H2, H3). Subtitle: Include a brief description or subtitle. 4. Pricing Display and format pricing details: Currency Symbol Price and Sale Price Billing Period (per month, per year) 5. Feature List included features like: Title of the feature section Custom feature items such as: Starter Pack Included Budget Minimization Venue Booking Personal Trainer 6. Button Configure your CTA button with the following options: Style & Hover Style: Choose button appearances for normal and hover states. Text: Add CTA text (e.g., Get Started) Link: Set a destination URL Icon: Add an icon and define its position, direction, and spacing 7. Ribbon Display a visual label (“Popular”, “Best Value”): Show Button: Enable or disable the ribbon Title: Enter the ribbon text Style Settings The Style section provides detailed control over the visual appearance of each part of the pricing table. It includes six major areas: 1. Pricing Table Padding: Adjust internal spacing for the entire pricing table container. 2. Header Title: Set color, typography, padding, and alignment. Subtitle: Customize color, typography, padding, and alignment. Icon: Modify color, size, margin, and alignment. Background Type: Choose a background style (solid, gradient, image). Border Type: Select border style (solid, dashed, etc.). Border Radius: Round the corners. Header Top Background: Define a unique background for the top header section. 3. Pricing Price Color and Typography Currency Symbol Typography Vertical Alignment: Align pricing content vertically. Period: Customize color and typography. Background Color and Padding Alignment: Align the pricing section content. 4. Features Title: Set color, typography, and margin. List Items: Customize: Text Color and Typography Icon Size Icon Spacing Gap between features Padding: Adjust spacing within the feature section. Border Type and Alignment 5. Button Style the call-to-action button using: Typography and Icon Size Text Color and Background Type Border Type, Border Radius, and Box Shadow Padding, Alignment, and Margin 6. Ribbon Define the look of the label/ribbon: Text Color and Typography Background Color Transform (e.g., rotate or skew) Border Radius and Padding Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome You’re all set! The Advanced Pricing Table Widget is now ready to highlight your pricing plans in a clear and attractive way. Need help or have questions? Our support team is just a message away. View Live Demo Filterable Gallery The Filterable Gallery Widget in Animation Addons for Elementor is a pro feature. To use it, make sure the plugin is installed and activated on your website. While you can browse both free and pro widgets using the filtering options, this specific widget is only accessible in the pro version. Introduction The Filterable Gallery Widget lets you display images with interactive filters for a clean and organized look. Key Use Cases for the Filterable Gallery Widget: Showcase images in categories with interactive filters. Customize layout and style to match your website’s design. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Filterable Gallery Widget: Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Filterable Gallery Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. The Filterable Gallery Widget is now ready to use! How to Add Filterable Gallery Widget in Elementor: Open the page where you want to add the Filterable Gallery Widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Filterable Gallery Widget.” Drag the widget to your desired section. How to Configure Filterable Gallery Widget In the Elementor panel, search for the “Filterable Gallery Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into your desired section. Add your gallery items with images, titles, and categories. Enable filtering options to let users sort content by category. Use the Style tab to customize layout, spacing, typography, hover effects, and colors to match your website’s design. Configuring Filterable Gallery Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Filterable Gallery Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content, Style, and Advanced. Content Settings In the Content section, you’ll find the following options: Layout: Customize the display style of the gallery, such as grid or masonry layout. Filter: Add categories or tags to enable filtering of gallery items. Gallery: Upload and manage the images or items that will appear in the gallery. Style Settings In the Style tab, you can fine-tune the design of your filterable gallery using the following sections: 1. Layout Gap – Adjust the spacing between gallery items. Row Height – Define the vertical height of each gallery row. 2. Filter Padding – Control the internal spacing of the filter buttons. Gap – Set the space between individual filter items. Margin – Define outer spacing around the filter area. Typography – Customize the font style, size, and weight of filter text. Text Color – Choose a color for the filter text. Background Type – Set a background color or gradient for the filter buttons. Alignment – Align filter options (left, center, or right) within the section. 3. Gallery Border Radius – Apply rounded corners to gallery item images. Play Button – Customize the Size and Color of the play button shown on video items within the gallery. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome Congratulations! You’ve now successfully set up the Filterable Gallery Widget in Elementor to showcase your images with easy-to-use filter options. If you need any further help or have any questions, don’t hesitate to reach out to our support team. View Live Demo Image Accordion The Image Accordion Widget in Animation Addons for Elementor is a pro feature. To use this widget, make sure the plugin is installed and activated on your site. You can browse both free and pro widgets using the filtering options, but this specific widget is available only in the pro version. Introduction The Image Accordion Widget in Animation Addons for Elementor displays images in a collapsible accordion style, offering a clean, interactive way to showcase images. Key Use Cases for the Image Accordion Widget: Display images in a compact, interactive accordion style. Enhance user experience with a clean, organized image gallery. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Image Accordion Widget: Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Image Accordion Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Image Accordion Widget is ready to use! How to Add the Image Accordion Widget in Elementor: Open the page where you want to add the Image Accordion Widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Image Accordion Widget.” Drag the widget to your desired section. How to Configure Image Accordion Widget In the Elementor panel, search for the “Image Accordion Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into your desired section. Add accordion items by uploading images and setting titles, descriptions, and links. Adjust the accordion behavior such as direction, interaction type, and expanded panel. Use the Style tab to customize image size, spacing, typography, overlay effects, and colors to align with your website’s design. Configuring Image Accordion Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide After adding the Image Accordion Widget to your page, you can customize its settings by navigating through the Content, Style, and Advanced tabs. Content Settings In the Content section of the Image Accordion Widget, you will find two main options: Image Accordion: This is where you can upload and configure the images to be displayed in the accordion. You can add multiple images, set titles, and descriptions for each accordion item. Button: You can enable or disable a button for each accordion item. If enabled, you can customize the button text and link to direct users to another page or section. Style Settings In the Style section of the Image Accordion Widget, you have two main options to customize: Content: Customize the appearance of the images, titles, and descriptions within the accordion. You can adjust spacing, typography, and image alignment to match your design. Button: Customize the button’s appearance, including font size, color, background, border, and hover effects, allowing you to match the button’s style to your website’s theme. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Image Accordion Widget in Elementor to create an engaging, interactive image section with titles, descriptions, and custom links. For any further assistance or inquiries, feel free to contact our support. View Live Demo Scroll Elements The Scroll Elements Widget in Animation Addons for Elementor is a Pro feature. To use this widget, ensure the plugin is properly installed and activated on your website. You can explore both free and pro widgets using the filtering options, but this specific widget is available only in the pro version. Introduction The Scroll Elements Widget adds interactive scroll animations to your content, enhancing user experience with dynamic effects as users scroll. Key Use Cases for the Scroll Elements Widget: Add dynamic scroll animations to your content for better user engagement. Customize the scroll effects to align with your website’s design and branding. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Scroll Elements Widget: Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Scroll Elements Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Scroll Elements Widget is ready to use! How to Add Scroll Elements Widget in Elementor: Open the page where you want to add the Scroll Elements Widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Scroll Elements Widget.” Drag the widget to your desired section. How to Configure Scroll Elements Widget : In the Elementor panel, search for the “Scroll Elements Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into your desired section. Add your content elements and define how each should behave during scroll—like fade, slide, rotate, or zoom. Adjust trigger settings, scroll distance, and animation direction for dynamic effects. Use the Style tab to refine the appearance—customize spacing, colors, typography, and motion styles to match your website’s design. Configuring Scroll Elements Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Scroll Elements Widget is placed on your page, you can configure its settings by navigating through the following tabs: Content, Style, and Advanced. Each tab offers specific customization options to adjust the widget’s behavior and appearance according to your design requirements. Content Settings In the Content section, you have three key customization options: Scroll Contents, Settings, and Scroll Navigation/Title. Each option allows you to adjust specific aspects of the Scroll Elements widget, such as the content structure, widget behavior, and navigation settings- Scroll Contents: This section allows you to add and manage the content that will appear within the scrollable area. You can customize the content displayed in each scrollable section, such as text, images, or other widgets. Settings: Here, you can control the behavior of the scroll element. Options include adjusting the scroll speed, direction, and enabling/disabling auto-scroll, among other settings to fine-tune the scroll effect. Scroll Navigation/Title: This section allows you to manage the navigation controls, including setting up the scroll navigation buttons or titles. You can customize the appearance and functionality of the navigation controls to improve the user experience. Style Settings In the Style section, you’ll find customization options for Scroll Navigation/Title, Image, and Content– Scroll Navigation/Title: In this section, you can customize the appearance of the scroll navigation buttons or titles. Adjust settings like color, typography, background, alignment, and spacing to align with your website’s design. Image: This section lets you style the images within your scrollable sections. You can modify settings such as image size, borders, margins, and shadows, giving you control over how the images appear within the scroll. Content: The content section enables you to style the text and other content within the scrollable area. You can adjust typography, font size, color, line height, padding, and other styling options to match your site’s theme and layout. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome In summary, the Scroll Elements Widget provides advanced customization options to create interactive scroll-based effects, enhancing both functionality and user engagement. For further assistance or inquiries, please contact our support team. View Live Demo Breadcrumbs The Breadcrumbs Widget in Animation Addons for Elementor is a paid feature. To use this widget, ensure the plugin is installed and activated on your site. You can explore both free and pro widgets using the filtering options, but this specific widget is available only in the pro version. Introduction The Breadcrumbs Widget in Animation Addons for Elementor enhances navigation by showing a trail of links, helping users track their location on your site. Key Use Cases for the Breadcrumbs Widget: Improve site navigation by displaying a clear path for users. Customize the breadcrumb design to align with your website’s branding. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Breadcrumbs Widget: Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Breadcrumbs Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Breadcrumbs Widget is ready to use! How to Configure Breadcrumbs Widget In the Elementor panel, search for the “Breadcrumbs Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into your desired section. The breadcrumb trail will automatically reflect the current page hierarchy. You can adjust the separator, alignment, and visibility of the home or end text. Use the Style tab to customize typography, spacing, colors, and hover effects to ensure it fits your site’s design. Configuring Breadcrumbs Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Breadcrumbs Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content and Advanced. Content Settings Note: To use the Breadcrumbs Widget from the Content section, you need to have Yoast SEO installed and activated on your site. If Yoast SEO is not activated, you won’t be able to use this feature. Please activate it first before proceeding. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Breadcrumbs Widget in Elementor to enhance your website’s navigation and improve user experience. For any further assistance or inquiries, please don’t hesitate to contact our support team. View Live Demo Author Box The Author Box Widget in Animation Addons for Elementor is a paid feature. To use this widget, ensure the plugin is installed and activated on your site. You can explore both free and pro widgets using the filtering options, but this specific widget is available only in the pro version. Introduction The Author Box Widget allows you to display author information at the end of your posts or pages, enhancing user engagement and providing an easy way to connect with content creators. Key Use Cases for the Author Box Widget: Display author information at the end of posts to engage readers. Customize the design to align with your website’s branding and style. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Author Box Widget: Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Author Box Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Author Box Widget is ready to use! How to Configure Author Box Widget In the Elementor panel, search for the “Author Box Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into your desired section. The widget will automatically fetch and display the author’s name, bio, and profile picture. You can choose to show or hide the avatar, name, bio, and link to the author’s archive page. Use the Style tab to adjust typography, spacing, alignment, colors, and image size to match your website’s design. Configuring Author Box Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Author Box Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content, Style, and Advanced. Content Settings In the Author Info section, you can customize elements like the source, profile picture and its size, display name with HTML tag, link, biography, archive button with custom text, layout style, and alignment—giving you full control over how the author details appear on your page. Style Settings Under the Style Settings, you’ll find three sections to customize your content’s appearance: Image, Text, and Button. Each section offers various styling options to enhance the overall design and match your site’s look and feel. 1. Image This section allows you to customize the appearance of the author’s profile picture. You can adjust settings such as border radius, size, box shadow, and margin/padding to match your website’s style and layout. 2. Text In the Text section, you can style all textual content including the display name, biography, and archive text. Customize font family, size, weight, line height, color, and spacing to ensure visual harmony with your site’s typography. 3. Button The Button section gives you control over the archive button’s appearance. You can personalize the button color, background, border, hover effects, padding, and typography for both normal and hover states to create an engaging call-to-action. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome Great job! You’ve now learned how to set up and customize the Mailchimp Widget in Elementor to easily add email subscription forms and expand your mailing list. If you need any more help or have questions, don’t hesitate to reach out to our support team. View Live Demo
Post Excerpt Before setting up the Post Excerpt Widget, ensure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. Once activated, you’ll have access to all free Elementor widgets, including the Post Excerpt Widget—completely free! Additionally, you can explore both free and pro widgets by filtering the selection options. Introduction The Post Excerpt Widget shows a short, customizable summary of your post to boost readability and engagement. Key Use Cases for the Post Excerpt widget The Post Excerpt Widget in Elementor is perfect for: Enhanced Readability – Display a concise summary of your posts to engage readers. Blog Layouts – Improve blog design by showing excerpts instead of full posts. Content Previews – Give visitors a sneak peek before they click to read more. Customization – Adjust excerpt length and styling to match your website’s aesthetics. Improved Navigation – Help users quickly find relevant content. With the Post Excerpt Widget, you can display post summaries dynamically, making your site more engaging and user-friendly. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate Post Excerpt Widget? To activate the Post Excerpt widget, follow these steps: Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Locate the Post Excerpt widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. How to Add the Post Excerpt Widget in Elementor Open the page where you want to add the Site Logo. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Site Logo.” Drag the Post Excerpt Widget to your desired section. The Post Excerpt Widget will now be available for customization. You can upload your logo, adjust its size, alignment, and link it to the homepage as needed. How to Configure Post Excerpt widget Enable it, create a new page, set a title, choose the Elementor Full Width template, and publish. Adjust options as needed. Enable the Widget from your dashboard (Animation Addons → Elements). Create a New Page, add a title, choose the Elementor Full Width template, and publish the page. Adjust page settings as needed. In the Elementor panel, search for the “Post Excerpt Widget.” Drag and Drop the widget into your desired section. The excerpt (summary) of the current post will display automatically. Customize the length, alignment, typography, and styling options to match your layout and design preferences. Configuring Post Excerpt Widget: A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Post Excerpt Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content, Style and Advanced. Content Settings There is only one option available: Content. Content Within the Content section of the Post Excerpt Widget, you’ll find a single setting group labeled Content. This section includes two primary configuration options: Limit and Alignment. Limit Function: This option allows you to define the number of words or characters displayed from the post excerpt. Usage: Adjust the limit to control how much of the excerpt is shown. This helps maintain layout consistency and ensures the summary remains concise. Effect: When you increase or decrease the limit, the length of the displayed post excerpt will change accordingly on the front end. Alignment Function: This controls the horizontal positioning of the excerpt text within its container. Available Options: Left, Center, Right, or Justify. Effect: Adjusting the alignment changes the visual layout of the excerpt, aligning it according to your selected preference. This helps with maintaining design uniformity across sections. These customization options help ensure that the excerpt content aligns well with your page design while also enhancing readability and layout balance. Style Settings The Style section allows you to customize the visual appearance of the post excerpt text, enabling better alignment with your website’s design aesthetics. Below are the available settings and their functions – Text Color Function: Defines the color of the excerpt text. Usage: Choose a color that matches or contrasts well with your background to maintain readability and visual appeal. Effect: The selected color is applied to the text, instantly updating its appearance. Typography Function: Controls font-related properties such as font family, size, weight, transform (uppercase, lowercase), style (italic, normal), line height, and letter spacing. Usage: Fine-tune how the excerpt text looks and feels. Effect: Adjustments reflect in real-time, allowing you to create consistent and polished typography across your site. Text Stroke Function: Adds an outline around the excerpt text. Usage: You can define the stroke width and color to emphasize text or create a stylistic effect. Effect: The text appears with a bordered outline, improving visibility and adding design impact. Text Shadow Function: Applies a shadow behind the excerpt text. Usage: Customize the blur, horizontal and vertical position, and shadow color. Effect: Adds depth and dimension to the text, helping it stand out, especially on visually busy backgrounds. Blend Mode Function: Determines how the excerpt text visually interacts with the background or surrounding elements- Available Modes Include: Multiply: Darkens the text by blending it with the background. Screen: Brightens the text using the background’s light areas. Overlay: Mixes multiply and screen modes for contrast. Darken / Lighten: Shows the darker or lighter parts of the blend. Color Dodge / Color Burn: Enhances contrast or saturation. Saturation / Hue / Color / Luminosity: Adjusts text based on background color properties. Difference / Exclusion: Creates effects by inverting background and text interaction. Effect: Each mode alters how the text appears in relation to its background, allowing for creative and advanced visual effects without additional graphic editing. These style settings ensure you have full control over the design and visibility of your post excerpt content, enabling a more dynamic and visually engaging presentation on your site. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Post Excerpt Widget in Elementor to create dynamic and engaging event displays on your website. For any further assistance or inquiries, feel free to contact our support team!
How To Get Support for Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor Having trouble or need help with Animation Addons for Elementor? No worries—this page will guide you through where to find answers and how to contact support if you need one-on-one help. Just follow the steps below to get the support you need. Step 1: Visit the Website First of all, visit the Animation Addons website and scroll down slightly—you’ll find the support section there. Step 2: Fill Out the Support Form Once you click on the Support section, the “Submit a Ticket” form will appear. Select the product “Animation Addons for Elementor Pro.” Next, paste your license key, then enter your email, password, and name to complete the registration. After that, provide the subject of your issue and include any relevant URLs. In the Description section, be sure to describe your issue in as much detail as possible. Finally, click “Submit Ticket” to complete the process. We hope these steps help you easily get the support you need for Animation Addons for Elementor. However, if you have any questions or need a hand, feel free to reach out to our support team—we’re always here to help.
Video Box Slider The Video Box Slider Widget in Animation Addons for Elementor is a paid feature. To use this widget, make sure the plugin is installed and activated on your site. You can explore both free and pro widgets through the filtering options, but this specific widget is only available in the pro version. Introduction The Video Box Slider Widget lets you showcase multiple videos in an interactive, engaging slider—perfect for enhancing user experience and visual presentation. Key Use Cases for the Video Box Slider Widget: Display multiple videos in an interactive slider for enhanced user engagement. Customize the design to match your website’s branding and layout seamlessly. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Video Box Slider Widget: Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Video Box Slider Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. The Video Box Slider Widget is now ready to use! How to Add the Video Box Slider Widget in Elementor: Open the page where you want to add the Video Box Slider Widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Video Box Slider Widget.” Drag the widget to your desired section. The Video Box Slider Widget is now ready for customization! How to Configure Video Box Slider Widget In the Elementor panel, search for the “Video Box Slider Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into your desired section. In the widget settings, add multiple video URLs and set custom thumbnails if needed.Customize the title, description, icons, and play button for each video slide. Use the Style tab to adjust typography, colors, spacing, borders, and shadows for a visually appealing slider. Configuring Video Box Slider Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Video Box Slider Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content,Style and Advanced. Content Settings The Video Box Slider Widget in Animation Addons for Elementor offers three main customization panels under the Content section: 1. Video Box Slider Video Slides: Add as many video slides as needed to showcase your content. Title HTML Tag: Define the HTML tag for slide titles to improve SEO and structure. Image Resolution: Set the image quality for thumbnails. Thumbnail After Button: Choose whether the thumbnail appears after the play button. Slider Max Width: Set the maximum width of the video slider for better layout control. 2. Button Text: Customize the button label. Icon: Choose an icon to accompany the text. Icon Spacing: Adjust spacing between icon and text. Active Ripple: Enable/disable ripple animation on button click. Ripple Color: Define the ripple animation color. Active Spinner: Add a loading spinner effect. Display: Control the button’s visibility and placement. 3. Slider Options Slides to Show: Define how many slides appear at once. Autoplay: Automatically cycle through video slides. Allow Touch Move: Enable swipe gestures for mobile users. Loop: Choose whether the slider loops continuously. Mousewheel Button: Allow mousewheel navigation. Animation Speed: Set how quickly slides transition. Space Between: Control spacing between each slide. Navigation Button: Toggle visibility of navigation arrows. Previous/Next Arrow Icon: Customize arrow icons. Pagination: Enable pagination bullets. Pagination Type: Select bullet or fraction style. Direction: Set slide direction (left/right). Center Slide: Highlight the center slide for better focus. Style Settings The Style section of the Video Box Slider Widget offers extensive design controls to help you fine-tune the appearance of every element. Below is a breakdown of each subsection and its available customization options: 1. Button Typography: Adjust font size, weight, line height, and more for the button text. Height & Width: Define the dimensions of the button for better alignment and balance. Border Type & Radius: Customize the border style and round the corners as desired. Box Shadow: Add shadow effects to create depth and emphasis. Text Color: Choose the color of the button text. Background Type: Set solid colors, gradients, or images for the button background. 2. Thumbnail Height: Set the height of the video thumbnail for consistent visual presentation. Padding: Control the spacing around the thumbnail. Border Radius: Apply rounded corners for a smoother look. 3. Content Padding: Manage the spacing inside the content area. Background Type: Define the background style using solid color, gradient, or image. Title Color: Set the color for the title text. Typography: Customize font settings for clarity and emphasis. Margin: Adjust spacing around the title. Subtitle Color: Choose a distinct color for subtitles. Typography: Modify font styles and sizes. Margin: Control the spacing around subtitle text. 4. Slider Navigation Size & Circle Size: Set the size of the navigation arrows and their circular backgrounds. Border Type & Radius: Apply border styles and curvature to navigation buttons. Padding: Adjust inner spacing within the navigation buttons. Color & Background Type: Style the arrow icons and their backgrounds. Position Type & Alignment: Define the positioning (absolute or relative) and align navigation arrows horizontally or vertically. Gap: Set spacing between previous and next navigation arrows. 5. Slider Pagination Color & Active Color: Choose default and active state colors for pagination bullets. Size & Gap: Adjust the size of pagination items and spacing between them. Border Type & Radius: Apply styles and rounded corners to the bullets. Direction: Set the pagination orientation (horizontal or vertical). Position & Alignment: Control the overall placement and alignment of the pagination. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Video Box Slider Widget in Elementor to showcase your videos in a dynamic slider format. For any further assistance or inquiries, feel free to contact our support. View Live Demo
Video Mask The Video Mask Widget in Animation Addons for Elementor is a premium feature. To access this widget, make sure the plugin is installed and activated on your site. While both free and pro widgets are available, the Video Mask Widget can only be used with the pro version of the plugin. Introduction The Video Mask Widget in Animation Addons for Elementor lets you add custom masks to videos, creating unique and engaging effects that enhance your website’s visual appeal. Key Use Cases for the Video Mask Widget: Add custom masks to videos for unique and eye-catching visual effects. Enhance your website’s design and create an interactive user experience with stunning video displays. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Video Mask Widget: Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Video Mask Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Video Mask Widget is ready to use! How to Add Video Mask Widget in Elementor: Open the page where you want to add the Video Mask Widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Video Mask Widget.” Drag the widget to your desired section. The Video Mask Widget is now ready for customization. How to Configure Video Mask Widget In the Elementor panel, search for the “Video Mask Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into your desired section on the page. In the widget settings, insert your video URL and choose a mask style to overlay on the video (e.g., shapes or SVG masks). Customize the mask position, size, and behavior based on your design requirements. Use the Style tab to refine the appearance by adjusting colors, borders, padding, and shadows for a visually cohesive look. Configuring Video Mask Widget: A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Video Mask Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content, Style, and Advanced. Content Settings The Video Mask Widget includes two main customization panels within the Content section: Button and Video. 1. Button Panel This panel allows you to control the button that overlays the video: Other Selection Text Tool: Provides optional text input or selection for custom labeling. Title: Add a title to the video mask section. Course Title: Insert a secondary label or contextual heading (commonly used for courses or categories). Play Icon: Select an icon to represent the play button. Icon Position: Define the icon’s placement relative to the button text (e.g., left, right). Offset: Adjust spacing between elements for better visual alignment. 2. Video Panel This panel configures the video source, behavior, and styling: Video Link: Paste the URL of the video to be displayed. Video Options: Toggle playback behaviors: Autoplay: Start video automatically. Mute: Mute audio on initial play. Playsinline: Ensures videos play inline on mobile devices. Loop Button: Enable looping for continuous playback. Poster: Upload a preview image that displays before the video plays. Mask: Shape: Select a mask shape to overlay the video. Size: Adjust the size of the mask relative to the video frame. Offset: Fine-tune the mask’s position. Border Type: Choose from solid, dashed, dotted, or none. Video Height: Define the video container height in pixels, % or viewport units. Style Settings The Style section of the Video Mask Widget provides design controls to fine-tune the visual appearance of the video, button, and related elements. It includes the following customization panels: 1. Gap Gap: Adjust the spacing between the button and content elements, allowing for flexible layout control and improved visual balance. 2. Alignment Alignment: Set the horizontal alignment (left, center, or right) of the button and text elements within the widget container. 3. Title Color: Define the default text color of the title. Typography: Customize the font family, size, weight, transform, and line height of the title to maintain consistency with your site’s text styling. 4. Icon Color: Set the default color of the play icon. Size: Adjust the size of the icon to fit your design requirements. 5. Hover Effects Hover Color: Change the title color when hovered over, adding interactivity and emphasis. Hover Icon Color: Set the color of the icon when a user hovers over the widget. 6. Active State Styling Active Title Color: Customize the title color when the video is actively playing. Active Icon Color: Define a distinct color for the play icon in the active state, helping users visually identify the current playback status. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Video Mask Widget in Elementor to create stunning video effects and enhance your website’s visual appeal. For any further assistance or inquiries, feel free to contact our support. View Live Demo
Flip Box The Flip Box Widget in Animation Addons for Elementor is a pro feature. To use this widget, make sure the plugin is properly installed and activated on your website. While you can browse both free and pro widgets using the filtering options, please note that the Flip Box Widget is available exclusively in the pro version. Introduction The Flip Box Widget in Animation Addons adds interactive flip boxes with hover effects, perfect for showcasing content with dynamic appeal. Key Use Cases for the Flip Box Widget: Create interactive flip boxes to showcase features, services, or portfolios. Customize design and hover effects to match your website’s style. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Flip Box Widget: Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Flip Box Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. The Flip Box Widget is now ready to use! How to Add Flip Box Widget in Elementor: Open the page where you want to add the Flip Box Widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Flip Box Widget.” Drag the widget to your desired section. The Flip Box Widget is now ready for customization! How to Configure Flip Box Widget In the Elementor panel, search for the “Flip Box Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into your desired section. From the widget settings, configure the front and back content of the flip box. Add elements such as icons, headings, descriptions, and buttons to create an engaging interactive experience. Choose your preferred flip direction and animation effect to define how the flip transition appears on hover. Use the available content and style options in the Elementor panel to customize the widget’s layout, typography, colors, borders, and more—ensuring it aligns seamlessly with your site’s overall design. Configuring Flip Box Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Flip Box Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content, Style, and Advanced. Content Settings Within the Content section of the Flip Box Widget, you’ll find three primary customization panels: Flip Box, Settings, and Button. Flip Box This panel allows you to define content for both the front and back sides of the flip box.Key customization options include: Content Type: Choose between icon, image, or custom content. Icon Type: Select from various icon libraries. Icon: Upload or choose an icon. Title: Add a title for each side and set the appropriate HTML tag. Content: Insert content using the visual editor, media uploader, or code editor for flexibility in formatting. Settings Control the overall behavior and presentation of the flip box: Flip Box Type: Choose the animation direction (e.g., horizontal or vertical flip). 3D Depth: Enable or disable 3D flipping effects. Height: Set a fixed or responsive height for the box. Link Type: Define if the entire box or just the button will act as a clickable link. Button Customize the optional call-to-action button located on the back side of the flip box: Style & Hover Style: Choose button design styles for normal and hover states. Text & Link: Add button text and destination URL. Icon Options: Add an icon, choose its position (before or after text), define direction, and set icon spacing for alignment and spacing control. Style Settings The Style section of the Flip Box Widget allows you to fine-tune the design and appearance of each element to match your site’s branding. You’ll find customization panels for the Flip Box, Front Icon, Back Icon, Title/Content, and Button. Flip Box Control the overall appearance of both the front and back sides of the flip box: Front Background: Choose a solid color or apply a custom background using the Background Type option. Back Background: Set the Background Color and select a Background Type (classic, gradient, etc.). Padding: Adjust internal spacing. Border Type: Define the border style (solid, dashed, etc.). Border Shadow: Add shadow effects for depth. Border Radius: Apply rounded corners. Front Icon Style the icon displayed on the front side: Icon Color: Set the color of the icon itself. Icon Background Color: Customize the background behind the icon. Size & Padding: Adjust the icon size and internal spacing. Border Type & Radius: Apply border styles and rounded edges for enhanced design. Back Icon Customize the icon on the back side similarly to the front: Icon Color & Background Color Size & Padding Border Type & Radius Title/Content Independently style the front and back text content: Title Style: Configure Color, Typography, and Margin. Content Style: Adjust Color, Typography, and Margin for body text or descriptions. Button Design and enhance the call-to-action button on the back side: Typography: Set font style, weight, and size. Icon Size: Customize the size of the icon (if used). Text Color & Background Type: Adjust the button text color and background. Border Type & Radius: Apply desired border styles and rounded corners. Padding & Margin: Control spacing inside and around the button. Box Shadow: Add shadows for visual depth and emphasis. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome Congratulations! You’ve now mastered how to configure the Flip Box Widget in Elementor to create interactive and visually engaging content. Customize the flip box to showcase features, services, or portfolios effectively. If you need any assistance or have questions, our support team is here to help! View Live Demo
Animated Text Before setting up the Animated Text Widget , make sure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. Once activated, you’ll have access to all free Elementor widgets, including the Animated Text Widget—at no cost! Additionally, you can explore both free and pro widgets by filtering the selection options. Introduction Animated Text in the Elementor Addon adds dynamic effects like fade, slide, and bounce to boost visual appeal and engagement. Key Use Cases for Animated Text in Elementor Addons Use animated text to highlight key messages, create engaging headers, or add emphasis to call-to-action buttons. Enhance page introductions, promotional banners, or event announcements with dynamic text effects. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Search No Result Widget? Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Search No Result widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Search No Result widget is ready to use! How to Add the Animated Text Widget in Elementor: Open the page where you want to add the Animated Text widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Animated Text Widget.” Drag the widget to your desired section. The Animated Text widget is now ready for customization. How to Configure the Animated Text Widget in Animation Addons? In the Elementor panel, search for the “Animated Text Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into the desired section. Customize the widget settings using the available options in the Elementor panel. Your Animated Text Widget is now ready to use! Here’s the interface where you can configure the settings and customize the Animated Text across various tabs for a personalized effect. Configuring Animated Text Widget in Animation Addons: A Step-by-Step Guide The Animated Text Widget can be added anywhere in Elementor, with three main settings: Content, Style, and Advanced. In the Content settings, you’ll find two options: Content, and the Text Animation Feature is available in the editor panel. Animations require the Pro version. Content Settings The Tab lets you choose your preferred image, adjust its resolution, and set the alignment. Text Animation And, explore the special Text Animation feature of our widget, which offers a variety of amazing animation categories with customization options for smooth transitions. We offer different animation categories under it, including Characters, Word, Text Move, and Text Reveal. Characters Animates each character of the text individually, often used for effects like typing or fading in one letter at a time. In the Characters animation, you’ll find several customization options: Enable Editor Toggle: When toggled on, this allows you to preview and edit the animation directly in the editor. If toggled off, the editor preview is disabled, and you’ll need to manually adjust settings. With the editor enabled, you can also click the Play Animation button to see how your animation will look after applying all the customizations. Delay: Controls the delay time before the animation starts. You can adjust this to set a specific time after the page loads before the animation begins. Duration: Adjust the length of the animation. Increasing the duration will make the animation slower, while decreasing it will make it faster. Stagger: This option controls the delay between the appearance of each character. A higher value will stagger the animation more, making each character appear with a delay after the other. Consider a sentence like: “Welcome to Our Website!” When you set the Stagger option: Low Stagger (0.1 seconds): Each character will appear quickly after the previous one. For example, “W” will appear first, then “e” will appear 0.1 seconds later, followed by “l” after another 0.1 seconds, and so on. The delay between each character’s appearance is minimal, creating a smooth, quick animation effect. High Stagger (0.5 seconds): A longer delay will be applied between the appearance of each character. “W” will appear first, followed by “e” after a 0.5-second delay, then “l” after another 0.5 seconds, and so on. This creates a more dramatic effect with noticeable gaps between each character’s appearance. Animation on Scroll Toggle: When toggled on, the animation will trigger as the user scrolls down the page. If toggled off, the animation will occur immediately when the page is loaded, regardless of the scroll position. Transform X & Y: These options allow you to adjust the movement of the text along the X and Y axes (left/right and up/down), giving you precise control over the direction of the animation. The values are measured in pixels (px), meaning you can specify how far the text moves in each direction. X-Axis (left/right): Controls horizontal movement. Positive values move the text to the right, while negative values move it to the left. Note: Positive values (+) move the text to the right & Negative values (−) move the text to the left. Y-Axis (up/down): Controls vertical movement. Positive values move the text down, and negative values move it up. Note: Positive values (+) move the text down & Negative values (−) move the text up. Breakpoint: This option allows you to set the animation’s behavior on different screen sizes (desktop, tablet, mobile), ensuring a responsive experience across devices. Text Move: Moves the entire text across the screen, with various directions and speeds for dynamic transitions. Text Reveal: Reveals the text progressively, such as through a wiping or fading effect, giving a more dramatic entrance. These settings give you full control over the timing, direction, and responsiveness of the animated text, allowing you to fine-tune the animation and preview it before finalizing the changes. Word In the Word animation category, you have several customization options: Enable Editor Toggle: When toggled on, this option lets you preview and edit the animation directly in the Elementor editor. If toggled off, the animation preview is disabled, and you’ll need to adjust settings manually. With the editor enabled, you can click the Play Animation button to see how the animation looks after applying all customizations. Delay: This controls the time delay before the animation starts for each word. Adjusting the delay will determine how long after the page load the animation will begin for each word. Duration: Adjusts how long the animation will take to complete for each word. A longer duration will make the animation slower, while a shorter duration will speed it up. Stagger: This option controls how much of a delay there will be between each word’s animation. Increasing the stagger time will make each word appear one after another with a delay, while a lower value will make them appear more quickly. Consider a sentence like: “Welcome to Our Website!”, When you set the Stagger option: Low Stagger (0.1 seconds): Each word will appear quickly after the previous one. For example, “Explore” will appear first, then “Our” will appear 0.1 seconds later, followed by “Features!” after another 0.1 seconds. The delay between each word’s appearance is minimal, creating a smooth and fast animation effect. High Stagger (0.5 seconds): A longer delay will be applied between the appearance of each word. “Explore” will appear first, followed by “Our” after a 0.5-second delay, then “Features!” after another 0.5 seconds. This creates a more dramatic effect with noticeable gaps between the appearance of each word. Animation on Scroll Toggle: When toggled on, the animation will trigger as the user scrolls down the page. If toggled off, the animation will play immediately when the page loads, regardless of the user’s scroll position. Transform X & Y: Adjusting Movement for Word Animation (X and Y Axes) – These options allow you to adjust the movement of each word along the X and Y axes (left/right and up/down), giving you precise control over the direction of the animation. The values are measured in pixels (px), allowing you to specify how far the words move in each direction. X-Axis (left/right): Controls horizontal movement. Positive values (+) move the word to the right. Negative values (−) move the word to the left. Example: If you set the X-Axis value to +50px, the word will shift 50px to the right. If you set it to -50px, the word will shift 50px to the left. Y-Axis (up/down): Controls vertical movement. Y-Axis (up/down): Controls vertical movement. Positive values (+) move the word down. Negative values (−) move the word up. Example: If you set the Y-Axis value to +30px, the word will move 30px down. If you set it to -30px, the word will move 30px up. Breakpoint: This option allows you to set custom breakpoints for different screen sizes (desktop, tablet, and mobile). You can adjust how the animation behaves on various devices, ensuring the animation is responsive and adapts well to different screen sizes. Text Move In the Text Move animation category, you have several customization options: Enable Editor Toggle: When toggled on, this option lets you preview and edit the animation directly in the Elementor editor. If toggled off, the animation preview is disabled, and you’ll need to adjust settings manually. With the editor enabled, you can click the Play Animation button to see how the animation looks after applying all customizations. Delay: Controls the time delay before the animation starts for the text. Adjusting the delay determines how long after the page load the animation will begin. Duration: Adjusts how long the animation will take to complete for the text. A longer duration will make the animation slower, while a shorter duration will speed it up. Stagger: Controls the delay between each text’s animation. Increasing the stagger time will make each piece of text appear one after another with a delay, while a lower value will make them appear more quickly. Animation on Scroll Toggle: When toggled on, the animation will trigger as the user scrolls down the page. If toggled off, the animation will play immediately when the page loads, regardless of the user’s scroll position. Transform X & Y: These options allow you to move the text along the X (left/right) and Y (up/down) axes. By adjusting these, you can create dynamic movement effects for the text during the animation. Rotation Direction: This option lets you choose the direction in which the text will rotate (clockwise or counterclockwise). It adds a rotating effect to the text during the animation. Rotation Value: Controls how much the text will rotate. You can set the angle of rotation in degrees. Positive values will rotate clockwise, and negative values will rotate counterclockwise. Transform Origin: Defines the point from which the text will rotate. You can choose a starting point such as top left, top right, center, bottom left, or bottom right, giving you more control over the rotation effect. Breakpoint: This option allows you to set custom breakpoints for different screen sizes (desktop, tablet, and mobile). You can adjust how the animation behaves on various devices, ensuring the animation is responsive and adapts well to different screen sizes. Text Reveal In the Text Reveal animation category, you have the following customization options: Enable Editor Toggle: When toggled on, you can directly preview and edit the animation within the Elementor editor. If toggled off, the editor view is disabled, and you’ll need to apply and test the animation manually. With the editor enabled, you can use the Play Animation button to preview how the animation looks after all customizations. Delay: This controls the delay before the text reveal animation starts. You can set a time (in seconds) after the page loads for the text to begin its animation. Duration: Adjusts how long the text reveal animation will last. A shorter duration will make the animation happen more quickly, while a longer duration will slow it down. Stagger: Controls the delay between each text reveal. A higher stagger time will reveal each part of the text one after another with a delay, creating a sequential effect. Animation on Scroll Toggle: When enabled, the animation will only trigger when the user scrolls to the section with the animated text. If disabled, the animation will play immediately as the page loads. Breakpoint: This option allows you to define how the text reveal animation behaves on different screen sizes (desktop, tablet, and mobile). You can set custom animations for each device type, ensuring responsiveness and an optimal experience across devices. These customizations offer you complete control over the timing, sequencing, and behavior of the text reveal animation, allowing you to tailor it to fit your design needs and enhance user interaction. Style Settings The Style section in Elementor allows you to customize the appearance of your text. Style: You can customize the text color, typography (font, size, weight), add text shadows, and adjust link styles, including hover effects. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve now learned how to configure the Animated Text Widget in Elementor to effectively customize and display dynamic text on your website. If you need further assistance, feel free to reach out to our support team! View Live Demo
Animations Widgets Articles Typewriter Animations Title Animated Text Animated Heading Lottie GSAP DrawSvg Animated Title Typewriter Before setting up the Typewriter Widget, make sure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. Once activated, you’ll get access to all free Elementor widgets, including the Typewriter Widget—completely free! You can also explore both free and pro widgets by using the filter options. Introduction The Typewriter Widget in Animation Addons for Elementor adds engaging text animations with a typewriter effect, ideal for headlines or quotes. Here’s how to configure it for your website. Key Use Cases for the Typewriter Widget in Elementor: Use the Typewriter widget to create dynamic headlines, engaging text animations, and showcase quotes or testimonials with a unique effect. Perfect for landing pages and calls to action. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Typewriter Widget? Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Typewriter Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Typewriter Widget is ready to use! How to Add the Typewriter Widget in Elementor: Open the page where you want to add the Typewriter widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Typewriter Widget.” Drag the widget to your desired section. How to Configure the Typewriter Widget in Animation Addons? In the Elementor panel, search for the “Typewriter Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into the desired section. Customize the typewriter settings using the available options in the Elementor panel. Your Typewriter Widget is now ready to use! Here’s the interface where you can configure the settings and customize the text animation across various tabs for a personalized effect. Configuring Typewriter Widget in Animation Addons: A Step-by-Step Guide The Typewriter widget is available in Elementor and can be placed on the desired section of the page. It offers three main settings tabs: Content, Style and Advanced. In the Content settings of the Typewriter Widget, you will find the “Content” option, where you can input the text that will appear with the typewriter effect. Content Settings In the Content section of the Typewriter Widget, you have: Non-Animated Text: Adds static text alongside the animation. Animated Text List: Creates a sequence of animated text items. HTML Tag: Adds HTML tags for styling. Alignment: Controls text alignment (left, center, right). Style Settings In the Style section of the Typewriter Widget, you have: Text Color: Changes the color of your text. Select any color for text to match your design. Typography: Adjusts font family, size, weight, and style. Customize the appearance of text for better readability or style. Text Stroke: Adds an outline around the text. Defines the thickness and color of the text’s border. Text Shadow: Applies a shadow effect behind the text. Adds depth and contrast for a more dynamic look. Line Color: Changes the color of the text’s underline. Customize the underline color to match or highlight text. Advance Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! Now you know how to configure the Typewriter Widget in Elementor to add engaging text animations to your website. If you need any further assistance, feel free to contact our support team! View Live Demo Animations Title Introduction Want your titles to pop? The Animated Title Widget adds animations to your text, making it more engaging and fun for your website visitors. Key Use Cases for the Image Widget in Elementor: Use the Animated Title widget to create eye-catching headlines for your homepage or landing pages. Highlight key services or promotions with dynamic animated text to engage visitors. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor Note: Ensure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated. Then, enable the Animated Title Widget toggle from the plugin settings. How to Activate an Image Widget ? To activate the Animated Title Widget, navigate to Animation Addons → Elements in the admin dashboard. Then, select the Widget tab, search for the Animated Title Widget, and toggle it on. The widget will be activated immediately. How to Configure the Animated Title Widget in Animation Addons? Enable it, create a new page, set a title, choose the Elementor Full Width template, and publish. Adjust options as needed. Note: Selecting full Elementor elements in a template unlocks all widgets and customization options, boosting design flexibility and functionality. Navigate to the Edit with Elementor option to access the editor interface. After selection, the Elementor panel appears with all tools and customization options. Click the “+” icon to add a container, then select the appropriate column structure and layout. In the Elementor Editor, click the ‘+’ icon to add a section. Search for the “Animated Title”, then drag and drop it into the desired section of the page. Configure the widget settings under the available tabs to customize it as needed. Here’s the interface where you can configure the settings and customize the Animated Title Widget across various tabs. Configuring Animated Title Widget: A Step-by-Step Guide The Animated Title Widget is available in Elementor and can be placed on the desired section of the page. It offers three main settings tabs: Content, Style, and Advanced. Content Settings The Content section lets you choose your preferred image, adjust its resolution, and set the alignment. This is the Content section of the Animated Title Widget in Elementor. Here’s what each option does: Title: Enter your desired text. You can highlight parts of the text by enclosing them in square brackets [ ]. Show Prefix: Toggle this option to display or hide a prefix before the title. HTML Tag: Choose the appropriate HTML heading tag (H1, H2, H3, etc.) for SEO and design structure. Alignment: Adjust the title’s alignment to left, center, right, or justified for proper positioning on the page. —————————————————————————————————————————- Animation text And, explore the optional Text Animation section to apply effects for smooth transitions. Note: Animations require the Pro version of the plugin. —————————————————————————————————————————– Style Settings The Style section includes two sections: Title and Prefix. This is the Style section of the Animated Title Widget in Elementor. Here’s what each option does: Title Styling Text Color: Defines the title text color, allowing customization for better visibility and design consistency. Typography: Controls font properties, including style, size, weight, and letter spacing for enhanced readability. Text Stroke: Applies an outline effect to the text, improving emphasis and contrast. Text Shadow: Adds shadow effects to create depth and highlight the text. Blend Mode: Determines how the text interacts with the background for seamless integration. Prefix Color: Choose a color to highlight specific words in the title. Background Type: Select a solid color or gradient for the highlight. Typography: Customize the highlighted text font style. Text Stroke: Apply an outline effect to the highlighted text. Text Shadow: Add shadow effects for better contrast. Blend Mode: Adjust how the highlight blends with the background. So, you’ve completed all the customizations! Here’s the final output: —————————————————————————————————————————– Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. —————————————————————————————————————————– Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve now learned how to configure the Animated Title Widget in Elementor to effectively customize and display images on your website. If you need further assistance, don’t hesitate to reach out to our support team! Animated Text Before setting up the Animated Text Widget , make sure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. Once activated, you’ll have access to all free Elementor widgets, including the Animated Text Widget—at no cost! Additionally, you can explore both free and pro widgets by filtering the selection options. Introduction Animated Text in the Elementor Addon adds dynamic effects like fade, slide, and bounce to boost visual appeal and engagement. Key Use Cases for Animated Text in Elementor Addons Use animated text to highlight key messages, create engaging headers, or add emphasis to call-to-action buttons. Enhance page introductions, promotional banners, or event announcements with dynamic text effects. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Search No Result Widget? Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Search No Result widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Search No Result widget is ready to use! How to Add the Animated Text Widget in Elementor: Open the page where you want to add the Animated Text widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Animated Text Widget.” Drag the widget to your desired section. The Animated Text widget is now ready for customization. How to Configure the Animated Text Widget in Animation Addons? In the Elementor panel, search for the “Animated Text Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into the desired section. Customize the widget settings using the available options in the Elementor panel. Your Animated Text Widget is now ready to use! Here’s the interface where you can configure the settings and customize the Animated Text across various tabs for a personalized effect. Configuring Animated Text Widget in Animation Addons: A Step-by-Step Guide The Animated Text Widget can be added anywhere in Elementor, with three main settings: Content, Style, and Advanced. In the Content settings, you’ll find two options: Content, and the Text Animation Feature is available in the editor panel. Animations require the Pro version. Content Settings The Tab lets you choose your preferred image, adjust its resolution, and set the alignment. Text Animation And, explore the special Text Animation feature of our widget, which offers a variety of amazing animation categories with customization options for smooth transitions. We offer different animation categories under it, including Characters, Word, Text Move, and Text Reveal. Characters Animates each character of the text individually, often used for effects like typing or fading in one letter at a time. In the Characters animation, you’ll find several customization options: Enable Editor Toggle: When toggled on, this allows you to preview and edit the animation directly in the editor. If toggled off, the editor preview is disabled, and you’ll need to manually adjust settings. With the editor enabled, you can also click the Play Animation button to see how your animation will look after applying all the customizations. Delay: Controls the delay time before the animation starts. You can adjust this to set a specific time after the page loads before the animation begins. Duration: Adjust the length of the animation. Increasing the duration will make the animation slower, while decreasing it will make it faster. Stagger: This option controls the delay between the appearance of each character. A higher value will stagger the animation more, making each character appear with a delay after the other. Consider a sentence like: “Welcome to Our Website!” When you set the Stagger option: Low Stagger (0.1 seconds): Each character will appear quickly after the previous one. For example, “W” will appear first, then “e” will appear 0.1 seconds later, followed by “l” after another 0.1 seconds, and so on. The delay between each character’s appearance is minimal, creating a smooth, quick animation effect. High Stagger (0.5 seconds): A longer delay will be applied between the appearance of each character. “W” will appear first, followed by “e” after a 0.5-second delay, then “l” after another 0.5 seconds, and so on. This creates a more dramatic effect with noticeable gaps between each character’s appearance. Animation on Scroll Toggle: When toggled on, the animation will trigger as the user scrolls down the page. If toggled off, the animation will occur immediately when the page is loaded, regardless of the scroll position. Transform X & Y: These options allow you to adjust the movement of the text along the X and Y axes (left/right and up/down), giving you precise control over the direction of the animation. The values are measured in pixels (px), meaning you can specify how far the text moves in each direction. X-Axis (left/right): Controls horizontal movement. Positive values move the text to the right, while negative values move it to the left. Note: Positive values (+) move the text to the right & Negative values (−) move the text to the left. Y-Axis (up/down): Controls vertical movement. Positive values move the text down, and negative values move it up. Note: Positive values (+) move the text down & Negative values (−) move the text up. Breakpoint: This option allows you to set the animation’s behavior on different screen sizes (desktop, tablet, mobile), ensuring a responsive experience across devices. Text Move: Moves the entire text across the screen, with various directions and speeds for dynamic transitions. Text Reveal: Reveals the text progressively, such as through a wiping or fading effect, giving a more dramatic entrance. These settings give you full control over the timing, direction, and responsiveness of the animated text, allowing you to fine-tune the animation and preview it before finalizing the changes. Word In the Word animation category, you have several customization options: Enable Editor Toggle: When toggled on, this option lets you preview and edit the animation directly in the Elementor editor. If toggled off, the animation preview is disabled, and you’ll need to adjust settings manually. With the editor enabled, you can click the Play Animation button to see how the animation looks after applying all customizations. Delay: This controls the time delay before the animation starts for each word. Adjusting the delay will determine how long after the page load the animation will begin for each word. Duration: Adjusts how long the animation will take to complete for each word. A longer duration will make the animation slower, while a shorter duration will speed it up. Stagger: This option controls how much of a delay there will be between each word’s animation. Increasing the stagger time will make each word appear one after another with a delay, while a lower value will make them appear more quickly. Consider a sentence like: “Welcome to Our Website!”, When you set the Stagger option: Low Stagger (0.1 seconds): Each word will appear quickly after the previous one. For example, “Explore” will appear first, then “Our” will appear 0.1 seconds later, followed by “Features!” after another 0.1 seconds. The delay between each word’s appearance is minimal, creating a smooth and fast animation effect. High Stagger (0.5 seconds): A longer delay will be applied between the appearance of each word. “Explore” will appear first, followed by “Our” after a 0.5-second delay, then “Features!” after another 0.5 seconds. This creates a more dramatic effect with noticeable gaps between the appearance of each word. Animation on Scroll Toggle: When toggled on, the animation will trigger as the user scrolls down the page. If toggled off, the animation will play immediately when the page loads, regardless of the user’s scroll position. Transform X & Y: Adjusting Movement for Word Animation (X and Y Axes) – These options allow you to adjust the movement of each word along the X and Y axes (left/right and up/down), giving you precise control over the direction of the animation. The values are measured in pixels (px), allowing you to specify how far the words move in each direction. X-Axis (left/right): Controls horizontal movement. Positive values (+) move the word to the right. Negative values (−) move the word to the left. Example: If you set the X-Axis value to +50px, the word will shift 50px to the right. If you set it to -50px, the word will shift 50px to the left. Y-Axis (up/down): Controls vertical movement. Y-Axis (up/down): Controls vertical movement. Positive values (+) move the word down. Negative values (−) move the word up. Example: If you set the Y-Axis value to +30px, the word will move 30px down. If you set it to -30px, the word will move 30px up. Breakpoint: This option allows you to set custom breakpoints for different screen sizes (desktop, tablet, and mobile). You can adjust how the animation behaves on various devices, ensuring the animation is responsive and adapts well to different screen sizes. Text Move In the Text Move animation category, you have several customization options: Enable Editor Toggle: When toggled on, this option lets you preview and edit the animation directly in the Elementor editor. If toggled off, the animation preview is disabled, and you’ll need to adjust settings manually. With the editor enabled, you can click the Play Animation button to see how the animation looks after applying all customizations. Delay: Controls the time delay before the animation starts for the text. Adjusting the delay determines how long after the page load the animation will begin. Duration: Adjusts how long the animation will take to complete for the text. A longer duration will make the animation slower, while a shorter duration will speed it up. Stagger: Controls the delay between each text’s animation. Increasing the stagger time will make each piece of text appear one after another with a delay, while a lower value will make them appear more quickly. Animation on Scroll Toggle: When toggled on, the animation will trigger as the user scrolls down the page. If toggled off, the animation will play immediately when the page loads, regardless of the user’s scroll position. Transform X & Y: These options allow you to move the text along the X (left/right) and Y (up/down) axes. By adjusting these, you can create dynamic movement effects for the text during the animation. Rotation Direction: This option lets you choose the direction in which the text will rotate (clockwise or counterclockwise). It adds a rotating effect to the text during the animation. Rotation Value: Controls how much the text will rotate. You can set the angle of rotation in degrees. Positive values will rotate clockwise, and negative values will rotate counterclockwise. Transform Origin: Defines the point from which the text will rotate. You can choose a starting point such as top left, top right, center, bottom left, or bottom right, giving you more control over the rotation effect. Breakpoint: This option allows you to set custom breakpoints for different screen sizes (desktop, tablet, and mobile). You can adjust how the animation behaves on various devices, ensuring the animation is responsive and adapts well to different screen sizes. Text Reveal In the Text Reveal animation category, you have the following customization options: Enable Editor Toggle: When toggled on, you can directly preview and edit the animation within the Elementor editor. If toggled off, the editor view is disabled, and you’ll need to apply and test the animation manually. With the editor enabled, you can use the Play Animation button to preview how the animation looks after all customizations. Delay: This controls the delay before the text reveal animation starts. You can set a time (in seconds) after the page loads for the text to begin its animation. Duration: Adjusts how long the text reveal animation will last. A shorter duration will make the animation happen more quickly, while a longer duration will slow it down. Stagger: Controls the delay between each text reveal. A higher stagger time will reveal each part of the text one after another with a delay, creating a sequential effect. Animation on Scroll Toggle: When enabled, the animation will only trigger when the user scrolls to the section with the animated text. If disabled, the animation will play immediately as the page loads. Breakpoint: This option allows you to define how the text reveal animation behaves on different screen sizes (desktop, tablet, and mobile). You can set custom animations for each device type, ensuring responsiveness and an optimal experience across devices. These customizations offer you complete control over the timing, sequencing, and behavior of the text reveal animation, allowing you to tailor it to fit your design needs and enhance user interaction. Style Settings The Style section in Elementor allows you to customize the appearance of your text. Style: You can customize the text color, typography (font, size, weight), add text shadows, and adjust link styles, including hover effects. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve now learned how to configure the Animated Text Widget in Elementor to effectively customize and display dynamic text on your website. If you need further assistance, feel free to reach out to our support team! View Live Demo Animated Heading Before setting up the Animated Heading, make sure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. Once activated, you’ll have access to all free Elementor widgets, including the Animated Heading—at no cost! Additionally, you can explore both free and pro widgets by filtering the selection options. Introduction The Animated Heading widget adds eye-catching titles with customizable animations and styles. Key Use Cases for the Animated Heading in Elementor: Use the Animated Heading widget to add dynamic and engaging titles to your website. Customize the animation effects, fonts, and styles to grab attention and enhance the overall visual appeal of your content. Perfect for highlighting important headings or sections. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Animated Heading Widget? Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Animated Heading Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Animated Heading Widget is ready to use! How to Add Animated Heading Widget in Elementor Open the page where you want to add the Animated Heading. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Animated Heading” . Drag the Event Slider widget to your desired section. The Event Slider widget will now be available for customization. How to Configure the Animated Heading Widget In the Elementor panel, search for the “Animated Heading Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into your desired section. Customize the heading settings using the available options in the Elementor panel. Your Animated Heading Widget is now ready to use! Configure the settings to create. dynamic, eye-catching titles for an engaging user experience. Content Settings You will find only one option there – Heading. Heading HTML Tag: Select the appropriate HTML tag for your heading (e.g., H1, H2, etc.). Link: Add a URL to make the heading clickable. Alignment: Choose the alignment of the heading (left, center, right). These settings will allow you to create a structured, clickable, and well-aligned title for your element. Style Settings Now, style your Animated Heading’s animation, font, size, color, and alignment to create an engaging user experience. In the Animated Heading Animation section, you will find the following options: Start Color: Set the color for the starting animation state.Typography: Customize the typography settings, such as font family, size, weight, etc. Animation Colors: Customize the color codes for the animation effects & End Color: Set the color for the ending animation state. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome: Congratulations! You’ve now mastered configuring the Animated Heading widget in Elementor to create dynamic and attention-grabbing titles for your website. If you need any further assistance or have any inquiries, feel free to reach out to our support team! View Live Demo Lottie Before setting up the Lottie widget, make sure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. Once activated, you’ll have access to all the premium widgets, including the Lottie widget. You can explore both free and pro widgets by filtering the selection options. Introduction The Lottie Widget adds lightweight, customizable animations for a more interactive experience. Key Use Cases for the Lottie Widget in Elementor: Enhance your website with lightweight, high-quality animations using the Lottie widget. Customize animation triggers, speed, and design to create an engaging and interactive user experience. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to activate a Lottie widget? Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Lottie Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. This will activate the Lottie widget for you to use! How to Add Lottie Widget in Elementor Open the page where you want to add the Lottie Widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Lottie Widget.“ Drag the Event Slider widget to your desired section. The Event Slider widget will now be available for customization. How to Configure the Lottie Widget In the Elementor panel, search for the “Lottie Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into your desired section. Customize the animation settings using the available options in the Elementor panel. Your Lottie Widget is now ready to use! Here’s the interface where you can configure the animation settings and personalize the widget for a smooth and engaging user experience. Configuring Lottie Widget: A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Lottie widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content, Style, and Advanced. Content Settings The Content section of the Lottie Widget includes two key configuration areas: Settings and Additional Properties. These options allow you to define how the animation behaves and integrates into your design. Settings 1. Source Purpose: Define where your Lottie animation is coming from. Options: Media File – Upload a local .json file. External URL – Paste a direct link to a Lottie animation hosted online. Effect: Determines how the animation is loaded and played. An incorrect or missing source will result in the animation not displaying. 2. Upload JSON File Purpose: This is where you upload the .json animation file exported from Adobe After Effects via Bodymovin. Effect: The uploaded JSON file is rendered as an animated SVG. This file must be optimized and correctly structured to ensure smooth performance 3. Trigger Purpose: Controls when the animation starts. Options: 1. None Behavior: The animation does not auto-play or respond to any user interaction. Use Case: Ideal when combined with manual controls or custom JavaScript triggers. 2. On Scroll Behavior: The animation plays as the user scrolls to the section containing the Lottie widget. Use Case: Perfect for adding visual impact as a user explores the page. 3. On Hover Behavior: The animation plays only when the user hovers over the widget. Use Case: Ideal for interactive icons, buttons, or call-to-action elements. 4. Mouse Cursor Behavior: The animation reacts to the movement of the user’s cursor within the widget area. Use Case: Great for adding an engaging and dynamic feel, especially in hero sections or product showcases. 5. On Click Behavior: The animation starts when the user clicks on the widget. Use Case: Useful for interactive elements like animated buttons or toggles. 6. Viewpoint Behavior: The animation plays when the widget enters the browser’s viewport (i.e., becomes visible on the screen). Use Case: Best for storytelling or sequential animations as users scroll through a page. Effect: Improves user engagement by syncing animation with user interaction. 4. Autoplay Purpose: Automatically starts the animation when the widget is loaded. Effect: Useful for background or attention-catching animations without requiring user interaction. 5. Controls Purpose: Enables playback controls (Play, Pause, Stop). Effect: Enhances user interaction and gives visitors the ability to manage the animation manually—especially useful in educational or demo content. 6. Loop Purpose: Allows the animation to repeat indefinitely. Effect: Best for icons, visual cues, or animated elements that should remain active and continuously draw attention. 7. Speed Purpose: Adjust the playback speed of the animation. Effect: You can slow down or speed up the animation (0.5 for slower, 2 for faster). This is ideal for synchronizing animation with other elements on the page or setting a specific visual rhythm. Additional Properties Renderer: The Renderer option within the Additional Properties section defines how the animation will be rendered (displayed) on the screen. It directly affects the performance, compatibility, and visual appearance of the animation. 🔧 Available Renderer Options: 1. Default Function: Automatically selects the most appropriate renderer based on the animation file and browser capabilities. Behavior: Balances performance and quality. Use Case: Best when you’re unsure which renderer to choose or want the widget to decide the optimal option. 2. SVG (Scalable Vector Graphics) Function: Renders the animation using SVG format. Behavior: High-quality visuals at all screen sizes (scales without loss of quality). Supports CSS styling and accessibility. Use Case: Ideal for simple vector-based animations, icons, and UI elements where clarity is crucial. 3. Canvas Function: Renders the animation inside an HTML <canvas> element. Behavior: Offers faster rendering, especially for complex animations. Not scalable without quality loss. Use Case: Best for fast, complex motion graphics and game-like animations Background Color Function: Sets the background color of the animation area. Use Case: Useful for blending the animation with the site design or making it stand out. Intermission Function: Sets the delay (in seconds) between animation loops when looping is enabled. Use Case: Helps control the timing between repeats, improving the pacing of the animation in UX. Style Settings The Style section in the Lottie Widget allows users to control the dimensions of the animation to ensure it fits seamlessly within their design layout. Key Customization Options: Height: Define the vertical size of the animation. Width: Set the horizontal size to match your section or container. How It Works: You can manually input pixel (px), percentage (%), or viewport (vh/vw) values. Adjusting these values helps scale the animation proportionally or responsively based on your layout needs. Use Case: Perfect for making the animation responsive across devices, ensuring it looks clean and professional on both desktop and mobile views. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Lottie widget in Elementor to create dynamic and engaging animations on your website. For any further assistance or inquiries, feel free to contact our support team! View Live Demo GSAP DrawSvg Introduction GSAP’s DrawSVG plugin lets you animate SVG strokes dynamically, creating self-drawing effects like lines, signatures, and path animations with precise control. Key Use Cases for GSAP DrawSVG GSAP DrawSVG allows precise control over SVG stroke animations, making it ideal for: Hand-drawn effects – Animate sketches and illustrations. Signature animations – Create realistic handwriting effects. Loading indicators – Design custom progress animations. Interactive storytelling – Guide users through animated visuals. With DrawSVG, developers can easily bring SVG graphics to life with smooth, dynamic animations Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate a GSAP DrawSvg widget ? To activate the Event Slider widget, follow these steps: Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Locate the GSAP DrawSvg widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. How to Add GSAP DrawSvg Widget in Elementor Open the page where you want to add the GSAP DrawSvg. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “GSAP DrawSvg“ Drag the GSAP DrawSvg widget to your desired section. The GSAP DrawSvg widget will now be available for customization. How to Configure the GSAP DrawSvg Widget Enable it, create a new page, set a title, choose the Elementor Full Width template, and publish. Adjust options as needed. Note: Selecting full Elementor elements in a template unlocks all widgets and customization options, boosting design flexibility and functionality. Navigate to the Edit with Elementor option to access the editor interface. After selection, the Elementor panel appears with all tools and customization options. Click the “+” icon to add a container, then select the appropriate column structure and layout. Here’s the interface where you can configure the settings and customize the GSAP DrawSvg Widget across various tabs. Configuring GSAP DrawSvg Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the GSAP DrawSvg widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content and Advanced. Content Settings There is only one option available: Settings. Settings I’ve made a little bit of adjustments to suit my design needs and customize the settings for a better visual experience. You can make further customizations using additional options to suit your design requirements. As you adjust them, you’ll notice the changes, which will help enhance your design skills. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the GSAP DrawSVG widget to create dynamic and engaging SVG animations on your website. With precise control over stroke lengths and durations, you can bring your SVG graphics to life. For any further assistance or inquiries, feel free to contact our support team! Animated Title Before setting up the Animated Title Widget, make sure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. Once activated, you’ll get access to all free Elementor widgets, including the Animated Title Widget—completely free! You can also explore both free and pro widgets by using the filter options. Introduction Want your titles to pop? The Animated Title Widget adds animations to your text, making it more engaging and fun for your website visitors. Key Use Cases for the Image Widget in Elementor: Use the Animated Title widget to create eye-catching headlines for your homepage or landing pages. Highlight key services or promotions with dynamic animated text to engage visitors. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Animated Title Widget? Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Animated Title Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Animated Title Widget is ready to use! How to Add the Animated Title Widget in Elementor: Open the page where you want to add the Animated Title widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Animated Title Widget.” Drag the widget to your desired section. The Animated Title widget is now ready for customization! How to Configure the Text Hover Image Widget in Animation Addons: In the Elementor panel, search for the “Animated Title Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into the desired section. Customize the title settings using the available options in the Elementor panel. Your Animated Title Widget is now ready to use! Here’s the interface where you can configure the settings and personalize the animated title using different tabs for a dynamic and engaging visual effect. Configuring Animated Title Widget in Animation Addons: A Step-by-Step Guide The Animated Title Widget is available in Elementor and can be placed in any section of your page. It includes three main settings tabs: Content, Style, and Advanced—each offering customization options to fine-tune your animated title display. In the Content settings of the Animated Title Widget, you’ll find the Content section and the Text Animation feature. This allows you to insert and organize your text, while the animation options (available in the editor panel) help bring your titles to life. Note: Animation effects require the Pro version of the plugin. Content Settings This is the Content section of the Animated Title Widget in Elementor. Here’s what each option does: Title: Enter your desired text. You can highlight parts of the text by enclosing them in square brackets [ ]. Show Prefix: Toggle this option to display or hide a prefix before the title. HTML Tag: Choose the appropriate HTML heading tag (H1, H2, H3, etc.) for SEO and design structure. Alignment: Adjust the title’s alignment to left, center, right, or justified for proper positioning on the page. Text Animation Also, explore the optional Text Animation section to apply engaging effects for smooth transitions. This section offers various animation categories that enhance your content’s visual appeal and make your titles more dynamic. Character The Characters animation in the Animated Title widget animates each character of the text individually, creating effects like typing, fading, or bouncing one letter at a time. You’ll find several customization options to control how each character behaves, allowing for precise and engaging text animations. Enable Editor Toggle: When activated, this allows you to preview and edit the animation directly within the Elementor editor for the Animated Title widget. If disabled, the live preview won’t be shown. With it enabled, use the Play Animation button to instantly view how your customized text animation will appear. Delay: Sets the time interval before the Animated Title animation starts. This lets you control how long after the page loads the animation should begin, helping you create a more timed and engaging user experience. Duration: Defines how long the animation of the Animated Title takes to complete. A higher duration slows down the animation, while a lower value speeds it up—allowing precise control over pacing and visual impact. Stagger: This option adjusts the delay between the appearance of each character in the Animated Title. A higher value increases the delay, creating a more pronounced stagger effect as each character appears one after another. Stagger in Animated Title Widget:Consider the phrase “Welcome to Our Website!” Low Stagger (0.1s): Each character appears quickly one after another, creating a smooth and fast animation. For example, “W” appears, then “e” after 0.1s, followed by “l”, and so on. High Stagger (0.5s): Each character has a longer delay between appearances, adding a dramatic, attention-grabbing effect as each letter shows up one by one. Animation on Scroll Toggle (Animated Title Widget): When enabled, the animation activates as the user scrolls and the widget enters view. If disabled, the animation plays instantly upon page load, independent of scrolling. Transform X & Y (Animated Title Widget): These settings let you shift the text horizontally (X-axis) and vertically (Y-axis) during animation. Measured in pixels, they help define the exact movement path—like sliding text left, right, up, or down for dynamic visual effects. Transform X & Y (Animated Title Widget): X-Axis (Left/Right): Controls horizontal movement.→ Positive values (+) move the text to the right.→ Negative values (−) move the text to the left. Y-Axis (Up/Down): Controls vertical movement.→ Positive values (+) move the text downward.→ Negative values (−) move the text upward. These options help you fine-tune how the animated title enters the screen for a more dynamic effect. Breakpoint (Animated Title Widget): This option allows you to control how the animation behaves across different screen sizes—desktop, tablet, and mobile—ensuring your animated text looks great and performs smoothly on all devices. Text Move (Animated Title Widget): This setting moves the entire text block across the screen, allowing you to create dynamic transitions by adjusting direction and speed—perfect for attention-grabbing animations. Text Reveal (Animated Title Widget): Displays the text gradually using effects like wipe or fade, adding a dramatic and visually engaging entrance to your content. These settings provide complete control over the timing, direction, and responsiveness of the animated title, enabling you to adjust the animation to your preferences and preview it before applying the final changes. Word In the Word animation category, you have several customization options: Enable Editor Toggle: When enabled, this option allows you to preview and adjust the animation directly within the Elementor editor. If disabled, the animation preview is turned off, requiring manual adjustments to settings. With the editor enabled, you can click the Play Animation button to see the animation in action with all customizations applied. Delay: This controls the time before the animation starts for each word. Adjusting the delay will set how long after the page loads the animation will begin for each individual word, allowing you to create a staggered or synchronized effect. Duration: This controls how long the animation takes to complete for each word. A longer duration will slow down the animation, while a shorter duration will speed it up. Stagger: This adjusts the delay between the appearance of each word. Increasing the stagger time will make words appear one after another with more delay, while a shorter value will make them appear quickly in succession. Consider a sentence like: “Welcome to Our Website!” When you set the Stagger option: Low Stagger (0.1 seconds): Each word will appear quickly after the previous one. For example, “Welcome” will appear first, then “to” will appear 0.1 seconds later, followed by “Our” after another 0.1 seconds. The delay between each word’s appearance is minimal, creating a smooth and quick animation effect. High Stagger (0.5 seconds): A longer delay will be applied between each word’s appearance. “Welcome” will appear first, followed by “to” after a 0.5-second delay, then “Our” after another 0.5 seconds. This creates a more dramatic effect, with noticeable gaps between the appearance of each word. Animation on Scroll Toggle: When toggled on, the animation will trigger as the user scrolls down the page. If toggled off, the animation will play immediately when the page loads, regardless of the user’s scroll position. Transform X & Y: These options allow you to adjust the movement of the words along the X (horizontal) and Y (vertical) axes. Positive values move the text in the respective direction (right or down), while negative values move it in the opposite direction (left or up), giving you control over the flow of the animation. These options allow you to adjust the movement of each word along the X and Y axes (left/right and up/down), giving you precise control over the direction of the animation. The values are measured in pixels (px), allowing you to specify how far the words move in each direction. X-Axis (left/right): Controls horizontal movement. Positive values (+) move the word to the right. Negative values (−) move the word to the left. Example: If you set the X-Axis value to +50px, the word will shift 50px to the right. If you set it to -50px, the word will shift 50px to the left. Y-Axis (up/down): Controls vertical movement. Positive values (+) move the word down. Negative values (−) move the word up. Example: If you set the Y-Axis value to +30px, the word will move 30px down. If you set it to -30px, the word will move 30px up. Breakpoint: This option allows you to set custom breakpoints for different screen sizes (desktop, tablet, and mobile). You can adjust how the animation behaves on various devices, ensuring a responsive design that adapts well to different screen sizes and maintains optimal performance across all devices. Text Move In the Text Move animation category, you have several customization options: Enable Editor Toggle: When enabled, this option allows you to preview and edit the animation directly in the Elementor editor. If turned off, the preview is disabled, and you will need to manually adjust the settings. With the editor toggle on, you can also click the Play Animation button to see the animation effect live as you make changes. Delay: This controls the amount of time before the animation starts for the text. By adjusting the delay, you can set how long after the page load the animation should begin, allowing for a smooth entrance of the animated title. Duration: This setting determines how long the animation will take to complete for the text. A longer duration will make the animation slower, while a shorter duration will speed up the animation, allowing you to control the overall timing of the effect. Stagger: This option controls the delay between each piece of text’s animation. Increasing the stagger time will cause each word or letter to appear with a delay after the previous one, creating a more spaced-out effect. A lower value results in a quicker transition where the text appears almost simultaneously. Animation on Scroll Toggle: When this option is toggled on, the animation will trigger when the user scrolls down the page. If toggled off, the animation will play immediately upon page load, regardless of the user’s scroll position. Transform X & Y: These options enable you to move the text along the X (left/right) and Y (up/down) axes. Adjusting these values allows you to create dynamic text movement effects during the animation. Rotation Direction: Choose the direction in which the text will rotate—clockwise or counterclockwise—adding a rotating effect to the text during the animation. Rotation Value: This controls the angle of rotation for the text. Positive values rotate the text clockwise, while negative values rotate it counterclockwise. You can set the rotation in degrees for precise control. Transform Origin: Define the point of rotation for the text. Options include top left, top right, center, bottom left, or bottom right, allowing you to adjust where the rotation starts. Breakpoint: This feature allows you to set custom breakpoints for different screen sizes (desktop, tablet, mobile), ensuring that the animation behaves responsively and adapts to various devices and screen sizes. Text Reveal In the Text Reveal animation category, you have the following customization options: Enable Editor Toggle: When toggled on, you can directly preview and edit the animation within the Elementor editor. If toggled off, the editor view is disabled, and you’ll need to apply and test the animation manually. With the editor enabled, you can use the Play Animation button to preview how the animation looks after all customizations. Delay: Controls the delay before the text reveal animation starts. You can set a time (in seconds) after the page loads for the text to begin its animation. Duration: Adjusts how long the text reveal animation will last. A shorter duration will make the animation happen more quickly, while a longer duration will slow it down. Stagger: Controls the delay between each text reveal. A higher stagger time will reveal each part of the text one after another with a delay, creating a sequential effect. Animation on Scroll Toggle: When enabled, the animation will only trigger when the user scrolls to the section with the animated text. If disabled, the animation will play immediately as the page loads. Breakpoint: This option allows you to define how the text reveal animation behaves on different screen sizes (desktop, tablet, and mobile). You can set custom animations for each device type, ensuring responsiveness and an optimal experience across devices. Text InvertEnable Editor Toggle: When enabled, this option allows you to directly preview and edit the animation within the Elementor editor. It helps you see how your animation will look in real time as you make adjustments. If toggled off, the editor preview is disabled, and you will need to manually adjust settings and preview the animation on the live page. 3. Play Animation Button: This button is available when the Enable Editor Toggle is turned on. By clicking it, you can preview the animation directly in the Elementor editor. It lets you visualize the effect of your customizations, helping you make precise adjustments before finalizing the settings. 4. Breakpoint: The Breakpoint option allows you to set different animations for different screen sizes, such as desktop, tablet, and mobile. This ensures that the animation remains responsive, providing an optimized viewing experience across various devices. 3D Spin Enable on Editor Button This toggle allows you to preview and edit the 3D spin animation directly within the Elementor editor. ON: You can see the animation live as you make changes. OFF: The animation won’t play in the editor, and you’ll have to check the live page for preview. Play Animation This button appears when Enable on Editor is active. Clicking it will play the 3D spin animation instantly in the editor, giving you a quick preview of the final output based on your current settings. Delay This setting controls the time (in seconds) before the 3D spin animation starts after the page is loaded. A higher value causes a longer wait before the animation begins. Useful when you want the animation to appear later for emphasis. Animation on Scroll When enabled, the 3D spin animation will trigger only when the user scrolls to the section where the animated title is placed. OFF: Animation starts as soon as the page loads. ON: Starts only when visible in the viewport, improving performance and focus. Spin Text Color This option lets you set the color of the text while it’s spinning. Helps you highlight the animation or match it with your brand style. You can choose bold colors or soft transitions depending on the effect you want. Start Defines the initial state of the 3D spin animation (angle, scale, opacity, etc.). It determines how the text looks before the animation begins. Common values might include the initial 3D rotation or position. End Sets the final state of the 3D spin animation after it completes. Controls where and how the text ends up post-animation. Typically used to bring the text to a readable or stable final appearance. Scrub When enabled, this makes the animation tied to the scroll position. The animation plays as the user scrolls—forward or backward. Ideal for creating interactive scroll-driven visual effects. Toggle Actions This allows you to define how the animation behaves during user interactions like scroll start, reverse, or end. Useful for setting repeat, reset, or pause behavior. Enhances control over animation flow and interactivity. Breakpoint The Breakpoint option helps you define different animation behaviors for different devices like desktop, tablet, and mobile. Ensures the 3D spin animation is responsive and looks great on all screen sizes. You can adjust or disable animations based on the device type for performance or design reasons. Style Settings The Style section includes one sections: Title. This is the Style section of the Animated Title Widget in Elementor. Here’s what each option does: Title Styling Text Color: Defines the title text color, allowing customization for better visibility and design consistency. Typography: Controls font properties, including style, size, weight, and letter spacing for enhanced readability. Text Stroke: Applies an outline effect to the text, improving emphasis and contrast. Text Shadow: Adds shadow effects to create depth and highlight the text. Blend Mode: Determines how the text interacts with the background for seamless integration. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve now learned how to configure the Animated Title Widget in Elementor to effectively customize and display images on your website. If you need further assistance, don’t hesitate to reach out to our support team! View Live Demo
Animated Heading Before setting up the Animated Heading, make sure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. Once activated, you’ll have access to all free Elementor widgets, including the Animated Heading—at no cost! Additionally, you can explore both free and pro widgets by filtering the selection options. Introduction The Animated Heading widget adds eye-catching titles with customizable animations and styles. Key Use Cases for the Animated Heading in Elementor: Use the Animated Heading widget to add dynamic and engaging titles to your website. Customize the animation effects, fonts, and styles to grab attention and enhance the overall visual appeal of your content. Perfect for highlighting important headings or sections. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Animated Heading Widget? Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Animated Heading Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Animated Heading Widget is ready to use! How to Add Animated Heading Widget in Elementor Open the page where you want to add the Animated Heading. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Animated Heading” . Drag the Event Slider widget to your desired section. The Event Slider widget will now be available for customization. How to Configure the Animated Heading Widget In the Elementor panel, search for the “Animated Heading Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into your desired section. Customize the heading settings using the available options in the Elementor panel. Your Animated Heading Widget is now ready to use! Configure the settings to create. dynamic, eye-catching titles for an engaging user experience. Content Settings You will find only one option there – Heading. Heading HTML Tag: Select the appropriate HTML tag for your heading (e.g., H1, H2, etc.). Link: Add a URL to make the heading clickable. Alignment: Choose the alignment of the heading (left, center, right). These settings will allow you to create a structured, clickable, and well-aligned title for your element. Style Settings Now, style your Animated Heading’s animation, font, size, color, and alignment to create an engaging user experience. In the Animated Heading Animation section, you will find the following options: Start Color: Set the color for the starting animation state.Typography: Customize the typography settings, such as font family, size, weight, etc. Animation Colors: Customize the color codes for the animation effects & End Color: Set the color for the ending animation state. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome: Congratulations! You’ve now mastered configuring the Animated Heading widget in Elementor to create dynamic and attention-grabbing titles for your website. If you need any further assistance or have any inquiries, feel free to reach out to our support team! View Live Demo
Image Box The Image Box Widget in Animation Addons for Elementor is a completely free feature. To use this widget, simply ensure that the plugin is installed and activated on your site. You can enjoy the full functionality of the Image Box widget without any additional cost, as it is available in the free version. Introduction The Image Box widget combines images and text, offering customizable size, alignment, spacing, overlays, hover effects, and animations for an interactive design. Key Use Cases for the Image Box Widget in Elementor: Highlight features Showcase services Display testimonials, portfolios, pricing plans, and call-to-action sections Enhance blog previews, promote events, and visually present key information with text and images Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Image Box Widget: Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Image Box Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Image Box Widget is ready to use! How to Add the Image Box Widget in Elementor: Open the page where you want to add the Image Box Widget. Launch the Elementor editor. Search for “Image Box Widget.” Drag the widget to your desired section. How to Configure the Image Box Widget in Animation Addons? In the Elementor panel, search for the “Image Box Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into the desired section. Customize the widget settings using the available options in the Elementor panel. Your Image Box Widget is now ready to use! Here’s the interface where you can configure the settings and customize the Testimonial Widget across various tabs. Configuring Image Box Widget in Animation Addons: A Step-by-Step GuideThe Image Box Widget can be added anywhere in Elementor, with three main settings: Content, Style, and Advanced. In the Content settings of the Image Box Widget, you’ll find five options for Layout, Image, Button, and Content. Additionally, the Image Animation feature is available in the editor panel. Note that animations require the Pro version for full functionality. Content Settings Layout: Choose the overall structure and alignment of your image box content. Image: Upload and adjust the main image. Content: Add and style the title, subtitle, and description. Button: Add a call-to-action with customizable text, link, and icon. Layout Here’s a brief description of each option in the Layout section: Style: Choose the animation style (slide, bounce) Direction: Set the direction the text animates (left, right, up, down). Gap: Adjust spacing between text and icon. Link Type: Choose how the link behaves (e.g., open in a new tab). Alignment: Set the text alignment (left, center, right). Icon: Add or customize an icon before/after the text. This section gives you full control over how the widget looks and interacts with users on your website, helping to achieve a polished and professional design. Image In the Image section, you will find options for Image and Image Resolution. Image: Upload the image you want to display within the widget, which will be shown alongside your text or content. Image Resolution: Adjust the quality of the image (low, medium, or high resolution) to control its clarity and loading speed on your site. Higher resolution provides better image quality but might affect loading time. Content In the Content section, you’ll find: Title: The main heading for the widget. Title HTML Tag: Choose the appropriate HTML tag for SEO and structure. Subtitle: A secondary heading, usually smaller than the title. Subtitle Position: Control where the subtitle appears (above or below the title). Description: A detailed explanation or additional text to provide context. Button In the Button section, you’ll find: Style: Customize the button’s appearance (e.g., color, border, background). Hover Style: Set the button’s look when hovered (e.g., color change, effects). Text: Define the text that appears on the button. Link: Set the URL that the button will redirect to. Icon: Choose an icon to display on the button. Icon Position: Decide whether the icon appears before or after the text. Direction: Control the button’s layout (e.g., horizontal or vertical alignment). Icon Spacing: Adjust the space between the icon and the text. Image AnimationIn the Image Animation section, the Reveal option creates a smooth transition where the image gradually appears from a specified direction (left, right, top, or bottom). After selecting the Reveal option, you’ll find the “Data Ease” setting, which controls the smoothness and flow of the animation transition. In the Data Ease option, you will find several categories that allow you to fine-tune the animation’s timing and movement. These categories give your animation different pacing effects, each offering a unique transition style. Here’s a brief explanation of the available categories: Power2.out: The animation begins quickly and slows down gradually toward the end. Example: Imagine an image sliding in from the left. At first, it moves quickly, then slows down as it reaches its final position, creating a smooth, natural stop. Bounce: The animation ends with a bouncing effect, creating a “rubber band” feel. Example: Picture an image dropping into place. As it lands, it bounces back a couple of times before settling, giving the effect of elasticity. Back: The animation slightly overshoots and then reverses, creating a playful “back and forth” motion before settling. Example: Imagine a ball moving to the right, going a bit too far, then quickly bouncing back to the left before stopping. This creates a fun, dynamic effect. Elastic: The animation has an elastic or spring-like movement, often bouncing back multiple times. Example: Think of a rubber band being stretched and released. The element will move, stretch beyond its final position, and then spring back, bouncing a few times before settling. Slowmo: Slows down the animation towards the end, creating a dramatic, slowed effect. Example: Imagine an object falling and then gradually slowing down as it approaches the ground. The movement becomes slower as it nears its final position, adding a dramatic touch. Stepped: The animation progresses in distinct steps, creating a staccato, segmented effect. Example: Think of a character walking, where each movement is in separate, abrupt steps rather than a smooth transition. The animation “jumps” from one frame to the next, giving it a blocky feel. Sine: The animation follows a sinusoidal (wave-like) curve, creating smooth oscillations. Example: Imagine a ball swinging back and forth in a smooth, continuous wave motion. The animation moves fluidly in a smooth up-and-down pattern, like a gentle wave. Expo: The animation starts off accelerating quickly and then slows down at the end, creating a dramatic effect. Example: Think of a curtain quickly opening and then slowly coming to a stop, revealing what’s behind. This creates a powerful, attention-grabbing effect. You can select the appropriate easing type based on the feel you want for your animation, providing a smoother, more professional look to the image reveal effect. Style Settings In the Style Section, you will find the following options: Image Box: This controls the overall appearance and layout of the image box, including its borders, background color, and padding, allowing you to style the entire section containing the image. Image: Here, you can adjust the appearance of the image itself, such as adding borders, shadows, and setting the image’s size, alignment, and other properties to enhance its visual presentation. Content: This section lets you style the text or content inside the image box, including adjusting the font size, color, spacing, and alignment, ensuring the text complements the image properly. Button: This allows you to style the button within the image box, including customizing its background color, text color, border radius, hover effects, and more, to make it visually appealing and functional. These options give you complete control over the styling of the image box and its elements, creating a cohesive and polished design. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve now learned how to configure the Image Box Widget in Elementor to effectively customize and display engaging image content on your website. If you need further assistance, feel free to reach out to our support team! View Live Demo
How To Install Animation Addons for Elementor Pro Animation Addons for Elementor Pro is a premium plugin designed to work seamlessly with your website. Meanwhile, Animation Addons for Elementor’s free version offers limited features and can be installed directly from the WordPress dashboard. However, the Pro version isn’t available through the WordPress dashboard. In this guide, I’ll show you step-by-step through the process of installing the Pro version on your website. Whether you’ve just purchased it or are setting it up for the first time, this simple guide will help you get everything up and running in no time. Step 1 First and foremost, click on Plugins> Add Plugin> Upload Plugin, and upload the Animation Addons Pro zip file plugin that you have downloaded. Step 2 You must install the free version of the Animation Addons plugin first; only then can you use the Pro version properly. Step 3 Finally, explore the Animation Addons for Elementor Pro full features and take your website to the next level. Conclusion I truly believe that by following the steps above, you can easily install Animation Addons for your Elementor Pro website. With it, you’ll be able to make your site more engaging, animated, and interactive. To sum up, if you have any questions or need a hand, feel free to reach out to our support team—we’re always here to help.
Advanced Accordion The Advanced Accordion Widget in Animation Addons for Elementor is a pro feature. To use this widget, make sure the plugin is installed and activated on your site. While you can browse both free and pro widgets using the filtering options, this specific widget is available only in the pro version. Introduction The Advanced Accordion Widget in Animation Addons for Elementor lets you create interactive, collapsible content sections, offering a sleek and customizable design to enhance user experience. Key Use Cases for the Advanced Accordion Widget: Organize content into interactive, collapsible sections for better navigation. Customize the design to match your website’s style and improve user experience. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Advanced Accordion Widget: Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Advanced Accordion Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. The Advanced Accordion Widget is now ready to use! How to Add the Advanced Accordion Widget in Elementor: Open the page where you want to add the Advanced Accordion Widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Advanced Accordion Widget. Drag the widget to your desired section. How to Configure Advanced Accordion Widget In the Elementor panel, search for the “Advanced Accordion Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into your desired section on the page. From the widget settings, add accordion items by entering the title and content for each section. You can enable icons, set active toggle behavior, and adjust animation settings for smoother user interaction. Use the Style tab to customize the appearance—adjust typography, spacing, colors, borders, and hover effects to ensure the accordion matches your site’s branding and design. Configuring Advanced Accordion Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide After adding the Advanced Accordion Widget to your page, you can customize its settings through the Content, Style, and Advanced tabs. Content Settings Under the Content tab, you’ll find the Accordion panel, where you can manage and configure your accordion items: Accordion Items: Add as many accordion items as needed. Each item includes a title and content area to display detailed information. Icon: Choose an icon to indicate the expandable section state. Active Icon: Set a distinct icon to display when the accordion item is opened. Title HTML Tag: Define the semantic tag (e.g., H1–H6) for the accordion titles to support SEO and content hierarchy. First Item Opened: Toggle to enable the first accordion item to be expanded by default. FAQ Schema: Enable this to apply structured data markup, helping search engines recognize the accordion content as FAQs for better visibility in search results. Style Settings The Style tab allows you to fine-tune the appearance of your accordion for a polished and branded design. The available customization areas include: Accordion Border Width: Define the thickness of the border surrounding each accordion item. Border Color: Choose a color for the item borders. Border Radius: Adjust the roundness of the item corners. Item Gap: Set the spacing between each accordion item. Count Color: Select a color for the numeric or symbol counter (if used). Typography: Customize the font style, size, weight, and more. Padding: Adjust spacing around the count element. Title Alignment: Set the horizontal alignment of the title text. Background: Choose a background color or gradient for the title area. Color: Define the default title text color. Active Color: Choose a different text color for the active (open) accordion item. Typography: Control the font settings for the title text. Text Stroke: Apply a stroke effect to the title text. Text Shadow: Add shadow to the title for a layered look. Padding: Set spacing inside the title area. Icon Size: Adjust the dimensions of the expand/collapse icon. Alignment: Set the icon position relative to the title. Color: Choose the default icon color. Active Color: Define the color for the icon when the item is open. Spacing: Adjust space between the icon and the title. Content Background: Set a background color or style for the content area. Color: Choose a text color for the content. Typography: Customize the font settings for the content text. Text Shadow: Add shadow for depth or emphasis. Padding: Control spacing inside the content box. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome Congratulations! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Advanced Accordion Widget in Elementor to create interactive and collapsible content sections. For any further assistance or inquiries, feel free to contact our support team. View Live Demo
Advanced Pricing Table The Advanced Pricing Table Widget in Animation Addons for Elementor is a paid feature. To use this widget, ensure the plugin is installed and activated on your site. You can explore both free and pro widgets using the filtering options, but this specific widget is available only in the pro version. Introduction The Advanced Pricing Table Widget in Animation Addons for Elementor lets you create customizable, visually appealing pricing tables that seamlessly match your website’s design. Key Use Cases for the Advanced Pricing Table Widget: Display and compare pricing plans in an organized, visually appealing layout. Customize the design to align with your website’s branding. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Advanced Pricing Table Widget: Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Advanced Pricing Table Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. The Advanced Pricing Table Widget is now ready to use! How to Add the Advanced Pricing Table Widget in Elementor: Open the page where you want to add the Advanced Pricing Table Widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Advanced Pricing Table Widget.” Drag the widget to your desired section. How to Configure Advanced Pricing Table Widget In the Elementor panel, search for the “Advanced Pricing Table Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into your desired section. From the widget settings, add your pricing plans by entering the title, price, features, and button text. You can highlight a featured plan and adjust alignment, icons, and labels as needed. Use the Style tab to customize colors, typography, spacing, and borders to match your site’s design. Configuring Advanced Pricing Table Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide After adding the Advanced Pricing Table Widget to your page, you can customize its settings through the Content, Style, and Advanced tabs. Content Settings The Content section of the Advanced Pricing Table Widget includes multiple customization options to help you design an engaging and informative pricing layout. The following settings are available: 1. Pricing Table Choose between two styles of pricing table layouts to best match your website’s design. 2. Layout Arrange the structure of your table by toggling the visibility of key sections: Header & Pricing Feature Button 3. Header Customize the top portion of the pricing table: Icon: Add an icon to visually represent the plan. Title: Enter the plan name. Title HTML Tag: Define semantic hierarchy (e.g., H2, H3). Subtitle: Include a brief description or subtitle. 4. Pricing Display and format pricing details: Currency Symbol Price and Sale Price Billing Period (per month, per year) 5. Feature List included features like: Title of the feature section Custom feature items such as: Starter Pack Included Budget Minimization Venue Booking Personal Trainer 6. Button Configure your CTA button with the following options: Style & Hover Style: Choose button appearances for normal and hover states. Text: Add CTA text (e.g., Get Started) Link: Set a destination URL Icon: Add an icon and define its position, direction, and spacing 7. Ribbon Display a visual label (“Popular”, “Best Value”): Show Button: Enable or disable the ribbon Title: Enter the ribbon text Style Settings The Style section provides detailed control over the visual appearance of each part of the pricing table. It includes six major areas: 1. Pricing Table Padding: Adjust internal spacing for the entire pricing table container. 2. Header Title: Set color, typography, padding, and alignment. Subtitle: Customize color, typography, padding, and alignment. Icon: Modify color, size, margin, and alignment. Background Type: Choose a background style (solid, gradient, image). Border Type: Select border style (solid, dashed, etc.). Border Radius: Round the corners. Header Top Background: Define a unique background for the top header section. 3. Pricing Price Color and Typography Currency Symbol Typography Vertical Alignment: Align pricing content vertically. Period: Customize color and typography. Background Color and Padding Alignment: Align the pricing section content. 4. Features Title: Set color, typography, and margin. List Items: Customize: Text Color and Typography Icon Size Icon Spacing Gap between features Padding: Adjust spacing within the feature section. Border Type and Alignment 5. Button Style the call-to-action button using: Typography and Icon Size Text Color and Background Type Border Type, Border Radius, and Box Shadow Padding, Alignment, and Margin 6. Ribbon Define the look of the label/ribbon: Text Color and Typography Background Color Transform (e.g., rotate or skew) Border Radius and Padding Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome You’re all set! The Advanced Pricing Table Widget is now ready to highlight your pricing plans in a clear and attractive way. Need help or have questions? Our support team is just a message away. View Live Demo
Brand Slider Before setting up the Brand Slider Widget, make sure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your website. Once activated, you’ll have access to all the free Elementor widgets, including the Brand Slider Widget—completely free! You can also explore both free and pro widgets using the available filter options. Introduction The Brand Slider Widget lets you showcase brand logos in a responsive, customizable slider—perfect for displaying partners or clients with smooth transitions. Key Use Cases for the Social Icons Widget in Elementor: Use the Brand Slider widget to display partner or client logos, boosting brand visibility. Add logos to footers, headers, or dedicated sections to highlight collaborations and affiliations. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Brand Slider Widget? Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Brand Slider Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Brand Slider Widget is ready to use! How to Add the Brand Slider Widget in Elementor: Open the page where you want to add the Brand Slider Widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Brand Slider Widget.” Drag the widget to your desired section The Brand Slider Widget is now ready for customization! How to Configure the Brand Slider Widget in Animation Addons: In the Elementor panel, search for the “Brand Slider Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into the desired section. Customize the logo slider settings using the available options in the Elementor panel. Your Brand Slider Widget is now ready to use! Use the configuration tabs to personalize the logo display, adjust slider speed, and apply transition effects for a smooth, professional look. Configuring Brand Slider Widget: A Step-by-Step Guide The Brand Slider Widget is available in Elementor and can be added to any section of your page. It includes three main settings tabs: Content, Style, and Advanced—each offering customization options to fine-tune your brand logo slider display. Content Settings In the Content section, you will find two options: Brand Slider and Slider Options. Brand Slider You will find two category options: Text and Image. Text: This option allows you to add textual content such as brand names, descriptions, or other relevant information to be displayed in the slide. Image: With this option, you can upload an image, typically the brand’s logo, to be displayed on the slide. These categories give you flexibility in presenting either text or images, allowing you to customize each slide according to your content needs. You can customize the slider content with three key options. The Slide Content option lets you add main content, like brand names or descriptions, alongside the logos. The Text List option allows you to display brand names or relevant details, adding context to each slide. The Text Separator defines a separator between the texts, ensuring a clean and organized layout. These options offer flexibility in customizing your Brand Slider, making it informative and visually appealing. Slider Options The Slider Options section lets you customize the Brand Slider’s behavior and appearance. Choose the number of slides to display (3), and the interface will show that many slides on the front. With autoplay enabled, the sliders move automatically without the need to press. You can also set the duration and autoplay interaction. Allow Touch Move: Enable touch movement for mobile users. Loop: Set the slider to loop continuously. Mousewheel: Allow navigation through the mouse wheel. Animation Speed: Adjust the speed of the slide transition. Speed Between: Set the delay between slide transitions. Navigation: Enable or disable navigation controls. Previous Arrow Icon: Customize the icon for the previous slide. Next Arrow Icon: Customize the icon for the next slide. Pagination: Enable pagination dots for navigation. Pagination Type: Choose the type of pagination (e.g., numbers, dots). Left/Right Direction: Set the slide direction to left or right. Style Settings The Style section includes three sections: Text, Slider Navigation and Pagination. Text Section: Customize the text color, typography, separator color, and size to match your design preferences. Slider Navigation: Adjust the appearance of navigation arrows for better user interaction. Pagination: Modify pagination styles for enhanced visual appeal and functionality. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve now learned how to configure the Brand Slider Widget in Elementor to customize and showcase brand logos effectively on your website. If you need further assistance, feel free to reach out to our support team! View Live Demo
Dynamic Widgets Articles Post Title Post Featured Image Post Excerpt Post Content Post Meta Info Post Pagination Social Share Posts Widget Archive Title Portfolio Search Form Search Query Search No Result Post Reactions Banner Posts Current Date Post Title Before setting up the Post Title widget, make sure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. Once activated, you’ll have access to all free Elementor widgets, including the Post Title widget—at no cost! Additionally, you can explore both free and pro widgets by filtering the selection options. Introduction The Post Title Widget allows you to display the title of a blog post or page with customizable options for font, size, alignment, and more, providing a dynamic and engaging presentation. Key Use Cases for the Post Title Widget The Post Title Widget is ideal for: Blog Presentation – Showcase the title of your blog posts with style. Page Titles – Display clear and professional titles for your pages. Customizable Design – Adjust font size, weight, and alignment to fit your design. Responsive Layout – Ensure titles look great on all screen sizes. Content Focus – Draw attention to your posts and pages with dynamic title formatting. With the Post Title Widget, you can easily create eye-catching titles that align with your site’s style and improve user engagement. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor To activate the Post Title widget, follow these steps: Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Locate the Post Title Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. How to Add the Post Title Widget in Elementor Open the page or post where you want to add the Post Title. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Post Title.” Drag the Post Title widget to your desired section. The Post Title widget will now be available for customization. You can adjust the font size, style, alignment, and other settings to match your design. How to Configure the Post Title Widget Enable the widget, create a new page, set a title, choose the Elementor Full Width template, and publish the page. Adjust page settings as needed. In the Elementor panel, search for the “Post Title Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into your desired section. The post title will automatically display based on the current post. You can then customize its typography, alignment, color, and other design settings to match your layout. Configuring Post Title Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Post Title Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content, Style and Advanced. Content Settings In the Post Title Widget, you have several options to control the appearance and structure of your post titles: Heading Link: Enable or disable a hyperlink on the post title, allowing users to click through to the post. HTML Tag: Choose the appropriate HTML tag (such as H1, H2, H3, etc.) for semantic accuracy and SEO optimization. Alignment: Align the post title text to the left, center, right, or justified based on your design preference. Show Highlight Button: Enable this to add a visual highlight or emphasis effect on the post title, drawing more attention to it. These settings help ensure your headings are both functionally and visually optimized within your off-canvas content. Style Settings In the Style section of the Post Title Widget, you can enhance and personalize the visual appearance of your post titles using the following options: Text Color: Set the color of the post title to match your design scheme. Typography: Customize the font family, size, weight, line height, letter spacing, and more. Text Stroke: Apply an outline effect around the title text for added emphasis. Text Shadow: Add shadow effects to give the text depth and dimension. Blend Mode: Choose from a variety of blend mode options (such as Multiply, Screen, Overlay, etc.) to create unique visual effects by blending the title with background elements. These styling options give you full control over how your post titles appear, helping you maintain a cohesive and visually appealing design. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Post Title Widget in Elementor to display dynamic and engaging post titles on your website. For any further assistance or inquiries, feel free to contact our support team! Post Featured Image Before setting up the Post Featured Image Widget, make sure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. Once activated, you’ll have access to all free Elementor widgets, including the Post Featured Image Widget—totally free! Additionally, you can explore both free and pro widgets by filtering the selection options. Introduction The Post Featured Image Widget displays the main image of a blog post, enhancing your site’s visual appeal. Key Use Cases for the Post Featured Image Widget The Post Featured Image Widget in Elementor is ideal for: Showcase Visual Content – Display the featured image of your post to capture the attention of your visitors. Blog Post Design – Easily integrate the featured image into your blog posts for a more visually appealing layout. Clickable Image – Link the featured image to the post, allowing users to easily access the content. Responsive Design – Ensure your post’s featured image adapts perfectly across all screen sizes. Professional Appearance – Elevate your blog’s design by adding professional and visually engaging imagery. With the Post Featured Image Widget, you can effortlessly showcase your post’s featured image and customize its alignment, size, and link behavior to match your design. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to activate the Post Featured Image widget, follow these steps: Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Locate the Post Featured Image Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. How to Add the Post Featured Image Widget in Elementor Open the page where you want to add the Post Featured Image. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Site Logo.” Drag the Post Featured Image to your desired section. The Post Featured Image widget will now be available for customization. How to Configure the Post Featured Image Widget Enable the widget, create a new page, set a title, choose the Elementor Full Width template, and publish the page. Adjust page settings as needed. In the Elementor panel, search for the “Post Featured Image Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into your desired section. The featured image of the current post will be displayed automatically. You can then customize its size, alignment, border, and styling options to fit your layout and design preferences. Configuring Post Featured Image Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Post Featured Image Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content, Style and Advanced. Content Settings There is only one option available: Image. Image In the Content section of the Post Featured Image Widget, you can control how the featured image is displayed using the following options: Image Resolution: Select the appropriate image size (full, medium, thumbnail) to match your layout needs and optimize loading performance. Alignment: Align the featured image to the left, center, or right within the section to suit your design. These settings help you display the post’s featured image effectively while maintaining visual consistency. Style Settings In the Style section of the Post Featured Image Widget, the Image subsection offers several customization options to refine the visual presentation of your featured image: Width & Max Width: Set a fixed or maximum width to control how wide the image appears within its container. Height: Define a specific height to maintain consistent image proportions across your layout. Border Type: Choose from multiple border styles such as None, Solid, Double, Dotted, Dashed, Groove, and more. Border Radius: Apply rounded corners to soften the image edges and match your design aesthetic. Box Shadow: Add a shadow effect to create depth and highlight the image visually. These settings provide fine-tuned control over the appearance of your post’s featured image, ensuring it blends seamlessly with the rest of your design. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Post Featured Image Widget in Elementor to display dynamic and eye-catching images on your website. For any further assistance or inquiries, feel free to contact our support team! Post Excerpt Before setting up the Post Excerpt Widget, ensure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. Once activated, you’ll have access to all free Elementor widgets, including the Post Excerpt Widget—completely free! Additionally, you can explore both free and pro widgets by filtering the selection options. Introduction The Post Excerpt Widget shows a short, customizable summary of your post to boost readability and engagement. Key Use Cases for the Post Excerpt widget The Post Excerpt Widget in Elementor is perfect for: Enhanced Readability – Display a concise summary of your posts to engage readers. Blog Layouts – Improve blog design by showing excerpts instead of full posts. Content Previews – Give visitors a sneak peek before they click to read more. Customization – Adjust excerpt length and styling to match your website’s aesthetics. Improved Navigation – Help users quickly find relevant content. With the Post Excerpt Widget, you can display post summaries dynamically, making your site more engaging and user-friendly. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate Post Excerpt Widget? To activate the Post Excerpt widget, follow these steps: Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Locate the Post Excerpt widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. How to Add the Post Excerpt Widget in Elementor Open the page where you want to add the Site Logo. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Site Logo.” Drag the Post Excerpt Widget to your desired section. The Post Excerpt Widget will now be available for customization. You can upload your logo, adjust its size, alignment, and link it to the homepage as needed. How to Configure Post Excerpt widget Enable it, create a new page, set a title, choose the Elementor Full Width template, and publish. Adjust options as needed. Enable the Widget from your dashboard (Animation Addons → Elements). Create a New Page, add a title, choose the Elementor Full Width template, and publish the page. Adjust page settings as needed. In the Elementor panel, search for the “Post Excerpt Widget.” Drag and Drop the widget into your desired section. The excerpt (summary) of the current post will display automatically. Customize the length, alignment, typography, and styling options to match your layout and design preferences. Configuring Post Excerpt Widget: A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Post Excerpt Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content, Style and Advanced. Content Settings There is only one option available: Content. Content Within the Content section of the Post Excerpt Widget, you’ll find a single setting group labeled Content. This section includes two primary configuration options: Limit and Alignment. Limit Function: This option allows you to define the number of words or characters displayed from the post excerpt. Usage: Adjust the limit to control how much of the excerpt is shown. This helps maintain layout consistency and ensures the summary remains concise. Effect: When you increase or decrease the limit, the length of the displayed post excerpt will change accordingly on the front end. Alignment Function: This controls the horizontal positioning of the excerpt text within its container. Available Options: Left, Center, Right, or Justify. Effect: Adjusting the alignment changes the visual layout of the excerpt, aligning it according to your selected preference. This helps with maintaining design uniformity across sections. These customization options help ensure that the excerpt content aligns well with your page design while also enhancing readability and layout balance. Style Settings The Style section allows you to customize the visual appearance of the post excerpt text, enabling better alignment with your website’s design aesthetics. Below are the available settings and their functions – Text Color Function: Defines the color of the excerpt text. Usage: Choose a color that matches or contrasts well with your background to maintain readability and visual appeal. Effect: The selected color is applied to the text, instantly updating its appearance. Typography Function: Controls font-related properties such as font family, size, weight, transform (uppercase, lowercase), style (italic, normal), line height, and letter spacing. Usage: Fine-tune how the excerpt text looks and feels. Effect: Adjustments reflect in real-time, allowing you to create consistent and polished typography across your site. Text Stroke Function: Adds an outline around the excerpt text. Usage: You can define the stroke width and color to emphasize text or create a stylistic effect. Effect: The text appears with a bordered outline, improving visibility and adding design impact. Text Shadow Function: Applies a shadow behind the excerpt text. Usage: Customize the blur, horizontal and vertical position, and shadow color. Effect: Adds depth and dimension to the text, helping it stand out, especially on visually busy backgrounds. Blend Mode Function: Determines how the excerpt text visually interacts with the background or surrounding elements- Available Modes Include: Multiply: Darkens the text by blending it with the background. Screen: Brightens the text using the background’s light areas. Overlay: Mixes multiply and screen modes for contrast. Darken / Lighten: Shows the darker or lighter parts of the blend. Color Dodge / Color Burn: Enhances contrast or saturation. Saturation / Hue / Color / Luminosity: Adjusts text based on background color properties. Difference / Exclusion: Creates effects by inverting background and text interaction. Effect: Each mode alters how the text appears in relation to its background, allowing for creative and advanced visual effects without additional graphic editing. These style settings ensure you have full control over the design and visibility of your post excerpt content, enabling a more dynamic and visually engaging presentation on your site. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Post Excerpt Widget in Elementor to create dynamic and engaging event displays on your website. For any further assistance or inquiries, feel free to contact our support team! Post Content Post Meta Info Before setting up the Post Meta Info widget, ensure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. Once activated, you’ll get access to all the free Elementor widgets, including the Post Meta Info—completely free! You can also explore both free and pro widgets by using the filter options in the widget panel. Introduction The Post Meta Info Widget shows details like author, date, categories, and tags for quick post insights. Key Use Cases for the Post Meta Info Widget in Elementor: Use the Post Meta Info widget to display essential post details like author, date, categories, and tags. Customize its design and layout to match your site’s style, ensuring clear and organized post information for users. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate a Post Meta Info Widget? How to Add Post Meta Info Widget in Elementor Open the page where you want to add the Post Meta Info Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Post Meta Info.“ Drag the Post Meta Info widget to your desired section. The Post Meta Info widget will now be available for customization. How to Configure the Post Meta Info Widget Create a New Page: Go to Pages > Add New, set a title, choose the Elementor Full Width template, and click Publish. Edit with Elementor: Click Edit with Elementor to open the editor. Insert Post Meta Info Widget: In the Elementor panel, search for the Post Meta Info Widget. Drag and drop it into your desired section. Customize: The widget automatically displays post meta information. Adjust the size, alignment, border, and styling as needed. Publish: Click Update to save and publish the page. Configuring Post Meta Info Widget: A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Post Meta Info Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content, Style, and Advanced. Content Settings 1. Layout The Layout option offers two styles for presenting post meta information: Style 1: Displays the post meta information in a single line. Style 2: Displays the post meta information in a stacked format, with each meta item on its own line. How it Affects the Display: Style 1 will display meta information like author, date, and categories horizontally, in one line. Style 2 will stack these elements vertically, with each piece of information appearing on a separate line. Alignment Under the Alignment section, you have three options: Left: Aligns the meta information to the left of the container. Center: Centers the meta information within the container. Right: Aligns the meta information to the right of the container. How it Affects the Display: Changing the alignment will adjust the position of the entire meta information block within its container. The selected alignment will be reflected in real-time on the page. Separator The Separator option allows you to choose how the meta information elements are separated. You can choose from two available options: Slash (“/”): Adds a slash between each piece of meta information. Comma (“,”): Adds a comma between each piece of meta information. How it Affects the Display: The separator determines the visual separation between the meta items. The selected separator will be reflected immediately, updating how the metadata appears between the various elements (e.g., author, date, categories). 1. Content List Title: The List Title option allows you to define a custom heading or label for the meta list. Effect on Display: The title appears above or beside the meta information block, depending on the layout and styling. It helps identify the metadata section, such as “Post Info”, “Details”, or “By the Author”. Meta Options: You can select and display any combination of the following metadata elements: Category Date View Count Author Reading Time Comments Effect on Display: Each selected meta item is displayed in the order chosen. For example: Selecting Author and Date will show something like: by John Doe / April 22, 2025. Enabling Reading Time adds the estimated reading duration (e.g., 3 min read). These values are dynamically pulled from the post’s metadata and will update automatically based on the current post’s content. Icon Customization: Each meta item includes an associated icon, which can be enabled, disabled, or replaced with a custom icon. Effect on Display: Icons provide a visual cue for each meta type (e.g., a calendar for the date or a user icon for the author). Toggling or customizing icons changes how the information is visually communicated and enhances user readability. Separator: You can define a separator to appear between each meta item in the list (e.g., slash (/), dot (•), pipe (|), or comma (,)). Effect on Display: The chosen separator appears between each meta element, impacting the overall look and spacing. For example: With a slash, the display might look like: John Doe / April 22, 2025 / 5 min read. With a pipe, it becomes: John Doe | April 22, 2025 | 5 min read. Style Settings In the Style Section of the Post Content widget, you will find the following options to customize and enhance the visual appearance of your content: Typography: Customize font family, size, weight, transform, and line height across all meta elements for consistency.Text Color: Define the primary text color used in the widget. Column Gap / Row Gap: Controls horizontal and vertical spacing between meta items and rows. Spacing: Fine-tune the distance between icons, text, and other elements for better layout structure. Effect on Display: These settings establish the overall structure and readability of the meta block. Proper spacing and font adjustments enhance both aesthetics and user experience. Separator Position: Set the separator before or after meta items, affecting flow and alignment. Icon Size & Color: Customize size and color of the separator icon or symbol. Effect on Display: Adjusts how distinct and visually separated the meta items are. Larger or colored separators provide more emphasis, while smaller ones offer a minimalist look. Category Styling Column Gap / Row Gap: Adjusts the spacing between multiple categories displayed. Separator Position: Choose where the separator appears between categories. Hover Style: Select from effects such as Divided, Cross, None, Cropping, Rollover Top, Rollover Left, Parallel Border, Rollover Cross for interactive hover animations. Typography: Control font settings specifically for category labels. Padding: Space inside the category tag, affecting its size and position. Border Type: Choose from Default, None, Solid, Double, Dotted, Dashed, Groove. Border Radius: Rounds category tag edges for a softer appearance. Transition: Sets the duration and smoothness of hover effects. Animation Effect (Normal & Hover): Customize how the category reacts visually in static and hover states. Color: Text color control for both normal and hover states. Background Type: Set solid color, gradient, or image background. Box Shadow: Adds depth and emphasis around the category tags. Icon, Icon Color & Spacing: Enable or disable icons, change their color, and control their distance from text. Effect on Display: These settings allow precise control over how categories appear and behave, improving both aesthetic value and interactivity. Author Styling Typography: Set author text style. Transition: Manage hover effect smoothness. Animation Effect (Normal & Hover): Add visual interaction when hovered or in a static state. Color: Set normal and hover text colors. Icon Size, Color & Spacing: Customize author icon appearance and spacing from text. Effect on Display: Creates a visually appealing author section that can subtly draw attention or integrate seamlessly with the layout. Date Styling Color: Control text and icon color. Typography: Set font style and size for the date. Icon Size, Color & Spacing: Adjust the date icon to match other elements. Effect on Display: Enables consistent styling with other meta elements while making the publication date easily visible and distinguishable. View Count Styling Color: Define the text and icon color for views. Typography: Adjust how the view count is displayed textually. Icon Settings (Size, Color, Spacing): Modify the visual representation of the view’s icon. Effect on Display: Allows the view count to stand out or blend in, depending on the emphasis desired for post popularity. Comment Styling Color: Set text and icon colors for comment count. Typography: Customize how the number of comments is styled. Icon Settings: Adjust icon size, color, and spacing for better alignment. Separator Size, Color & Spacing: Control how the comments separator is presented. Effect on Display: Improves readability and emphasis on user engagement through comments, with full control over style and positioning. These comprehensive style controls ensure each element within the Post Meta Info Widget aligns with your branding and user interface goals, offering both visual appeal and functional clarity. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Words The Post Content widget in Elementor allows you to customize and enhance your posts with options for layout, styling, and metadata. It helps create a clean, engaging, and professional presentation for your content. Post Pagination Before setting up the Post Pagination Widget, make sure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. Once activated, you’ll have access to all free Elementor widgets, including the Post Pagination Widget—at no cost! Additionally, you can explore both free and pro widgets by filtering the selection options. Introduction The Post Pagination widget adds navigation for users to easily browse between multiple pages of content on your site. Key Use Cases for the Post Pagination Widget in Elementor: Use the Post Pagination widget to enable easy navigation through multiple pages of content. Customize the layout and style to fit your site’s design, providing a seamless user experience for browsing posts. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate a Post Pagination Widget ? How to Add Post Pagination Widget in Elementor Open the page where you want to add the Post Pagination Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Post Pagination“ Drag the Post Pagination widget to your desired section. The Post Pagination will now be available for customization. How to Configure the Post Pagination Widget Enable the widget, create a new page, set a title, choose the Elementor Full Width template, and publish the page. Adjust page settings as needed. In the Elementor panel, search for the “Post Pagination Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into your desired section. The widget will automatically display navigation links to move between post pages.You can customize its layout, alignment, icon style, spacing, and typography to match your site’s design. Configuring Post Pagination Widget : : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Post PaginationWidget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content, Style and Advanced. Content Settings The Content section of the Post Pagination Widget provides a single configuration panel named Settings, allowing you to control the behavior and appearance of the pagination. Settings 1. Preset Style Default: Displays a standard pagination layout with basic navigation. Layout 2: Offers an alternate visual style with different alignment and structure. Effect on Display: Switching between these styles changes the visual structure of the pagination buttons, offering flexibility to match your site’s design. 2.Show Post Title Button Toggle this option to display the title of the next or previous post within the pagination buttons. Effect on Display: When enabled, the pagination will show the actual post titles alongside the navigation controls, providing users more context. 3. Enable Preview Button Allows you to show a preview button that links to the previous or next post. Effect on Display: Enhances navigation by enabling users to see what’s coming next or revisit the previous post, improving engagement. 4. Previous Title & Icon Customize the text label for the “Previous” button. Change or disable the icon associated with it. Effect on Display: Updates the appearance and content of the button that leads to the previous post, allowing for better clarity and styling. 5. Enable Next Button, Title & Icon Enable or disable the “Next” button. Customize the label and icon for this button. Effect on Display:Controls whether the user can proceed to the next post, and how that action is visually represented. Style Settings The Style section of the Post Pagination Widget provides two customization panels: Style and Post Style. These settings control the visual appearance and interactive behavior of pagination buttons and post titles. 1.Style Gap & Margin Gap: Adjusts the spacing between the Previous and Next buttons. Margin: Controls the outer spacing of the pagination container. Effect on Display: These options define the overall spacing, helping to maintain layout consistency and visual balance within the section. Previous / Next Settings Typography: Customize the font style, size, weight, and alignment for the button text. Border Type & Radius: Choose border styles (None, Solid, Dashed, etc.) and apply rounded corners. Width & Height: Define fixed dimensions for pagination buttons. Gap: Set internal spacing between the icon and text. Icon Size: Adjust the size of the navigation icons. Animation Theme – Normal & Hover:Choose from two animation states—Normal and Hover—to control how buttons appear statically and when hovered. Color & Background Type:Define the default and hover text color, as well as background styles (solid, gradient, or image). Effect on Display: These settings provide full control over the appearance of pagination buttons. You can make them visually stand out or seamlessly integrate them into your site design. Hover animations enhance interactivity, offering a more engaging user experience. 2. Post Style Panel Post Title Title Typography: Set the font properties for the post titles shown within the pagination. Spacing: Adjust the space between the title and other elements (icon, button, etc.). Animation Theme – Normal & Hover:Apply subtle or dynamic effects for title transitions during user interaction. Color: Customize the text color for both normal and hover states. Effect on Display: These options allow you to emphasize post titles, ensuring they are visually aligned with your site’s branding and enhance readability. Animation effects help improve the user interface by drawing attention during interaction. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make.. Final Words The Post Pagination widget in Elementor helps you manage and enhance navigation between multiple posts. With customizable layout and styling options, it ensures a smooth user experience and clean navigation for your readers. Social Share Before setting up the Social Share Widget, make sure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. Once activated, you’ll have access to all free Elementor widgets, including the Social Share Widget—at no cost! Additionally, you can explore both free and pro widgets by filtering the selection options. Introduction The Social Share Widget adds share buttons to your site, making it easy for users to share content and increase engagement. Key Use Cases for the Social Share Widget in Elementor: Use the Social Share widget to add social media sharing buttons to your site, enabling visitors to share content. Customize the design to match your site’s style, enhancing engagement and expanding reach. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor To activate the Social Share Widget, follow these steps: Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Social Share Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. This will activate the Social Share widget for you to use! Here’s how you can add the Social Share Widget in Elementor: Open the page where you want to add the Social Share Widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Social Share Widget.“ Drag the Social Share Widget to your desired section. The Social Share Widget will now be available for customization. How to Configure Social Share Widget Enable the widget, create a new page, set a title, choose the Elementor Full Width template, and publish the page. Adjust page settings as needed. In the Elementor panel, search for the “Social Share Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into your desired section. Social media share buttons will be displayed automatically. You can customize the layout, icon style, alignment, and colors to match your site’s design and encourage content sharing. Configuring Social Share Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Social Share Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content, Style and Advanced. Content Settings Once the Social Share Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content, Style and Advanced. Layout Options Alignment: Choose from Left, Center, or Right to position the social icons within the section. Direction: Select Row or Column to define the orientation of the icons. Social Platforms Facebook Icon: Customize or change the Facebook icon. Link: Add your Facebook share or profile link.Color: Set the icon color. Background Color: Define the background behind the icon. Twitter Icon: Customize the Twitter icon. Link: Insert your Twitter share or profile link. Color: Choose the icon color. Background Color: Set the background color. YouTube Icon: Modify the YouTube icon. Link: Enter your YouTube channel or video link.Color: Adjust the icon color. Background Color: Define the background color. Effect on Display: These settings allow you to control both the appearance and functionality of each social button, ensuring consistency with your brand and encouraging user interaction. Style Settings The Style section of the Social Share Widget includes two panels: Icon and Icon Hover, allowing you to customize the appearance and hover effects of your social icons. 1. Icon Color: Sets the default icon color. Background Color: Defines the background behind each icon. Size: Adjusts the overall size of the icons. Padding: Adds internal spacing within the icon container. Spacing: Controls the distance between multiple icons. Border Type: Choose from styles like None, Solid, Dotted, Dashed, etc. Border Radius: Rounds the corners of the icon container for a softer or sharper look. Effect on Display: These settings help match the icon design with your site’s branding, enhancing visual consistency and user engagement. 2. Icon Hover Color: Changes the icon color on hover. Background Color: Sets a different background color when hovered. Hover Animation: Select from various animation effects to create interactive transitions when users hover over the icons. Effect on Display: These options enhance interactivity by adding engaging visual feedback, making the icons more dynamic and user-friendly. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Words The Social Share widget in Elementor allows you to easily add social media sharing buttons to your posts. With customizable layout and styling options, it enhances user engagement and helps expand your content’s reach on social platforms. View Live Demo Posts Widget Before setting up the Posts Widget, make sure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. Once activated, you’ll have access to all free Elementor widgets, including the Posts Widget—at no cost! Additionally, you can explore both free and pro widgets by filtering the selection options. Introduction The Posts Widget displays a list of blog posts with options to filter by category or tag and customize the design to fit your site. Key Use Cases for the Posts Widget in Elementor: Use the Posts Widget to display and filter blog posts by category or tag, with design customization to enhance layout and user experience. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate a Posts Widget ? To activate the Posts Widget, follow these steps: Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Locate the Posts Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. This will activate the Posts Widget for you to use! How to Configure Posts Widget To get started, navigate to the Animation Addons dashboard and select Theme Builder. Within the Theme Builder interface, locate and select the Single option, then click on Add New Template to create a new single post template. Fill in all the necessary sections and then click on Edit with Elementor to customize the template further. After selection, the Elementor panel appears with all tools and customization options. Configuring Posts Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Posts Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content, Style and Advanced. Content Settings In the content section, we have three options: Layout, Query, and Pagination. Under the Content tab of the Posts Widget, the Layout section allows you to control how your blog posts are displayed. Below is a detailed explanation of the available customization options: Layout Style Choose from six predefined layout styles to determine the structural design for displaying your posts. Columns Set the number of columns to control how many posts appear per row. This setting supports responsive adjustments for different devices. Posts Per Page Define the total number of posts to display on a single page. Image Resolution Select the image size (Medium – 300 x 300) to maintain visual consistency and performance optimization. Show Title Toggle to show or hide the post title. When enabled, each post will display its title above or below the image depending on the style layout. Title Length Set a character limit for post titles. If the title exceeds this limit, it will be truncated with an ellipsis (…). Title HTML Tag Choose the HTML tag (H1–H6) used for the post title, which helps maintain SEO structure and hierarchy. Highlighted Title Enable or disable highlighted styling for the post title, which visually differentiates it for better user engagement. Show Excerpt Toggle this option to display a short summary of the post content. Excerpt Length Set the number of words or characters to display in the excerpt field. Show Date / Show Comment / Show Author / Show Taxonomy Enable or disable the display of post metadata such as: Date – Shows the publish date. Comment – Displays the comment count. Author – Shows the post author’s name. Taxonomy – Displays categories or tags. Read More Toggle this option to show a “Read More” link below each post. Read More Text Customize the call-to-action text for the “Read More” link. Icon Choose an icon to accompany the “Read More” text. You can select from the icon library or upload a custom SVG. Icon Position Define the position of the icon relative to the text: Before – Icon appears before the text. After – Icon appears after the text. Icon Spacing Adjust the space between the icon and the “Read More” text to ensure proper visual balance. Query The Query section allows you to control which posts are displayed in the widget by applying specific filtering and ordering parameters. Query Type Custom: Enables advanced filtering options, allowing users to manually define what content appears. Default: Displays posts based on the default WordPress loop or theme settings. Source Choose the type of content to be displayed, such as: Posts (default) Pages Any registered Custom Post Type Include / Exclude Toggle between Include or Exclude filters. Define specific parameters to include or exclude posts based on taxonomies or terms like categories, tags, or custom taxonomies. Include By Use this field to select specific terms ( a category or tag) to include in the query results. Clicking the “+” button opens a taxonomy selector to refine your content display. Post Format Filter posts by WordPress post formats (e.g., Standard, Gallery, Video, Quote), if applicable. Supports multiple format selections. Date Select a time range to display posts: All, Today, Last 7 Days, This Month, etc. Useful for time-sensitive or trending content filtering. Order By Choose how the posts should be sorted: Date, Title, Menu Order, Random, etc. Ensures content appears in the desired order for relevance or aesthetics. Order Set the display order: ASC (Ascending) – Oldest to Newest DESC (Descending) – Newest to Oldest Ignore Sticky Posts Yes/No Toggle When enabled, sticky posts will be ignored in the query. Helps maintain a uniform post flow without prioritizing sticky content. Pagination Pagination allows users to navigate through multiple pages of blog posts. When you select “Numbers + Previous/Next” from the Pagination options, additional settings become available to enhance functionality and appearance: Available Options: Style Section : Choose the visual style for pagination elements to match your site design. Page Limit : Set the maximum number of page numbers to display at once. Shorten Toggle Button: Enable or disable shortening for long pagination lists with ellipsis (…) to improve layout and readability. Previous Arrow Icon : Choose a custom icon for the “Previous” button. Next Arrow Icon : Choose a custom icon for the “Next” button. Alignment : Align the pagination section to Left, Center, or Right within its container. Spacing : Adjust spacing between pagination elements for better visual balance. Style Settings Within the Style section of the Post Widget, you will find multiple customization panels to control the visual appearance of your post listings. These include: Layout – Adjust spacing, alignment, and column gaps to define the overall structure. Thumbnail – Customize image size, border radius, spacing, and hover effects. Content – Control the padding, spacing, and background styling of the content container. Title – Modify typography, color, spacing, and hover effects for post titles. Excerpt – Configure font styles, length, and spacing for the post excerpt text. Taxonomy – Style category or tag labels, including background, color, spacing, and hover effects. Meta – Customize author, date, and other post meta elements with typography and color settings. Read More – Style the “Read More” button or link, including hover animations, typography, and color. Pagination – Adjust layout, icon size, spacing, and color options for pagination controls. Hover – Define hover animation styles and effects for post items. In the content section, I made a few slight changes for my design as I don’t need any further customization. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Words The Posts widget in Elementor allows you to showcase multiple posts in a customizable layout. With options for styling and content display, it helps create an engaging and dynamic blog or news section on your website. View Live Demo Archive Title Before setting up the Archive Title Widget, make sure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. Once activated, you’ll have access to all free Elementor widgets, including the Archive Title Widget—at no cost! Additionally, you can explore both free and pro widgets by filtering the selection options. Introduction The Archive Title Widget in Elementor shows archive page titles, improving navigation and content clarity. Key Use Cases for the Archive Title Widget in Elementor: Display archive page titles clearly to improve navigation. Customize styling to match your site’s design for a cohesive look. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Archive Title Widget? Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Archive Title widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Archive Title widget is ready to use! How to Add Archive Title Widget in Elementor Open the page where you want to add the Archive Title Widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Archive Title Widget.” Drag the widget to your desired section. The Archive Title widget is now ready for customization. How to Configure Archive Title Widget Enable it, create a new page, set a title, choose the Elementor Full Width template, and publish. Adjust options as needed. Enable the widget, create a new page, set a title, choose the Elementor Full Width template, and publish the page. Adjust page settings as needed. In the Elementor panel, search for the “Archive Title Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into your desired section. The archive title (such as category, tag, or author name) will be displayed automatically based on the archive being viewed. Configuring Archive Title Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Archive Title Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content,Style and Advanced. Content Settings The Archive Title Widget in Elementor offers three key configuration tabs: Content, Style, and Advanced. Each tab provides specific controls to customize how your archive titles appear and behave- HTML Tag: Choose from 9 HTML heading tags (H1–H6, div, span, paragraph) to define the semantic structure and SEO relevance of your archive title. Custom Toggle: Enables custom display conditions. When toggled on, you can set specific page conditions for showing custom titles. Adjustment: Provides fine-tuning options such as alignment or visibility settings for more precise control over how the title appears. Style Settings The Style section of the Archive Title Widget focuses on customizing the visual appearance of the text. This section includes the following options: 1. Text Color Defines the color of the archive title text. You can choose a solid color, gradient, or use dynamic color settings based on theme or custom fields. 2. Typography Controls font-related properties such as: Font family Size Weight Line height Letter spacing & Text transformation (uppercase, lowercase, etc.) These settings ensure consistency with your site’s overall typographic style. 3. Text Stroke Adds an outline to the text. You can define the stroke width and color. It’s useful for creating bold and stylized titles that stand out. 4. Text Shadow Applies shadow effects behind the text. You can customize shadow color, blur radius, horizontal/vertical position to add depth and emphasis. 5. Blend Mode Determines how the title text blends with the background or underlying elements. Various blend modes (like multiply, screen, overlay) allow for creative visual effects. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make- Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Archive Title widget in Elementor to display dynamic and customized titles for your archive pages. For any further assistance or inquiries, feel free to contact our support team! Portfolio Before setting up the Portfolio Widget , make sure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. Once activated, you’ll have access to all free Elementor widgets, including the Portfolio Widget—at no cost! Additionally, you can explore both free and pro widgets by filtering the selection options. Introduction The Portfolio Widget in Elementor displays your projects in a customizable grid, perfect for freelancers and creatives to showcase their work. Key Use Cases for the Portfolio Widget in Elementor: Showcase your projects in a stylish grid. Customize layout and hover effects for a personalized presentation. Perfect for freelancers and creatives to highlight their work. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Portfolio Widget? Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Portfolio widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. How to Add Portfolio Widget in Elementor Open the page where you want to add the Portfolio Widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Portfolio Widget.” Drag the widget to your desired section. The Portfolio Widget is now ready for customization. How to Configure Archive Title Widget Enable the Widget from your plugin or theme settings. Create a New Page → Set a title → Choose Elementor Full Width template → Publish. Open with Elementor, search for “Portfolio Widget”, and drag it into your section. The widget will auto-display portfolio items based on your settings. Customize layout, filters, and style as needed. ConfiguringPortfolio Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Portfolio Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under three main tabs: Content, Style and Advanced. Configuring the Portfolio Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Portfolio Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content,Style and Advanced. Content Settings The Content section provides control over the structure, query, filtering, and pagination of the portfolio display. Below is a breakdown of each setting and its function: 1. Layout Customize how portfolio items appear on the page- Layout Styles: Choose from 5 different layout styles to match your design preference. Columns: Select up to 6 columns to define how many items appear in each row. Posts Per Page: Set the number of portfolio items displayed per page. Image Resolution: Choose from various image quality options for better performance and clarity. Masonry Toggle: Enable/disable masonry layout for dynamic item arrangement based on height. Item Height: Manually set a fixed height for uniform item display. Show Title Toggle: Turn the item title on or off. Title Length: Limit the number of words or characters in the title for consistency. Title HTML Tag: Define the semantic HTML tag (H1–H6, div, span) for SEO and accessibility. Meta Toggle: Show or hide metadata like post date or category. Taxonomy Control how portfolio categories are displayed. Supports three taxonomy types (categories, tags,formats). Enable or disable taxonomy visibility. Option to display publish date alongside taxonomy labels. 2. Query This section defines which portfolio items are displayed. You can choose from 12 different query types. The Query option allows you to control which portfolio items are displayed. Source: Choose the content source (posts, pages, or custom post types like portfolios or projects). Include/Exclude: Select specific categories, tags, or individual items to include or exclude. Order By: Sort items by date, title, menu order, or random. Order: Set ascending or descending order. Sticky Toggle: Decide whether sticky posts are included or ignored. Post Format: Filter content by format (standard, video, gallery). This feature gives you fine-tuned control over what content appears in the portfolio, making the widget highly flexible for custom portfolio displays. 3. Filter Bar Display a filter bar to allow users to sort items by taxonomy (category/tag). Customizable appearance and behavior. Enhances user experience by making content navigation easier. 4. Pagination Set how users navigate through multiple pages of portfolio items. Choose from options like numbers, arrows, or load more buttons. Improves content organization and site performance. Style Settings You will get two options: Layout and Content. I also made slight changes in the Style section, just like in the Content section! 1. Layout Columns Gap: Adjust the spacing between portfolio item columns to improve layout clarity and alignment. Rows Gap: Set vertical spacing between portfolio rows for better content separation. Hover Effect: Apply visual effects on item hover (e.g., zoom, fade) to enhance interactivity. Alignment: Align content within each portfolio item (left, center, or right). 2. Content Title Color: Define the title text color. Typography: Customize font family, size, weight, transform, and style. Margin: Adjust spacing around the title for proper positioning. Meta Color: Set the text color for metadata (date, taxonomy, etc.). Typography: Adjust font styles for meta details. Margin: Manage spacing around the metadata area for visual balance. But you can explore all customization options yourself to see the changes. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Portfolio Widget in Elementor to showcase your projects in a stylish and customizable layout. For any further assistance or inquiries, feel free to contact our support team! View Live Demo Search Form Introduction The Search Form Widget in Elementor adds a customizable search bar for easy content discovery. Key Use Cases for the Search Form Widget in Elementor: Add a customizable search bar for easy content discovery. Improve user experience by enabling quick searches across your site. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Search Form Widget? Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Search Form widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Search Form widget is ready to use! How to Configure Search Form Widget Enable it, create a new page, set a title, choose the Elementor Full Width template, and publish. Adjust options as needed. After selection, the Elementor panel appears with all tools and customization options. Click the “+” icon to add a container, then select the appropriate column structure and layout. Here’s the interface where you can configure the settings and customize the Event Slider Widget across various tabs. Configuring Search Form Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Search Form Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content,Style and Advanced. Content Settings Search Preset I chose the classic search preset style. See the difference, guys! Then make a little bit changes on search option which you will get it selecting the classic style as search preset. Style Settings You’ll also find two options in the style section: input and button. I made some slight changes there as well, just like in the content section! Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Search Form widget in Elementor to create an interactive and user-friendly search experience on your website. For any further assistance or inquiries, feel free to contact our support team! Search Query Before setting up the Search Query Widget , make sure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. Once activated, you’ll have access to all free Elementor widgets, including the Search Query Widget —at no cost! Additionally, you can explore both free and pro widgets by filtering the selection options. Introduction The Search Query Widget in Elementor displays dynamic search results, offering users an easy way to find content and customize the layout to fit your site’s design. Key Use Cases for the Search Query Widget: Display dynamic search results for seamless user experience. Customize search result layout to match your site’s design. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Search Query Widget? Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Search Query widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Search Query widget is ready to use! How to Add Search Query Widget in Elementor Open the page where you want to add the Search Query Widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Search Query Widget.” Drag the widget to your desired section. The Search Query widget is now ready for customization! How to Configure Search Query Widget Enable the widget, create a new page, set a title, choose the Elementor Full Width template, and publish the page. Adjust the page settings as needed. In the Elementor panel, search for the “Search Form Widget.”Drag and drop the widget into your desired section. The search form will appear instantly. Customize it using the Content, Style, and Advanced tabs—especially the Search Query section, where you can define placeholder text, select an HTML tag for the label, and adjust the alignment to fit your layout perfectly. Configuring Search Query Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Search Query Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content,Style and Advanced. Content Settings Within the Content section, the Search Query settings allow you to control the display and behavior of the search input field and related content. HTML Tag You can choose from 9 different HTML tags (H1–H6, div, span, p) for the search form title or label. This helps you maintain semantic structure and improves accessibility and SEO based on where the form is used. Search Text Customize the placeholder text that appears inside the search field. This helps guide users on what they can search for (e.g., “Search blog posts…” or “Type to find…”). Alignment This controls the alignment of the entire search form (left, center, right, or justified) to match the design of your section or page. Style Settings The Style tab of the Search Form Widget provides two customization sections: Style: Customize the overall appearance of the search form text. You can adjust: Text Color: Sets the color of the form text. Typography: Controls font size, weight, family, etc. Text Stroke: Adds outline effects to the text. Text Shadow: Applies shadow behind the text for depth. Blend Mode: Defines how the text blends with the background. Query Text Style: Specifically styles the search query input text: Text Color: Adjusts the color of the input text. Typography: Lets you set the font style and structure for the query text. These settings allow complete control over the visual presentation of the search form, ensuring it aligns with your site design. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Search Query widget in Elementor to create a seamless and customizable search experience for your website. For any further assistance or inquiries, feel free to contact our support team! View Live Demo Search No Result Before setting up the Search No Result Widget, make sure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. Once activated, you’ll have access to all free Elementor widgets, including the Search No Result Widget —at no cost! Additionally, you can explore both free and pro widgets by filtering the selection options. Introduction The Animated Text Widget adds dynamic effects like fade, slide, and bounce to text, boosting visual appeal with ease. Key Use Cases for the Search No Result Widget in Elementor: Display a helpful message when no search results are found. Customize the message to guide users towards other content or actions. Enhance user experience by offering alternative suggestions or links. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Search No Result Widget? Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Search No Result widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Search No Result widget is ready to use! How to Add Search No Result Widget in Elementor Open the page where you want to add the Archive Title Widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Archive Title Widget.” Drag the widget to your desired section. The Archive Title widget is now ready for customization. How to Configure Search No Result Widget Enable the widget, create a new page, set a title, choose the Elementor Full Width template, and publish the page. Adjust the page settings as needed. In the Elementor panel, search for the “Search No Result Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into your desired section. This widget will automatically display a custom message when a search returns no results, enhancing user experience by guiding them clearly when nothing is found. Configuring Search No Result Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Search No Result Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content,Style and Advanced. Content Settings The Content section of the Search No Result Widget allows full customization of the message displayed when no search results are found. The available configuration options include: Search Title: Define the heading that appears when no results are returned. This helps users understand that their search yielded no matches. Title HTML Tag: Choose from 7 HTML heading tags (H1–H6 and DIV) to determine the semantic importance of the title. This is essential for accessibility and SEO optimization. Search Content: Add supporting text or guidance using a rich text editor. You can include: Media: Insert images or videos to make the message more engaging. Visual/Text (Code) Mode: Switch between a visual editor for basic formatting and code mode for custom HTML. Paragraphs: Write clear, user-friendly messages that guide users on what to do next (try another keyword, check spelling). These settings help maintain a consistent user experience and ensure that users are clearly informed when their query doesn’t return any content. Style Settings The Style section provides options for customizing the appearance of both the title and content of the Search No Result Widget. These options allow for complete control over the visual presentation. Title Settings The Title section allows you to customize the heading that appears when no search results are found: Text Color: Adjust the color of the title text to match your website’s design scheme. Typography: Control the font family, size, weight, line height, and letter spacing to ensure the title is visually prominent and aligned with the overall theme. Text Stroke: Apply an outline effect around the title text for enhanced visibility and emphasis. Text Shadow: Add a shadow behind the title to create depth and a more dynamic appearance. Spacing: Set the spacing (margin and padding) around the title to control its positioning within the widget. Content Settings The Content section allows you to style the body of the message displayed when no results are found: Text Color: Choose the color of the content text to maintain readability and consistency with the page’s color scheme. Typography: Adjust font size, weight, family, line height, and letter spacing to ensure the content text is legible and well-aligned with the title. These style settings offer flexibility to tailor the widget’s appearance to fit your website’s design, ensuring it provides a seamless and visually appealing user experience. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Search No Result widget in Elementor to display a customized message when no search results are found. For any further assistance or inquiries, feel free to contact our support team! Post Reactions Before setting up the Post Reactions Widget, make sure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. Once activated, you’ll have access to all free Elementor widgets, including the Post Reactions Widget—at no cost! Additionally, you can explore both free and pro widgets by filtering the selection options. Introduction The Post Reactions Widget adds interactive buttons for user engagement on your posts. Key Use Cases for the Post Reactions Widget in Elementor: Increase user engagement by allowing reactions on posts. Customize reaction buttons to match your site’s style. Enable users to express their feelings about your content easily. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Post Reactions Widget? Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Post Reactions widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. The Post Reactions widget is now ready to use! How to Add Post Reactions Widget in Elementor Open the page where you want to add the Post Reactions Widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Post Reactions Widget.” Drag the widget to your desired section. The Post Reactions widget is now ready for customization. How to Configure Post Reactions Widget Enable the Widget: Ensure the Post Reactions Widget is enabled in your Elementor settings. Create a New Page: Open a new page where you wish to display the widget. Set a Title: Add a title for your page as required. Choose Template: Select the Elementor Full Width template for a full-width layout. Publish the Page: After setting the title and template, publish the page. Search for Post Reactions Widget: In the Elementor panel, search for “Post Reactions Widget”. Drag and Drop the Widget: Drag the widget to your desired section of the page. Adjust Settings: Customize the widget settings, including the reaction types and alignment, as Once added, the Post Reactions Widget will automatically display reaction options (like thumbs up, thumbs down, etc.) for posts, enabling user interaction based on the post content. Configuring Post Reactions Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Post Reactions Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content,Style and Advanced. Content Settings Only one customization option is available in the content section. I made a slight change by setting the alignment—that’s it. The Content Section of the Post Reactions Widget offers the following options for customization: Reactions: This option allows you to select predefined reactions for your posts. You can also add custom reactions based on your design preferences. Reactions provide users with the ability to interact with posts, such as liking, sharing, or rating the content. Show Level: This setting controls the visibility of reaction levels (if applicable). You can choose to display the level of interaction based on the number of reactions a post receives. Reaction Count: This option enables you to display the number of reactions each post has received. It provides a count of how many users have reacted to a specific post, allowing for greater user engagement tracking. Separator: The separator option allows you to choose whether to display a divider between reactions. It provides a visual break between the reactions for a cleaner and more organized look. Separator Icon: You can choose or upload an icon to act as the separator between reactions. This icon enhances the visual appeal and separates the different reaction types effectively. Icon Library or Upload SVG: You can select an icon from the built-in icon library or upload custom SVG icons for reactions. This gives you flexibility in designing how reactions appear and matching the visual style of your website. Style Settings The Style Section of the Post Reactions Widget includes three primary customization options, allowing you to tailor the appearance of reactions, icons, and separators to suit your website’s design. These options are: Reaction Button Style: This option allows you to customize the appearance of the reaction buttons. You can modify the button background color, border type , border radius,text color,typography and padding to match the overall aesthetic of your site. Reaction Icon Style: The Separator Icon Style controls the visual appearance of the icon used as a separator between reaction types. You can modify the icon size, color, and margin to ensure the separator is visually distinct yet harmonizes with the design of the reaction buttons. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Post Reactions widget in Elementor to add interactive reaction buttons and boost engagement on your posts. For any further assistance or inquiries, feel free to contact our support team! View Live Demo Banner Posts The Banner Posts Widget in Animation Addons for Elementor is a paid feature. To access this widget, ensure the plugin is installed and activated on your site. You can also explore both free and pro widgets through the filtering options. Introduction The Banner Posts Widget displays customizable post banners for promoting content or announcements. Key Use Cases for the Banner Posts Widget: Display customizable post banners to highlight important content or announcements. Match the banner’s design with your site’s style for a cohesive look. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Banner Posts Widget? Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Banner Posts Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Banner Posts Widget is ready to use! How to Add Banner Posts Widget in Elementor Open the page where you want to add the Banner Posts Widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Banner Posts Widget.” Drag the widget to your desired section. The Banner Posts Widget is now ready for customization. How to Configure Banner Posts Widget Make sure the Banner Posts Widget is activated in your Elementor settings. Open a new page in WordPress. Add a page title and choose the Elementor Full Width template. Click Publish to save your changes.In the Elementor panel, search for “Banner Posts Widget” and drag it onto the page. Adjust the banner layout, styling, and content display as needed. Configuring Filterable Posts Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Banner Posts Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content,Style and Advanced. Content Settings In the content section, you’ll find various customization options. I made slight adjustments to Query, Settings, and Title, while leaving the rest unchanged as they weren’t needed for my design. Query: This option allows you to filter the posts that appear in the Banner Posts Widget. You can control which posts are displayed by filtering them based on categories, tags, post types, or specific custom queries. It helps you display the most relevant content to your audience. Settings: The settings section lets you configure the behavior of the widget, such as determining the number of posts to display, whether to enable pagination or infinite scrolling, and adjusting the l Title: This option allows you to customize the appearance of the title for the banner posts, including typography, size, color, and alignment. You can make the title stand out and match your website’s overall design by adjusting these settings. These options allow you to refine and control the content displayed in the Banner Posts Widget to suit your needs and design preferences. Style Settings In the Style Section of the Banner Post Widget, the following elements play key roles: Title: The title is the main heading of a page or post, visible on the page and in the browser tab. It’s crucial for SEO and should be clear and relevant to the content. Meta: Meta tags provide information about the page (like a description) in the HTML, not visible to users. The meta description is often shown in search engine results and helps with SEO. Meta Admin: Meta Admin includes administrative info such as the author, date, and content updates, primarily for content management, not visible on the front-end. Read More: The Read More link shows a content preview and leads users to the full article, keeping pages tidy and aiding SEO by offering an organized layout. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Once the Banner Posts Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content,Style and Advanced. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Filterable Posts Widget in Elementor to display dynamic and categorized posts seamlessly. For any further assistance or inquiries, feel free to contact our support. View Live Demo Current Date Introduction The Current Date Widget dynamically displays the date, keeping your site updated and engaging. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Current Date Widget? Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Current Date Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Current Date Widget is ready to use! How to Add Current Date Widget in Elementor Open the page where you want to add the Current Date Widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Current Date Widget”. Drag the widget to your desired section. The Current Date Widget is now ready for customization. How to Configure Current Date Widget Enable it, create a new page, set a title, choose the Elementor Full Width template, and publish. Adjust options as needed. After selection, the Elementor panel appears with all tools and customization options. Here’s the interface where you can configure the settings and customize the Event Slider Widget across various tabs. Configuring Current Date Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Current Date Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content, Style, and Advanced. Content Settings In the Content section, you’ll find customization options for the date format. I changed the date format, toggled the “Show Day” button, and adjusted the gap and alignment to fit my design preferences. Style Settings In the Style section, I made changes only to the Margin section, while the rest remained unchanged as I don’t need them for now. However, feel free to explore and customize them according to your needs. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Current Date Widget in Elementor to display the current date dynamically on your website. For any further assistance or inquiries, feel free to contact our support.
Lottie Before setting up the Lottie widget, make sure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. Once activated, you’ll have access to all the premium widgets, including the Lottie widget. You can explore both free and pro widgets by filtering the selection options. Introduction The Lottie Widget adds lightweight, customizable animations for a more interactive experience. Key Use Cases for the Lottie Widget in Elementor: Enhance your website with lightweight, high-quality animations using the Lottie widget. Customize animation triggers, speed, and design to create an engaging and interactive user experience. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to activate a Lottie widget? Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Lottie Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. This will activate the Lottie widget for you to use! How to Add Lottie Widget in Elementor Open the page where you want to add the Lottie Widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Lottie Widget.“ Drag the Event Slider widget to your desired section. The Event Slider widget will now be available for customization. How to Configure the Lottie Widget In the Elementor panel, search for the “Lottie Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into your desired section. Customize the animation settings using the available options in the Elementor panel. Your Lottie Widget is now ready to use! Here’s the interface where you can configure the animation settings and personalize the widget for a smooth and engaging user experience. Configuring Lottie Widget: A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Lottie widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content, Style, and Advanced. Content Settings The Content section of the Lottie Widget includes two key configuration areas: Settings and Additional Properties. These options allow you to define how the animation behaves and integrates into your design. Settings 1. Source Purpose: Define where your Lottie animation is coming from. Options: Media File – Upload a local .json file. External URL – Paste a direct link to a Lottie animation hosted online. Effect: Determines how the animation is loaded and played. An incorrect or missing source will result in the animation not displaying. 2. Upload JSON File Purpose: This is where you upload the .json animation file exported from Adobe After Effects via Bodymovin. Effect: The uploaded JSON file is rendered as an animated SVG. This file must be optimized and correctly structured to ensure smooth performance 3. Trigger Purpose: Controls when the animation starts. Options: 1. None Behavior: The animation does not auto-play or respond to any user interaction. Use Case: Ideal when combined with manual controls or custom JavaScript triggers. 2. On Scroll Behavior: The animation plays as the user scrolls to the section containing the Lottie widget. Use Case: Perfect for adding visual impact as a user explores the page. 3. On Hover Behavior: The animation plays only when the user hovers over the widget. Use Case: Ideal for interactive icons, buttons, or call-to-action elements. 4. Mouse Cursor Behavior: The animation reacts to the movement of the user’s cursor within the widget area. Use Case: Great for adding an engaging and dynamic feel, especially in hero sections or product showcases. 5. On Click Behavior: The animation starts when the user clicks on the widget. Use Case: Useful for interactive elements like animated buttons or toggles. 6. Viewpoint Behavior: The animation plays when the widget enters the browser’s viewport (i.e., becomes visible on the screen). Use Case: Best for storytelling or sequential animations as users scroll through a page. Effect: Improves user engagement by syncing animation with user interaction. 4. Autoplay Purpose: Automatically starts the animation when the widget is loaded. Effect: Useful for background or attention-catching animations without requiring user interaction. 5. Controls Purpose: Enables playback controls (Play, Pause, Stop). Effect: Enhances user interaction and gives visitors the ability to manage the animation manually—especially useful in educational or demo content. 6. Loop Purpose: Allows the animation to repeat indefinitely. Effect: Best for icons, visual cues, or animated elements that should remain active and continuously draw attention. 7. Speed Purpose: Adjust the playback speed of the animation. Effect: You can slow down or speed up the animation (0.5 for slower, 2 for faster). This is ideal for synchronizing animation with other elements on the page or setting a specific visual rhythm. Additional Properties Renderer: The Renderer option within the Additional Properties section defines how the animation will be rendered (displayed) on the screen. It directly affects the performance, compatibility, and visual appearance of the animation. 🔧 Available Renderer Options: 1. Default Function: Automatically selects the most appropriate renderer based on the animation file and browser capabilities. Behavior: Balances performance and quality. Use Case: Best when you’re unsure which renderer to choose or want the widget to decide the optimal option. 2. SVG (Scalable Vector Graphics) Function: Renders the animation using SVG format. Behavior: High-quality visuals at all screen sizes (scales without loss of quality). Supports CSS styling and accessibility. Use Case: Ideal for simple vector-based animations, icons, and UI elements where clarity is crucial. 3. Canvas Function: Renders the animation inside an HTML <canvas> element. Behavior: Offers faster rendering, especially for complex animations. Not scalable without quality loss. Use Case: Best for fast, complex motion graphics and game-like animations Background Color Function: Sets the background color of the animation area. Use Case: Useful for blending the animation with the site design or making it stand out. Intermission Function: Sets the delay (in seconds) between animation loops when looping is enabled. Use Case: Helps control the timing between repeats, improving the pacing of the animation in UX. Style Settings The Style section in the Lottie Widget allows users to control the dimensions of the animation to ensure it fits seamlessly within their design layout. Key Customization Options: Height: Define the vertical size of the animation. Width: Set the horizontal size to match your section or container. How It Works: You can manually input pixel (px), percentage (%), or viewport (vh/vw) values. Adjusting these values helps scale the animation proportionally or responsively based on your layout needs. Use Case: Perfect for making the animation responsive across devices, ensuring it looks clean and professional on both desktop and mobile views. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Lottie widget in Elementor to create dynamic and engaging animations on your website. For any further assistance or inquiries, feel free to contact our support team! View Live Demo
Post Meta Info Before setting up the Post Meta Info widget, ensure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. Once activated, you’ll get access to all the free Elementor widgets, including the Post Meta Info—completely free! You can also explore both free and pro widgets by using the filter options in the widget panel. Introduction The Post Meta Info Widget shows details like author, date, categories, and tags for quick post insights. Key Use Cases for the Post Meta Info Widget in Elementor: Use the Post Meta Info widget to display essential post details like author, date, categories, and tags. Customize its design and layout to match your site’s style, ensuring clear and organized post information for users. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate a Post Meta Info Widget? How to Add Post Meta Info Widget in Elementor Open the page where you want to add the Post Meta Info Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Post Meta Info.“ Drag the Post Meta Info widget to your desired section. The Post Meta Info widget will now be available for customization. How to Configure the Post Meta Info Widget Create a New Page: Go to Pages > Add New, set a title, choose the Elementor Full Width template, and click Publish. Edit with Elementor: Click Edit with Elementor to open the editor. Insert Post Meta Info Widget: In the Elementor panel, search for the Post Meta Info Widget. Drag and drop it into your desired section. Customize: The widget automatically displays post meta information. Adjust the size, alignment, border, and styling as needed. Publish: Click Update to save and publish the page. Configuring Post Meta Info Widget: A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Post Meta Info Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content, Style, and Advanced. Content Settings 1. Layout The Layout option offers two styles for presenting post meta information: Style 1: Displays the post meta information in a single line. Style 2: Displays the post meta information in a stacked format, with each meta item on its own line. How it Affects the Display: Style 1 will display meta information like author, date, and categories horizontally, in one line. Style 2 will stack these elements vertically, with each piece of information appearing on a separate line. Alignment Under the Alignment section, you have three options: Left: Aligns the meta information to the left of the container. Center: Centers the meta information within the container. Right: Aligns the meta information to the right of the container. How it Affects the Display: Changing the alignment will adjust the position of the entire meta information block within its container. The selected alignment will be reflected in real-time on the page. Separator The Separator option allows you to choose how the meta information elements are separated. You can choose from two available options: Slash (“/”): Adds a slash between each piece of meta information. Comma (“,”): Adds a comma between each piece of meta information. How it Affects the Display: The separator determines the visual separation between the meta items. The selected separator will be reflected immediately, updating how the metadata appears between the various elements (e.g., author, date, categories). 1. Content List Title: The List Title option allows you to define a custom heading or label for the meta list. Effect on Display: The title appears above or beside the meta information block, depending on the layout and styling. It helps identify the metadata section, such as “Post Info”, “Details”, or “By the Author”. Meta Options: You can select and display any combination of the following metadata elements: Category Date View Count Author Reading Time Comments Effect on Display: Each selected meta item is displayed in the order chosen. For example: Selecting Author and Date will show something like: by John Doe / April 22, 2025. Enabling Reading Time adds the estimated reading duration (e.g., 3 min read). These values are dynamically pulled from the post’s metadata and will update automatically based on the current post’s content. Icon Customization: Each meta item includes an associated icon, which can be enabled, disabled, or replaced with a custom icon. Effect on Display: Icons provide a visual cue for each meta type (e.g., a calendar for the date or a user icon for the author). Toggling or customizing icons changes how the information is visually communicated and enhances user readability. Separator: You can define a separator to appear between each meta item in the list (e.g., slash (/), dot (•), pipe (|), or comma (,)). Effect on Display: The chosen separator appears between each meta element, impacting the overall look and spacing. For example: With a slash, the display might look like: John Doe / April 22, 2025 / 5 min read. With a pipe, it becomes: John Doe | April 22, 2025 | 5 min read. Style Settings In the Style Section of the Post Content widget, you will find the following options to customize and enhance the visual appearance of your content: Typography: Customize font family, size, weight, transform, and line height across all meta elements for consistency.Text Color: Define the primary text color used in the widget. Column Gap / Row Gap: Controls horizontal and vertical spacing between meta items and rows. Spacing: Fine-tune the distance between icons, text, and other elements for better layout structure. Effect on Display: These settings establish the overall structure and readability of the meta block. Proper spacing and font adjustments enhance both aesthetics and user experience. Separator Position: Set the separator before or after meta items, affecting flow and alignment. Icon Size & Color: Customize size and color of the separator icon or symbol. Effect on Display: Adjusts how distinct and visually separated the meta items are. Larger or colored separators provide more emphasis, while smaller ones offer a minimalist look. Category Styling Column Gap / Row Gap: Adjusts the spacing between multiple categories displayed. Separator Position: Choose where the separator appears between categories. Hover Style: Select from effects such as Divided, Cross, None, Cropping, Rollover Top, Rollover Left, Parallel Border, Rollover Cross for interactive hover animations. Typography: Control font settings specifically for category labels. Padding: Space inside the category tag, affecting its size and position. Border Type: Choose from Default, None, Solid, Double, Dotted, Dashed, Groove. Border Radius: Rounds category tag edges for a softer appearance. Transition: Sets the duration and smoothness of hover effects. Animation Effect (Normal & Hover): Customize how the category reacts visually in static and hover states. Color: Text color control for both normal and hover states. Background Type: Set solid color, gradient, or image background. Box Shadow: Adds depth and emphasis around the category tags. Icon, Icon Color & Spacing: Enable or disable icons, change their color, and control their distance from text. Effect on Display: These settings allow precise control over how categories appear and behave, improving both aesthetic value and interactivity. Author Styling Typography: Set author text style. Transition: Manage hover effect smoothness. Animation Effect (Normal & Hover): Add visual interaction when hovered or in a static state. Color: Set normal and hover text colors. Icon Size, Color & Spacing: Customize author icon appearance and spacing from text. Effect on Display: Creates a visually appealing author section that can subtly draw attention or integrate seamlessly with the layout. Date Styling Color: Control text and icon color. Typography: Set font style and size for the date. Icon Size, Color & Spacing: Adjust the date icon to match other elements. Effect on Display: Enables consistent styling with other meta elements while making the publication date easily visible and distinguishable. View Count Styling Color: Define the text and icon color for views. Typography: Adjust how the view count is displayed textually. Icon Settings (Size, Color, Spacing): Modify the visual representation of the view’s icon. Effect on Display: Allows the view count to stand out or blend in, depending on the emphasis desired for post popularity. Comment Styling Color: Set text and icon colors for comment count. Typography: Customize how the number of comments is styled. Icon Settings: Adjust icon size, color, and spacing for better alignment. Separator Size, Color & Spacing: Control how the comments separator is presented. Effect on Display: Improves readability and emphasis on user engagement through comments, with full control over style and positioning. These comprehensive style controls ensure each element within the Post Meta Info Widget aligns with your branding and user interface goals, offering both visual appeal and functional clarity. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Words The Post Content widget in Elementor allows you to customize and enhance your posts with options for layout, styling, and metadata. It helps create a clean, engaging, and professional presentation for your content.
How to Configure Animation Addons for Elementor Features Animation Addons for Elementor delivers performance-ready animation tools that enhance the user experience. Whether you’re aiming for subtle transitions or bold visual effects, setting it up is straightforward. This guide will take you through everything you need to know to get started. 1. First of all, head to Animation Addons for Elementor > Setup, and then hit Continue. 2. Next, you need to activate the widgets you want to use. For example, if you want to use the Image Box widget or the Image Box Slider, simply toggle the switch to enable them. After that, click on “Continue” and repeat the same process to activate the Extensions, just as you did with the widgets. 3. Once you’ve clicked ‘Continue,’ simply hit the ‘Go to Dashboard’ button to complete the setup and start exploring the addons. 4. After successfully completing the setup process, navigate to the Widgets and Extensions tabs. From there, you can selectively enable the widget elements and extension features that best suit your needs. Final Verdict Now that you’ve learned how to configure the key features of Animation Addons for Elementor, you’re ready to transform your website with smooth, high-impact animations. Whether you’re building a dynamic landing page or an engaging scroll-based experience, the tools are in your hands. Start exploring and bring your creative vision to life. If you have any questions or need a hand, feel free to reach out to our support team—we’re always here to help.
Counter Before setting up the Counter Widget, make sure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. Once activated, you’ll get access to all free Elementor widgets, including the Counter Widget—completely free! You can also explore both free and pro widgets using the filter options. Introduction The Counter Widget displays animated numbers—perfect for highlighting stats or milestones with customizable styles. Key Use Cases for the Counter Widget in Elementor: Use the Counter widget to highlight statistics, milestones, or achievements dynamically. Display real-time data with engaging animations to enhance user interaction. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Counter Widget? Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Counter Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. How to Add the Counter Widget in Elementor: Open the page where you want to add the Counter Widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Counter Widget“. Drag the widget to your desired section. The Counter Widget is now ready for customization! How to Configure the Counter Widget in Animation Addons: In the Elementor panel, search for the “Counter Widget”. Drag and drop the widget into the desired section. Customize the counter settings using the available options in the Elementor panel. Your Counter Widget is now ready to use! Use the tabs to personalize number style, animation, and layout for a visually engaging result. Configuring the Counter Widget in Animation Addons: A Step-by-Step Guide The Counter Widget in Elementor offers three main tabs: Content, Style, and Advanced, allowing you to customize the number format, animation style, and layout. Content Settings Content In the Content section, you’ll find the following settings: Starting Number: The initial value of the counter. Ending Number: The final value the counter will reach. Number Prefix: Adds text before the number (e.g., “$”). Number Suffix: Adds text after the number (e.g., “%”). Animation Duration: Sets how long the counter animation lasts. Thousand Separator Toggle: Enables or disables the comma separator for large numbers. Separator: Defines the character used as a separator (e.g., comma). Title: Adds a title to your counter. Direction: Controls whether the counter counts up or down. Gap: Adjusts the spacing between numbers. Separator Button: Enables separator for thousands in large numbers. Alignment: Aligns the counter text (left, center, right). Style Settings The Style section consists of three parts: Number, Suffix/Prefix, and Title. Let’s explore how to customize each setting. Number Customize the font, size, color, weight, and letter spacing for the counter number. Prefix/Suffix Adjust the font, size, color, and weight for the number prefix and suffix. Title Style the title text, including font, size, color, and weight to match the overall design. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve now learned how to configure the Counter widget in Elementor to effectively customize and display dynamic counters on your website. If you need further assistance, feel free to reach out to our support team! View Live Demo
Filterable Gallery The Filterable Gallery Widget in Animation Addons for Elementor is a pro feature. To use it, make sure the plugin is installed and activated on your website. While you can browse both free and pro widgets using the filtering options, this specific widget is only accessible in the pro version. Introduction The Filterable Gallery Widget lets you display images with interactive filters for a clean and organized look. Key Use Cases for the Filterable Gallery Widget: Showcase images in categories with interactive filters. Customize layout and style to match your website’s design. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Filterable Gallery Widget: Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Filterable Gallery Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. The Filterable Gallery Widget is now ready to use! How to Add Filterable Gallery Widget in Elementor: Open the page where you want to add the Filterable Gallery Widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Filterable Gallery Widget.” Drag the widget to your desired section. How to Configure Filterable Gallery Widget In the Elementor panel, search for the “Filterable Gallery Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into your desired section. Add your gallery items with images, titles, and categories. Enable filtering options to let users sort content by category. Use the Style tab to customize layout, spacing, typography, hover effects, and colors to match your website’s design. Configuring Filterable Gallery Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Filterable Gallery Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content, Style, and Advanced. Content Settings In the Content section, you’ll find the following options: Layout: Customize the display style of the gallery, such as grid or masonry layout. Filter: Add categories or tags to enable filtering of gallery items. Gallery: Upload and manage the images or items that will appear in the gallery. Style Settings In the Style tab, you can fine-tune the design of your filterable gallery using the following sections: 1. Layout Gap – Adjust the spacing between gallery items. Row Height – Define the vertical height of each gallery row. 2. Filter Padding – Control the internal spacing of the filter buttons. Gap – Set the space between individual filter items. Margin – Define outer spacing around the filter area. Typography – Customize the font style, size, and weight of filter text. Text Color – Choose a color for the filter text. Background Type – Set a background color or gradient for the filter buttons. Alignment – Align filter options (left, center, or right) within the section. 3. Gallery Border Radius – Apply rounded corners to gallery item images. Play Button – Customize the Size and Color of the play button shown on video items within the gallery. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome Congratulations! You’ve now successfully set up the Filterable Gallery Widget in Elementor to showcase your images with easy-to-use filter options. If you need any further help or have any questions, don’t hesitate to reach out to our support team. View Live Demo
Form Widgets Articles Advanced Mailchimp Advanced Mailchimp The Advanced Mailchimp Widget in Animation Addons for Elementor is a paid feature. To access this widget, ensure the plugin is installed and activated on your site. You can also explore both free and pro widgets through the filtering options. Introduction The Advanced Mailchimp Widget integrates Mailchimp forms with advanced customization options to help grow and manage your email list. Key Use Cases for the Advanced Mailchimp Widget: Style the form to match your site’s design for a seamless user experience. Easily integrate customizable Mailchimp sign-up forms to grow your email list. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Advanced Mailchimp Widget: Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Advanced Mailchimp Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Advanced Mailchimp Widget is ready to use! How to Add Advanced Mailchimp Widget in Elementor: Open the page where you want to add the Advanced Mailchimp Widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Advanced Mailchimp Widget.” Drag the widget to your desired section. The Advanced Mailchimp Widget is now ready for customization. How to Configure Advanced Mailchimp Widget In the Elementor panel, search for the “Advanced Mailchimp Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into your desired section. From the widget settings, connect your Mailchimp account and select the appropriate audience list. You can then customize advanced form fields, enable optional inputs like name or phone, and fine-tune the layout and design using extensive styling options in the Elementor panel. Configuring Advanced Mailchimp Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Advanced Mailchimp Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content,Style and Advanced. Content Settings Within the Content section, you’ll find two distinct subsections: Form and Mailchimp, each offering essential configuration options to customize the widget’s functionality and integration. Mailchimp Under the Mailchimp section, you can configure the following options: Mailchimp API: Enter your Mailchimp API key to connect your website with your Mailchimp account and enable seamless data integration. Audience: Select the specific Mailchimp audience (list) where you want to collect and store subscriber data. Enable Double Opt-In: Activate this option to require users to confirm their subscription via email before being added to the list—enhancing email security and compliance. Form Under the Form section, you can configure the following options: Email: Set the primary email input field for the subscription form. Label: Define or customize the label displayed for the email input. Placeholder: Add a placeholder text inside the email field to guide users. Additional Fields: Enable and manage extra fields such as name or phone number to collect more user information. Under the Button settings: Text: Customize the button text (“Subscribe”). Icon: Add an icon to the button for visual enhancement. Icon Position: Choose whether the icon appears before or after the text. Icon Spacing: Adjust the space between the icon and the button text for proper alignment and spacing. Style Settings In the Style section of the Advanced Mailchimp Widget, you will find various controls that allow you to customize the appearance of the subscription form. These include: Layout: Adjust the overall layout and spacing of form elements to align with your design preferences. Label: Style the text labels associated with each input field. You can modify typography, color, spacing, and alignment to match your site’s branding. Input: Customize the general input field styles, including padding, borders, background, and text appearance. Email: Specifically target and style the email input field, allowing for consistent formatting and design flexibility. Select: Style any dropdown (select) fields within the form. This includes control over background, border, font, and spacing. Radio: Customize the look and feel of radio buttons, including size, alignment, and label styling. Button: Define the appearance of the submit button. You can modify its typography, colors, border styles, hover effects, and more to enhance visual engagement and user experience. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Advanced Mailchimp Widget in Elementor to integrate customizable email sign-up forms and grow your email list. For any further assistance or inquiries, feel free to contact our support. View Live Demo
GSAP DrawSvg Introduction GSAP’s DrawSVG plugin lets you animate SVG strokes dynamically, creating self-drawing effects like lines, signatures, and path animations with precise control. Key Use Cases for GSAP DrawSVG GSAP DrawSVG allows precise control over SVG stroke animations, making it ideal for: Hand-drawn effects – Animate sketches and illustrations. Signature animations – Create realistic handwriting effects. Loading indicators – Design custom progress animations. Interactive storytelling – Guide users through animated visuals. With DrawSVG, developers can easily bring SVG graphics to life with smooth, dynamic animations Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate a GSAP DrawSvg widget ? To activate the Event Slider widget, follow these steps: Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Locate the GSAP DrawSvg widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. How to Add GSAP DrawSvg Widget in Elementor Open the page where you want to add the GSAP DrawSvg. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “GSAP DrawSvg“ Drag the GSAP DrawSvg widget to your desired section. The GSAP DrawSvg widget will now be available for customization. How to Configure the GSAP DrawSvg Widget Enable it, create a new page, set a title, choose the Elementor Full Width template, and publish. Adjust options as needed. Note: Selecting full Elementor elements in a template unlocks all widgets and customization options, boosting design flexibility and functionality. Navigate to the Edit with Elementor option to access the editor interface. After selection, the Elementor panel appears with all tools and customization options. Click the “+” icon to add a container, then select the appropriate column structure and layout. Here’s the interface where you can configure the settings and customize the GSAP DrawSvg Widget across various tabs. Configuring GSAP DrawSvg Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the GSAP DrawSvg widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content and Advanced. Content Settings There is only one option available: Settings. Settings I’ve made a little bit of adjustments to suit my design needs and customize the settings for a better visual experience. You can make further customizations using additional options to suit your design requirements. As you adjust them, you’ll notice the changes, which will help enhance your design skills. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the GSAP DrawSVG widget to create dynamic and engaging SVG animations on your website. With precise control over stroke lengths and durations, you can bring your SVG graphics to life. For any further assistance or inquiries, feel free to contact our support team!
Can I upgrade my licenses? Yes, you can upgrade your license whenever you need. Just log in to your account at animation-addons.com, find the plugin you purchased, and click on “View Licenses” next to it. From there, you’ll see the available upgrade options. If there are any upgrades for your license, you’ll see a View Upgrades link on the right. Simply click it to explore your options and make the upgrade as per your choice. Afterward, you will see the total cost for each option, such as Business and Agency. Choose the one that best suits your preference to complete the purchase. Next, enter your details, such as your first name, last name, and email address, and choose your preferred payment method. After completing your upgrade purchase, your license will be upgraded, allowing you to activate it on additional URLs. To view the domains where your license is activated or deactivate it from a website, head to your account page and click on the View Licenses link. From there, click Manage Sites, and you’ll have the option to add a new site for activation or deactivate an existing one, like this:
Post Pagination Before setting up the Post Pagination Widget, make sure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. Once activated, you’ll have access to all free Elementor widgets, including the Post Pagination Widget—at no cost! Additionally, you can explore both free and pro widgets by filtering the selection options. Introduction The Post Pagination widget adds navigation for users to easily browse between multiple pages of content on your site. Key Use Cases for the Post Pagination Widget in Elementor: Use the Post Pagination widget to enable easy navigation through multiple pages of content. Customize the layout and style to fit your site’s design, providing a seamless user experience for browsing posts. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate a Post Pagination Widget ? How to Add Post Pagination Widget in Elementor Open the page where you want to add the Post Pagination Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Post Pagination“ Drag the Post Pagination widget to your desired section. The Post Pagination will now be available for customization. How to Configure the Post Pagination Widget Enable the widget, create a new page, set a title, choose the Elementor Full Width template, and publish the page. Adjust page settings as needed. In the Elementor panel, search for the “Post Pagination Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into your desired section. The widget will automatically display navigation links to move between post pages.You can customize its layout, alignment, icon style, spacing, and typography to match your site’s design. Configuring Post Pagination Widget : : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Post PaginationWidget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content, Style and Advanced. Content Settings The Content section of the Post Pagination Widget provides a single configuration panel named Settings, allowing you to control the behavior and appearance of the pagination. Settings 1. Preset Style Default: Displays a standard pagination layout with basic navigation. Layout 2: Offers an alternate visual style with different alignment and structure. Effect on Display: Switching between these styles changes the visual structure of the pagination buttons, offering flexibility to match your site’s design. 2.Show Post Title Button Toggle this option to display the title of the next or previous post within the pagination buttons. Effect on Display: When enabled, the pagination will show the actual post titles alongside the navigation controls, providing users more context. 3. Enable Preview Button Allows you to show a preview button that links to the previous or next post. Effect on Display: Enhances navigation by enabling users to see what’s coming next or revisit the previous post, improving engagement. 4. Previous Title & Icon Customize the text label for the “Previous” button. Change or disable the icon associated with it. Effect on Display: Updates the appearance and content of the button that leads to the previous post, allowing for better clarity and styling. 5. Enable Next Button, Title & Icon Enable or disable the “Next” button. Customize the label and icon for this button. Effect on Display:Controls whether the user can proceed to the next post, and how that action is visually represented. Style Settings The Style section of the Post Pagination Widget provides two customization panels: Style and Post Style. These settings control the visual appearance and interactive behavior of pagination buttons and post titles. 1.Style Gap & Margin Gap: Adjusts the spacing between the Previous and Next buttons. Margin: Controls the outer spacing of the pagination container. Effect on Display: These options define the overall spacing, helping to maintain layout consistency and visual balance within the section. Previous / Next Settings Typography: Customize the font style, size, weight, and alignment for the button text. Border Type & Radius: Choose border styles (None, Solid, Dashed, etc.) and apply rounded corners. Width & Height: Define fixed dimensions for pagination buttons. Gap: Set internal spacing between the icon and text. Icon Size: Adjust the size of the navigation icons. Animation Theme – Normal & Hover:Choose from two animation states—Normal and Hover—to control how buttons appear statically and when hovered. Color & Background Type:Define the default and hover text color, as well as background styles (solid, gradient, or image). Effect on Display: These settings provide full control over the appearance of pagination buttons. You can make them visually stand out or seamlessly integrate them into your site design. Hover animations enhance interactivity, offering a more engaging user experience. 2. Post Style Panel Post Title Title Typography: Set the font properties for the post titles shown within the pagination. Spacing: Adjust the space between the title and other elements (icon, button, etc.). Animation Theme – Normal & Hover:Apply subtle or dynamic effects for title transitions during user interaction. Color: Customize the text color for both normal and hover states. Effect on Display: These options allow you to emphasize post titles, ensuring they are visually aligned with your site’s branding and enhance readability. Animation effects help improve the user interface by drawing attention during interaction. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make.. Final Words The Post Pagination widget in Elementor helps you manage and enhance navigation between multiple posts. With customizable layout and styling options, it ensures a smooth user experience and clean navigation for your readers.
Icon Box Before setting up the Icon Widget, make sure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. Once activated, you’ll get access to all free Elementor widgets, including the Icon Widget—completely free! You can also explore both free and pro widgets by using the filter options. Introduction The Icon Widget in Elementor lets you display fully customizable icons with control over size, color, alignment, hover effects, and links, enhancing both design and interactivity. Key Use Cases for the Icon Box Widget in Elementor: Use the Icon Box widget to showcase services, features, or key offerings with icons and descriptive text. Create visually engaging sections to highlight important information, enhancing user experience and interaction. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Icon Widget? Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Icon Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Icon Widget is ready to use! How to Add the Icon Widget in Elementor: Open the page where you want to add the Icon Widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Icon Widget”. Drag the widget to your desired section. The Icon Widget is now ready for customization! How to Configure the Icon Widget in Animation Addons: In the Elementor panel, search for the “Icon Widget.” Drag anddrop the widget into the desired section. Customize icon settings like type, size, color, hover effects, and link using the available options. Your Icon Widget is now ready to use! Use the tabs to style and personalize it for a visually engaging effect. Configuring Icon Box Widget in Animation Addons: A Step-by-Step Guide. The Icon Box Widget is available in Elementor and can be placed on the desired section of the page. It offers three main settings tabs: Content, Style, and Advanced. Content Settings Icon Box Under the Content section of the Icon Widget, you’ll find the Icon settings, where you can customize the following: Icon Box Style: Choose the layout style for the icon and text. Icon: Select the icon you want to display. Title: Add a custom title next to or below the icon. Title HTML Tag: Choose a suitable HTML tag for the title (like H1–H6, div, span). Description: Add short supporting text or details below the title. Media: Upload or link media content if needed. Paragraph: Insert additional text or context as a paragraph. Each setting allows you to personalize the widget for a clean, functional design. Button In the Button section of the Icon Widget, you’ll find the following customization options: Style: Choose the default look of the button. Hover Style: Set the visual effect when users hover over the button. Text: Enter the button label or call-to-action. Link: Add a URL where the button will redirect. Icon: Select an icon to show with the text. Icon Position: Place the icon before or after the text. Direction: Set the direction of the button content (row or column). Icon Spacing: Adjust the space between the icon and text. These settings help you design engaging, clickable buttons for a better user experience. Style Settings Style settings provide the flexibility to fine-tune and enhance your content, improving its visual appeal. Within this section, you’ll find options for Box, Icon, Content, Button, and Hover Effects. Let’s explore how each of these works: In the Style section of the Icon Widget, you’ll find four key areas to customize: Box: Adjust background, border, padding, and overall box layout. Icon: Change icon size, color, spacing, and hover effects. Content: Style the title and description with typography, color, and spacing. Button: Customize button appearance, including colors, typography, border, and hover animations. These controls let you perfectly style the widget to match your site design. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve now learned how to configure the Icon Box in Elementor to effectively customize and display dynamic counters on your website. If you need further assistance, feel free to reach out to our support team! View Live Demo
Image Accordion The Image Accordion Widget in Animation Addons for Elementor is a pro feature. To use this widget, make sure the plugin is installed and activated on your site. You can browse both free and pro widgets using the filtering options, but this specific widget is available only in the pro version. Introduction The Image Accordion Widget in Animation Addons for Elementor displays images in a collapsible accordion style, offering a clean, interactive way to showcase images. Key Use Cases for the Image Accordion Widget: Display images in a compact, interactive accordion style. Enhance user experience with a clean, organized image gallery. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Image Accordion Widget: Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Image Accordion Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Image Accordion Widget is ready to use! How to Add the Image Accordion Widget in Elementor: Open the page where you want to add the Image Accordion Widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Image Accordion Widget.” Drag the widget to your desired section. How to Configure Image Accordion Widget In the Elementor panel, search for the “Image Accordion Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into your desired section. Add accordion items by uploading images and setting titles, descriptions, and links. Adjust the accordion behavior such as direction, interaction type, and expanded panel. Use the Style tab to customize image size, spacing, typography, overlay effects, and colors to align with your website’s design. Configuring Image Accordion Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide After adding the Image Accordion Widget to your page, you can customize its settings by navigating through the Content, Style, and Advanced tabs. Content Settings In the Content section of the Image Accordion Widget, you will find two main options: Image Accordion: This is where you can upload and configure the images to be displayed in the accordion. You can add multiple images, set titles, and descriptions for each accordion item. Button: You can enable or disable a button for each accordion item. If enabled, you can customize the button text and link to direct users to another page or section. Style Settings In the Style section of the Image Accordion Widget, you have two main options to customize: Content: Customize the appearance of the images, titles, and descriptions within the accordion. You can adjust spacing, typography, and image alignment to match your design. Button: Customize the button’s appearance, including font size, color, background, border, and hover effects, allowing you to match the button’s style to your website’s theme. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Image Accordion Widget in Elementor to create an engaging, interactive image section with titles, descriptions, and custom links. For any further assistance or inquiries, feel free to contact our support. View Live Demo
Video Widgets Articles Video Popup Video Box Video Mask Video Popup The Video Popup Widget in Animation Addons for Elementor is a paid feature. To use this widget, ensure the plugin is installed and activated on your site. You can explore both free and pro widgets using the filtering options, but this specific widget is available only in the pro version. Introduction The Video Popup Widget in Animation Addons for Elementor lets you display videos in popups, boosting engagement and interactivity on your site. Key Use Cases for the Video Popup Widget: Display videos in a popup format for better user engagement. Customize the popup design to match your site’s style and branding. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Video Popup Widget: Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Video Popup Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Video Popup Widget is ready to use! How to Add Video Popup Widget in Elementor: Open the page where you want to add the Video Popup Widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Video Popup Widget.” Drag the widget to your desired section. The Video Popup Widget is now ready for customization. How to Configure Video Popup Widget Enable it, create a new page, set a title, choose the Elementor Full Width template, and publish. Adjust options as needed. You can then customize the thumbnail image, play icon, and popup behavior. Use the styling options in the Elementor panel to adjust appearance, alignment, and animations for an engaging user experience. In the Elementor panel, search for the “Video Popup Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into your desired section. From the widget settings, add your video URL (YouTube, Vimeo, or self-hosted). You can then customize the thumbnail image, play icon, and popup behavior. Use the styling options in the Elementor panel to adjust appearance, alignment, and animations for an engaging user experience. Configuring Video Popup Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Video Popup Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content,Style and Advanced. Content Settings In the Content section, you’ll find two customization options. Button and video. I only have a button section. Button The Button section allows you to customize how the play button appears and behaves: Text: Set the label or title that appears on the video popup button. Icon: Choose a play icon or any other icon to enhance the button’s visual appeal. Icon Spacing: Adjust the space between the text and icon for better layout control. Active Ripple: Enable a ripple effect when the button is clicked, adding a dynamic visual cue. Ripple Color: Define the color of the ripple animation for brand consistency. Active Spinner: Optionally show a loading spinner when the video is being fetched. Alignment: Align the button (left, center, or right) to fit your page design. Video The Video section allows you to define the source of your video: Video Link: Paste the URL of your video from YouTube, Vimeo, or a self-hosted source. This is the video that will open in a popup when the button is clicked. Style Settings The Style section provides control over the visual appearance of your Video Popup button: Button Typography: Customize font style, size, weight, line height, and letter spacing for the button text. Width & Height: Define the exact size of the button for consistent layout and design. Border Type: Choose from solid, dashed, dotted, or none to frame the button as needed. Border Radius: Round the button’s corners to match your design aesthetic. Box Shadow: Add shadows for depth and emphasis, making the button stand out. Text Color: Set the color of the button text for better visibility or brand alignment. Background Type: Choose between solid colors, gradients, or images as the button background. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Video Popup Widget in Elementor to display engaging videos in a popup format. It’s a great way to boost user interaction on your site. For any questions or further assistance, feel free to reach out to our support team. View Live Demo Video Box The Video Popup Widget in Animation Addons for Elementor is a paid feature. To use this widget, make sure the plugin is properly installed and activated on your site. While you can browse both free and pro widgets using the filtering options, please note that this particular widget is only available in the pro version. Introduction The Video Box Widget in Animation Addons for Elementor allows you to showcase videos in an interactive and visually appealing format, enhancing user engagement on your website. Key Use Cases for the Video Box Widget: Display engaging videos directly on your site to capture attention. Customize the video box design to match your site’s overall look and feel. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Video Box Widget: Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Video Box Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget.Now, the Video Box Widget is ready to use! How to Add Video Box Widget in Elementor: Open the page where you want to add the Video Box Widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Video Box Widget.” How to Configure the Video Box Widget: In the Elementor panel, search for the “Video Box Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into your desired section. In the widget settings, add your video URL and set a custom thumbnail if needed. You can also adjust the title, description, icon, and play button appearance. Configuring Video Box Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Video Box Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content,Style and Advanced. Content Settings The Content section of the Video Box Widget is divided into several configurable panels to help you design and control the video presentation effectively. Below is a breakdown of each subsection and its available settings: 1. Layout Style: Choose between two predefined layout styles. Alignment: Set the alignment of the entire widget content (left, center, or right). 2. Thumbnail Type: Select whether to display an image or a video as the thumbnail. Image: Upload or choose a thumbnail image from the media library. Image Resolution: Define the resolution quality of the thumbnail image. 3. Content Title: Enter the main heading text to be displayed. Title HTML Tag: Set the appropriate semantic HTML tag (e.g., H1, H2, H3) for the title. Subtitle: Add a short descriptive subtitle to appear below the title. 4. Button Text: Customize the call-to-action button text. Icon: Select an icon to be displayed alongside the button text. Icon Spacing: Adjust the spacing between the icon and the button text. Active Ripple: Enable or disable the ripple effect on click. Ripple Color: Choose the color of the ripple animation. Active Spinner: Toggle the loading spinner effect when the video is triggered. Style Settings The Style section of the Video Box Widget offers comprehensive design customization options across four main categories: Video Box, Thumbnail, Content, and Button. Below is a detailed breakdown of each section and its styling controls: 1. Video Box Border Type: Select the border style (solid, dashed, dotted, etc.) for the video box container. Border Radius: Define the corner roundness of the video box to achieve sharp or rounded edges. 2. Thumbnail Height: Adjust the height of the thumbnail to fit your design layout and maintain responsive proportions. 3. Content Padding: Set inner spacing around the content area for better visual separation. Background Type: Choose between classic color, gradient, or image backgrounds for the content container. Title Color: Set the color for the title text. Title Typography: Customize the font family, size, weight, line height, and letter spacing for the title. Title Space: Control the spacing below the title. Subtitle Typography: Define the typography settings for the subtitle text. Subtitle Color: Choose a color for the subtitle text. Subtitle Space: Adjust the spacing below the subtitle for consistent layout flow. 4. Button Typography: Configure the font settings for the button text. Width & Height: Set the button’s dimensions to match your design needs. Border Type: Choose the border style for the button. Border Radius: Define how rounded the button edges should be. Box Shadow: Apply a shadow effect around the button for depth and emphasis. Text Color: Set the color of the button text. Background Type: Customize the button background using a solid color, gradient, or image. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome And that’s it! You’ve now successfully configured the Video Box Widget in Elementor to showcase engaging video content in a sleek and interactive way. Feel free to explore more styling options to match your website’s vibe. Need help? Our support team is just a message away! View Live Demo Video Mask The Video Mask Widget in Animation Addons for Elementor is a premium feature. To access this widget, make sure the plugin is installed and activated on your site. While both free and pro widgets are available, the Video Mask Widget can only be used with the pro version of the plugin. Introduction The Video Mask Widget in Animation Addons for Elementor lets you add custom masks to videos, creating unique and engaging effects that enhance your website’s visual appeal. Key Use Cases for the Video Mask Widget: Add custom masks to videos for unique and eye-catching visual effects. Enhance your website’s design and create an interactive user experience with stunning video displays. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Video Mask Widget: Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Video Mask Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Video Mask Widget is ready to use! How to Add Video Mask Widget in Elementor: Open the page where you want to add the Video Mask Widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Video Mask Widget.” Drag the widget to your desired section. The Video Mask Widget is now ready for customization. How to Configure Video Mask Widget In the Elementor panel, search for the “Video Mask Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into your desired section on the page. In the widget settings, insert your video URL and choose a mask style to overlay on the video (e.g., shapes or SVG masks). Customize the mask position, size, and behavior based on your design requirements. Use the Style tab to refine the appearance by adjusting colors, borders, padding, and shadows for a visually cohesive look. Configuring Video Mask Widget: A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Video Mask Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content, Style, and Advanced. Content Settings The Video Mask Widget includes two main customization panels within the Content section: Button and Video. 1. Button Panel This panel allows you to control the button that overlays the video: Other Selection Text Tool: Provides optional text input or selection for custom labeling. Title: Add a title to the video mask section. Course Title: Insert a secondary label or contextual heading (commonly used for courses or categories). Play Icon: Select an icon to represent the play button. Icon Position: Define the icon’s placement relative to the button text (e.g., left, right). Offset: Adjust spacing between elements for better visual alignment. 2. Video Panel This panel configures the video source, behavior, and styling: Video Link: Paste the URL of the video to be displayed. Video Options: Toggle playback behaviors: Autoplay: Start video automatically. Mute: Mute audio on initial play. Playsinline: Ensures videos play inline on mobile devices. Loop Button: Enable looping for continuous playback. Poster: Upload a preview image that displays before the video plays. Mask: Shape: Select a mask shape to overlay the video. Size: Adjust the size of the mask relative to the video frame. Offset: Fine-tune the mask’s position. Border Type: Choose from solid, dashed, dotted, or none. Video Height: Define the video container height in pixels, % or viewport units. Style Settings The Style section of the Video Mask Widget provides design controls to fine-tune the visual appearance of the video, button, and related elements. It includes the following customization panels: 1. Gap Gap: Adjust the spacing between the button and content elements, allowing for flexible layout control and improved visual balance. 2. Alignment Alignment: Set the horizontal alignment (left, center, or right) of the button and text elements within the widget container. 3. Title Color: Define the default text color of the title. Typography: Customize the font family, size, weight, transform, and line height of the title to maintain consistency with your site’s text styling. 4. Icon Color: Set the default color of the play icon. Size: Adjust the size of the icon to fit your design requirements. 5. Hover Effects Hover Color: Change the title color when hovered over, adding interactivity and emphasis. Hover Icon Color: Set the color of the icon when a user hovers over the widget. 6. Active State Styling Active Title Color: Customize the title color when the video is actively playing. Active Icon Color: Define a distinct color for the play icon in the active state, helping users visually identify the current playback status. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Video Mask Widget in Elementor to create stunning video effects and enhance your website’s visual appeal. For any further assistance or inquiries, feel free to contact our support. View Live Demo
Social Share Before setting up the Social Share Widget, make sure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. Once activated, you’ll have access to all free Elementor widgets, including the Social Share Widget—at no cost! Additionally, you can explore both free and pro widgets by filtering the selection options. Introduction The Social Share Widget adds share buttons to your site, making it easy for users to share content and increase engagement. Key Use Cases for the Social Share Widget in Elementor: Use the Social Share widget to add social media sharing buttons to your site, enabling visitors to share content. Customize the design to match your site’s style, enhancing engagement and expanding reach. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor To activate the Social Share Widget, follow these steps: Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Social Share Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. This will activate the Social Share widget for you to use! Here’s how you can add the Social Share Widget in Elementor: Open the page where you want to add the Social Share Widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Social Share Widget.“ Drag the Social Share Widget to your desired section. The Social Share Widget will now be available for customization. How to Configure Social Share Widget Enable the widget, create a new page, set a title, choose the Elementor Full Width template, and publish the page. Adjust page settings as needed. In the Elementor panel, search for the “Social Share Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into your desired section. Social media share buttons will be displayed automatically. You can customize the layout, icon style, alignment, and colors to match your site’s design and encourage content sharing. Configuring Social Share Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Social Share Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content, Style and Advanced. Content Settings Once the Social Share Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content, Style and Advanced. Layout Options Alignment: Choose from Left, Center, or Right to position the social icons within the section. Direction: Select Row or Column to define the orientation of the icons. Social Platforms Facebook Icon: Customize or change the Facebook icon. Link: Add your Facebook share or profile link.Color: Set the icon color. Background Color: Define the background behind the icon. Twitter Icon: Customize the Twitter icon. Link: Insert your Twitter share or profile link. Color: Choose the icon color. Background Color: Set the background color. YouTube Icon: Modify the YouTube icon. Link: Enter your YouTube channel or video link.Color: Adjust the icon color. Background Color: Define the background color. Effect on Display: These settings allow you to control both the appearance and functionality of each social button, ensuring consistency with your brand and encouraging user interaction. Style Settings The Style section of the Social Share Widget includes two panels: Icon and Icon Hover, allowing you to customize the appearance and hover effects of your social icons. 1. Icon Color: Sets the default icon color. Background Color: Defines the background behind each icon. Size: Adjusts the overall size of the icons. Padding: Adds internal spacing within the icon container. Spacing: Controls the distance between multiple icons. Border Type: Choose from styles like None, Solid, Dotted, Dashed, etc. Border Radius: Rounds the corners of the icon container for a softer or sharper look. Effect on Display: These settings help match the icon design with your site’s branding, enhancing visual consistency and user engagement. 2. Icon Hover Color: Changes the icon color on hover. Background Color: Sets a different background color when hovered. Hover Animation: Select from various animation effects to create interactive transitions when users hover over the icons. Effect on Display: These options enhance interactivity by adding engaging visual feedback, making the icons more dynamic and user-friendly. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Words The Social Share widget in Elementor allows you to easily add social media sharing buttons to your posts. With customizable layout and styling options, it enhances user engagement and helps expand your content’s reach on social platforms. View Live Demo
Animated Title Before setting up the Animated Title Widget, make sure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. Once activated, you’ll get access to all free Elementor widgets, including the Animated Title Widget—completely free! You can also explore both free and pro widgets by using the filter options. Introduction Want your titles to pop? The Animated Title Widget adds animations to your text, making it more engaging and fun for your website visitors. Key Use Cases for the Image Widget in Elementor: Use the Animated Title widget to create eye-catching headlines for your homepage or landing pages. Highlight key services or promotions with dynamic animated text to engage visitors. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Animated Title Widget? Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Animated Title Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Animated Title Widget is ready to use! How to Add the Animated Title Widget in Elementor: Open the page where you want to add the Animated Title widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Animated Title Widget.” Drag the widget to your desired section. The Animated Title widget is now ready for customization! How to Configure the Text Hover Image Widget in Animation Addons: In the Elementor panel, search for the “Animated Title Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into the desired section. Customize the title settings using the available options in the Elementor panel. Your Animated Title Widget is now ready to use! Here’s the interface where you can configure the settings and personalize the animated title using different tabs for a dynamic and engaging visual effect. Configuring Animated Title Widget in Animation Addons: A Step-by-Step Guide The Animated Title Widget is available in Elementor and can be placed in any section of your page. It includes three main settings tabs: Content, Style, and Advanced—each offering customization options to fine-tune your animated title display. In the Content settings of the Animated Title Widget, you’ll find the Content section and the Text Animation feature. This allows you to insert and organize your text, while the animation options (available in the editor panel) help bring your titles to life. Note: Animation effects require the Pro version of the plugin. Content Settings This is the Content section of the Animated Title Widget in Elementor. Here’s what each option does: Title: Enter your desired text. You can highlight parts of the text by enclosing them in square brackets [ ]. Show Prefix: Toggle this option to display or hide a prefix before the title. HTML Tag: Choose the appropriate HTML heading tag (H1, H2, H3, etc.) for SEO and design structure. Alignment: Adjust the title’s alignment to left, center, right, or justified for proper positioning on the page. Text Animation Also, explore the optional Text Animation section to apply engaging effects for smooth transitions. This section offers various animation categories that enhance your content’s visual appeal and make your titles more dynamic. Character The Characters animation in the Animated Title widget animates each character of the text individually, creating effects like typing, fading, or bouncing one letter at a time. You’ll find several customization options to control how each character behaves, allowing for precise and engaging text animations. Enable Editor Toggle: When activated, this allows you to preview and edit the animation directly within the Elementor editor for the Animated Title widget. If disabled, the live preview won’t be shown. With it enabled, use the Play Animation button to instantly view how your customized text animation will appear. Delay: Sets the time interval before the Animated Title animation starts. This lets you control how long after the page loads the animation should begin, helping you create a more timed and engaging user experience. Duration: Defines how long the animation of the Animated Title takes to complete. A higher duration slows down the animation, while a lower value speeds it up—allowing precise control over pacing and visual impact. Stagger: This option adjusts the delay between the appearance of each character in the Animated Title. A higher value increases the delay, creating a more pronounced stagger effect as each character appears one after another. Stagger in Animated Title Widget:Consider the phrase “Welcome to Our Website!” Low Stagger (0.1s): Each character appears quickly one after another, creating a smooth and fast animation. For example, “W” appears, then “e” after 0.1s, followed by “l”, and so on. High Stagger (0.5s): Each character has a longer delay between appearances, adding a dramatic, attention-grabbing effect as each letter shows up one by one. Animation on Scroll Toggle (Animated Title Widget): When enabled, the animation activates as the user scrolls and the widget enters view. If disabled, the animation plays instantly upon page load, independent of scrolling. Transform X & Y (Animated Title Widget): These settings let you shift the text horizontally (X-axis) and vertically (Y-axis) during animation. Measured in pixels, they help define the exact movement path—like sliding text left, right, up, or down for dynamic visual effects. Transform X & Y (Animated Title Widget): X-Axis (Left/Right): Controls horizontal movement.→ Positive values (+) move the text to the right.→ Negative values (−) move the text to the left. Y-Axis (Up/Down): Controls vertical movement.→ Positive values (+) move the text downward.→ Negative values (−) move the text upward. These options help you fine-tune how the animated title enters the screen for a more dynamic effect. Breakpoint (Animated Title Widget): This option allows you to control how the animation behaves across different screen sizes—desktop, tablet, and mobile—ensuring your animated text looks great and performs smoothly on all devices. Text Move (Animated Title Widget): This setting moves the entire text block across the screen, allowing you to create dynamic transitions by adjusting direction and speed—perfect for attention-grabbing animations. Text Reveal (Animated Title Widget): Displays the text gradually using effects like wipe or fade, adding a dramatic and visually engaging entrance to your content. These settings provide complete control over the timing, direction, and responsiveness of the animated title, enabling you to adjust the animation to your preferences and preview it before applying the final changes. Word In the Word animation category, you have several customization options: Enable Editor Toggle: When enabled, this option allows you to preview and adjust the animation directly within the Elementor editor. If disabled, the animation preview is turned off, requiring manual adjustments to settings. With the editor enabled, you can click the Play Animation button to see the animation in action with all customizations applied. Delay: This controls the time before the animation starts for each word. Adjusting the delay will set how long after the page loads the animation will begin for each individual word, allowing you to create a staggered or synchronized effect. Duration: This controls how long the animation takes to complete for each word. A longer duration will slow down the animation, while a shorter duration will speed it up. Stagger: This adjusts the delay between the appearance of each word. Increasing the stagger time will make words appear one after another with more delay, while a shorter value will make them appear quickly in succession. Consider a sentence like: “Welcome to Our Website!” When you set the Stagger option: Low Stagger (0.1 seconds): Each word will appear quickly after the previous one. For example, “Welcome” will appear first, then “to” will appear 0.1 seconds later, followed by “Our” after another 0.1 seconds. The delay between each word’s appearance is minimal, creating a smooth and quick animation effect. High Stagger (0.5 seconds): A longer delay will be applied between each word’s appearance. “Welcome” will appear first, followed by “to” after a 0.5-second delay, then “Our” after another 0.5 seconds. This creates a more dramatic effect, with noticeable gaps between the appearance of each word. Animation on Scroll Toggle: When toggled on, the animation will trigger as the user scrolls down the page. If toggled off, the animation will play immediately when the page loads, regardless of the user’s scroll position. Transform X & Y: These options allow you to adjust the movement of the words along the X (horizontal) and Y (vertical) axes. Positive values move the text in the respective direction (right or down), while negative values move it in the opposite direction (left or up), giving you control over the flow of the animation. These options allow you to adjust the movement of each word along the X and Y axes (left/right and up/down), giving you precise control over the direction of the animation. The values are measured in pixels (px), allowing you to specify how far the words move in each direction. X-Axis (left/right): Controls horizontal movement. Positive values (+) move the word to the right. Negative values (−) move the word to the left. Example: If you set the X-Axis value to +50px, the word will shift 50px to the right. If you set it to -50px, the word will shift 50px to the left. Y-Axis (up/down): Controls vertical movement. Positive values (+) move the word down. Negative values (−) move the word up. Example: If you set the Y-Axis value to +30px, the word will move 30px down. If you set it to -30px, the word will move 30px up. Breakpoint: This option allows you to set custom breakpoints for different screen sizes (desktop, tablet, and mobile). You can adjust how the animation behaves on various devices, ensuring a responsive design that adapts well to different screen sizes and maintains optimal performance across all devices. Text Move In the Text Move animation category, you have several customization options: Enable Editor Toggle: When enabled, this option allows you to preview and edit the animation directly in the Elementor editor. If turned off, the preview is disabled, and you will need to manually adjust the settings. With the editor toggle on, you can also click the Play Animation button to see the animation effect live as you make changes. Delay: This controls the amount of time before the animation starts for the text. By adjusting the delay, you can set how long after the page load the animation should begin, allowing for a smooth entrance of the animated title. Duration: This setting determines how long the animation will take to complete for the text. A longer duration will make the animation slower, while a shorter duration will speed up the animation, allowing you to control the overall timing of the effect. Stagger: This option controls the delay between each piece of text’s animation. Increasing the stagger time will cause each word or letter to appear with a delay after the previous one, creating a more spaced-out effect. A lower value results in a quicker transition where the text appears almost simultaneously. Animation on Scroll Toggle: When this option is toggled on, the animation will trigger when the user scrolls down the page. If toggled off, the animation will play immediately upon page load, regardless of the user’s scroll position. Transform X & Y: These options enable you to move the text along the X (left/right) and Y (up/down) axes. Adjusting these values allows you to create dynamic text movement effects during the animation. Rotation Direction: Choose the direction in which the text will rotate—clockwise or counterclockwise—adding a rotating effect to the text during the animation. Rotation Value: This controls the angle of rotation for the text. Positive values rotate the text clockwise, while negative values rotate it counterclockwise. You can set the rotation in degrees for precise control. Transform Origin: Define the point of rotation for the text. Options include top left, top right, center, bottom left, or bottom right, allowing you to adjust where the rotation starts. Breakpoint: This feature allows you to set custom breakpoints for different screen sizes (desktop, tablet, mobile), ensuring that the animation behaves responsively and adapts to various devices and screen sizes. Text Reveal In the Text Reveal animation category, you have the following customization options: Enable Editor Toggle: When toggled on, you can directly preview and edit the animation within the Elementor editor. If toggled off, the editor view is disabled, and you’ll need to apply and test the animation manually. With the editor enabled, you can use the Play Animation button to preview how the animation looks after all customizations. Delay: Controls the delay before the text reveal animation starts. You can set a time (in seconds) after the page loads for the text to begin its animation. Duration: Adjusts how long the text reveal animation will last. A shorter duration will make the animation happen more quickly, while a longer duration will slow it down. Stagger: Controls the delay between each text reveal. A higher stagger time will reveal each part of the text one after another with a delay, creating a sequential effect. Animation on Scroll Toggle: When enabled, the animation will only trigger when the user scrolls to the section with the animated text. If disabled, the animation will play immediately as the page loads. Breakpoint: This option allows you to define how the text reveal animation behaves on different screen sizes (desktop, tablet, and mobile). You can set custom animations for each device type, ensuring responsiveness and an optimal experience across devices. Text InvertEnable Editor Toggle: When enabled, this option allows you to directly preview and edit the animation within the Elementor editor. It helps you see how your animation will look in real time as you make adjustments. If toggled off, the editor preview is disabled, and you will need to manually adjust settings and preview the animation on the live page. 3. Play Animation Button: This button is available when the Enable Editor Toggle is turned on. By clicking it, you can preview the animation directly in the Elementor editor. It lets you visualize the effect of your customizations, helping you make precise adjustments before finalizing the settings. 4. Breakpoint: The Breakpoint option allows you to set different animations for different screen sizes, such as desktop, tablet, and mobile. This ensures that the animation remains responsive, providing an optimized viewing experience across various devices. 3D Spin Enable on Editor Button This toggle allows you to preview and edit the 3D spin animation directly within the Elementor editor. ON: You can see the animation live as you make changes. OFF: The animation won’t play in the editor, and you’ll have to check the live page for preview. Play Animation This button appears when Enable on Editor is active. Clicking it will play the 3D spin animation instantly in the editor, giving you a quick preview of the final output based on your current settings. Delay This setting controls the time (in seconds) before the 3D spin animation starts after the page is loaded. A higher value causes a longer wait before the animation begins. Useful when you want the animation to appear later for emphasis. Animation on Scroll When enabled, the 3D spin animation will trigger only when the user scrolls to the section where the animated title is placed. OFF: Animation starts as soon as the page loads. ON: Starts only when visible in the viewport, improving performance and focus. Spin Text Color This option lets you set the color of the text while it’s spinning. Helps you highlight the animation or match it with your brand style. You can choose bold colors or soft transitions depending on the effect you want. Start Defines the initial state of the 3D spin animation (angle, scale, opacity, etc.). It determines how the text looks before the animation begins. Common values might include the initial 3D rotation or position. End Sets the final state of the 3D spin animation after it completes. Controls where and how the text ends up post-animation. Typically used to bring the text to a readable or stable final appearance. Scrub When enabled, this makes the animation tied to the scroll position. The animation plays as the user scrolls—forward or backward. Ideal for creating interactive scroll-driven visual effects. Toggle Actions This allows you to define how the animation behaves during user interactions like scroll start, reverse, or end. Useful for setting repeat, reset, or pause behavior. Enhances control over animation flow and interactivity. Breakpoint The Breakpoint option helps you define different animation behaviors for different devices like desktop, tablet, and mobile. Ensures the 3D spin animation is responsive and looks great on all screen sizes. You can adjust or disable animations based on the device type for performance or design reasons. Style Settings The Style section includes one sections: Title. This is the Style section of the Animated Title Widget in Elementor. Here’s what each option does: Title Styling Text Color: Defines the title text color, allowing customization for better visibility and design consistency. Typography: Controls font properties, including style, size, weight, and letter spacing for enhanced readability. Text Stroke: Applies an outline effect to the text, improving emphasis and contrast. Text Shadow: Adds shadow effects to create depth and highlight the text. Blend Mode: Determines how the text interacts with the background for seamless integration. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve now learned how to configure the Animated Title Widget in Elementor to effectively customize and display images on your website. If you need further assistance, don’t hesitate to reach out to our support team! View Live Demo
Testimonial Before setting up the Testimonial Widget, make sure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. Once activated, you’ll get access to all free Elementor widgets, including the Testimonial Widget—completely free! You can also explore both free and pro widgets by using the filter options. Introduction The Testimonial Widget showcases customer feedback with customizable layouts and effects, boosting trust and credibility. Key Use Cases for the Testimonial Widget in Elementor: Use the Testimonial Widget to display customer feedback, reviews, or success stories, building trust and credibility. Create engaging sections to highlight positive experiences, enhancing social proof and boosting user confidence. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Testimonial Widget: Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Testimonial Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Testimonial Widget is ready to use! How to Add the Testimonial Widget in Elementor: Open the page where you want to add the Testimonial widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Testimonial Widget.” Drag the widget to your desired section. The Testimonial widget is now ready for customization! How to Configure the Testimonial Widget in Animation Addons: In the Elementor panel, search for the “Testimonial Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into the desired section. Customize the testimonial settings using the available options in the Elementor panel. Your Testimonial Widget is now ready to use! Here’s the interface where you can configure the settings and personalize the testimonials with different layouts and design options for an engaging display. Content Settings In the Content Settings, you’ll find options for Testimonial and Slider. Testimonial Style In the Testimonial Widget, you’ll find: Testimonial Styles: Choose from multiple preset layouts to best fit your design needs. Image Resolution: Adjust the image size and quality for clean, professional visuals. These options help you create stylish, trust-building testimonial displays effortlessly. Slider Option Here’s a quick breakdown of the Slider Options available in the Testimonial Widget: Slides to Show: Set how many testimonial slides appear at once. Autoplay: Enable automatic sliding of testimonials. Autoplay Delay: Choose the delay time between each auto-slide. Autoplay Interaction: Pause or continue autoplay on user interaction. Allow Touch Move: Enable swipe gestures on touch devices. Loop: Make the slider loop infinitely. Animated Speed: Control how fast the slide transitions occur. Space Between: Set spacing between each testimonial slide. Navigation: Enable/disable navigation arrows or dots. Previous Arrow Icon: Choose the icon style for the previous arrow. Next Arrow Icon: Choose the icon style for the next arrow. Direction: Set the slide direction (left-to-right or right-to-left). These settings help you fully customize the testimonial slider experience for your site’s visitors. Style Settings In the Style section, you’ll find various options such as Slide, Navigation, Image, Content, Name, and Designation. Here’s a brief overview of each part under the Style section of the Testimonial Widget: Slide: Customize the background, padding, border, and box-shadow of the testimonial slide. Navigation: Style the navigation arrows and dots, including color, size, spacing, and hover effects. Image: Adjust the testimonial author’s image size, border radius, and spacing. Content: Style the testimonial text with typography, color, spacing, and alignment settings. Name: Customize the name text with font, size, weight, and color options. Designation: Style the author’s role or title with typography and color controls. These options help you perfectly match the testimonial design to your website’s branding. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome Congratulations! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Testimonial Widget in Elementor to customize and display dynamic counters on your website. For any additional help or inquiries, don’t hesitate to contact our support team! View Live Demo
Scroll Elements The Scroll Elements Widget in Animation Addons for Elementor is a Pro feature. To use this widget, ensure the plugin is properly installed and activated on your website. You can explore both free and pro widgets using the filtering options, but this specific widget is available only in the pro version. Introduction The Scroll Elements Widget adds interactive scroll animations to your content, enhancing user experience with dynamic effects as users scroll. Key Use Cases for the Scroll Elements Widget: Add dynamic scroll animations to your content for better user engagement. Customize the scroll effects to align with your website’s design and branding. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Scroll Elements Widget: Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Scroll Elements Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Scroll Elements Widget is ready to use! How to Add Scroll Elements Widget in Elementor: Open the page where you want to add the Scroll Elements Widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Scroll Elements Widget.” Drag the widget to your desired section. How to Configure Scroll Elements Widget : In the Elementor panel, search for the “Scroll Elements Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into your desired section. Add your content elements and define how each should behave during scroll—like fade, slide, rotate, or zoom. Adjust trigger settings, scroll distance, and animation direction for dynamic effects. Use the Style tab to refine the appearance—customize spacing, colors, typography, and motion styles to match your website’s design. Configuring Scroll Elements Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Scroll Elements Widget is placed on your page, you can configure its settings by navigating through the following tabs: Content, Style, and Advanced. Each tab offers specific customization options to adjust the widget’s behavior and appearance according to your design requirements. Content Settings In the Content section, you have three key customization options: Scroll Contents, Settings, and Scroll Navigation/Title. Each option allows you to adjust specific aspects of the Scroll Elements widget, such as the content structure, widget behavior, and navigation settings- Scroll Contents: This section allows you to add and manage the content that will appear within the scrollable area. You can customize the content displayed in each scrollable section, such as text, images, or other widgets. Settings: Here, you can control the behavior of the scroll element. Options include adjusting the scroll speed, direction, and enabling/disabling auto-scroll, among other settings to fine-tune the scroll effect. Scroll Navigation/Title: This section allows you to manage the navigation controls, including setting up the scroll navigation buttons or titles. You can customize the appearance and functionality of the navigation controls to improve the user experience. Style Settings In the Style section, you’ll find customization options for Scroll Navigation/Title, Image, and Content– Scroll Navigation/Title: In this section, you can customize the appearance of the scroll navigation buttons or titles. Adjust settings like color, typography, background, alignment, and spacing to align with your website’s design. Image: This section lets you style the images within your scrollable sections. You can modify settings such as image size, borders, margins, and shadows, giving you control over how the images appear within the scroll. Content: The content section enables you to style the text and other content within the scrollable area. You can adjust typography, font size, color, line height, padding, and other styling options to match your site’s theme and layout. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome In summary, the Scroll Elements Widget provides advanced customization options to create interactive scroll-based effects, enhancing both functionality and user engagement. For further assistance or inquiries, please contact our support team. View Live Demo
Posts Widget Before setting up the Posts Widget, make sure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. Once activated, you’ll have access to all free Elementor widgets, including the Posts Widget—at no cost! Additionally, you can explore both free and pro widgets by filtering the selection options. Introduction The Posts Widget displays a list of blog posts with options to filter by category or tag and customize the design to fit your site. Key Use Cases for the Posts Widget in Elementor: Use the Posts Widget to display and filter blog posts by category or tag, with design customization to enhance layout and user experience. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate a Posts Widget ? To activate the Posts Widget, follow these steps: Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Locate the Posts Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. This will activate the Posts Widget for you to use! How to Configure Posts Widget To get started, navigate to the Animation Addons dashboard and select Theme Builder. Within the Theme Builder interface, locate and select the Single option, then click on Add New Template to create a new single post template. Fill in all the necessary sections and then click on Edit with Elementor to customize the template further. After selection, the Elementor panel appears with all tools and customization options. Configuring Posts Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Posts Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content, Style and Advanced. Content Settings In the content section, we have three options: Layout, Query, and Pagination. Under the Content tab of the Posts Widget, the Layout section allows you to control how your blog posts are displayed. Below is a detailed explanation of the available customization options: Layout Style Choose from six predefined layout styles to determine the structural design for displaying your posts. Columns Set the number of columns to control how many posts appear per row. This setting supports responsive adjustments for different devices. Posts Per Page Define the total number of posts to display on a single page. Image Resolution Select the image size (Medium – 300 x 300) to maintain visual consistency and performance optimization. Show Title Toggle to show or hide the post title. When enabled, each post will display its title above or below the image depending on the style layout. Title Length Set a character limit for post titles. If the title exceeds this limit, it will be truncated with an ellipsis (…). Title HTML Tag Choose the HTML tag (H1–H6) used for the post title, which helps maintain SEO structure and hierarchy. Highlighted Title Enable or disable highlighted styling for the post title, which visually differentiates it for better user engagement. Show Excerpt Toggle this option to display a short summary of the post content. Excerpt Length Set the number of words or characters to display in the excerpt field. Show Date / Show Comment / Show Author / Show Taxonomy Enable or disable the display of post metadata such as: Date – Shows the publish date. Comment – Displays the comment count. Author – Shows the post author’s name. Taxonomy – Displays categories or tags. Read More Toggle this option to show a “Read More” link below each post. Read More Text Customize the call-to-action text for the “Read More” link. Icon Choose an icon to accompany the “Read More” text. You can select from the icon library or upload a custom SVG. Icon Position Define the position of the icon relative to the text: Before – Icon appears before the text. After – Icon appears after the text. Icon Spacing Adjust the space between the icon and the “Read More” text to ensure proper visual balance. Query The Query section allows you to control which posts are displayed in the widget by applying specific filtering and ordering parameters. Query Type Custom: Enables advanced filtering options, allowing users to manually define what content appears. Default: Displays posts based on the default WordPress loop or theme settings. Source Choose the type of content to be displayed, such as: Posts (default) Pages Any registered Custom Post Type Include / Exclude Toggle between Include or Exclude filters. Define specific parameters to include or exclude posts based on taxonomies or terms like categories, tags, or custom taxonomies. Include By Use this field to select specific terms ( a category or tag) to include in the query results. Clicking the “+” button opens a taxonomy selector to refine your content display. Post Format Filter posts by WordPress post formats (e.g., Standard, Gallery, Video, Quote), if applicable. Supports multiple format selections. Date Select a time range to display posts: All, Today, Last 7 Days, This Month, etc. Useful for time-sensitive or trending content filtering. Order By Choose how the posts should be sorted: Date, Title, Menu Order, Random, etc. Ensures content appears in the desired order for relevance or aesthetics. Order Set the display order: ASC (Ascending) – Oldest to Newest DESC (Descending) – Newest to Oldest Ignore Sticky Posts Yes/No Toggle When enabled, sticky posts will be ignored in the query. Helps maintain a uniform post flow without prioritizing sticky content. Pagination Pagination allows users to navigate through multiple pages of blog posts. When you select “Numbers + Previous/Next” from the Pagination options, additional settings become available to enhance functionality and appearance: Available Options: Style Section : Choose the visual style for pagination elements to match your site design. Page Limit : Set the maximum number of page numbers to display at once. Shorten Toggle Button: Enable or disable shortening for long pagination lists with ellipsis (…) to improve layout and readability. Previous Arrow Icon : Choose a custom icon for the “Previous” button. Next Arrow Icon : Choose a custom icon for the “Next” button. Alignment : Align the pagination section to Left, Center, or Right within its container. Spacing : Adjust spacing between pagination elements for better visual balance. Style Settings Within the Style section of the Post Widget, you will find multiple customization panels to control the visual appearance of your post listings. These include: Layout – Adjust spacing, alignment, and column gaps to define the overall structure. Thumbnail – Customize image size, border radius, spacing, and hover effects. Content – Control the padding, spacing, and background styling of the content container. Title – Modify typography, color, spacing, and hover effects for post titles. Excerpt – Configure font styles, length, and spacing for the post excerpt text. Taxonomy – Style category or tag labels, including background, color, spacing, and hover effects. Meta – Customize author, date, and other post meta elements with typography and color settings. Read More – Style the “Read More” button or link, including hover animations, typography, and color. Pagination – Adjust layout, icon size, spacing, and color options for pagination controls. Hover – Define hover animation styles and effects for post items. In the content section, I made a few slight changes for my design as I don’t need any further customization. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Words The Posts widget in Elementor allows you to showcase multiple posts in a customizable layout. With options for styling and content display, it helps create an engaging and dynamic blog or news section on your website. View Live Demo
Slider Widgets Articles Filterable Slider Video Box Slider Filterable Slider The Filterable Slider Widget in Animation Addons for Elementor is a paid feature. To use this widget, make sure the plugin is installed and activated on your site. While you can browse both free and pro widgets using the filtering options, please note that this particular widget is available only in the pro version. Introduction The Filterable Slider Widget allows you to create interactive sliders with filter options for easy content organization. Key Use Cases for the Filterable Slider Widget: Showcase content in a dynamic, filterable slider. Customize the design to match your website’s style and layout. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Filterable Slider Widget: Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Filterable Slider Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Filterable Slider Widget is ready to use! How to Add Filterable Slider Widget in Elementor: Open the page where you want to add the Filterable Slider Widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Filterable Slider Widget.” Drag the widget to your desired section. The Filterable Slider Widget is now ready for customization. How to Configure Filterable Slider Widget In the Elementor panel, search for the “Filterable Slider Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into your desired section. Add your slider items by uploading images, setting titles, descriptions, and assigning categories. Enable filtering options to allow users to switch between slides by category. Use the Style tab to customize slider layout, spacing, navigation controls, typography, and colors to match your website’s design. Configuring Filterable Slider Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Filterable Slider Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content, Style, and Advanced. Content Settings Once the Filterable Slider Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under four options: Filter, Slides, Slider Options, and Settings. Filter: This section allows you to set up filters for the slider. You can categorize your slides and let users filter them based on the selected categories. This helps in organizing and displaying content more effectively. Slides: In the Slides section, you can add and manage the individual slides for the slider. You can include images, text, buttons, and links for each slide. This is where you create and arrange the content that will appear in the slider. Slider Options: This section provides settings to control the functionality and appearance of the slider. You can adjust the number of slides to show the transition effects, autoplay settings, navigation buttons, and more to customize how the slider operates. Settings: The Settings section allows you to adjust various configurations like the slider’s layout, responsiveness, spacing, and alignment. You can fine-tune the visual presentation and ensure the slider fits your design perfectly. Style Settings In the Style section, we have the following options to customize: Filter Image Slider Navigation Pagination Filter: In this section, you can customize the appearance of the filter buttons. Adjust colors, font size, padding, and spacing to match your site’s branding and enhance the visual presentation of the filter options. Image: This section allows you to style the images within the slider. You can adjust image borders, hover effects, shadows, and more, to ensure the images look visually appealing and consistent with the overall design. Slider Navigation:Here, you can customize the navigation buttons of the slider, such as arrows or dots. Control their size, color, hover effects, and alignment to improve user experience and make navigation intuitive. Pagination: This section lets you style the pagination controls that appear if the slider has multiple pages. You can adjust the look of the page indicators, including their size, color, and hover effects, ensuring they align with the overall design of the slider and website. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Filterable Slider Widget in Elementor to create a dynamic and interactive slider with filtering options. For any further assistance or inquiries, feel free to contact our support. View Live Demo Video Box Slider The Video Box Slider Widget in Animation Addons for Elementor is a paid feature. To use this widget, make sure the plugin is installed and activated on your site. You can explore both free and pro widgets through the filtering options, but this specific widget is only available in the pro version. Introduction The Video Box Slider Widget lets you showcase multiple videos in an interactive, engaging slider—perfect for enhancing user experience and visual presentation. Key Use Cases for the Video Box Slider Widget: Display multiple videos in an interactive slider for enhanced user engagement. Customize the design to match your website’s branding and layout seamlessly. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Video Box Slider Widget: Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Video Box Slider Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. The Video Box Slider Widget is now ready to use! How to Add the Video Box Slider Widget in Elementor: Open the page where you want to add the Video Box Slider Widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Video Box Slider Widget.” Drag the widget to your desired section. The Video Box Slider Widget is now ready for customization! How to Configure Video Box Slider Widget In the Elementor panel, search for the “Video Box Slider Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into your desired section. In the widget settings, add multiple video URLs and set custom thumbnails if needed.Customize the title, description, icons, and play button for each video slide. Use the Style tab to adjust typography, colors, spacing, borders, and shadows for a visually appealing slider. Configuring Video Box Slider Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Video Box Slider Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content,Style and Advanced. Content Settings The Video Box Slider Widget in Animation Addons for Elementor offers three main customization panels under the Content section: 1. Video Box Slider Video Slides: Add as many video slides as needed to showcase your content. Title HTML Tag: Define the HTML tag for slide titles to improve SEO and structure. Image Resolution: Set the image quality for thumbnails. Thumbnail After Button: Choose whether the thumbnail appears after the play button. Slider Max Width: Set the maximum width of the video slider for better layout control. 2. Button Text: Customize the button label. Icon: Choose an icon to accompany the text. Icon Spacing: Adjust spacing between icon and text. Active Ripple: Enable/disable ripple animation on button click. Ripple Color: Define the ripple animation color. Active Spinner: Add a loading spinner effect. Display: Control the button’s visibility and placement. 3. Slider Options Slides to Show: Define how many slides appear at once. Autoplay: Automatically cycle through video slides. Allow Touch Move: Enable swipe gestures for mobile users. Loop: Choose whether the slider loops continuously. Mousewheel Button: Allow mousewheel navigation. Animation Speed: Set how quickly slides transition. Space Between: Control spacing between each slide. Navigation Button: Toggle visibility of navigation arrows. Previous/Next Arrow Icon: Customize arrow icons. Pagination: Enable pagination bullets. Pagination Type: Select bullet or fraction style. Direction: Set slide direction (left/right). Center Slide: Highlight the center slide for better focus. Style Settings The Style section of the Video Box Slider Widget offers extensive design controls to help you fine-tune the appearance of every element. Below is a breakdown of each subsection and its available customization options: 1. Button Typography: Adjust font size, weight, line height, and more for the button text. Height & Width: Define the dimensions of the button for better alignment and balance. Border Type & Radius: Customize the border style and round the corners as desired. Box Shadow: Add shadow effects to create depth and emphasis. Text Color: Choose the color of the button text. Background Type: Set solid colors, gradients, or images for the button background. 2. Thumbnail Height: Set the height of the video thumbnail for consistent visual presentation. Padding: Control the spacing around the thumbnail. Border Radius: Apply rounded corners for a smoother look. 3. Content Padding: Manage the spacing inside the content area. Background Type: Define the background style using solid color, gradient, or image. Title Color: Set the color for the title text. Typography: Customize font settings for clarity and emphasis. Margin: Adjust spacing around the title. Subtitle Color: Choose a distinct color for subtitles. Typography: Modify font styles and sizes. Margin: Control the spacing around subtitle text. 4. Slider Navigation Size & Circle Size: Set the size of the navigation arrows and their circular backgrounds. Border Type & Radius: Apply border styles and curvature to navigation buttons. Padding: Adjust inner spacing within the navigation buttons. Color & Background Type: Style the arrow icons and their backgrounds. Position Type & Alignment: Define the positioning (absolute or relative) and align navigation arrows horizontally or vertically. Gap: Set spacing between previous and next navigation arrows. 5. Slider Pagination Color & Active Color: Choose default and active state colors for pagination bullets. Size & Gap: Adjust the size of pagination items and spacing between them. Border Type & Radius: Apply styles and rounded corners to the bullets. Direction: Set the pagination orientation (horizontal or vertical). Position & Alignment: Control the overall placement and alignment of the pagination. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Video Box Slider Widget in Elementor to showcase your videos in a dynamic slider format. For any further assistance or inquiries, feel free to contact our support. View Live Demo
Classic Testimonial Before setting up the Classic Testimonial Widget, ensure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. Once activated, you’ll get access to all free Elementor widgets, including the Classic Testimonial Widget—completely free! You can also use the filter options to explore both free and pro widgets. Introduction The Classic Testimonial widget in Elementor displays customer feedback in a simple, professional layout, helping to build trust with your audience. Key Use Cases for the Classic Testimonial Widget in Elementor: Use the Classic Testimonial Widget to showcase customer feedback, reviews, or success stories, fostering trust and credibility. Create clean, professional sections to highlight positive experiences, enhancing social proof and boosting user confidence. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Classic Testimonial Widget? Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Classic Testimonial Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Classic Testimonial Widget is ready to use! How to Add the Classic Testimonial Widget in Elementor: Open the page where you want to add the Classic Testimonial widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Classic Testimonial Widget.” Drag the widget to your desired section. The Classic Testimonial Widget is now ready for customization! How to Configure the Classic Testimonial Widget in Animation Addons: In the Elementor panel, search for the “Classic Testimonial Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into your desired section. Customize the testimonial settings using the available options in the Elementor panel—such as content, layout, image, and style. Your Classic Testimonial Widget is now ready to use! You can personalize it further using the Content, Style, and Advanced tabs for a clean and credible testimonial display. Configuring Classic Testimonial Widget in Animation Addons: A Step-by-Step Guide The Classic Testimonial Widget is available in Elementor and can be placed in any section of your page. It includes three main settings tabs: Content, Style, and Advanced—each offering customization options to fine-tune the testimonial’s layout, appearance, and behavior for a polished and trustworthy look. Content Settings In the Content Settings, you’ll find options for Content and Slider options. Content In the content section, you’ll find various testimonial styles. For Testimonial Item One, you need to set an image along with the content, including the reviewer’s name, title, and a link. Slider Option In the Slider section of the Classic Testimonial Widget‘s Content settings, you can customize the following options: Slides to Show: Set the number of testimonial slides you want to display at once. Autoplay: Enable or disable automatic sliding of testimonials. Autoplay Delay: Set the delay time (in milliseconds) between each slide transition when autoplay is enabled. Autoplay Interaction: Control whether autoplay continues after a user interaction. Allow Touch Move: Enable or disable touch movement for mobile devices. Loop: Choose whether the slider should loop back to the first testimonial after reaching the last one. Animated Speed: Set the speed of slide transitions for smooth animation. Space Between: Adjust the space between each testimonial slide. Navigation: Enable or disable navigation arrows for sliding through testimonials. Previous Arrow Icon: Customize the icon for the previous navigation arrow. Next Arrow Icon: Customize the icon for the next navigation arrow. Direction: Set the direction for sliding (e.g., horizontal or vertical). These options allow you to fully customize how the testimonial slider behaves and interacts with users. Style Settings In the Style section of the Classic Testimonial Widget, you’ll find a range of customization options for each part of the testimonial display. Here’s how each one works: Slide: Adjust the overall appearance of the testimonial slides, including background color, padding, and borders. Navigation: Customize the navigation arrows for moving through the slides. You can change the color, size, position, and style of the previous and next arrows. Content: Style the content of each testimonial, such as the testimonial text. You can modify font size, color, typography, line height, and text alignment for better readability. Image: Customize the appearance of the testimonial image (if available). You can adjust the image border radius, size, and add box shadow or other visual effects. Name: Style the name of the person giving the testimonial. Options include changing the font size, color, weight, and alignment to match the overall design. Title: Customize the title (e.g., job title or role) of the person in the testimonial. Adjust font settings like size, color, and weight to differentiate the name from the title. Quote: Style the quote symbol or icon. You can adjust its color, size, position, and even add custom icons to represent the quote symbol, making the testimonial stand out more. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome Congratulations! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Testimonial Classic widget in Elementor to showcase customer feedback effectively on your website. View Live Demo
Breadcrumbs The Breadcrumbs Widget in Animation Addons for Elementor is a paid feature. To use this widget, ensure the plugin is installed and activated on your site. You can explore both free and pro widgets using the filtering options, but this specific widget is available only in the pro version. Introduction The Breadcrumbs Widget in Animation Addons for Elementor enhances navigation by showing a trail of links, helping users track their location on your site. Key Use Cases for the Breadcrumbs Widget: Improve site navigation by displaying a clear path for users. Customize the breadcrumb design to align with your website’s branding. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Breadcrumbs Widget: Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Breadcrumbs Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Breadcrumbs Widget is ready to use! How to Configure Breadcrumbs Widget In the Elementor panel, search for the “Breadcrumbs Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into your desired section. The breadcrumb trail will automatically reflect the current page hierarchy. You can adjust the separator, alignment, and visibility of the home or end text. Use the Style tab to customize typography, spacing, colors, and hover effects to ensure it fits your site’s design. Configuring Breadcrumbs Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Breadcrumbs Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content and Advanced. Content Settings Note: To use the Breadcrumbs Widget from the Content section, you need to have Yoast SEO installed and activated on your site. If Yoast SEO is not activated, you won’t be able to use this feature. Please activate it first before proceeding. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Breadcrumbs Widget in Elementor to enhance your website’s navigation and improve user experience. For any further assistance or inquiries, please don’t hesitate to contact our support team. View Live Demo
Archive Title Before setting up the Archive Title Widget, make sure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. Once activated, you’ll have access to all free Elementor widgets, including the Archive Title Widget—at no cost! Additionally, you can explore both free and pro widgets by filtering the selection options. Introduction The Archive Title Widget in Elementor shows archive page titles, improving navigation and content clarity. Key Use Cases for the Archive Title Widget in Elementor: Display archive page titles clearly to improve navigation. Customize styling to match your site’s design for a cohesive look. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Archive Title Widget? Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Archive Title widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Archive Title widget is ready to use! How to Add Archive Title Widget in Elementor Open the page where you want to add the Archive Title Widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Archive Title Widget.” Drag the widget to your desired section. The Archive Title widget is now ready for customization. How to Configure Archive Title Widget Enable it, create a new page, set a title, choose the Elementor Full Width template, and publish. Adjust options as needed. Enable the widget, create a new page, set a title, choose the Elementor Full Width template, and publish the page. Adjust page settings as needed. In the Elementor panel, search for the “Archive Title Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into your desired section. The archive title (such as category, tag, or author name) will be displayed automatically based on the archive being viewed. Configuring Archive Title Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Archive Title Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content,Style and Advanced. Content Settings The Archive Title Widget in Elementor offers three key configuration tabs: Content, Style, and Advanced. Each tab provides specific controls to customize how your archive titles appear and behave- HTML Tag: Choose from 9 HTML heading tags (H1–H6, div, span, paragraph) to define the semantic structure and SEO relevance of your archive title. Custom Toggle: Enables custom display conditions. When toggled on, you can set specific page conditions for showing custom titles. Adjustment: Provides fine-tuning options such as alignment or visibility settings for more precise control over how the title appears. Style Settings The Style section of the Archive Title Widget focuses on customizing the visual appearance of the text. This section includes the following options: 1. Text Color Defines the color of the archive title text. You can choose a solid color, gradient, or use dynamic color settings based on theme or custom fields. 2. Typography Controls font-related properties such as: Font family Size Weight Line height Letter spacing & Text transformation (uppercase, lowercase, etc.) These settings ensure consistency with your site’s overall typographic style. 3. Text Stroke Adds an outline to the text. You can define the stroke width and color. It’s useful for creating bold and stylized titles that stand out. 4. Text Shadow Applies shadow effects behind the text. You can customize shadow color, blur radius, horizontal/vertical position to add depth and emphasis. 5. Blend Mode Determines how the title text blends with the background or underlying elements. Various blend modes (like multiply, screen, overlay) allow for creative visual effects. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make- Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Archive Title widget in Elementor to display dynamic and customized titles for your archive pages. For any further assistance or inquiries, feel free to contact our support team!
Modern Testimonial Before setting up the Modern Testimonial Widget, make sure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. Once activated, you’ll get access to all free Elementor widgets, including the Modern Testimonial Widget—completely free! You can also explore both free and pro widgets by using the filter options. Introduction The Modern Testimonial Widget displays sleek customer reviews, enhancing credibility and trust for business sites and portfolios. Key Use Cases for the Testimonial Modern Widget in Elementor: Use the Modern Testimonial widget to showcase customer feedback, reviews, or success stories, enhancing trust and credibility. Create visually appealing sections to highlight positive experiences, boosting social proof and increasing user confidence. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Modern Testimonial Widget: Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Modern Testimonial Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Modern Testimonial Widget is ready to use! How to Add the Modern Testimonial Widget in Elementor: Open the page where you want to add the Modern Testimonial widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Modern Testimonial Widget.” Drag the widget to your desired section. The Modern Testimonial widget is now ready for customization! How to Configure the Modern Testimonial Widget in Elementor: In the Elementor panel, search for the “Modern Testimonial Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into the desired section. Customize the testimonial settings using the available options in the Elementor panel. The Modern Testimonial widget is now ready to use! Here’s where you can configure settings like testimonial style, images, navigation, and other visual options to create a dynamic and professional display. Configuring Modern Testimonial Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide The Modern Testimonial Widget is available in Elementor and can be placed on the desired section of the page. It offers three main settings tabs: Content, Style, and Advanced. Content Settings In the Content Settings, you’ll find options for both Content and Slider customization. The Content section allows you to add and manage text, images, and other elements, ensuring your testimonials are well-structured and visually appealing. Content In the Content Section of the Modern Testimonial Widget, you will find the following options: Section Title: This allows you to add a title above your testimonial section. It can help provide context to the testimonials or introduce the section on your page. HTML Tag: You can select the HTML tag for the section title (e.g., H1, H2, H3). This helps with SEO and controlling the structure of your content. Testimonial Style Category: Here, you can choose the style category for the testimonial layout. This allows you to customize the look and feel of how the testimonials appear, whether in a grid, carousel, or other styles. Quote: This field allows you to add the actual testimonial text. You can customize this section with quotes from your clients or customers, showcasing their feedback in a visually appealing way. These settings allow you to create a visually engaging testimonial section while maintaining flexibility in design. Slider Option In the Slider Option of the Modern Testimonial Widget, you’ll find the following customizable settings: Slides to Show: Choose how many testimonial slides you want to display at once in the slider. This helps in controlling the layout of your testimonial section. Autoplay: Toggle this option to automatically cycle through the testimonials without user interaction. It ensures a seamless viewing experience. Autoplay Delay: Set the delay between each slide transition when autoplay is enabled. This determines how long each testimonial stays visible before the next one appears. Autoplay Interaction: If enabled, the slider will pause when a user interacts with it (hover or click), ensuring they can read the testimonials without interruption. Allow Touch Move: This option allows users to swipe through the testimonials on touch devices, like smartphones or tablets. Loop: Enabling this makes the slider loop back to the first testimonial after reaching the last one, creating a continuous experience. Animation Speed: Adjust how quickly the testimonials transition from one to the next. This controls the smoothness of the slide effect. Space Between: Set the space between each slide. This is helpful in managing the visual flow and arrangement of testimonials. Navigation: You can choose to enable navigation arrows for the user to manually move between the testimonials. Previous Arrows Icon: Customize the icon for the previous slide arrow, making it more in line with your site’s style. Next Arrow Icon: Customize the icon for the next slide arrow, adding to the overall aesthetic. Direction: Choose whether the slides move horizontally or vertically. This affects how the testimonials are presented in the slider. Style Settings The Style section offers various customization options, including Section Border, Navigation, Section Title, Content, Name, Designation, and Quote. In the Style Section of the Modern Testimonial Widget, you’ll find the following options: Slide: Customize the look of the individual testimonial slides, including background color, border, and padding. Navigation: Style the navigation arrows (previous/next), adjusting their size, color, and positioning. Image: Adjust the image settings for testimonial authors, such as size, border radius, and padding. Content: Style the testimonial content, including font size, color, line height, and text alignment. Name: Customize the name of the testimonial author by adjusting the font size, color, and typography. Designation: the designation (job title or position) of the testimonial author, including font style and color. These options help you tailor the appearance of the testimonial widget to match your site’s design, ensuring consistency and a professional look. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome Congratulations! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Modern Testimonial in Elementor to customize and display dynamic counters on your website. View Live Demo
Author Box The Author Box Widget in Animation Addons for Elementor is a paid feature. To use this widget, ensure the plugin is installed and activated on your site. You can explore both free and pro widgets using the filtering options, but this specific widget is available only in the pro version. Introduction The Author Box Widget allows you to display author information at the end of your posts or pages, enhancing user engagement and providing an easy way to connect with content creators. Key Use Cases for the Author Box Widget: Display author information at the end of posts to engage readers. Customize the design to align with your website’s branding and style. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Author Box Widget: Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Author Box Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Author Box Widget is ready to use! How to Configure Author Box Widget In the Elementor panel, search for the “Author Box Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into your desired section. The widget will automatically fetch and display the author’s name, bio, and profile picture. You can choose to show or hide the avatar, name, bio, and link to the author’s archive page. Use the Style tab to adjust typography, spacing, alignment, colors, and image size to match your website’s design. Configuring Author Box Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Author Box Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content, Style, and Advanced. Content Settings In the Author Info section, you can customize elements like the source, profile picture and its size, display name with HTML tag, link, biography, archive button with custom text, layout style, and alignment—giving you full control over how the author details appear on your page. Style Settings Under the Style Settings, you’ll find three sections to customize your content’s appearance: Image, Text, and Button. Each section offers various styling options to enhance the overall design and match your site’s look and feel. 1. Image This section allows you to customize the appearance of the author’s profile picture. You can adjust settings such as border radius, size, box shadow, and margin/padding to match your website’s style and layout. 2. Text In the Text section, you can style all textual content including the display name, biography, and archive text. Customize font family, size, weight, line height, color, and spacing to ensure visual harmony with your site’s typography. 3. Button The Button section gives you control over the archive button’s appearance. You can personalize the button color, background, border, hover effects, padding, and typography for both normal and hover states to create an engaging call-to-action. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome Great job! You’ve now learned how to set up and customize the Mailchimp Widget in Elementor to easily add email subscription forms and expand your mailing list. If you need any more help or have questions, don’t hesitate to reach out to our support team. View Live Demo
Portfolio Before setting up the Portfolio Widget , make sure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. Once activated, you’ll have access to all free Elementor widgets, including the Portfolio Widget—at no cost! Additionally, you can explore both free and pro widgets by filtering the selection options. Introduction The Portfolio Widget in Elementor displays your projects in a customizable grid, perfect for freelancers and creatives to showcase their work. Key Use Cases for the Portfolio Widget in Elementor: Showcase your projects in a stylish grid. Customize layout and hover effects for a personalized presentation. Perfect for freelancers and creatives to highlight their work. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Portfolio Widget? Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Portfolio widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. How to Add Portfolio Widget in Elementor Open the page where you want to add the Portfolio Widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Portfolio Widget.” Drag the widget to your desired section. The Portfolio Widget is now ready for customization. How to Configure Archive Title Widget Enable the Widget from your plugin or theme settings. Create a New Page → Set a title → Choose Elementor Full Width template → Publish. Open with Elementor, search for “Portfolio Widget”, and drag it into your section. The widget will auto-display portfolio items based on your settings. Customize layout, filters, and style as needed. ConfiguringPortfolio Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Portfolio Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under three main tabs: Content, Style and Advanced. Configuring the Portfolio Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Portfolio Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content,Style and Advanced. Content Settings The Content section provides control over the structure, query, filtering, and pagination of the portfolio display. Below is a breakdown of each setting and its function: 1. Layout Customize how portfolio items appear on the page- Layout Styles: Choose from 5 different layout styles to match your design preference. Columns: Select up to 6 columns to define how many items appear in each row. Posts Per Page: Set the number of portfolio items displayed per page. Image Resolution: Choose from various image quality options for better performance and clarity. Masonry Toggle: Enable/disable masonry layout for dynamic item arrangement based on height. Item Height: Manually set a fixed height for uniform item display. Show Title Toggle: Turn the item title on or off. Title Length: Limit the number of words or characters in the title for consistency. Title HTML Tag: Define the semantic HTML tag (H1–H6, div, span) for SEO and accessibility. Meta Toggle: Show or hide metadata like post date or category. Taxonomy Control how portfolio categories are displayed. Supports three taxonomy types (categories, tags,formats). Enable or disable taxonomy visibility. Option to display publish date alongside taxonomy labels. 2. Query This section defines which portfolio items are displayed. You can choose from 12 different query types. The Query option allows you to control which portfolio items are displayed. Source: Choose the content source (posts, pages, or custom post types like portfolios or projects). Include/Exclude: Select specific categories, tags, or individual items to include or exclude. Order By: Sort items by date, title, menu order, or random. Order: Set ascending or descending order. Sticky Toggle: Decide whether sticky posts are included or ignored. Post Format: Filter content by format (standard, video, gallery). This feature gives you fine-tuned control over what content appears in the portfolio, making the widget highly flexible for custom portfolio displays. 3. Filter Bar Display a filter bar to allow users to sort items by taxonomy (category/tag). Customizable appearance and behavior. Enhances user experience by making content navigation easier. 4. Pagination Set how users navigate through multiple pages of portfolio items. Choose from options like numbers, arrows, or load more buttons. Improves content organization and site performance. Style Settings You will get two options: Layout and Content. I also made slight changes in the Style section, just like in the Content section! 1. Layout Columns Gap: Adjust the spacing between portfolio item columns to improve layout clarity and alignment. Rows Gap: Set vertical spacing between portfolio rows for better content separation. Hover Effect: Apply visual effects on item hover (e.g., zoom, fade) to enhance interactivity. Alignment: Align content within each portfolio item (left, center, or right). 2. Content Title Color: Define the title text color. Typography: Customize font family, size, weight, transform, and style. Margin: Adjust spacing around the title for proper positioning. Meta Color: Set the text color for metadata (date, taxonomy, etc.). Typography: Adjust font styles for meta details. Margin: Manage spacing around the metadata area for visual balance. But you can explore all customization options yourself to see the changes. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Portfolio Widget in Elementor to showcase your projects in a stylish and customizable layout. For any further assistance or inquiries, feel free to contact our support team! View Live Demo
Button Before setting up the Button Widget, make sure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. Once activated, you’ll get access to all free Elementor widgets, including the Button Widget—completely free! You can also explore both free and pro widgets by using the filter options. Introduction The Button widget in Elementor lets you create customizable buttons with adjustable text, colors, borders, hover effects, and links, ideal for call-to-action and boosting user engagement. Key Use Cases for the Button Widget in Elementor: Use the Button widget to create customizable, clickable buttons for your website. Enhance user engagement by adjusting text, colors, borders, and hover effects, and set links to guide users to specific actions or pages. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Button Widget: Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Button Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Button Widget is ready to use! How to Add the Button Widget in Elementor: Open the page where you want to add the Button Widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Button Widget.” Drag the widget to your desired section. The Button Widget is now ready for customization! How to Configure the Button Widget in Animation Addons: In the Elementor panel, search for the “Button Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into your desired section. Customize the button text, link, alignment, and icon using the available options in the Elementor panel. Your Button Widget is now ready to use! Explore the Content, Style, and Advanced tabs to personalize its appearance, animations, and interactions for a more engaging user experience. Configuring Button Widget in Animation Addons: A Step-by-Step Guide The Button Widget is available in Elementor and can be placed on the desired section of the page. It offers three main settings tabs: Content, Style, and Advanced. Content Settings In the Content section, you will find only the Button option, where you can customize the text, link and alignment for your button. Let’s explore the Button section located under the Content tab in the Button Widget. Here’s a quick breakdown of each option: Style: Choose the visual appearance of your button—like solid, outline, or gradient styles to match your website design. Hover Style: Set how the button reacts on hover. This includes hover animations, color transitions, or other interactive effects. Text: This is where you add the button label. For example, “Buy Now,” “Learn More,” or any CTA you prefer. Link: Insert the URL where the button will redirect your visitors once clicked. Icon: Add an icon to enhance the button’s visual impact—choose from a wide variety of icons available in Elementor. Icon Position: Decide whether you want the icon to appear before or after the button text. Direction: Set the layout direction as LTR (left to right) or RTL (right to left) depending on your content language and alignment. Icon Spacing: Adjust the space between the icon and the text for better readability and design balance. Alignment: Control the button’s position—align it to the left, center, right, or justify based on your layout needs. Style Settings The Button section under the Style tab lets you visually enhance the look and feel of your button. Here’s a quick exploration of each option: Typography: Customize the font style, size, weight, line height, letter spacing, and more to match your brand’s voice. Icon Size: Adjust the size of the icon to make it more prominent or subtle depending on your design goal. Text Color: Change the button text color to ensure it’s readable and aligns with your site’s color palette. Background Type: Choose between solid color, gradient, or even image backgrounds for your button. Border Type: Add or customize borders—set solid, dashed, dotted, or none, and define border width and color. Border Radius: Control how rounded the button corners are—from sharp squares to smooth pills. Padding: Define the spacing inside the button—top, bottom, left, and right—to control button size and spacing. Box Shadow: Add shadows around the button to give it depth or a subtle lift effect. These styling tools help you design a fully responsive, visually appealing button that fits perfectly with your site aesthetics. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome Congratulations! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Button widget in Elementor to create customizable, clickable buttons on your website. For any further assistance or inquiries, feel free to contact our support team! View Live Demo
Search Form Introduction The Search Form Widget in Elementor adds a customizable search bar for easy content discovery. Key Use Cases for the Search Form Widget in Elementor: Add a customizable search bar for easy content discovery. Improve user experience by enabling quick searches across your site. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Search Form Widget? Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Search Form widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Search Form widget is ready to use! How to Configure Search Form Widget Enable it, create a new page, set a title, choose the Elementor Full Width template, and publish. Adjust options as needed. After selection, the Elementor panel appears with all tools and customization options. Click the “+” icon to add a container, then select the appropriate column structure and layout. Here’s the interface where you can configure the settings and customize the Event Slider Widget across various tabs. Configuring Search Form Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Search Form Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content,Style and Advanced. Content Settings Search Preset I chose the classic search preset style. See the difference, guys! Then make a little bit changes on search option which you will get it selecting the classic style as search preset. Style Settings You’ll also find two options in the style section: input and button. I made some slight changes there as well, just like in the content section! Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Search Form widget in Elementor to create an interactive and user-friendly search experience on your website. For any further assistance or inquiries, feel free to contact our support team!
Image Comparison Before setting up the Image Comparison Widget, make sure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. Once activated, you’ll get access to all free Elementor widgets, including the Image Comparison Widget—completely free! You can also explore both free and pro widgets by using the filter options. Introduction The Image Comparison widget lets users compare two images with a slider—perfect for before-and-after views. Key Use Cases for the Image Comparison Widget in Elementor: Use the Image Comparison widget to showcase two images side by side with a draggable slider. Perfect for before-and-after visuals, product comparisons, or transformations, enhancing user engagement and interactivity. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Image Comparison Widget: Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Image Comparison Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Image Comparison Widget is ready to use! How to Add the Image Comparison Widget in Elementor: Open the page where you want to add the Image Comparison widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Image Comparison Widget.” Drag the widget to your desired section. The Image Comparison widget is now ready for customization! How to Configure the Image Comparison Widget in Elementor: In the Elementor panel, search for the “Image Comparison Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into the desired section. Upload the two images you want to compare.Customize the settings like slider position, image width, and more in the Elementor panel. Your Image Comparison Widget is now ready to use! You can adjust the settings for a smooth before-and-after comparison experience. Configuring Image Comparison Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide The Image Comparison Widget is available in Elementor and can be placed on the desired section of the page. It offers three main settings tabs: Content, Style, and Advanced. Content Settings In the Content section, you will find only the content option, where you can customize the text, link, and alignment for your button. Content In the Content Section of the Image Comparison Widget, you’ll find the following image customization options: Before Image: This option allows you to upload and set the image for the “before” state in your comparison. After Image: Similarly, this lets you upload and set the “after” state image for comparison. Show Caption : When enabled, this option allows you to add a caption (text) that will appear over the image, describing the comparison. Alignment: Controls the positioning of the images and the comparison slider. You can choose from left, center, or right alignment to place the images within their container. Show Button: This option enables or disables a button that can appear below the images. It’s often used for actions like “Learn More” or “Shop Now.” These customization options allow you to control how the images, captions, and buttons are displayed within the comparison widget. Style Settings In the Style Section of the Image Comparison Widget, you have the following two options: Image: This allows you to style both the Before and After images. You can adjust the image’s width, height, border, shadow, and other visual properties to enhance the look and feel of the images within the comparison widget. Handler: The handler is the slider button that users drag to compare the images. You can customize its appearance here, including its size, color, border radius, and shadow, to make it fit with your site’s design. These options help you fine-tune the visuals of both the images and the comparison slider, ensuring it blends seamlessly with the overall design of your website. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Image Comparison widget in Elementor to create customizable, clickable buttons on your website. For any further assistance or inquiries, feel free to contact our support team! View Live Demo
Search Query Before setting up the Search Query Widget , make sure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. Once activated, you’ll have access to all free Elementor widgets, including the Search Query Widget —at no cost! Additionally, you can explore both free and pro widgets by filtering the selection options. Introduction The Search Query Widget in Elementor displays dynamic search results, offering users an easy way to find content and customize the layout to fit your site’s design. Key Use Cases for the Search Query Widget: Display dynamic search results for seamless user experience. Customize search result layout to match your site’s design. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Search Query Widget? Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Search Query widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Search Query widget is ready to use! How to Add Search Query Widget in Elementor Open the page where you want to add the Search Query Widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Search Query Widget.” Drag the widget to your desired section. The Search Query widget is now ready for customization! How to Configure Search Query Widget Enable the widget, create a new page, set a title, choose the Elementor Full Width template, and publish the page. Adjust the page settings as needed. In the Elementor panel, search for the “Search Form Widget.”Drag and drop the widget into your desired section. The search form will appear instantly. Customize it using the Content, Style, and Advanced tabs—especially the Search Query section, where you can define placeholder text, select an HTML tag for the label, and adjust the alignment to fit your layout perfectly. Configuring Search Query Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Search Query Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content,Style and Advanced. Content Settings Within the Content section, the Search Query settings allow you to control the display and behavior of the search input field and related content. HTML Tag You can choose from 9 different HTML tags (H1–H6, div, span, p) for the search form title or label. This helps you maintain semantic structure and improves accessibility and SEO based on where the form is used. Search Text Customize the placeholder text that appears inside the search field. This helps guide users on what they can search for (e.g., “Search blog posts…” or “Type to find…”). Alignment This controls the alignment of the entire search form (left, center, right, or justified) to match the design of your section or page. Style Settings The Style tab of the Search Form Widget provides two customization sections: Style: Customize the overall appearance of the search form text. You can adjust: Text Color: Sets the color of the form text. Typography: Controls font size, weight, family, etc. Text Stroke: Adds outline effects to the text. Text Shadow: Applies shadow behind the text for depth. Blend Mode: Defines how the text blends with the background. Query Text Style: Specifically styles the search query input text: Text Color: Adjusts the color of the input text. Typography: Lets you set the font style and structure for the query text. These settings allow complete control over the visual presentation of the search form, ensuring it aligns with your site design. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Search Query widget in Elementor to create a seamless and customizable search experience for your website. For any further assistance or inquiries, feel free to contact our support team! View Live Demo
Progress bar Before setting up the Progress Bar Widget, make sure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. Once activated, you’ll get access to all free Elementor widgets, including the Progress Bar Widget—completely free! You can also explore both free and pro widgets by using the filter options. Introduction The Progress Bar widget adds dynamic, customizable progress bars to track goals and achievements in Elementor. Key Use Cases for the Progress Bar Widget in Elementor: Use the Progress Bar widget to visually display progress, goals, or achievements on your website. Customize the appearance, colors, and animations to engage users and track measurable progress effectively. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Progress Bar Widget: Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Progress Bar Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Progress Bar Widget is ready to use! How to Add the Progress Bar Widget in Elementor Open the page where you want to add the Progress Bar. Launch Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Progress Bar.” Drag the Progress Bar widget to your desired section. The Progress Bar widget will now be available for customization. How to Configure the Progress Bar Widget in Animation Addons: In the Elementor panel, search for the “Progress Bar Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into the desired section. Customize the progress bar settings using the available options in the Elementor panel. Your Progress Bar Widget is now ready to use! You can adjust the progress percentage, style, and animations to match your design needs. Configuring Progress Bar Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content, Style, and Advanced. Content Settings You will find two options: Layout and Progress Bar. Layout In the Layout section of the Progress Bar widget, you’ll only find the Style option. You can choose from three preset styles to match your design preferences: Style One Style Two Style Three Each style gives your progress bar a different visual appearance. Simply select the one that fits your page’s design best—it’s that easy! Progress Bar From the Progress Bar settings under the Content section, you can control: Percentage – Adjust the progress using the slider or input box. You can set it anywhere from 0 to 100 depending on what you want to display. Display Percentage – Toggle this option ON/OFF to either show or hide the numeric percentage on the progress bar. This section helps you define how far along a task or goal is visually and numerically. Let me know if you want help with the Style section too! Style Settings From the Style tab of the Progress Bar widget, under the Progress Bar section (as shown in your screenshot), you can customize the appearance with the following options: Progress Bar Color – Choose the color of the progress bar (the filled portion). Background Color – Set the background color of the bar (the unfilled portion). Stroke Width – Adjust the thickness of the progress stroke (the main progress line). Trail Width – Modify the width of the background trail line behind the progress. These settings help you design the progress bar to match your site’s branding or desired visual style. Let me know if you want help describing the Percentage section or the Advanced tab! Percentage Under the Style tab of the Progress Bar widget, the Percentage section lets you style the percentage text displayed on the bar. Here’s what you can customize: Color – Change the color of the percentage text to match your design. Typography – Customize the font, size, weight, and other text styles. Position Y – Adjust the vertical position of the percentage label along the Y-axis. (e.g., move it up or down over the progress bar). These settings help make the progress bar more visually appealing and aligned with your site’s design. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Progress Bar widget in Elementor to create customizable, clickable buttons on your website. For any further assistance or inquiries, feel free to contact our support team! View Live Demo
Search No Result Before setting up the Search No Result Widget, make sure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. Once activated, you’ll have access to all free Elementor widgets, including the Search No Result Widget —at no cost! Additionally, you can explore both free and pro widgets by filtering the selection options. Introduction The Animated Text Widget adds dynamic effects like fade, slide, and bounce to text, boosting visual appeal with ease. Key Use Cases for the Search No Result Widget in Elementor: Display a helpful message when no search results are found. Customize the message to guide users towards other content or actions. Enhance user experience by offering alternative suggestions or links. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Search No Result Widget? Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Search No Result widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Search No Result widget is ready to use! How to Add Search No Result Widget in Elementor Open the page where you want to add the Archive Title Widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Archive Title Widget.” Drag the widget to your desired section. The Archive Title widget is now ready for customization. How to Configure Search No Result Widget Enable the widget, create a new page, set a title, choose the Elementor Full Width template, and publish the page. Adjust the page settings as needed. In the Elementor panel, search for the “Search No Result Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into your desired section. This widget will automatically display a custom message when a search returns no results, enhancing user experience by guiding them clearly when nothing is found. Configuring Search No Result Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Search No Result Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content,Style and Advanced. Content Settings The Content section of the Search No Result Widget allows full customization of the message displayed when no search results are found. The available configuration options include: Search Title: Define the heading that appears when no results are returned. This helps users understand that their search yielded no matches. Title HTML Tag: Choose from 7 HTML heading tags (H1–H6 and DIV) to determine the semantic importance of the title. This is essential for accessibility and SEO optimization. Search Content: Add supporting text or guidance using a rich text editor. You can include: Media: Insert images or videos to make the message more engaging. Visual/Text (Code) Mode: Switch between a visual editor for basic formatting and code mode for custom HTML. Paragraphs: Write clear, user-friendly messages that guide users on what to do next (try another keyword, check spelling). These settings help maintain a consistent user experience and ensure that users are clearly informed when their query doesn’t return any content. Style Settings The Style section provides options for customizing the appearance of both the title and content of the Search No Result Widget. These options allow for complete control over the visual presentation. Title Settings The Title section allows you to customize the heading that appears when no search results are found: Text Color: Adjust the color of the title text to match your website’s design scheme. Typography: Control the font family, size, weight, line height, and letter spacing to ensure the title is visually prominent and aligned with the overall theme. Text Stroke: Apply an outline effect around the title text for enhanced visibility and emphasis. Text Shadow: Add a shadow behind the title to create depth and a more dynamic appearance. Spacing: Set the spacing (margin and padding) around the title to control its positioning within the widget. Content Settings The Content section allows you to style the body of the message displayed when no results are found: Text Color: Choose the color of the content text to maintain readability and consistency with the page’s color scheme. Typography: Adjust font size, weight, family, line height, and letter spacing to ensure the content text is legible and well-aligned with the title. These style settings offer flexibility to tailor the widget’s appearance to fit your website’s design, ensuring it provides a seamless and visually appealing user experience. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Search No Result widget in Elementor to display a customized message when no search results are found. For any further assistance or inquiries, feel free to contact our support team!
Team Before setting up the Team Widget, make sure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. Once activated, you’ll get access to all free Elementor widgets, including the Team Widget—completely free! You can also explore both free and pro widgets by using the filter options. Introduction The Team Widget lets you display team members with images, roles, and social links in customizable layouts. Key Use Cases for the Team Widget in Elementor: Use the Team Widget to showcase your team members professionally with images, roles, and social links. Create engaging team sections to highlight expertise, build credibility, and enhance your brand’s identity. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Team Widget? Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Team Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Team Widget is ready to use! How to Add the Progress Bar Widget in Elementor Open the page where you want to add the Progress Bar. Launch Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Team Widget” Drag the Team Widget to your desired section. The Progress Bar widget will now be available for customization. How to Configure the Team Widget in Animation Addons: In the Elementor panel, search for the “Team Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into the desired section. Customize the team member details, layout, and social links using the available options in the Elementor panel. Your Team Widget is now ready to showcase your amazing team! Configuring Button Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content, Style, and Advanced. Content Settings The Team Widget offers four configuration options: Layout, Image, Content, and Social Media, enabling precise customization for an optimized team display. Layout – Choose your preferred layout style to display team members. Image – Upload profile photos and control how they appear. Content – Add the team member’s name, designation, and description. Social Media – Insert social icons with links to platforms like Facebook, LinkedIn, Instagram, and more Style Settings Image Settings: Customize the profile picture or team member’s image to match your design. You can adjust the size, shape, and even apply hover effects for a more interactive experience. Content Adjustments: Tailor the text, such as the team member’s name, role, and bio. You can choose different fonts, colors, and layout styles to ensure the content fits the overall look of your site. Social Media Integrations: Link your team members’ social media profiles directly to their profiles on the website. This allows visitors to connect easily with your team across various platforms, such as LinkedIn, Twitter, or Facebook. These options give you full control over the presentation and functionality of your team section. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Team Widget in Elementor to create customizable, clickable buttons on your website. For any further assistance or inquiries, feel free to contact our support team! View Live Demo
Post Reactions Before setting up the Post Reactions Widget, make sure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. Once activated, you’ll have access to all free Elementor widgets, including the Post Reactions Widget—at no cost! Additionally, you can explore both free and pro widgets by filtering the selection options. Introduction The Post Reactions Widget adds interactive buttons for user engagement on your posts. Key Use Cases for the Post Reactions Widget in Elementor: Increase user engagement by allowing reactions on posts. Customize reaction buttons to match your site’s style. Enable users to express their feelings about your content easily. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Post Reactions Widget? Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Post Reactions widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. The Post Reactions widget is now ready to use! How to Add Post Reactions Widget in Elementor Open the page where you want to add the Post Reactions Widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Post Reactions Widget.” Drag the widget to your desired section. The Post Reactions widget is now ready for customization. How to Configure Post Reactions Widget Enable the Widget: Ensure the Post Reactions Widget is enabled in your Elementor settings. Create a New Page: Open a new page where you wish to display the widget. Set a Title: Add a title for your page as required. Choose Template: Select the Elementor Full Width template for a full-width layout. Publish the Page: After setting the title and template, publish the page. Search for Post Reactions Widget: In the Elementor panel, search for “Post Reactions Widget”. Drag and Drop the Widget: Drag the widget to your desired section of the page. Adjust Settings: Customize the widget settings, including the reaction types and alignment, as Once added, the Post Reactions Widget will automatically display reaction options (like thumbs up, thumbs down, etc.) for posts, enabling user interaction based on the post content. Configuring Post Reactions Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Post Reactions Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content,Style and Advanced. Content Settings Only one customization option is available in the content section. I made a slight change by setting the alignment—that’s it. The Content Section of the Post Reactions Widget offers the following options for customization: Reactions: This option allows you to select predefined reactions for your posts. You can also add custom reactions based on your design preferences. Reactions provide users with the ability to interact with posts, such as liking, sharing, or rating the content. Show Level: This setting controls the visibility of reaction levels (if applicable). You can choose to display the level of interaction based on the number of reactions a post receives. Reaction Count: This option enables you to display the number of reactions each post has received. It provides a count of how many users have reacted to a specific post, allowing for greater user engagement tracking. Separator: The separator option allows you to choose whether to display a divider between reactions. It provides a visual break between the reactions for a cleaner and more organized look. Separator Icon: You can choose or upload an icon to act as the separator between reactions. This icon enhances the visual appeal and separates the different reaction types effectively. Icon Library or Upload SVG: You can select an icon from the built-in icon library or upload custom SVG icons for reactions. This gives you flexibility in designing how reactions appear and matching the visual style of your website. Style Settings The Style Section of the Post Reactions Widget includes three primary customization options, allowing you to tailor the appearance of reactions, icons, and separators to suit your website’s design. These options are: Reaction Button Style: This option allows you to customize the appearance of the reaction buttons. You can modify the button background color, border type , border radius,text color,typography and padding to match the overall aesthetic of your site. Reaction Icon Style: The Separator Icon Style controls the visual appearance of the icon used as a separator between reaction types. You can modify the icon size, color, and margin to ensure the separator is visually distinct yet harmonizes with the design of the reaction buttons. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Post Reactions widget in Elementor to add interactive reaction buttons and boost engagement on your posts. For any further assistance or inquiries, feel free to contact our support team! View Live Demo
One Page Nav Before setting up the Animated Title Widget for your one-page navigation, ensure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. Once activated, you’ll gain access to all free Elementor widgets, including the Animated Title Widget, at no cost! You can easily explore both free and pro widgets by using the filter options for efficient navigation within your one-page layout. Introduction The One Page Nav Widget provides smooth, customizable navigation for single-page websites. Key Use Cases for the One Page Nav Widget in Elementor: Use the One Page Nav widget to create seamless, easy navigation between sections on a single-page website. Customize the design and links to enhance user experience and improve site interaction. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the One Page Nav Widget? Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the One Page Nav Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the One Page Nav Widget is ready to use! How to Add the One Page Nav Widget in Elementor Open the page where you want to add the Progress Bar. Launch Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “One Page Nav” . Drag the One Page Nav widget to your desired section. The Progress Bar widget will now be available for customization. How to Configure the One Page Nav Widget in Animation Addons: In the Elementor panel, search for the “One Page Nav Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into the desired section. Customize the navigation settings using the available options in the Elementor panel. Your One Page Nav Widget is now ready to use! Here’s the interface where you can configure the settings and personalize the navigation links for a seamless one-page website experience. Configuring One Page Nav Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the One Page Nav widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content, Style, and Advanced. Content Settings You will find two options: Navigation and Settings. Navigation From the Content section, you’ll find two subsections: Navigation and Settings. Under the Navigation subsection, you can set up your one-page navigation menu with items like Home, About, and FAQ. Settings From the Settings subsection, you’ll find the following options: Navigation Position: Choose where the navigation appears—left or right side of the screen. Vertical Position: Adjust the vertical alignment of the navigation—top, middle, or bottom.Show Tooltip: Toggle this on to display tooltips when hovering over navigation items. Style Settings Now, it’s time to enhance the look of your navigation using the Style section. Here’s what you can explore: Navigation Wrapper: Customize the background, border, padding, and spacing to match your site’s design. Navigation Item: Style the individual items with color, size, spacing, hover effects, and more for a clean and modern look. These styling options help you create a visually appealing and user-friendly one-page navigation setup. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the One Page Nav widget in Elementor to create customizable, clickable buttons on your website. For any further assistance or inquiries, feel free to contact our support team! View Live Demo
Timeline Before setting up the Timeline Widget, make sure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. Once activated, you’ll get access to all free Elementor widgets, including the Timeline Widget—completely free! You can also explore both free and pro widgets using the filter options. Introduction The Timeline Widget displays events in order with customizable layouts for better storytelling. Key Use Cases for the Timeline Widget in Elementor: Use the Timeline widget to showcase events, milestones, or achievements in chronological order. Customize the layout, colors, and design to create an engaging visual story and highlight key moments on your website. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Timeline Widget? Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Timeline Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Timeline Widget is ready to use! How to Add the Progress Bar Widget in Elementor Open the page where you want to add the Progress Bar. Launch Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Timeline” Drag the Timeline widget to your desired section. The Progress Bar widget will now be available for customization. How to Configure the Timeline Widget in Animation Addons: In the Elementor panel, search for the “Timeline Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into the desired section. Customize the timeline settings using the available options in the Elementor panel. Your Timeline Widget is now ready to use! Use the interface to configure and personalize your timeline with different tabs for a visually engaging and chronological display of events or milestones. Configuring Timeline Widget in Animation Addons: A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Timeline widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content, Style, and Advanced. Content Settings You will find two options: Layout and Timeline & Image Animation (optional). Layout Customize the timeline structure, such as vertical or horizontal layout, alignment, spacing, and connectors to match your design needs. Timeline Add engaging entrance animations to timeline items and images, enhancing the visual flow and making your timeline more dynamic. Image Animation And, explore the Animation section to apply effects like Power2out or Reveal for smooth transitions. Enable the Play Animation option to use your selected effect. Note: Animations require the Pro version of the plugin. 1. Power2.out Behavior: Starts fast and slows down toward the end (ease-out). Use case: Smooth transitions for UI elements like buttons, cards, or text reveals. Why use it: It gives a professional, subtle feel without being too flashy. 2. Bounce Behavior: The animation hits the end point and bounces a few times like a ball. Use case: Fun, playful interfaces—great for kids’ websites, eCommerce pop-ups, or gamified UIs. Why use it: Adds personality and movement but might be too much for minimalist designs. 3. Back Behavior: Goes slightly past the target before coming back to settle—like a reverse tug. Use case: Hover animations, dropdowns, or modal pop-ups. Why use it: Adds a lively feel, perfect for making elements look responsive and interactive. 4. Elastic Behavior: Like a spring—overshoots the final position and oscillates before settling. Use case: Loading indicators, playful transitions, and attention-grabbing animations. Why use it: Eye-catching but can be overwhelming if used too much. 5. Slowmo Behavior: Starts slow, speeds up, then slows down again. Use case: Dramatic reveals—text overlays, hero sections, or featured images. Why use it: Great for storytelling or highlighting something important. 6. Stepped Behavior: Moves in sudden, discrete steps—no smooth transitions. Use case: Retro or glitchy design styles, pixel art interfaces, or robotic themes. Why use it: Stylized look, works when you want something to feel abrupt or digital. 7. Sine Behavior: Smooth, wave-like easing—in and out gently. Use case: Image sliders, content fades, scroll animations. Why use it: Very natural and smooth—good for subtle movement. 8. Expo Behavior: Exponential curve—starts slow then accelerates rapidly (or the opposite). Use case: When you want dramatic emphasis, like a hero element flying in. Why use it: Bold, impactful entrance—but can feel intense if overused. Style Settings Under the Style tab in the timeline widget you will find three expandable options: Timeline Controls the appearance of the line that connects the steps. Line color & thickness Alignment (left/center/right) Spacing between elements Line animation (if supported) Content Styles the text, headings, and descriptions inside each timeline item. Typography (font, size, color) Background color or image Padding, margin, border radius Box shadow or hover effects Step Customizes the icon or circle that represents each timeline point. Size & shape Border, background color Icon settings (if using icons) Hover/active animations Advance Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! Now you know how to manage the Timeline Widget settings in Elementor to showcase events and milestones effectively on your website. For any further assistance, feel free to reach out to our support team! View Live Demo
Tabs Before setting up the Tabs Widget, make sure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. Once activated, you’ll get access to all free Elementor widgets, including the Tabs Widget—completely free! You can also explore both free and pro widgets by using the filter options. Introduction The Tabs Widget lets you display segmented content in interactive, easy-to-navigate sections. Key Use Cases for the One Page Nav Widget in Elementor: Use the Tabs Widget to organize content into separate, easy-to-navigate sections within a page. Customize the design and tab labels to provide a clear, interactive experience, allowing users to switch between different content seamlessly. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Tabs Widget? Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Tabs Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Tabs Widget is ready to use! How to Add the One Page Nav Widget in Elementor Open the page where you want to add the Progress Bar. Launch Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Tabs”. Drag the Tabs widget to your desired section. The Progress Bar widget will now be available for customization. How to Configure the Tabs Widget in Animation Addons In the Elementor panel, search for the “Tabs Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into the desired section. Customize the tab settings using the available options in the Elementor panel. Your Tabs Widget is now ready to use! Here’s the interface where you can configure the settings and personalize the tabs for a clean and interactive user experience. Configuring Tabs Widget in Animation Addons: A Step-by-Step Guide The Tabs Widget is available in Elementor and can be placed in any section of your page. It includes three main settings tabs: Content, Style, and Advanced—each offering customization options to personalize your tabs and optimize the layout for a seamless user experience. Content Settings You will find two options: Tabs and Settings. Tabs Section (under the Content tab): In the Tabs section, you’ll find the Tab Items subsection, which allows you to configure the content for each individual tab. The available settings include: Tab Title – Set a label for the tab. Icon – Choose an icon to visually represent the tab. Title – Add a title that appears inside the content area. Content Type – Select between two options: Content – Use the built-in editor to create and display custom content. Saved Templates – Insert a pre-designed Elementor template as the tab content. When Content is selected, the following additional configuration options will appear: Add Media – Upload or insert images, videos, or custom code for enhanced visual presentation. Paragraph – Enter descriptive text or supporting content using the rich text editor. These features allow you to structure your content in a clear, organized format—ideal for FAQs, service descriptions, or product details. Direction (Tab Content Placement): The Direction setting allows you to define the placement of the tab content in relation to the tab labels. You can choose from the following options: Above – Displays the tab content above the tab labels. Below – Places the tab content beneath the tab labels (commonly used layout). Before – Positions the tab content to the left of the tab labels. After – Places the tab content to the right of the tab labels. This feature helps you design the layout of your Tabs Widget to best match your page structure and visual preferences. Alignment – Controls the position of the tabs (Start, Center, End & Stretch). This setting determines how the tabs are aligned within the widget’s container. You can choose from the following options: Start – Aligns all tab items to the left side (default for left-to-right languages). Center – Places the tab items in the center of the container, creating a balanced look. End – Aligns all tab items to the right side of the container. Stretch – Expands all tab items evenly to fill the entire width of the container, ensuring equal space between each tab. This control is useful for adjusting the visual alignment of your tabs based on your design needs or layout preferences. Settings (Under the Content Tab) After configuring the Tabs section, you’ll move on to the Settings panel. This section offers additional customization options to fine-tune the appearance and behavior of your tabs. Here’s what you’ll find: Title Alignment Choose how your tab titles should align within the widget. Options include: Left Center Right This helps you match the tab alignment with your overall design layout. Icon Position Decide where the icon will appear in relation to the tab title. You can place it before or after the text for better visual hierarchy. Icon Gap Set the spacing between the icon and the title text. This ensures that your design remains clean and easy to read. Breakpoint Define how the tab layout behaves on different devices. The available breakpoints are: Mobile Portrait (>767px) – Adjusts the layout specifically for mobile devices in portrait orientation. Tablet Portrait (>1024px) – Optimizes the layout for tablets in portrait mode. These settings provide responsive control and allow you to create a seamless viewing experience across various devices. Style Settings In the Content section under Style, you’ll find the following options: Style Background Type Set the background of the tab items. You can choose between: Solid color Gradient Image background Border Radius Adjust the roundness of the tab corners. A higher radius results in more rounded edges, while a lower value gives a sharper, boxed look. Gap Between Tabs Control the space between each individual tab. Proper spacing improves readability and maintains a clean layout. Distance from Content Define the spacing between the tab headers and the content area. This ensures clear separation and visual balance between the navigation and its associated content. Typography Subsection Within this subsection, you can fine-tune how the text and icons inside the tabs appear: 🔸 Icon Size Set the size of the icon used within the tab titles. Larger icons draw more attention, while smaller ones create a minimal look. 🔸 Text Color Choose the color of the tab title text. This should complement your site’s color scheme while ensuring good readability. 🔸 Background Type This controls the background of the text area or tab title, separate from the main background. It adds layering and contrast to the tab design. Additional Styling Options Border Type and Radius Define the border style (solid, dashed, dotted, etc.) and radius to shape the outer frame of the tab content or tab titles. This helps reinforce structure in your design. 🔹 Padding Adjust the inner spacing around the content inside each tab. Proper padding ensures that text and visuals do not appear cramped and enhances user experience. These style options are designed to give you full control over the look and feel of your tabbed content, helping you create engaging, responsive, and brand-aligned sections on your Elementor-powered website. Content Background Type The Background Type setting in the Style tab allows users to customize the visual appearance of the content area within the Tabs widget. This option is essential for enhancing the overall design and user experience of your section. Available Background Types: Default: Keeps the default styling provided by your theme or Elementor. None: Removes any background styling, resulting in a transparent background.Solid: Applies a single solid color as the background. You can choose any color using the color picker. Double: Creates a double border effect around the content area, offering a more decorative look. Dotted: Applies a dotted border around the content area for a stylized, subtle effect. Dashed: Similar to dotted, but with dashed lines, giving a segmented appearance to the border. Groove: Adds a 3D grooved border style, providing depth and visual interest. Border Type Choose the style of border around the tab content. Options include None, Solid, Double, Dotted, Dashed, Groove, and more. Border Radius Customize the curvature of the content box’s corners. You can enter different values for Top, Right, Bottom, and Left to create rounded or sharp corners. Padding Controls the space inside the content box (between the content and the border). Set padding values individually for Top, Right, Bottom, and Left to manage spacing effectively. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Tabs widget in Elementor to create customizable, interactive tabbed content on your website. For any further assistance or inquiries, feel free to contact our support team! View Live Demo
Services Tabs Before setting up the Service Tabs widget, ensure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. Once activated, you’ll have access to all free Elementor widgets, including the Service Tabs widget—at no cost! Additionally, you can explore both free and pro widgets by filtering the selection options. Introduction The Services Tabs widget displays services in a tabbed layout for easy navigation and better user experience. Key Use Cases for the Services Tabs Widget in Elementor: Use the Services Tabs widget to showcase different services in an organized, tabbed format. Customize the design and content to enhance user experience and make it easier for visitors to explore your offerings. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Service Tabs Widget? Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Service Tabs Widget from the list. Toggle the switch to enable it. That’s it! The Service Tabs Widget is now ready to use on your website. How to Add the One Page Nav Widget in Elementor Open the page where you want to add the Progress Bar. Launch Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Services Tabs” . Drag the Services Tabs widget to your desired section. The Progress Bar widget will now be available for customization. How to Configure the Service Tabs Widget in Animation Addons In the Elementor panel, search for the “Service Tabs Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into the section where you want to display your services. Use the available options in the Elementor panel to customize the tabs, such as titles, icons, content, and layout to match your site’s style and service offerings. Your Service Tabs Widget is now ready to use! Here’s the interface where you can configure the settings and customize each tab to showcase your services in a clean, organized, and interactive layout. Configuring Services Tabs Widget: A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Services Tabs widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content, Style, and Advanced. Content Settings You will find two options: Tabs, Button, and Settings. Tab Under the Content section of the Service Tabs Widget, you’ll find several key configuration options to customize each tab effectively: Style: Choose between two available layout styles – Style One and Style Two – based on your design preference. Tabs Items: Tab Number: Define the number of tabs you want to display. Tab Title: Add a title for each tab to clearly represent the content. Add Media: Insert rich content using either the Visual editor or Code view for advanced customization. Paragraph: Add descriptive text to provide context or details. Choose Image: Upload or select an image that complements your tab content. Link Option: Add a clickable link to direct users to more information or a specific page. Once all your tabs are set up, make sure to adjust the image resolution to match your overall design theme for a polished and cohesive look. Button In the Button section of the Service Tabs Widget, you can fully personalize the appearance and behavior of your button to match your website’s style: Style Selection: Choose from 7 unique button styles to suit your design preference. Hover Effects: Select from 7 different hover styles to enhance interactivity. Text: Add your desired button label/text. Icon: You can either upload a custom icon or choose one from the icon library. Icon Position: Decide whether the icon appears before or after the text. Direction: Arrange the button layout in a horizontal (row) or vertical (column) orientation. Icon Spacing: Adjust the space between the icon and text for better visual balance. These settings allow you to create a visually appealing and highly functional button that complements your service tabs seamlessly. Settings In the final part of the Content section, you’ll find the Settings panel, which allows you to manage how your Service Tabs display across different screen sizes. You’ll have two Breakpoint categories available: Mobile Portrait: Targets screens below 767px, ensuring your content looks great on smaller mobile devices. Tablet Portrait: Targets screens up to 1024px, providing optimal layout for tablet users. These settings help maintain a responsive and user-friendly experience across all devices by automatically adjusting the tab layout based on screen size. Style Settings Now, it’s time to enhance your Tabs, Image, Tab Title, and content by styling them to match your design preferences and improve the overall user experience. Tabs You can adjust the tab width according to these settings to ensure optimal display across different devices. Image In the image section, you’ll find customization options such as margin, border type, and box shadow, allowing you to adjust the tab width as needed for a refined design. Tab Title Tab Number Function: This field likely auto-generates or displays the number of the tab in order (e.g., Tab 1, Tab 2). Customization: There might not be much to change here unless it’s manually editable depending on the widget you’re using. Color Purpose: Changes the color of the tab number or title text. Options: Clicking the color box opens the color picker, allowing you to choose a solid color, gradient, or even set it to transparent. Typography Purpose: Lets you customize the font styling for the tab number or title. Options: Includes font family, size, weight (boldness), transform (uppercase/lowercase), style (italic/normal), decoration (underline, etc.), line-height, and letter-spacing. Space (Slider) Function: Adjusts the spacing (likely the gap between the tab number/title and the tab content or between tabs themselves). Customization: Use the slider or manually input a number in the box to the right. Title Function: Input field where you enter the actual name/title of the tab (e.g., “Cleaning Services,” “Pricing,” etc.). Tabs: There are two states: Normal: Controls how the title looks normally. Hover/Active: Controls how the title looks when hovered over or currently selected. Color (under Title state) Function: Customize the color of the tab title based on the state selected (Normal or Hover/Active). Interaction: Clicking opens the color picker for both text and background options. Typography (under Title state) Purpose: Customize font details specifically for the title under Normal or Hover/Active state. Options: Font family, size, weight, style, spacing, etc. Border Type Function: Lets you apply borders around the tab title. Options: Choices may include none, solid, dashed, dotted, double, or groove. Padding Function: Adds spacing inside the tab title area (between the content and the border). Values: Editable fields for Top, Right, Bottom, and Left. Margin Function: Adds spacing outside the tab title area (between this tab and surrounding elements). Values: Editable fields for Top, Right, Bottom, and Left. Content Color:Adjust the text color, background color, and active tab color to match your brand’s palette and improve readability. Padding:Control the space inside each tab element, ensuring your content has enough breathing room and a clean layout. Typography:Customize font family, size, weight, line height, and letter spacing to maintain consistency with your site’s overall text style. Margin:Set the space outside the tab elements, allowing you to control the distance between tabs and other elements on the page. These options provide complete flexibility to fine-tune the appearance of your tabs, ensuring they look polished and consistent with the rest of your design. Button Button Margin What it does: Adds space outside the button. Input Fields: You can set values for Top, Right, Bottom, and Left independently. Link Icon (🔗): Click to apply the same margin to all sides simultaneously. Typography Purpose: Adjusts the font style of the button text. Options: Includes settings like font family, size, weight (boldness), style (italic/normal), decoration (underline), line height, and letter spacing. Open Settings: Click the pencil/edit icon to reveal these options. Icon Size What it does: If your button includes an icon, this slider controls its size. Adjust: Use the slider or type the value manually in px (pixels). State Tabs: Normal | Hover Normal Tab: Style your button in its default state. Hover Tab: Change how the button looks when the user hovers their mouse over it. You can toggle between them to apply different settings for each state. Text Color Purpose: Changes the color of the text on the button. Color Picker: Click to choose a color. You can use solid colors, gradients, or even transparent options. Background Type Purpose: Set the background color or gradient of the button. Options: Classic: Solid color or image background. Gradient: Smooth color transitions. Click the color panel to reveal the picker or image upload tool. Border Type Purpose: Determines the type of border around the button. Options: Default, solid, dotted, dashed, double, groove, ridge, etc. Border Radius What it does: Controls the roundness of the button corners. Values: You can set custom radius values for Top, Right, Bottom, and Left. Linked editing: Use the chain icon to keep all corners uniform. Padding Purpose: Adds space inside the button (between the border and the text/icon). Input Fields: Customize padding for Top, Right, Bottom, and Left sides separately. Box Shadow Purpose: Adds a shadow around the button for a lifted or 3D effect. Settings (when expanded): Control shadow color, blur, spread, position (horizontal/vertical), and more. Click the edit icon (✏️) to configure shadow properties. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Services Tabs Widget in Elementor to create customizable, interactive tabbed content on your website. For any further assistance or inquiries, feel free to contact our support team! View Live Demo
Floating Elements Before setting up the Floating Elements, make sure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. Once activated, you’ll have access to all free Elementor widgets, including the Floating Elements—at no cost! Additionally, you can explore both free and pro widgets by filtering the selection options. Introduction Floating elements stay fixed while scrolling, ensuring quick access to key actions or info without interrupting the layout. Key Use Cases for the Floating elements in Elementor: Use the Floating Elements widget to display key components like navigation menus, call-to-action buttons, or notifications in a fixed position. Customize the design and placement to ensure they stay accessible as users scroll, enhancing user experience without interrupting the page flow. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Floating Elements Widget? Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Locate the Floating Elements Widget in the list. Toggle the switch to enable the widget. That’s it! The Floating Elements Widget is now ready to use on your website. How to Add the Floating Elements Widget in Elementor Open the page where you want to add the Progress Bar. Launch Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Floating Elements” . Drag the Floating Elements widget to your desired section. The Progress Bar widget will now be available for customization. How to Configure the Floating Elements Widget In the Elementor panel, search for the “Floating Elements Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into the section where you want the floating effect to appear. Customize the widget settings using the available options in the Elementor panel, including animation style, direction, speed, and more to achieve your desired floating effect. Configuring Floating Elements Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Floating Elements widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content and Advanced. Content Settings You will find only one option there – WCF Floating Elements. The Elements section within the WCF Floating Elements widget provides comprehensive control over the floating items you want to display on your webpage. Below is a breakdown of the configurable options available for each item: Choose Image: Allows you to upload or select an image from the media library to be used as the floating element. 2. Size: Lets you define the width and height of the floating image. This ensures consistent sizing across devices. 3. Offset: Provides control over the horizontal and vertical positioning of the element. You can fine-tune the placement by adjusting the offset values. 4. Z-Index: Sets the layering order of the floating element. A higher z-index value brings the element to the front over other page elements. 5. Live Animation: Enables dynamic visual effects for floating elements. Available animation styles include: Float Y – Vertical floating motion Float X – Horizontal floating motion Spin – Rotational movement Scale – Smooth zoom in/out effect Wiggle – Playful shaking motion 6. Enable Scroll Smoother: A toggle option to enable or disable smooth scrolling effects for the floating elements, making transitions appear more fluid. 7. Visibility Options: You can control the visibility of floating elements on various devices using the following toggles: Hide on Desktop Hide on Tablet Portrait Hide on Mobile Portrait These options ensure that your floating elements display only on the intended devices, improving performance and user experience. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Floating Elements widget in Elementor to create interactive, floating components on your website. For any further assistance or inquiries, feel free to contact our support team! View Live Demo
Banner Posts The Banner Posts Widget in Animation Addons for Elementor is a paid feature. To access this widget, ensure the plugin is installed and activated on your site. You can also explore both free and pro widgets through the filtering options. Introduction The Banner Posts Widget displays customizable post banners for promoting content or announcements. Key Use Cases for the Banner Posts Widget: Display customizable post banners to highlight important content or announcements. Match the banner’s design with your site’s style for a cohesive look. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Banner Posts Widget? Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Banner Posts Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Banner Posts Widget is ready to use! How to Add Banner Posts Widget in Elementor Open the page where you want to add the Banner Posts Widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Banner Posts Widget.” Drag the widget to your desired section. The Banner Posts Widget is now ready for customization. How to Configure Banner Posts Widget Make sure the Banner Posts Widget is activated in your Elementor settings. Open a new page in WordPress. Add a page title and choose the Elementor Full Width template. Click Publish to save your changes.In the Elementor panel, search for “Banner Posts Widget” and drag it onto the page. Adjust the banner layout, styling, and content display as needed. Configuring Filterable Posts Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Banner Posts Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content,Style and Advanced. Content Settings In the content section, you’ll find various customization options. I made slight adjustments to Query, Settings, and Title, while leaving the rest unchanged as they weren’t needed for my design. Query: This option allows you to filter the posts that appear in the Banner Posts Widget. You can control which posts are displayed by filtering them based on categories, tags, post types, or specific custom queries. It helps you display the most relevant content to your audience. Settings: The settings section lets you configure the behavior of the widget, such as determining the number of posts to display, whether to enable pagination or infinite scrolling, and adjusting the l Title: This option allows you to customize the appearance of the title for the banner posts, including typography, size, color, and alignment. You can make the title stand out and match your website’s overall design by adjusting these settings. These options allow you to refine and control the content displayed in the Banner Posts Widget to suit your needs and design preferences. Style Settings In the Style Section of the Banner Post Widget, the following elements play key roles: Title: The title is the main heading of a page or post, visible on the page and in the browser tab. It’s crucial for SEO and should be clear and relevant to the content. Meta: Meta tags provide information about the page (like a description) in the HTML, not visible to users. The meta description is often shown in search engine results and helps with SEO. Meta Admin: Meta Admin includes administrative info such as the author, date, and content updates, primarily for content management, not visible on the front-end. Read More: The Read More link shows a content preview and leads users to the full article, keeping pages tidy and aiding SEO by offering an organized layout. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Once the Banner Posts Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content,Style and Advanced. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Filterable Posts Widget in Elementor to display dynamic and categorized posts seamlessly. For any further assistance or inquiries, feel free to contact our support. View Live Demo
Event Slider Before setting up the Event Slider, make sure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. Once activated, you’ll have access to all free Elementor widgets, including the Event Slider—at no cost! Additionally, you can explore both free and pro widgets by filtering the selection options. Introduction The Event Slider widget in Elementor displays events in a dynamic slider with customizable design, showing dates, descriptions, and images. Key Use Cases for the Event Slider in Elementor: Use the Event Slider widget to showcase upcoming events in a dynamic, sliding format. Customize the design, transitions, and content to display event details like dates, descriptions, and images, ensuring an engaging and interactive user experience. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Event Slider Widget? Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Event Slider Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Event Slider Widget is ready to use! How to Add Event Slider Widget in Elementor Open the page where you want to add the Event Slider. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Event Slider.“ Drag the Event Slider widget to your desired section. The Event Slider widget will now be available for customization. How to Configure the Event Slider Widget In the Elementor panel, search for the “Event Slider Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into the desired section. Customize the event slider settings using the available options in the Elementor panel. Your Event Slider Widget is now ready to use! Here’s the interface where you can configure the settings and personalize the slider for a dynamic and engaging event showcase. Configuring Event Slider Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Event Slider widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content,Style and Advanced. Content Settings You will find only three options there – Event Slider, Button and Slider Option. Event Slider The Slider Option settings include – Event Style,Events item, choose image,name,date and description. The Slider Option settings provide various customization options to enhance your design. For the Event Style settings, follow these steps: Event Item: Choose the event or item you want to customize. Each event will have its own unique settings. Choose Image: Select an image for the event that visually represents it. Name: Add the name or title of the event to make it easily identifiable. Date: Set the date of the event to inform your audience about when it will occur. Description: Provide a brief description of the event so users understand the details and what to expect. Button The Button Section offers a variety of customization options to help you design visually appealing and interactive buttons. Below is a detailed explanation of each setting: 1. Style Defines the default appearance of the button. You can customize: Background color Text color Border style Typography Padding & Margin This allows you to align the button design with your website’s branding. 2. Hover Style Controls the button’s appearance when a user hovers over it. You can configure: Hover Style Categories Within the Hover Style option, you’ll find a variety of pre-designed hover animation categories to enhance user interaction and visual appeal. These styles provide dynamic effects when users hover over the button. Here are some of the available hover style categories: Divided – Splits the button visually during hover for a modern effect. Cross – Displays a cross-patterned hover animation. Cropping – Creates a crop-like visual transition on hover. Rollover Top – Applies a slide effect from the top of the button. Rollover Left – Slides the hover effect in from the left side. Parallel Border – Highlights the button with animated parallel borders. Rollover Cross – Combines rollover motion with a cross-direction animation. These options are designed to give your buttons a unique and interactive feel. You can experiment with each style to find the one that best suits your design needs. 3. Text Specifies the label displayed on the button. It should be clear and action-oriented (e.g., “Read More”, “Buy Now”). 4. Icon Enables you to add an icon to the button from a predefined icon library. Icons enhance visual context and user comprehension. 5. Icon Position Determines where the icon will appear in relation to the text. You can choose: Before the text After the text This ensures better alignment based on design preferences. 6. Direction Controls the layout direction of the icon and text. Options include: Row (default) – icon and text appear side-by-side. Column – icon appears above or below the text. This is useful for different layout styles, especially in vertical designs. 7. Icon Spacing Adjusts the space between the icon and the button text. You can define precise spacing to maintain visual balance and clarity. Slider Option The Slider Options panel provides comprehensive control over the behavior, design, and navigation of your slider. Below is a detailed explanation of each setting available: 1. Slider Styles Choose from 10 unique slider styles to control the overall look and layout of your slider. Each style comes with a predefined design configuration that can be further customized. 2. Autoplay Button Enables a play/pause button for the slider, allowing users to manually control autoplay functionality. 3. Autoplay Delay Specifies the time interval (in milliseconds) between automatic slide transitions.Example: Setting it to 3000ms results in a 3-second delay between slides. 4. Autoplay Interaction Determines whether autoplay will pause on user interaction (e.g., mouse hover or touch). Enabled: Autoplay pauses when the user interacts. Disabled: Autoplay continues regardless of user interaction. 5. Allow Touch Move Enables swipe functionality on touch devices. Useful for enhancing mobile responsiveness and user experience. 6. Loop Allows the slider to loop continuously from the last slide back to the first, creating a seamless carousel effect. 7. Mousewheel Control Enables users to navigate through slides using the mouse wheel — particularly useful for full-page slider experiences. 8. Animation Speed Controls the transition speed (in milliseconds) between slides.Example: A setting of 500ms results in a half-second slide animation. 9. Space Between Sets the amount of spacing (in pixels) between each slide. This helps manage layout density and visual clarity. 10. Navigation Enables or disables navigation arrows (previous and next) on the slider. Enabled: Users can manually switch slides using arrows. Disabled: Arrows are hidden. 11. Previous Arrow Icon Select a custom icon for the previous navigation arrow, allowing alignment with your site’s theme or style. 12. Next Arrow Icon Select a custom icon for the next navigation arrow, similar to the previous arrow setting. 13. Pagination Displays pagination indicators (e.g., dots or progress bars) to show the current slide position within the total slides. 14. Pagination Type Choose the style of pagination, such as: Bullets Fraction Progress Bar Each type offers a different visual representation of the slider’s progress. 15. Direction Defines the slide transition direction: Left to Right (default for horizontal sliders) Right to Left (ideal for RTL languages or custom flows) Style Settings Once your Event Slider Widget is added and configured, the next step is to enhance the visual presentation of your content. Images This section lets you style the event image for a polished and responsive visual display. Size: Adjust the image dimensions to maintain consistency across all event slides. Border Type: Select a border style (solid, dashed, dotted, etc.) to enhance the image frame. Border Radius: Define the roundness of the image corners for a smooth or sharp look, depending on your design needs. These settings allow you to present your event images in a visually consistent and attractive manner. Content Customize the container that holds the title, description, and other event information. Background Type: Choose a solid color, gradient, or image background to enhance visual depth. Padding: Control the inner spacing between the content and the container’s edges for better alignment and spacing. Margin: Adjust the outer spacing around the content area to create breathing space from other elements. Individual Text Elements within Content: Title Color: Set the text color to match your brand or design palette. Typography: Customize font family, size, weight, line height, and letter spacing. Margin: Fine-tune spacing above and below the title for visual balance. Date Color: Define the date’s text color for clarity and emphasis. Typography: Adjust typography settings to match your style guide. Margin: Set spacing to separate the date from surrounding elements. Description Color: Control the description text color for optimal readability. Typography: Modify font details to ensure legibility and aesthetic harmony. Margin: Adjust spacing around the description to maintain layout consistency. Button Customize the action button within the slider for a compelling call-to-action. Adjust text styling, padding, border, colors, hover effects, icon settings, and spacing to create a visually engaging and functional button. Slider Navigation This section lets you personalize the Previous and Next arrows. Customize icon styles, size, color, background, positioning, and hover effects to align with your design aesthetic. Pagination Configure the look of pagination elements such as dots or progress bars. Control shape, size, color, spacing, and active/hover states to ensure intuitive navigation across slides. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Event Slider widget in Elementor to create dynamic and engaging event displays on your website. For any further assistance or inquiries, feel free to contact our support team! View Live Demo
Current Date Introduction The Current Date Widget dynamically displays the date, keeping your site updated and engaging. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Current Date Widget? Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Current Date Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Current Date Widget is ready to use! How to Add Current Date Widget in Elementor Open the page where you want to add the Current Date Widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Current Date Widget”. Drag the widget to your desired section. The Current Date Widget is now ready for customization. How to Configure Current Date Widget Enable it, create a new page, set a title, choose the Elementor Full Width template, and publish. Adjust options as needed. After selection, the Elementor panel appears with all tools and customization options. Here’s the interface where you can configure the settings and customize the Event Slider Widget across various tabs. Configuring Current Date Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Current Date Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content, Style, and Advanced. Content Settings In the Content section, you’ll find customization options for the date format. I changed the date format, toggled the “Show Day” button, and adjusted the gap and alignment to fit my design preferences. Style Settings In the Style section, I made changes only to the Margin section, while the rest remained unchanged as I don’t need them for now. However, feel free to explore and customize them according to your needs. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Current Date Widget in Elementor to display the current date dynamically on your website. For any further assistance or inquiries, feel free to contact our support.
Content Slider Before setting up the Content Slider Widget, make sure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. Once activated, you’ll have access to all free Elementor widgets, including the Content Slider Widget—at no cost! Additionally, you can explore both free and pro widgets by filtering the selection options. Introduction The Content Slider widget displays dynamic content with customizable design and transitions. Key Use Cases for the Content Slider in Elementor: Use the Content Slider widget to showcase dynamic text, images, or promotions in an interactive sliding format. Customize the layout, transitions, and design to create an engaging experience without disrupting the page flow. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Content Slider Widget? Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Content Slider Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Content Slider Widget is ready to use! How to Add the Content Slider Widget in Elementor Open the page where you want to add the Content Slider. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Content Slider“. Drag the Content Slider Widget to your desired section. The Content Slider Widget will now be available for customization. How to Configure the Content Slider Widget in Animation Addons Enable the widget, create a new page, set a title, choose the Elementor Full Width template, and publish it. Adjust options as needed. In the Elementor panel, search for the “Content Slider Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into your desired section. Add your slides and customize each one’s content, layout, and animation using the available settings. Content Settings These options allow you to customize the slider functionality, manage content visibility, and fine-tune the display settings for optimal user engagement. The settings panel provides two primary configuration options: Content Slider and Slider Option. Content Slider The Content Slider widget offers various configuration options to adjust the layout, content, and media elements for an engaging and responsive presentation. Below is a breakdown of the key settings available in the Content Slider section: Max Width Description: Defines the maximum width of the content slider, allowing you to control the slider’s overall size within its container. Use Case: This setting helps maintain consistency across different screen sizes and ensures that the slider does not stretch beyond the desired width. Options: You can set the width in pixels or percentage, depending on your design needs. Align Items Description: Controls the vertical alignment of the content inside each slide. Use Case: Aligning items ensures that the content within the slider is positioned properly, whether centered, top-aligned, or bottom-aligned. Options: Available alignment options include Top, Center, or Bottom. Two Category Content Type Description: Allows you to categorize the content into two distinct types for improved organization and layout options. Use Case: This is especially useful when displaying content that needs to be categorized or separated into two sections, such as an image and text, or different event categories. Options: Typically, you can choose between Image & Text or Text & Button. Content Description: This setting is for adding and managing the textual content within each slide. Use Case: You can define the title, description, or any other content you want to display within the slider. Options: Content fields allow you to input text and customize it further using typography settings like font size, color, line height, etc. Add Media (Visual and Code) Description: Allows the addition of media, either through visual elements (images, videos, etc.) or code (like HTML embeds). Use Case: Add compelling media to your slides to enrich the visual appeal, or embed content such as custom HTML code for advanced layouts and dynamic elements. Options: Visual: Upload or select media from your media library. Code: Insert custom HTML code for more flexible, dynamic content. Paragraph Description: Provides the option to add a paragraph of text to each slide. Use Case: The paragraph field is ideal for adding descriptions, additional details, or any longer text content related to the event or offer being showcased. Options: You can style the paragraph text using standard typography settings, such as font size, color, line height, and alignment. Slider Option I made slight changes to my slider and customized a few things as well. That’s All! Slider Option The Slider Options section provides a wide range of controls to fine-tune the behavior, layout, and user interaction of your Content Slider. Below is a detailed explanation of each setting to help you configure the slider professionally and effectively: 1. Slides to Show (1–10) Description: Defines how many slides are visible at once within the slider viewport. Use Case: Display multiple items side-by-side or focus on a single highlighted content element. Options: Choose from 1 to 10 slides to display simultaneously. Autoplay Button Description: Enables or disables automatic slide transition. Use Case: Ideal for hands-free, continuous content presentation such as featured posts or promotions. Control: Toggle switch (On/Off). Autoplay Delay (if available) Description: Sets the time delay (in milliseconds) between automatic slide transitions.Use Case: Controls the pacing of autoplay to match your content’s visibility needs. Allow Touch Move Description: Enables swipe gestures for touch devices. Use Case: Enhances mobile usability by allowing users to slide content using finger gestures. Control: Toggle switch (On/Off). Loop Description: Allows the slider to loop back to the beginning after the last slide. Use Case: Provides a seamless, continuous sliding experience. Control: Toggle switch (On/Off). Mousewheel Toggle Button Description: Enables slide navigation using mouse wheel scrolling. Use Case: Improves desktop navigation and adds intuitive interaction. Control: Toggle switch (On/Off). Animation Speed Description: Controls the transition speed between slides. Use Case: Adjusts the feel of the slider—smooth and slow or quick and snappy. Unit: Time in milliseconds (e.g., 300ms, 500ms). Space Between Description: Sets the gap between individual slides. Use Case: Useful for visually separating content blocks and improving layout clarity. Unit: Pixels (px). Navigation Description: Displays previous and next navigation arrows for manual slide control. Use Case: Allows users to manually scroll through slides. Control: Toggle switch (On/Off). Previous Arrow Icon / Next Arrow Icon Description: Customize the icons used for the previous and next navigation arrows. Use Case: Match your site’s design language or theme. Options: Select from available icon sets. Pagination Toggle Button Description: Enables dot or numeric pagination indicators. Use Case: Helps users identify their position within the slider. Control: Toggle switch (On/Off). Pagination Type Description: Selects the style of pagination (e.g., dots, fraction, progress bar). Use Case: Enhances visual feedback and user orientation. Options: Depends on available pagination styles in the widget. Left/Right Direction Description: Determines the sliding direction of the content. Use Case: Useful for RTL (Right-to-Left) language support or custom design preference. Options: Left or Right. Center Slide Toggle Button Description: Centers the currently active slide within the slider frame. Use Case: Enhances focus on the active item for a clean, professional look. Control: Toggle switch (On/Off). Effect Description: Sets the slide transition animation effect (e.g., slide, fade). Use Case: Adds aesthetic value and improves content engagement. Options: Based on available animation types. Style Settings The Style section of the Content Slider widget is categorized into three parts: Slide, Slider Navigation, and Slider Pagination. Each section offers detailed styling options to help you align the slider’s design with your website’s aesthetics- Slide Customize the visual appearance of individual slides using the following settings: Background Type – Choose between classic, gradient, or image backgrounds to set the visual tone. Border Type – Define the border style (solid, dotted, dashed, etc.) around the slide. Border Radius – Adjust the roundness of slide corners for a softer or sharper appearance. Padding – Control the spacing inside the slide for proper content alignment. Slider Navigation Style the previous and next navigation arrows with precision: Size – Set the icon size to match your design layout. Padding – Add spacing around the navigation buttons for balanced positioning. Color – Choose the arrow icon color to match your brand palette. Background Type – Customize the background using solid colors, gradients, or images. Border Type – Apply a suitable border style to the navigation buttons. Border Radius – Round off the edges of the navigation buttons for a modern or classic look. Slider Pagination Design the pagination indicators to enhance user navigation: Size – Adjust the size of pagination dots or lines. Color – Set the default color of the pagination items. Active Color – Define a distinct color for the active pagination item to highlight the current slide. Border Type – Customize the border around each pagination item. Gap – Set spacing between pagination items for clean alignment. Pagination Position – Choose where the pagination appears (e.g., top, bottom, inside). Pagination Offset – Fine-tune the exact position by setting offset values. These options provide full control over the design and user experience of your Content Slider, ensuring it integrates seamlessly into your website’s layout and branding. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Content Slider widget in Elementor to create dynamic and engaging content displays on your website. For any further assistance or inquiries, feel free to contact our support team! View Live Demo
Countdown Before setting up the Countdown Widget, make sure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. Once activated, you’ll have access to all free Elementor widgets, including the Countdown Widget—at no cost! Additionally, you can explore both free and pro widgets by filtering the selection options. Introduction The Countdown widget adds a customizable timer to create urgency for events or promotions. Key Use Cases for the Countdown Widget in Elementor: Use the Countdown widget to display timers for upcoming events, product launches, or promotions. Customize the design and countdown settings to create urgency and engage visitors effectively. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Countdown Widget: Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Countdown Widget in the list Toggle it on to enable the widget.Now, the Countdown Widget is ready to use! How to Add Countdown Widget in Elementor Open the page where you want to add the Countdown. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Countdown.“ Drag the Event Slider widget to your desired section. The Event Slider widget will now be available for customization. How to Configure the Countdown Widget Enable it, create a new page, set a title, choose the Elementor Full Width template, and publish. Adjust options as needed. In the Elementor panel, search for the “Countdown Widget.” Drag and drop the widget into the desired section. Customize the countdown settings using the available options in the Elementor panel. Your Countdown Widget is now ready to use! Configure the settings to create an engaging and time-sensitive experience. Configuring Countdown Widget in Animation Addons: A Step-by-Step Guide The Countdown Widget is available in Elementor and can be placed in any section of your page. It includes three main settings tabs: Content, Style, and Advanced—each offering customization options to personalize the timer and optimize the layout for a time-sensitive, engaging user experience. Content Settings In the Content section of the Countdown Widget, you will find three main options: Layout Style – Choose the overall visual style of the countdown timer (boxed, inline). Show Separator – Enable or disable separators (like colons or symbols) between time units for better readability and design consistency. Timer In the Timer section of the Countdown Widget, you will find the following options: Due Date – Set the exact date and time when the countdown will end. Labels – Enable or disable labels for each time unit (Days, Hours, Minutes, Seconds). Days / Hours / Minutes / Seconds – Customize the visibility and styling for each unit individually. Direction – Set the alignment direction of the timer (e.g., row or column layout). Label Gap – Adjust the spacing between the numbers and their respective labels for a cleaner look. These options allow you to tailor the countdown timer’s functionality and appearance to match your site’s design. Time Expire In the Time Expire section of the Countdown Widget, you can define what will be displayed once the countdown reaches zero. This allows you to maintain engagement with your audience even after the countdown ends. 🔹 Title Specify a custom title that appears when the countdown timer expires. This can be used to highlight a message like “Time’s Up!”, “Offer Ended”, or any other relevant notification. 🔹 Description Add a supporting description below the title to provide additional information. For example, you might include details like “Please stay tuned for upcoming events.” or “This deal is no longer available.” Style Settings As we can see, there are several customization options in the style section for layout, days, hours, minutes, seconds and separator. The Style section allows you to customize the visual appearance of your Countdown Timer, helping you create an attractive, brand-aligned design. The options are divided into several key areas: Layout Item Gap: Adjust the spacing between each time unit (Days, Hours, Minutes, Seconds) to ensure balanced alignment and visual clarity. Days / Hours / Minutes / Seconds (Under “General”) Each of these sections provides the same set of customization options: Digit & Label Gap: Control the space between the numeric value and its corresponding label (e.g., “Days”, “Hours”). Padding: Add internal spacing inside the time unit box for a more spacious look. Background Type: Choose a background color or gradient to enhance visibility and match your design theme. Border Type: Apply solid, dashed, dotted, or double borders around each time unit. Border Radius: Soften the corners of each box by adjusting the radius value. Box Shadow: Add a shadow effect for depth and emphasis. Digits Typography and Color: Customize the font style, weight, size, and color of the digits. Labels Typography and Color: Modify the label’s text appearance to maintain consistency with your site’s aesthetic. Separator Size: Set the thickness or font size of the separator between time units. Offset: Adjust the vertical positioning of the separator to align it perfectly with the design layout. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve successfully configured the Countdown widget in Elementor to create an engaging countdown timer for your website. For any further assistance or inquiries, feel free to contact our support team! View Live Demo
Advanced Button Before setting up the Advanced Button, make sure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. Once activated, you’ll have access to all free Elementor widgets, including the Advanced Button—at no cost! Additionally, you can explore both free and pro widgets by filtering the selection options. Introduction The Advanced Button widget in Elementor lets you create customizable, stylish buttons with various design and hover effects to boost user engagement. Key Use Cases for the Advanced Button in Elementor: Use the Advanced Button widget to create highly customizable, interactive buttons with unique hover effects, shapes, and styles. Customize button design, actions, and animations to enhance user experience and drive engagement on your website. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Advanced Button Widget Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Advanced Button Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Advanced Button Widget is ready to use! How to Add Advanced Button Widget in Elementor: Open the page where you want to add the Advanced Button. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Advanced Button.” Drag the Advanced Button widget to your desired section. The Advanced Button widget will now be available for customization. How to Configure Advanced Button Widget In the Elementor panel, search for the Advanced Button Widget. Drag and drop the widget into the desired section. Customize the button settings using the available options in the Elementor panel. Your Advanced Button Widget is now ready to use! Configuring Advanced Button Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Advanced Button Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content,Style and Advanced. Content Settings You will find only one option – Button. In the Button section, you will find the following customization options: Styles: Choose from 8 predefined button styles. Text: Customize the text displayed on the button. Icon: Add an icon to the button. Icon Position: Control the position of the icon (before or after the text). Link: Set the link for the button (URL). Alignment: Adjust the alignment of the button (left, center, or right). These options allow you to tailor the appearance and functionality of the button to suit your design. Style Settings Within the Style tab, the Button section provides a range of design customization options to enhance the visual appeal and usability of your button. Here’s what you can configure: Typography: Customize the font style, size, weight, and spacing of the button text. Background Type: Choose between classic or gradient backgrounds for the button. Border Width: Define the thickness of the button border. Border Radius: Adjust the roundness of the button corners. Padding: Control the space inside the button for balanced text and icon placement. Icon Size: Set the size of the icon used in the button. Gap: Manage the spacing between the icon and the button text. Color: Choose the text color of the button. Border Color: Select a color for the button border. These options give you complete control over the button’s appearance, helping you align it perfectly with your site’s design language. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Advanced Button widget in Elementor to create stylish and interactive buttons for your website. For any further assistance or inquiries, feel free to contact our support team! View Live Demo
Contact Form 7 The Contact Form 7 Widget in Animation Addons for Elementor is a free feature. To access this widget, ensure the plugin is installed and activated on your site. You can easily integrate and customize Contact Form 7 forms on your pages with this widget. Introduction Contact Form 7 is a customizable WordPress plugin for creating forms with email notifications and spam protection. Key Use Cases for Contact Form 7 Widgets: Create and manage custom forms for seamless user interaction. Integrate email notifications and spam protection for secure communication. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Contact Form 7 Widget: Go to Contact Form 7 in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Contact Form 7 Widget in the list of available widgets. Drag and drop the widget into your desired widget area. Customize the form settings and save changes. How to Add Contact Form 7 Widget in Elementor: Open the page where you want to add the Contact Form 7 Widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Contact Form 7”. Drag the widget to your desired section. Select the form you want to display and customize the widget settings. How to Configure Contact Form 7 Widgets Ensure the Contact Form 7 plugin is activated in your WordPress settings. Open a new page in WordPress. Add a page title and choose the Elementor Full Width template. Click Publish to save your changes. In the Elementor panel, search for “Contact Form 7 Widget” and drag it onto the page. Configuring Contact Form 7 Widgets : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Contact Form 7 Widgets is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content,Style and Advanced. Content Settings In the Content section, there is only one customization option. Before selecting any option from the contact section, make sure to customize it first from the Contact Dashboard in the backend. After customizing it from the Contact Dashboard in the backend, you can select any option from your creation. Style Settings Style – Overall customization for the form’s appearance, including layout and general design. Input – Allows customization of the input fields, such as font, background, border, and padding. Textarea – Customizes the appearance of larger text areas, such as height, width, and font style. Label – Customizes the styling of form labels, such as font size, color, and spacing.Button – Customizes the submit button’s design, including color, size, shape, and hover effects.Message – Customizes the appearance of success or error messages that appear after form submission. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Contact Form 7 Widget in Elementor to create and manage custom contact forms effortlessly. For any further assistance or inquiries, feel free to contact our support. View Live Demo
Featured Posts The Featured Posts Widget in Animation Addons for Elementor is a paid feature. To access this widget, ensure the plugin is installed and activated on your site. You can also explore both free and pro widgets through the filtering options. Introduction The Featured Posts Widget displays selected posts in a stylish format, perfect for highlighting key content on your website. Key Use Cases for the Featured Posts Widget Showcase featured posts for maximum attention. Customize the look to blend perfectly with your site’s design. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Featured Posts Widget : Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Featured Posts Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Featured Posts Widget is ready to use! How to Add Featured Posts Widget in Elementor Open the page where you want to add the Featured Posts Widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Featured Posts Widget” . Drag the widget to your desired section. The Featured Posts Widget is now ready for customization. How to Configure Featured Posts Widget Make sure the Featured Posts Widget is activated in your Elementor settings. Open a new page in WordPress. Add a page title and choose the Elementor Full Width template. Click Publish to save your changes. In the Elementor panel, search for “Featured Posts Widget” and drag it onto the page. Customize the post selection, layout, and styling to match your website’s design. Configuring Featured Posts Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Featured Posts Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content,Style and Advanced. Content Settings In the Content section, you’ll find plenty of customization options such as Query, Settings, Title, Taxonomy, Meta, and Read More. These options allow you to control which posts appear, adjust layout behaviors, display important post details, and fine-tune how users interact with your featured posts. Query: Set the source of your posts by choosing specific categories, tags, or manual selections. This helps you control which posts appear in the widget. Settings: Manage the overall behavior and layout of the widget, such as the number of posts to display, post order, and other basic display settings. Title: Customize the post title by adjusting its visibility and adding styling options, making the titles more attractive and aligned with your page design. Taxonomy: Choose how categories or tags are shown under each post. You can enable, disable, or style them to match your website’s look. Meta: Display additional post information like the author’s name, publish date, or comment count. You can also choose which meta details to show or hide. Read More: Customize the “Read More” button or link that takes visitors to the full post. You can adjust its text, enable/disable it, and style it for better engagement. Style Settings Banner – Likely refers to the large header or image that appears at the top of the post, which can be styled. Tab Area – Might be used for organizing different categories or sections within the widget, styled as tabs. Grid Area – Refers to the layout or arrangement of posts in a grid format. Thumbnail – The smaller image or icon that represents the post visually, typically displayed next to the title. Title – The post’s heading, which can be customized in terms of font, size, and color. Taxonomy – This could refer to categories or tags associated with the post, typically styled as small labels or tags. Meta – Contains metadata like the author name, publication date, etc. Meta Admin – Likely refers to admin-related meta-information, like who edited or published the post. Read More – A button or link that directs users to the full post; this is often styled with specific colors, shapes, and text. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Featured Posts Widget in Elementor to display highlighted posts dynamically and visually appealing. For any further assistance or inquiries, feel free to contact our support. View Live Demo
Current Date Widget The Current Date Widget in Animation Addons for Elementor is a paid feature. To access this widget, ensure the plugin is installed and activated on your site. You can also explore both free and pro widgets through the filtering options. Introduction The Current Date Widget dynamically displays the date, keeping your site updated and engaging. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Current Date Widget: Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Current Date Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Current Date Widget is ready to use! Open the page where you want to add the Current Date Widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Current Date Widget”. Drag the widget to your desired section. The Current Date Widget is now ready for customization. How to Configure Current Date Widget Make sure the Current Date Widget is activated in your Elementor settings. Open a new page in WordPress. Add a page title and choose the Elementor Full Width template. Click Publish to save your changes. In the Elementor panel, search for “Current Date Widget” and drag it onto the page. Adjust the date format, style, and alignment as needed to match your design. Configuring Current Date Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Current Date Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content, Style, and Advanced. Content Settings In the Content section, you’ll find customization options for the date format. Date Format: Choose the format in which the date will appear. A dropdown menu provides different format styles to match your design needs. Show Day: Toggle this option to display or hide the day of the week (like Monday, Tuesday) alongside the date. When you toggle on the Show Day option in the Current Date Widget, a few additional settings appear: # Separator: Choose the symbol (like a dash, comma, or custom character) that separates the day from the date.#Gap: Adjust the spacing between the day and the date for better visual balance.#Direction: Set the order — whether the day appears before or after the date. Alignment: Set the position of the date (left, center, or right) based on your page layout and design preference. Style Settings In the Style section of the Current Date Widget, you’ll find several customization options: Current Date (Color & Typography): Change the color and font styling of the main date to match your design. Day (Color & Typography): Customize the color and typography specifically for the day text when it’s shown. Margin: Adjust the spacing around the date to control its positioning. Separator (Color & Typography): Style the separator by changing its color and font settings for a polished look. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Current Date Widget in Elementor to display the current date dynamically on your website. For any further assistance or inquiries, feel free to contact our support. View Live Demo
Category Showcase The Category Showcase Widget in Animation Addons for Elementor is a paid feature. To access this widget, ensure the plugin is installed and activated on your site. You can explore both free and pro widgets by filtering the selection options. Introduction The Category Showcase Widget displays post categories in a visually appealing layout, making content navigation easier. Key Use Cases for the Category Showcase Widget: Display categories in a well-organized and visually appealing manner. Customize the style to seamlessly align with your site’s design. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Category Showcase Widget : Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Category Showcase Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Category Showcase Widget is ready to use! How to Add Category Showcase Widget in Elementor Open the page where you want to add the Category Showcase Widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Category Showcase Widget”. Drag the widget to your desired section. The Category Showcase Widget is now ready for customization. How to Configure Category Showcase Widget Make sure the Category Showcase Widget is activated in your Elementor settings. Open a new page in WordPress. Add a page title and choose the Elementor Full Width template.Click Publish to save your changes. In the Elementor panel, search for “Category Showcase Widget” and drag it onto the page. Adjust the category layout, styling, and content display as needed. Configuring Category Showcase Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Category Showcase Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content, Style, and Advanced. Content Settings In the content section, you’ll find various customization options such as Image, Content, Layout, and Settings. These options allow you to tailor the widget to fit your design needs- Image: This option allows you to upload or select an image to display within the widget. You can use it to showcase category icons, cover images, or any other visual elements that represent the category. Content: The content section allows you to define what information will be displayed within the widget. This typically includes post titles, descriptions, or excerpts. You can control the specific content shown based on the category selected. Layout: This option helps you adjust how the categories are displayed. You can choose between grid or list layouts, and modify the number of columns, spacing, and alignment. This ensures the widget fits perfectly into your design. Settings: The settings section lets you tweak the overall behavior of the widget. You can control options like the number of posts to display, whether to show or hide specific elements, and adjust pagination settings if needed. Style Settings In the style section, you’ll find various customization options such as Item, Thumbnail, Content, Title, Subtitle, Description, Slogan, and Border. These options allow you to refine the look and feel of the widget to match your design preferences. Item: This option allows you to style the overall look of each category item, including padding, margin, and alignment. It ensures that each category block is styled consistently across your site. Thumbnail: Style the thumbnail image for each category. You can adjust the image size, border radius, and hover effects to create an eye-catching display for category images. Content: Customize the look and feel of the content area within each category block. You can adjust spacing, padding, font settings, and more to ensure the content is visually appealing and easy to read. Title: Style the category title, including its typography, font size, color, weight, and spacing. This ensures that the title stands out and aligns with your site’s design. Subtitle: If you use subtitles for categories, you can adjust their typography, color, size, and spacing to differentiate them from the main title and make them visually appealing. Description: Customize the description text within the category block. You can adjust font size, color, line height, and spacing to make sure the description is readable and well-integrated with the overall design. Slogan: Style the category slogan if it’s part of the widget. Adjust font size, weight, color, and spacing to make it stand out or blend with the design as needed. Border: Customize the border around the category items. You can change the border color, width, style, and radius to create a unique visual frame for each category. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make- Final Outcome Congratulations! You’ve successfully learned how to set up the Category Showcase Widget in Elementor to display categories in an engaging and dynamic way. For any further help or questions, feel free to reach out to our support team! View Live Demo
Breaking News Slider The Breaking News Slider Widget in Animation Addons for Elementor is a paid feature. To access this widget, ensure the plugin is installed and activated on your site. You can explore both free and pro widgets by filtering the selection options. Introduction The Breaking News Slider Widget showcases news or updates in a dynamic sliding format. Key Use Cases for the Filterable Posts Widget: Display important news or updates in a dynamic sliding format. Customize the design to align with your site’s branding for a cohesive look. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Breaking News Slider Widget: Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Breaking News Slider Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Breaking News Slider Widget is ready to use! How to Add Breaking News Slider Widget in Elementor: Open the page where you want to add the Breaking News Slider Widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Breaking News Slider Widget.” Drag the widget to your desired section. The Breaking News Slider Widget is now ready for customization. How to ConfigureBreaking News Slider Widget Make sure the Breaking News Slider Widget is activated in your Elementor settings. Open a new page in WordPress. Add a page title and choose the Elementor Full Width template. Click Publish to save your changes. In the Elementor panel, search for “Breaking News Slider Widget” and drag it onto the page. Adjust the slider layout, animation effects, post sources, and style as needed. Configuring Breaking News Slider Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Breaking News Slider Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content, Style and Advanced. Content Settings In the content section, you will find two options: one is “Query” and the other is “Settings” . Query: This option allows you to define which posts will be displayed in the Breaking News Slider. You can filter posts based on categories, tags, or post types, giving you control over the content shown in the slider. Settings: This option provides configuration settings for the slider, such as controlling the number of posts to display, enabling or disabling autoplay, and adjusting the slide transition speed. It helps you fine-tune the slider’s behavior and presentation. Style Settings In the style section, you will find three options: “Layout,” “Title Style” and “Icon Style.” Layout: This option allows you to customize the overall appearance of the slider, including the number of columns, spacing, and alignment of the posts. You can adjust how the posts are arranged within the slider for a clean and organized look. Title Style: This option lets you style the titles of the posts within the slider. You can adjust the typography, color, size, weight, and spacing to make the titles stand out and match your design aesthetic. Icon Style: If your Breaking News Slider includes icons (such as for categories or post types), this option allows you to customize the icon’s size, color, and spacing. You can modify the icon’s appearance to ensure it aligns with your site’s overall design. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Breaking News Slider Widget in Elementor to display dynamic and eye-catching news updates. For any further assistance or inquiries, feel free to contact our support. View Live Demo
Grid Hover Posts Before setting up the Grid Hover Posts Widget, make sure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. Once activated, you’ll have access to all paid Elementor widgets, including the Grid Hover Posts Widget. Additionally, you can explore both free and pro widgets by filtering the selection options. Introduction The Grid Hover Posts Widget displays posts in a grid with hover effects, allowing easy customization. Key Use Cases for the Grid Hover Posts Widget: Display posts in an interactive grid with hover effects for better engagement. The Grid Hover Posts Widget displays posts in a grid with hover effects, offering simple customization. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Grid Hover Posts Widget: Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Grid Hover Posts widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Grid Hover Posts widget is ready to use! Here’s how to add the Grid Hover Posts Widget in Elementor: Open the page where you want to add the Grid Hover Posts Widget.Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Grid Hover Posts Widget.” Drag the widget to your desired section. The Grid Hover Posts Widget is now ready for customization. How to Configure Grid Hover Posts Widget Make sure the Grid Hover Posts Widget is activated in your Elementor settings. Open a new page in WordPress. Add a page title and choose the Elementor Full Width template. Click Publish to save your changes. In the Elementor panel, search for “Grid Hover Posts Widget” and drag it onto the page. Adjust the grid layout, hover effects, post sources, and style as needed. Configuring Grid Hover Posts Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Grid Hover Posts Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content,Style and Advanced. Content Settings In the content section, you’ll find plenty of customization options. I made a slight change by toggling on the filter button, while the rest remained unchanged as they weren’t needed for my design. Query: Define which posts to display by setting specific filters such as categories, tags, or post types. Layout: Adjust the layout of your posts, such as the number of columns and spacing between posts to suit your design. Settings: Fine-tune the overall widget settings, including pagination options, post limit, and more to enhance the user experience. Title: Customize the title of your posts, including typography, color, size, and spacing to match your website’s style. Excerpt: Style the excerpt text of your posts, controlling font settings, colors, and margins for consistency with your design. Taxonomy: Style how categories or tags appear for each post, with options to modify typography, color, and spacing. Meta: Adjust the appearance of post metadata, including author name, date, and comment count, to match your site’s look and feel. Read More: Customize the “Read More” link or button, including its color, typography, and hover effects for better interaction. Style Settings Layout: Modify the overall layout of your posts, including adjustments to spacing, padding, and alignment to fit your design style. Thumbnail: Style the post thumbnails by adjusting their size, border radius, hover effects, and spacing to make them visually appealing. Title: Customize the typography, color, size, and spacing of the post titles to match your website’s aesthetic and improve readability. Excerpt: Style the post excerpts, allowing you to adjust font settings, colors, margins, and line height to ensure consistency with your design. Taxonomy: Customize how categories or tags are displayed, including typography, color, and spacing to match your style preferences. Meta: Adjust the appearance of metadata like the author name, publish date, and comment count, controlling their typography and colors. Meta Admin: Customize the style of metadata fields specifically for admin use, if needed, to fit the overall look of your design. Read More: Style the “Read More” button or link, customizing its typography, color, hover effects, and spacing for better interaction. These options give you flexibility in designing your widget to suit your style. You can choose to explore and adjust these settings based on your needs. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Grid Hover Posts widget in Elementor to display posts in a grid layout with engaging hover effects. View Live Demo
Posts Slider Before setting up the Post Slider Widget, ensure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. This is a premium widget, available in the pro version. Once activated, you can explore both free and pro widgets using the filtering options. Introduction The Post Slider Widget displays posts in a stylish, interactive slider with smooth transitions. Key Use Cases for the Archive Title Widget in Elementor: Display posts in a Post Slider Widget format for easy navigation. Customize the layout and design to match your site’s style. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Post Slider Widget: Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Post Slider widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Post Slider widget is ready to use! How to Add Post Slider Widget in Elementor: Open the page where you want to add the Post Slider Widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Post Slider Widget.” Drag the widget to your desired section. The Post Slider widget is now ready for customization. How to Configure Post Slider Widget Make sure the Post Slider Widget is activated in your Elementor settings. Open a new page in WordPress. Add a page title and choose the Elementor Full Width template. Click Publish to save your changes. In the Elementor panel, search for “Post Slider Widget” and drag it onto the page. Adjust post settings, slider layout, transitions, and style as needed. Configuring Post Slider Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Post Slider Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content, Style, and Advanced. Content Settings In the Content section of the Post Slider Widget, you’ll find the following options: Query, Layout, Post Settings, Title, Excerpt, Taxonomy, Meta, Read More, Slider Settings and Settings. Query: Select the post source and set filters by category, tag, or author. Layout: Pick the slider layout and arrange the design structure. Post Settings: Adjust how the post displays, like setting the image position and alignment. Title: Choose whether to show the post title and customize its style. Excerpt: Display a short preview of the post and control how much text appears. Taxonomy: Show categories or tags attached to the posts and style them as needed. Meta: Display extra information like the author’s name and publish date. Read More: Add a “Read More” link and style it to guide users to the full post. Slider Settings: Set how the slider behaves — like autoplay, slide speed, and navigation options. Settings: Fine-tune extra options such as image size and content alignment for better control. Additional customization options are available under each setting. Explore these settings to tailor the widget to your needs and enhance the final output. Style Settings Customizing the Style of Your Post Slider Widget with the Following Customization Options: General Style: Adjust the overall look of the slider, including spacing, padding, and general design elements. Gallery Video: Customize the appearance of any video content displayed in the slider. Content: Style the main post content area, including background, padding, and borders. Thumbnail: Modify the appearance of post thumbnails like size, border radius, and hover effects. Title: Customize the post title’s typography, color, and spacing to match your design. Excerpt: Style the post excerpt text, controlling font settings, colors, and margins.Taxonomy: Design how categories or tags appear, with options for typography, color, and spacing. Meta: Style metadata like author name, publish date, and comment count. Meta Admin: Adjust styling specifically for admin metadata fields, if needed. Read More: Customize the “Read More” button or link, including its colors, typography, and hover effects. Slider Navigation: Style navigation elements like arrows for moving between slides. Slider Pagination: Customize pagination indicators (dots, numbers) to improve navigation and user experience. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Post Slider Widget in Elementor to display dynamic posts in a stylish and engaging slider format. For any further assistance or inquiries, feel free to contact our support. View Live Demo
Filterable Posts The Filterable Posts Widget in Animation Addons for Elementor is a paid feature. To access this widget, ensure the plugin is installed and activated on your site. You can also explore both free and pro widgets through the filtering options. Introduction The Filterable Posts Widget lets you display and sort posts dynamically, enhancing content organization and user experience. Key Use Cases for the Filterable Posts Widget: Display and sort posts dynamically for better content organization. Customize styling to match your site’s design seamlessly. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Filterable Posts Widget? Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Filterable Posts Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Filterable Posts Widget is ready to use! How to Add Filterable Posts Widget in Elementor Open the page where you want to add the Filterable Posts Widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Filterable Posts Widget”. Drag the widget to your desired section. The Filterable Posts Widget is now ready for customization. How to Configure Filterable Posts Widget Enable it, create a new page, set a title, choose the Elementor Full Width template, and publish. Adjust options as needed. Make sure the Filterable Posts Widget is activated in your Elementor settings. Open a new page in WordPress. Add a page title and choose the Elementor Full Width template. Click Publish to save your changes. In the Elementor panel, search for “Filterable Posts Widget” and drag it onto the page. Adjust filters, post sources, layout, and style as needed. Configuring Filterable Posts Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Filterable Posts Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content,Style and Advanced. Content Settings In the Elementor Editor, under the Content tab of the Filterable Posts Widget, you’ll find the following configurable sections: Filter: Enable and customize filter tabs for post categories or tags. Query: Define which posts to display based on source, category, tags, or custom queries. Layout: Choose grid, masonry, or other display layouts. Settings: Control post count, image size, and display toggles (author, date, etc.). Title: Manage visibility and styling options for post titles. Excerpt: Display a short preview of each post with length control. Taxonomy: Show assigned categories or tags with customization. Meta: Toggle metadata like author, date, and customize its appearance. Read More: Enable and style a call-to-action link to full post content. Pagination: Add pagination controls to navigate through multiple post pages. You’ll find even more customization options under each setting. So go ahead, explore them, and see the difference! Style Settings In the style section, I only made changes to the filter section only, while the rest remained unchanged as I don’t need them right now. Filter: Customize the appearance of filter buttons, including color, typography, and spacing. Layout: Adjust the overall design, alignment, and spacing of the post slider layout. Thumbnail: Style the post thumbnail by setting dimensions, border radius, and hover effects. Title: Change the typography, color, and spacing of the post titles. Excerpt: Style the excerpt text by adjusting font size, color, and spacing. Taxonomy: Customize the look of categories or tags, including font, color, and background styles. Meta: Style metadata like author name and date with typography and color settings. Meta Admin: Adjust the appearance of admin-specific metadata fields if displayed. Read More: Style the “Read More” button or link, including typography, colors, background, and hover effects. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Filterable Posts Widget in Elementor to display dynamic and categorized posts seamlessly. For any further assistance or inquiries, feel free to contact our support. View Live Demo
Video Posts Tab Before setting up the Video Posts Tab Widget, ensure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. Once activated, you’ll have access to all Elementor widgets, including the Video Posts Tab Widget—completely free! You can also explore both free and pro widgets by filtering the selection options. Introduction The Video Posts Tab Widget displays videos in tabs, allowing easy navigation and customization for better user engagement. Key Use Cases for the Video Posts Tab Widget: Display videos in an organized tabbed format for easy navigation. Customize design and transitions to match your site’s style. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Video Posts Tab Widget: Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Video Posts Tab widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Video Posts Tab widget is ready to use! How to Add the Video Posts Tab Widget in Elementor: Open the page where you want to add the Video Posts Tab Widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Video Posts Tab Widget.” Drag the widget to your desired section. The Video Posts Tab widget is now ready for customization. How to Configure Video Posts Tab Widget Enable it, create a new page, set a title, choose the Elementor Full Width template, and publish. Adjust options as needed. Navigate to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard and ensure the Video Story Widget is enabled. Go to Pages → Add New and create a new page where you want to showcase the video stories. Enter a relevant title for your page to define its purpose. From the page attributes section, select the Elementor Full Width template to utilize a clean, full-width layout. Click the Publish button to make the page live. Launch the Elementor editor for the newly created page. In the Elementor panel, use the search bar to find “Video Story Widget.” Drag the Video Story Widget into your desired section of the page. Configure widget options such as video sources, layout, playback settings, title, excerpt, taxonomy, and meta display to suit your content and design preferences. Configuring Video Posts Tab Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Video Posts Tab Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content,Style and Advanced. Content Settings You’ll find three customization options in the content section: Query, Settings, and Button. I only adjusted the Query section—that’s it. Query – Video Story Widget: Define which content to display in the video stories Order By: Determines the criteria used to sort the displayed posts (e.g., by date, title, menu order, or custom fields). Order: Sets the sorting direction—Ascending (ASC) or Descending (DESC)—based on the selected “Order By” option. Ignore Sticky Posts: Enable this option to exclude sticky posts from the query results, ensuring only regular posts appear in the video story layout. Settings – Video Story Widget : Customize the core behavior of your video stories. Posts Per Page:Set the number of video story posts to display per page. Image Resolution:Choose the image size (e.g., Medium – 300×300) for thumbnails or cover visuals. Show Thumb:Toggle to display or hide the thumbnail image for each story. Show Title:Enable to display the story title. Title Length:Limit the number Show Author:Display the author name for each story. Show Taxonomy:Show categories or tags associated with each post. Read More:Enable a “Read More” button to link to the full post. Additional Read More Settings: Read More Text: Customize the text displayed on the button (“Read More”, “Watch Full Story”). Read More Icon: Add an icon to visually enhance the button. Icon Position: Choose whether the icon appears before or after the button text. Icon Spacing: Adjust the spacing between the icon and the text for better visual balance. ButtonConfigure the call-to-action button shown with each story. You can set the button text, link destination, and adjust alignment or visibility to drive user interaction. View All Button Enable or disable a “View All” button that directs users to a full listing or archive page of all video stories. View Text Customize the text label displayed on the View All button.Example: “View All” “See More Stories” “Explore Videos” Link Define the URL or permalink where the View All button redirects users. This should typically point to a dedicated video story archive or a custom landing page. Icon Add a visual icon alongside the View Text to enhance clarity and aesthetics. This icon can be placed before or after the text. Additional Icon Options: Icon Library : The Icon Library provides a wide range of commonly used icons (arrows, play buttons, magnifiers) that can be easily selected and applied without uploading external files. Icon SVG : Upload or paste a custom SVG (Scalable Vector Graphics) icon to use within the widget. This option is ideal when you need a unique or brand-specific icon not available in the default library. Style Settings You’ll also find plenty of customization options in the Style section. Layout – Adjust the overall structure and arrangement of the video posts. Banner – Add and customize a banner for the video section. Play Icon – Modify the play button style, size, and color. Thumbnail – Customize the preview image for each video post. Title – Control the font, size, and color of the video titles. Excerpt – Adjust the visual presentation of the story excerpts to align with your site’s branding. Meta – Style the meta information to be clean and informative without overwhelming the design. Date – Present the date clearly and consistently with your overall typography scheme. View All Button – Make the “View All” button visually prominent and aligned with your site design. Read More Button – Refine the style of the “Read More” button for a polished and interactive user experience. I made slight changes to fit my needs, but you can fully customize everything to match your design. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Archive Title widget in Elementor to display dynamic and customized titles for your archive pages. For any further assistance or inquiries, feel free to contact our support team! Excerpt – Adjust the short description displayed with each video. Meta – Manage additional details like author name or category. Date – Show or hide the video post’s publication date. View All – Customize the “View All” button for accessing more videos. Read More – Adjust the styling and text for the “Read More” button. View Live Demo
Advanced Posts Before setting up the Advanced Posts Widget, ensure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. Since the Advanced Posts Widget is a premium feature, you’ll need to upgrade to access its advanced functionalities. Additionally, you can explore both free and pro widgets by filtering the selection options. Introduction The Advanced Posts Widget in Elementor displays blog posts dynamically with custom layouts and filters for better engagement. Key Use Cases for the Advanced Posts Widget in Elementor: Showcase blog posts dynamically for better content visibility. Customize layout and filters to enhance user experience. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Advanced Posts Widget? Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Advanced Posts widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Advanced Posts widget is ready to use! How to Add Advanced Posts Widget in Elementor Open the page where you want to add the Advanced Posts Widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Advanced Posts Widget”. Drag the widget to your desired section. Since this is a premium widget, ensure you have the pro version activated. The Advanced Posts Widget is now ready for customization. How to Configure Advanced Posts Widget Make sure the Advanced Posts Widget is activated in your Elementor settings. Open a new page where you want to showcase your posts. Provide a title for your page as required. Select the Elementor Full Width template for a seamless layout. After finalizing the title and layout, publish the page. In the Elementor panel, type “Advanced Posts Widget” in the search bar. Place the widget in the desired section of your page. Customize the widget’s layout, post query, pagination, metadata, and style options to fit your design preferences. Once added, the Advanced Posts Widget will automatically display a dynamic list of posts based on your selected query settings, allowing users to browse and engage with curated post content seamlessly. Configuring Advanced Posts Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Advanced Posts Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content,Style and Advanced. Content Settings The Content section of the Advanced Posts Widget offers extensive customization to control how your posts appear and function. Key options include: Filter Enable Filter: Toggle this option to display a filter bar above the post grid. Alignment: Once enabled, you can set the alignment (left, center, right) of the filter controls. Query Query Type: Choose from 12 different query types to control the logic for post display. Source: Select from Posts, Pages, or Video Stories. Include/Exclude: Define which posts to show or hide based on various parameters. Include By: Post Format: Choose from Image, Video, Audio, and Gallery formats. Date Range Order By: Set sorting criteria such as date, title, or random. Order: Ascending or Descending. Ignore Sticky Posts: Optionally ignore posts marked as sticky. Layout Layout Type: Choose from 5 unique layout styles to present your content visually. Offers a flexible grid system for showcasing posts in a structured manner. Settings Columns: Define how many columns to display across different screen sizes. Posts Per Page: Set how many posts should appear at a time. Show/Hide Toggles: Customize visibility for elements like: Thumbnail Image Image Resolution Title Excerpt Taxonomy Meta Information Rating Read More Button Masonry Layout Post Audio, Video, and Gallery Integration Title Title Length: Limit the number of words shown in the post title. HTML Tag: Choose the HTML heading tag (H1–H6, Div, Span, etc.). Show Highlights: Highlight certain keywords or styled portions of the title. Excerpt Excerpt Length: Set the number of words displayed in the excerpt section. Taxonomy Categories Displayed: Show up to three taxonomy types (e.g., Category, Tag, Custom Taxonomy). Limit: Control the number of taxonomies shown per post. Meta Post Meta: Show or hide post views, publish date, and author information. Separator: Add a custom separator between different meta fields. Author Avatar: Option to display the author’s profile image. Read More Text Label: Customize the “Read More” button text. Icon: Choose an icon from the library or upload an SVG. Icon Position: Set it to display before or after the text. Icon Spacing: Define the space between icon and text. Pagination Choose from multiple pagination types including Numbers, Load More Button, and Infinite Scroll. Style Settings Layout The Layout section under the Style tab in the Advanced Posts Widget provides essential customization controls to refine the visual structure of your post grid. Below is a professional breakdown of each available setting: Columns Gap: Adjust the horizontal spacing between post columns. The value can be set using the slider or entered manually in pixels (px). Rows Gap: Control the vertical spacing between rows of posts. This setting ensures that your post layout remains visually balanced and well-organized. Border Type: Choose a border style (e.g., Solid, Dashed, Dotted) or keep it as Default to inherit global or theme styles. Padding: Set the inner spacing of the post container from all sides (Top, Right, Bottom, Left). This helps create breathing space within each post block. Margin: Define the outer spacing of each post container. Use this to manage spacing between multiple widgets or content blocks. Background Type: Select a background type (e.g., Classic, Gradient, or Video) to enhance the visual appeal of your post containers. Hover Effect: Choose an animation effect ( Zoom In) that is triggered when users hover over the posts. This adds interactivity and improves user engagement. Thumbnail You can control the visual appearance of post thumbnails to align with your design preferences. Below are the available customization options explained professionally: Height & Width Height: Set a fixed height for your post thumbnails to ensure uniformity across all post items. Width: Define the width of the thumbnails to control their horizontal size and alignment within the post layout. Border Radius: Adjust the border radius to create rounded corners for the thumbnails. This helps soften the design and adds a modern touch to your posts. Margin: Control the space outside the thumbnail image. This setting is useful for maintaining consistent spacing between thumbnails and other post elements Title You have control over the visual appearance of post titles in both Normal and Hover states. This allows for a more dynamic and interactive design. Here’s a breakdown of the available settings: Typography Customize the font family, size, weight, transform, style, line height, and letter spacing to ensure the post titles match your website’s branding and remain visually appealing. Color Normal: Choose the default color for the post title when it is not being interacted with. Hover: Set a different color that appears when a user hovers over the title, adding visual feedback and interactivity. Margin Define the space around the title element, controlling how it aligns with other components such as thumbnails, excerpts, or meta information. You can adjust the top, right, bottom, and left margins individually for precise spacing. Excerpt Color: Choose the text color for the excerpt to ensure readability and design consistency with the rest of your content. Typography: Adjust the font family, size, font weight, transform, style, line height, and letter spacing to control the look and feel of the excerpt text. This helps maintain a consistent visual hierarchy across the widget. Margin: Define the outer spacing around the excerpt area. You can set the top, right, bottom, and left margins individually to manage how the excerpt is positioned relative to other elements like the title or metadata. Taxonomy Typography: Customize the font family, size, weight, style, line height, and letter spacing to control the visual presentation of taxonomy text, ensuring it aligns with your site’s overall typography. Space Between: Define the spacing between individual taxonomy items, allowing for clear separation and better readability when multiple terms are shown. Color: Set the text color for taxonomy items to match your branding or improve visibility against the background. Background Type: Choose a background style (solid color, gradient, or image) to highlight the taxonomy section and make it stand out from the rest of the content. Border Type: Apply a border around taxonomy items. You can choose the border style (solid, dashed, dotted, etc.) and control its thickness and visibility. Border Radius: Define rounded corners for the taxonomy box. This adds a softer, more modern look to the tags or categories. Box Shadow: Add a shadow effect around taxonomy items for depth and visual emphasis. This is useful for drawing attention subtly. Padding: Set inner spacing within each taxonomy item to ensure the text isn’t cramped and maintains a neat appearance. Position: Control the placement of taxonomy labels within the post layout, offering flexibility in alignment and design hierarchy. Meta Gap Adjust the space between meta elements (e.g., between date and author) to ensure a clean and balanced layout. Color Set the text color for meta information. This allows you to highlight or tone down metadata depending on your design preference. Typography Control the font style, size, weight, line height, and spacing for meta text to match the overall site typography and improve readability. Margin Define outer spacing around the meta section to separate it visually from other content, like post titles or thumbnails. Icon Size Set the size of icons (such as calendar, user, or eye icons) used alongside metadata to ensure they are proportionate and clear. Icon Color Customize the icon color separately from the text color for visual contrast or harmony, depending on your design. Icon Gap Adjust the space between each icon and its corresponding text to maintain clarity and visual appeal. Meta – Admin These settings ensure the author’s presence aligns seamlessly with your overall design and user interaction preferences. Below is a professional explanation of each option: Gap Defines the spacing between the author label (e.g., “By”) and the author’s name. This helps maintain a clean and readable layout. Author By Allows you to customize or toggle the “By” prefix shown before the author’s name (e.g., “By John Doe”). You can choose whether to display it or not, based on your content style. Color Sets the default color of the author text. You can use this to match your theme or highlight the author’s name for emphasis. Typography Manage typographic properties such as font family, size, weight, line height, and spacing for the entire author section to ensure consistent branding. Author – Typography Provides separate control over the typography of the author’s name itself. You can distinguish it from surrounding text for better visual hierarchy. Author – Color Allows you to apply a distinct color style to the author’s name, helping it stand out or blend in based on your preference. Animation (Normal & Hover) You can apply two animation states: Normal: Default animation style for the author text when not interacted with. Hover: Define animation effects or transitions when the user hovers over the author’s name, adding interactive appeal. Read More In the Read More section of the Advanced Posts Widget, you can fully personalize the appearance and behavior of the “Read More” link or button that invites users to explore individual posts further. Below is a clear and professional breakdown of each available style setting: Typography: Adjusts the font family, size, weight, letter spacing, and line height of the “Read More” text to maintain consistency with your site’s overall design. Icon Size: Allows you to set the size of the icon used alongside the text (if any), ensuring proper visual balance between icon and text. Text Color: Controls the color of the “Read More” text, helping it stand out or blend in with your design theme. Background Type: Lets you choose between a solid color, gradient, or image as the background for the button or text area, adding depth and visual interest. Border Type: Defines the border style (solid, dashed, dotted, double, or none), allowing you to create separation or emphasize the call-to-action. Border Radius: Customizes the rounded corners of the button or link, giving it a soft or sharp appearance based on your design preference. Padding: Controls the inner spacing around the text and icon, ensuring the “Read More” element has appropriate breathing room. Box Shadow: Adds a shadow effect around the element to create depth or highlight the call-to-action area. Margin: Sets the outer spacing between the “Read More” element and other sections, helping to align it cleanly within the post layout. Filter These options usually allow users to customize the appearance of elements on a website, particularly when styling a widget or section. Padding: Controls the space inside the container, creating a buffer between the content and the edges of the element. It helps in adjusting the internal spacing for a clean and balanced layout. Tab Item Gap: Defines the space between each tab within a tabbed interface. Adjusting the gap ensures a visually appealing and easy-to-navigate tab layout. Content Gap: Determines the spacing between individual content sections or elements. This setting improves readability and ensures proper alignment and balance of the content. Border Type: Specifies the style of the element’s border. Options typically include solid, dashed, dotted, or double, providing flexibility in the visual appeal and border design. Border Radius: Adjusts the roundness of the corners of an element’s border. A higher radius creates a more rounded appearance, offering a softer, modern look. Typography Customizes the font style, size, weight, line-height, and other text-related attributes. Typography settings are crucial for readability and overall design consistency. Text Color: Allows for the modification of the text color within the element. Proper contrast and color choices enhance readability and align with the brand’s aesthetic. Background Type: Defines the background style of an element, which can include solid color, gradient, or image. This option is key in enhancing visual appeal and setting the tone of the design. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Archive Title widget in Elementor to display dynamic and customized titles for your archive pages. For any further assistance or inquiries, feel free to contact our support team! View Live Demo
Mailchimp The Mailchimp Widget in Animation Addons for Elementor is a paid feature. To use this widget, ensure the plugin is installed and activated on your site. You can explore both free and pro widgets using the filtering options, but this specific widget is available only in the pro version. Introduction The Mailchimp Widget in Animation Addons for Elementor helps you integrate Mailchimp forms seamlessly into your site, making email list building easy and efficient. Key Use Cases for the Mailchimp Widget: Easily integrate Mailchimp forms to grow your email list. Customize the design to match your website’s branding. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Mailchimp Widget: Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Mailchimp Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. Now, the Mailchimp Widget is ready to use! How to Add Mailchimp Widget in Elementor: Open the page where you want to add the Mailchimp Widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Mailchimp Widget.” Drag the widget to your desired section. The Mailchimp Widget is now ready for customization. How to Configure Mailchimp Widget Ensure the Mailchimp plugin is activated in your WordPress settings. Open a new page in WordPress.Add a page title and choose the Elementor Full Width template. Click Publish to save your changes. In the Elementor panel, search for “Mailchimp Widget” and drag it onto the page. Configuring Mailchimp Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Mailchimp Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under different tabs: Content,Style and Advanced. Content Settings In the Content section, you’ll find two customization options named Mailchimp and Form. Mailchimp Options: Mailchimp API: Connect your Mailchimp account to integrate the widget with your Mailchimp account. Audience: Create and select your audience (list) from Mailchimp to send the form data. Enable Double Opt-In: Turn on double opt-in for confirming subscriptions, ensuring the user agrees to receive emails. Form Options: Customize a variety of elements for the form: Alignment: Control the alignment of form elements. Item Gap: Adjust the spacing between form fields. Enable Name: Option to include a name field in the form. Enable Phone: Option to include a phone number field in the form. Email Label: Customize the label for the email field. Email Placeholder: Set a placeholder text for the email field. Email Icon: Add an icon to the email field (optional). Icon Position: Choose whether to display the email icon on the left or right. Button Text: Customize the text on the submit button. Button Icon: Add an icon to the submit button (optional). Icon Position: Set the icon’s position (left or right). Icon Spacing: Adjust the spacing between the icon and the text on the button. This will allow you to fully customize the appearance and behavior of the Mailchimp form on your page. Style Settings In the style section, I only made changes to the filter section only, while the rest remained unchanged as I don’t need them right now. However, you can explore and customize them as needed. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Mailchimp Widget in Elementor to integrate email sign-up forms and grow your email list. For any further assistance or inquiries, feel free to contact our support. View Live Demo
Video Story Before setting up the Video Story_Widget, ensure that the Animation Addons for Elementor plugin is installed and activated on your site. Once activated, you’ll gain access to the Video Story_Widget, which is part of the paid version of the plugin. Please note that this widget is not available for free and requires a valid license for use. After activation, you can explore a variety of premium widgets, including the Video Story Widget, through the selection options. Introduction The Video Story_Widget is a premium Elementor widget for displaying videos in an interactive, story format. Key Use Cases for the Post Reactions Widget in Elementor: Showcase videos in an interactive, story-like format to captivate users. Enhance user engagement by offering dynamic video presentations. Customize video display settings to match your site’s design and branding. Prerequisite Elementor Animation Addons for Elementor How to Activate the Video Story Widget: Go to Animation Addons → Elements in your WordPress dashboard. Find the Video Story_Widget in the list. Toggle it on to enable the widget. The Video Story_Widget is now ready to use! How to Add the Video Story Widget in Elementor: Open the page where you want to add the Video Story_Widget. Launch the Elementor editor. In the Elementor panel, search for “Video Story_Widget.” Drag the widget to your desired section. How to Configure the Video Story Widget: Enable the Widget: Ensure the Video Story_Widget is enabled in your Elementor settings. Create a New Page: Open a new page where you wish to display the widget. Set a Title: Add a title for your page as required. Choose Template: Select the Elementor Full Width template for a full-width layout. Publish the Page: After setting the title and template, publish the page. Search for Video Story Widget: In the Elementor panel, search for “Video Story_Widget.” Drag and Drop the Widget: Drag the widget to your desired section of the page. Adjust Settings: Customize the widget settings, including video sources, display options, and styling, as needed. Once added, the Video Story Widget displays your video in an engaging, story-style format for dynamic user interaction. Configuring Video Story Widget : A Step-by-Step Guide Once the Video Story Widget is added to your page, you can configure its settings under three tabs: Content, Style, and Advanced. Content Settings Query: Choose which posts or custom post types to display as video stories using filters like categories or tags. Layout: Select the visual arrangement (e.g., horizontal, vertical, carousel) for displaying the stories. Settings: Configure story duration, autoplay, loop, and transition effects. Title: Show or hide post titles and adjust their display settings. Excerpt: Enable or disable post excerpts to show a short summary. Taxonomy: Filter stories by categories, tags, or custom taxonomies. Meta: Display post metadata such as author, date, or reading time. Style Settings Style Section Overview – Video Story Widget Layout: Customize spacing, alignment, and overall structure of the widget layout. Video: Style the video container with border, shadow, radius, and overlay effects. Content: Adjust padding, alignment, and background of the content area. Title: Control typography, color, and spacing of the story titles. Excerpt: Style the excerpt text, including font, size, color, and spacing. Taxonomy: Modify the appearance of categories or tags shown with each story. Meta: Customize the look of meta info (author, date, etc.) including font, size, and color. Advanced Settings In the advanced settings, you’ll find a variety of advanced features designed to enhance your designs. Experiment with these options and experience the difference they make. Final Outcome That’s it! You’ve successfully learned how to configure the Video Story Widget in Elementor to showcase videos in an interactive, story-style format and enhance user engagement.For any further assistance or inquiries, feel free to contact our support team! View Live Demo